Script | Spoken-Tutorial - User contributions [en]

LibreOffice Suite Writer 6.3

2021-07-19T08:10:43Z

Pratik kamble:

=== Introduction ===

LibreOffice Writer is the word processor component of the LibreOffice Suite.It is the equivalent of Microsoft Word in Microsoft Office Suite. It is a free and open source software so it can be shared, modified and distributed without any restrictions. It provides the features of a word processor like edit text, text modifications, adding images, tables, objects, spell check, auto correct, etc. In addition, it provides the following important features:

* Export to PDF

* Built-in Drawing tools

* Page layout methods

__TOC__

=== Basic Level ===

#Introduction to LibreOffice Writer
#*About LibreOffice Writer
#*Various toolbars in Writer
#*How to open a new and existing document
#*How to save and close a document
#*How to save as MS Word document
#*How to export as a PDF document
#*How save in different file format .odt, pdf, html .docx
#*How to change font name
#*How to change font size
#*How use to Align Centre
#Typing text and basic formatting in Writer
#*Alignment options in Writer
#*Difference between Bullets and Numbering
#*Various Bullets and Numbering options
#*How to Cut, Copy and Paste
#*How to make the text Bold, Underline, Italic
#*How to change Font name
#*How to change Font size
#*How to change Font color
#*How to align left, right, justified and centre
#Inserting images, hyperlinks, bookmarks in Writer
#*Inserting an Image file in Writer
#*Resizing the image
#*Moving the image to the desired location
#*Inserting a Hyperlink in Writer document
#*Inserting a Bookmark in Writer document
#*Customising the Bookmark feature
#*How to use Target in Document
#*How to create Path to another document
#*How to use Target file feature
#Table and Table Properties in Writer
#*Insert table
#*Add row
#*Modify row
#*Adjust table properties
#*Minimize column width
#*Table toolbar
#*Center Align
#*Alignment
#*Background color
#*Align bottom
#*Distribute columns evenly
#*Optimize Size
#*Split Table
#*Copy heading
#*Center Vertically
#*Auto format Styles
#Viewing and printing a document in Writer
#*How to use Print options
#*View Normal layout
#*View Web layout
#*How to view in Full screen mode
#*How to use Zoom slider
#*How to use Zoom head
#*How to use Zoom factor
#*Different Zoom & View layout options
#*How to use Fit width option
#*How to use Fit width and height option
#*How to use Print Preview option
#*Use Book view option
==Intermediate Level==
#Using Find, Replace and Autocorrect in Writer
#*Use Find and Replace option
#*Use Spell check option
#*Use Autocorrect feature
#*How to add abbreviation
#*How to Find Previous
#*How to Find Next
#*Use Find All option
#*Use Previous page option
#*Use Next page option
#*Use Replace All option
#*Change Language Settings
#*How to use Automatic Spell checking feature
#*How to Ignore double spaces feature
#Creating Newsletters in Writer
#*Use Column break option feature
#*How to Check Word count in the document
#*How to Add Image and Banner in the document
#*How to Add Text animation in the document
#*How to Add Watermark in the document
#*How to Highlight Text
#*Use Font Effects option
#*Use Drawing toolbar option
#*Check the Character count
#Header Footer and Notes
#*How to Insert Header in a document
#*How to Insert Footer in a document
#*How to Remove Header and Footer
#*How to Insert Footnote in a document
#*How to Insert Endnote in a document
#*How to Add Page number in Footer
#*How to Add Date in Header
#*How to Add Shadow to a page
#*How to Change character of Footnote
#*How to Highlight Footnote
==Advanced Level==
#Using Track Changes
#*How to Peer review a document
#*How to Enable Record Track changes option
#*How to Enable Show Track Changes option
#*How to Edit a document
#*How to Add comments in a document
#*How to Delete comment in a document
#*How to Reply to a comment in a document
#*How to Accept Changes in a document
#*How to Reject Changes in a document
#*How to change author name in a document
#Typing in Local languages
#*How to Install Language packages in Writer
#*How to Configure Local Language setting
#*How to add a new language to the system
#*How to type a text in a Local Language
#*How to use Language support option
#*How to check if the local language is activated or not
#*Learn how to use Hindi keyboard layout
#*How to add a language in input sources
#*Shortcut key to change input language

LaTeX/C3/newcommand-in-LaTeX/English-timed

2021-06-28T13:33:47Z

Pratik kamble: Created page with "{| border="1" |- | '''Time''' | '''Narration''' |- | 00:02 | Welcome to the spoken tutorial on creating new '''commands '''in '''LaTeX'''. |- | 00:08 |This tutorial will hel..."

{| border="1"
|-
| '''Time'''
| '''Narration'''

|-
| 00:02
| Welcome to the spoken tutorial on creating new '''commands '''in '''LaTeX'''.

|-
| 00:08
|This tutorial will help the learners to

create or define new '''commands''' to get customized output.

redefine the existing '''commands'''.

|-
| 00:18
| To follow this tutorial,

1 You should have knowledge of '''commands '''that are necessary to create a document in '''LaTeX'''.
2 You should also have knowledge of '''compiling '''and producing a '''PDF output '''in '''LaTeX'''.
3 If not, please go through the relevant '''LaTeX''' spoken tutorials on this website.

|-
| 00:37
| To record this tutorial, I am using

'''Ubuntu Linux 14.04''' operating system

'''TeXWorks 0.5'''

|-
| 00:47
| We all know that '''commands '''are special words that are provided to the '''compiler'''.

|-
| 00:52
|'''Commands '''start with a '''backslash '''and sometimes accept '''parameters'''.
Example: '''\noindent, \textbf, \centering'''

|-
| 01:02
|We can define our own custom '''commands '''in '''LaTeX''' to save time or for the code to look cleaner.

|-
| 01:09
| Ensure that the custom '''command '''you create is not an already existing '''LaTeX command'''.

|-
| 01:15
|To define''' '''a new '''command,''' we write '''\newcommand{command}{definition}''' at the beginning of the document.

|-
| 01:27
| Let us open the '''TeXWorks editor.'''

|-
| 01:34
| Pause the tutorial at this point.Download and unzip the files provided in the '''Code Files '''link below the player.

|-
| 01:43
| You will see some '''LaTeX''' code given in the file “'''newComm.tex'''” that you downloaded onto your machine.

|-
| 01:59
| We will copy and paste the first block of code from this file into our newly opened '''tex''' file.

|-
| 02:09
| Let’s try to understand the program.

|-
| 02:12
| The definition '''\newcommand{\bbr}{\mathbb R} '''means that '''\bbr '''is the '''newcommand.'''

|-
| 02:24
|And when used, it will typeset '''R '''in the '''mathbb font. '''

|-
| 02:31
| Note that the required '''packages '''are loaded in the preamble; in this case '''\usepackage{amsfonts}'''

|-
| 02:40
| So, instead of '''{\mathbb R},''' we can use '''\bbr '''within '''dollars '''while typesetting.

|-
|02:48
|Let us save the file as '''newComm.tex'''

|-
| 03:00
| On compilation, we get the '''pdf '''output. Observe the letter '''R '''in '''mathbb font.'''

|-
| 03:15
| Now, we will see '''newcommand''' with '''parameters.'''

|-
| 03:24
|It is typically defined as -

'''\newcommand{\command}[parameters]{definition}''

|-
|03:36
| Let’s open a new file in '''TeXWorks'''.

|-
| 03:45
| Now switch to our downloaded code file.

|-
|03:59
| We will copy the next block of code from our downloaded code file and paste it into our new '''teX''' file.

|-
| 04:07
| Let us understand the code now.

|-
|04:11
|We have '''\newcommand{\bb}[1]{\mathbb {#1}}'''before the '''begin document statement.'''

|-
| 04:22
| Here '''\bb''' is the '''command.'''

'''[1] '''means that the command has one parameter

|-
| 04:30
| '''\mathbb {#1}''' defines the '''command.'''
'''#1 '''means the first parameter.

|-
| 04:37
| Carefully observe the usage after '''\begin{document}'''

|-
| 04:42
|We use it within '''dollars '''because it contains '''math symbols.'''

|-
| 04:48
| '''\bb '''followed by the '''open brace '''and '''parameter '''and again we close the '''brace.'''

|-
| 04:58
| We have used it twice with '''R''' as the '''parameter''' in the first usage and '''Z''' as the '''parameter''' in the second usage.

|-
| 05:08
| Save the program as '''newCommP1.tex '''and compile it.

|-
| 05:28
| In the output, observe that the '''R''' and''' Z''' are in the '''mathbb''' or the '''blackboard font.'''

|-
| 05:40
| Next, let’s define a '''newcommand''' with '''2 parameters.'''

|-
| 05:46
| Open a new '''tex''' file.

|-
| 06:08
| We will copy and paste the next block of code from our downloaded file, as shown here.

|-
| 06:16
| Observe the line '''\newcommand{\add}[2]{ \left( #1 + #2 \right) }''' in the document.

|-
| 06:34
| This has been used as '''$\add{abc}{xyz}$''' Here in the definition, '''\add''' is the '''newcommand'''.

|-
| 06:47
|[2]''' indicates that it has '''2 parameters.''' '''{\left( #1+#2\right)}''' is the definition of the '''command.'''

|-
| 06:57
| '''#1''' for the first '''parameter''' and '''#2''' for the second '''parameter.'''

|-
|07:05
| #1''' and '''#2''' are replaced by the actual text '''{abc}''' and '''{xyz}''' in this case.

|-
| 07:16
| Let us save as '''newCommP2.tex '''and compile the '''tex''' file.

|-
| 07:32
| Observe the output.

Here the '''left''' and '''right parenthesis''' are added and a '''plus symbol''' is introduced between the first and second '''parameters.'''

|-
| 07:53
| Let’s now learn about the '''renewcommand'''.

|-
|07:59
| '''renewcommand''' is used to change or overwrite the existing '''command.'''

|-
|08:04
| The syntax for '''renewcommand''' is '''\renewcommand{command}{definition}''' It’s quite similar to '''newcommand.'''

|-
| 08:18
| Once again, we will open a new '''tex '''file.

|-
| 08:35
| We will copy and paste the last block of code from our downloaded file into our newly opened '''tex '''file.

|-
|08:45
| Let us understand the program now.

|-
| 08:48
| The definition '''\renewcommand{\S}{\mathcal {S}}''' redefines '''\S'''.

|-
|08:58
| '''\S '''normally produces the section symbol (§)

|-
|09:02
| whereas after redefining '''\S,''' produces '''S''' in '''Calligraphic font '''

|-
|09:11
| Note that the required package '''amsmath''' is preloaded. Also, we use '''\S''' within '''dollar symbols'''.

|-
| 09:26
| Let us now save the file as '''renew.tex''', compile it and see the output. We can see '''“S” '''in calligraphic font.

|-
| 09:49
| Come back to the '''tex '''file.

|-
| 09:59
| Note that replacing '''z '''for '''S '''in the '''renewcommand '''does not work.

|-
|10:06
| This is because there is no existing '''command''' defined as '''\z.'''

|-
|10:12
| Please use '''renewcommand''' only when you are very sure about what you are doing.

|-
| 10:26
|To summarise, we have learnt

'''newcommand'''

'''newcommand''' with '''parameters'''

'''renewcommand'''

|-
| 10:37
| Assignment

Create a new '''command \textbfit''' which will convert the given text into bold and italics.

|-
| 10:50
| The video at the following link summarises the Spoken Tutorial project.
Pls watch it.

|-
| 10:57
| The Spoken Tutorial Project Team : Conducts workshops using spoken tutorials and Gives certificates to those who pass an online test

|-
|11:07
| For more details, please write to us.

|-
| 11:11
| Spoken Tutorial Project is funded by NMEICT, MHRD, Government of India. More information on this Mission is available at this link.

|-
|11:24
| This is Ambika Vanchinathan signing off. Thanks for joining.

|}

LaTeX/C3/Indic-Language-Typesetting-in-LaTeX/English-timed

2021-06-28T11:30:23Z

Pratik kamble: Created page with "{| border="1" |- || '''Time''' || '''Narration''' |- |00:01 | Hello and welcome to the spoken tutorial on “'''Indic language typesetting'''” |- |00:07 |In this tutorial..."

{| border="1"
|-
|| '''Time'''
|| '''Narration'''

|-
|00:01
| Hello and welcome to the spoken tutorial on “'''Indic language typesetting'''”

|-
|00:07
|In this tutorial we will learn to,

1 Install a new '''font''' and
2 '''Typeset''' a document in '''indic language''' using '''XeLaTeX'''.

|-
|00:19
|This tutorial is recorded using

'''Ubuntu Linux''' 18.04 OS and

'''TeXworks''' editor v0.6.

|-
|00:31
|The steps demonstrated will work in all operating systems.

|-
|00:37
|To practise this tutorial, you should be familiar with '''LaTeX commands.'''

|-
|00:43
| If not, then go through the prerequisite '''LaTeX''' spoken tutorials on this website.

|-
|00:51
|The files used for the installation are available in the '''Code files''' link on this tutorial page.

|-
|00:58
| Please download and use them while practising. Make sure that all the supporting files are kept in the same folder while practising

|-
|01:09
| In this tutorial we will be installing '''Nirmala UI font'''.

|-
|01:15
| This '''font''' supports 12 '''indic''' scripts as mentioned here.

|-
|01:21
|First go to the folder where all the files are downloaded.

|-
|01:27
|Now double-click on the file '''Nirmala.ttf''' It will open the '''Nirmala UI font''' in the '''Font Viewer''' window.

|-
|01:38
| Click on the '''Install''' button located at the top right corner of the window. This will install the '''font''' in your system.

|-
|01:48
| Once done, the '''Install''' option will be changed to '''Installed.'''

|-
|01:54
|Let us cross verify this.

|-
|01:57
|Click on the '''back''' button located to the left of the '''Font''' name.

|-
|02:03
|This will display the list of '''fonts''' already installed in the system.

|-
|02:09
|Scroll down to find the newly installed '''Nirmala UI font''' in the '''fonts''' folder. Here it is.

|-
|02:18
| If '''Nirmala font''' file is present in that folder, then installation of the '''font''' is successful.

|-
|02:26
|If not, repeat the above installation steps once again.
|-
|02:31
|Now we will '''typeset''' a document''' '''in '''XeLaTeX'''.

|-
|02:36
|I will be using the file '''multiLang.tex '''for this demonstration.

|-
|02:42
|The same is available in the '''Code files''' link. You can download it from there and use it while practising.

|-
|02:51
| I have already opened the file '''multiLang.tex''' in '''TeXworks''' editor.

|-
| 02:57
|Now let me give an overview of few commands.

|-
|03:02
| '''Fontspec package''' allows us to use opentype fonts without installing them.

|-
|03:09
|This is useful when you are not able to install '''fonts''' or require '''admin access'''.

|-
|03:16
|It gives us the facility to switch or use different '''fonts''' in the same '''LaTeX '''document.

|-
|03:25
| '''Polyglossia package''' allows us to typeset '''indic''' languages in a '''XeLaTeX''' document.

|-
|03:32
|Without this '''package''' the sentences in other language will not be processed in the output.

|-
|03:39
|I have set the default language as '''English''' using the '''command setdefaultlanguage.'''

|-
|03:46
|If you wish to set any other language as a default one, then we have to specify it here.

|-
|03:54
| '''setotherlanguages command''' helps us to mention the languages which we are going to use here.

|-
|04:01
|In this example we are using Hindi, Tamil, Bengali, Telugu and Malayalam scripts.

|-
|04:10
|Using the '''newfontfamily command''' I have declared the '''font''' for each language.

|-
|04:17
| Here I have used '''Nirmala UI font''' for all the languages.

|-
|04:23
|You can use any of the 12 scripts supported by '''Nirmala UI '''as per your choice.''' '''

|-
|04:30
|Make sure you have installed this '''font''' before compiling.

|-
|04:35
|Next to the '''begin document''', I have written a few lines of code.

|-
|04:40
|The first few lines are written in English. As I have set English as a '''default''' language, I don’t need to specify any language.

|-
|04:51
|Before typing the text in a language other than the '''default''' one, we have to use the '''command select language.'''

|-
|04:58
|And select the respective language name as a value.

|-
|05:04
|Say, in this piece of code, I wish to display my text in Tamil.

|-
|05:10
|So before writing the text in Tamil, I have used '''selectlanguage command''', and set its value to '''Tamil'''.

|-
|05:19
| Likewise, I have written the code for the rest of the languages. Now let us '''compile''' this.

|-
|05:28
|Select '''XeLaTeX''' as the '''compiler''' from the dropdown on the top toolbar.

|-
|05:35
|'''XeLaTeX''' provides user with extensive set of '''fonts'''.

|-
|05:41
| Run the code by clicking on the green '''Typeset''' button at the top left corner.

|-
|05:48
|Observe the output '''pdf'''. We can see the output of the sentence in various languages in '''Nirmala UI font'''.

|-
|05:58
| In this example, I have used the '''font bundle Nirmala UI''' for all the languages.

|-
|06:05
|Instead we can also use specific '''fonts''' for each language.

|-
|06:11
|For this part of the demonstration, I will be using these '''fonts''' for the respective languages.

|-
|06:18
|The same is available in the '''Code files''' link.

|-
|06:22
|Download and install them as explained earlier in this tutorial, before proceeding further.

|-
|06:30
|I have already installed these '''fonts''' on my machine.

|-
|06:35
| In the '''multiLang.tex''' file, update the '''font''' declaration as shown here.

|-
|06:43
|In this example, I am declaring different '''fonts''' for different languages.

|-
|06:49
|Let us '''compile''' this file to see the output. Make sure the '''compiler''' is set to '''XeLaTeX '''at the top.

|-
|07:02
| Observe that there is no change in the output, other than the '''font style.'''

|-
|07:08
|So using any one of these methods, one can '''typeset indic''' languages in a '''LaTeX''' document.

|-
|07:16
|Important note.

While '''typesetting''' an '''indic''' language in '''LaTeX''', make sure you have declared the '''command selectlanguage.'''

|-
|07:25
|Else, the particular language text will not be displayed in the output. Let us try this.

|-
|07:34
|Copy the text written in any language and paste it next to the line, '''Knowledge is the supreme goal'''.

|-
|07:43
|Let us '''compile''' this file to see the output.

|-
|07:48
|In this code we have written a line of text in '''Telugu''' twice.

|-
|07:53
|One is before the '''selectlanguage command''' for '''Telugu '''and one is after that.

|-
|08:02
| But in the output '''pdf''', we can only see the text which is written after the '''selectlanguage command'''.

|-
|08:08
|So be careful while '''typesetting''' in '''indic''' language.

|-
| 08:14
|With this we have come to the end of this tutorial. Let us summarise.

|-
|08:21
| In this tutorial we learnt

1. How to install '''Nirmala UI font'''

2. To '''typeset''' a document in multiple languages using '''Nirmala UI''' and other language specific '''fonts'''

|-
|08:36
|As an assignment:
Identify and download other '''fonts''' which are compatible with the above languages.
Or that supports some other languages.

|-
|08:49
|Install and use them to '''typeset''' a document and
Compare the output.

|-
|08:56
|The video at the following link summarises the Spoken Tutorial project. Please watch it.

|-
|09:04
|The Spoken Tutorial Project Team conducts workshops and gives certificates.

|-
|09:10
|For more details, please write to us.

|-
|09:14
|Please post your timed queries in this forum

|-
|09:18
| Spoken Tutorial Project is funded by MHRD, Government of India. More information on this Mission is available at this link.

|-
|09:24
| The script was contributed by Meenal and Preeti, FOSSEE Summer Fellows 2019.

|-
|09:32
|And this is Praveen from IIT Bombay signing off. Thanks for joining.

|-
|}

ESim/C3/Uploading-a-spice-Subcircuit-file/English-timed

2021-06-28T10:30:52Z

Pratik kamble: Created page with "{| border="1" |- | '''Time''' | '''Narration''' |- |00:01 |Welcome to the spoken tutorial on '''Uploading a spice Subcircuit file''' in '''eSim'''. |- |00:08 |In this tuto..."

{| border="1"
|-
| '''Time'''
| '''Narration'''

|-
|00:01
|Welcome to the spoken tutorial on '''Uploading a spice Subcircuit file''' in '''eSim'''.

|-
|00:08
|In this tutorial, using '''eSim''' we will learn to upload an external '''spice subcircuit''' file in '''eSim'''.

|-
|00:17
|To record this tutorial, we will use-

'''Ubuntu Linux OS''' version 16.04

'''eSim''' version 2.0

|-
|00:29
|To practice this tutorial, you should know how to create and '''simulate''' a '''circuit''' and '''subcircuit''' in '''eSim'''.

|-
|00:38
|If not, watch the prerequisite '''eSim''' tutorials on this website.

|-
|00:44
|The '''subcircuit''' file always begins with the '''dot subckt''' statement.

|-
|00:50
|'''Subname''' is the '''subcircuit component''' name.

|-
|00:55
|'''N1, N2''' are the nodes. The '''subcircuit''' ends with '''dot Ends''' followed by the '''subcircuit''' name.

|-
|01:05
|This option is available in the '''eSim 2 point 0''' and later versions.

|-
|01:12
|The '''subcircuit''' file is added to the '''eSim subcircuit library'''.

|-
|01:18
|You can also refer to the '''subcircuit''' files available in the '''Ngspice''' manual.

|-
|01:25
|To launch '''eSim''', you need to double-click on the '''eSim''' icon on your '''Desktop'''.

|-
|01:31
|I have already opened '''eSim'''.

|-
|01:35
|On the '''eSim''' main window, click on the '''Subcircuit''' button from the left toolbar.

|-
|01:41
|In the previous tutorial, we have seen how to create a new''' subcircuit''' and edit an existing '''subcircuit'''.

|-
|01:51
|Pause the video here. Download '''Fulladder_using_Nand''' text file from the '''Code file''' section available on this page.

|-
|02:01
|Save it on '''Desktop''' with a '''dot sub''' extension.

|-
|02:06
|Now, on the '''Subcircuit''' tab, click on '''Upload a Subcircuit''' option. I have saved this file on my '''Desktop'''.

|-
|02:16
|Double-click on the '''Desktop''' folder.

|-
|02:19
|Click on '''Full_adder_using_Nand dot sub''' and then click on the '''Open''' button.

|-
|02:27
|The '''subcircuit''' uploaded using '''Upload''' option loads only '''dot sub''' file.

|-
|02:34
|As you can see here, only '''dot sub''' files will be available.

|-
|02:39
|No '''sch''' or '''cir''' files will be present in this folder.

|-
|02:45
|Let us simulate the '''Full Adder''' example with the newly added '''subcircuit library'''.

|-
|02:52
|Open the '''FullAdder''' example from the '''Examples''' folder of '''eSim''' installer.

|-
|02:59
|Click on the '''Open Project''' option from the top menu.

|-
|03:04
|Locate the directory where the '''eSim''' is installed and double-click on the '''Examples''' folder.

|-
|03:13
|Now select the '''FullAdder''' example and click on the '''Open''' button.

|-
|03:20
|On the '''eSim''' window, select '''FullAdder''' under '''Projects'''.

|-
|03:25
|Then click on '''Convert Kicad to Ngspice''' button from the left toolbar.

|-
|03:31
|Let the '''transient analysis parameters''' and '''Source details''' be the same.

|-
|03:37
|We will not change it. Skip the '''Ngspice Model''' and '''Device Modeling''' tab.

|-
|03:44
|Under the '''Subcircuits''' tab, click the '''ADD''' button.

|-
|03:49
|Click on '''FA using NAND''' dot '''sub''' file.

|-
|03:54
|Now click on the '''Open''' button. On the '''Kicad to Ngspice''' tab, click on the '''Convert''' button.

|-
|04:04
|On the '''eSim''' window, click on the '''Simulation''' button from the left toolbar.

|-
|04:10
|An '''Ngspice terminal''' and '''plot''' windows open along with a '''Python plot''' window.

|-
|04:17
|We have given the '''inputs''' as '''5, 5''' and '''0'''.

|-
|04:25
|Hence, the '''output''' for '''Sum''' is '''0''' volts and '''Carry''' is '''5''' volts. Close the '''Ngspice terminal''' and '''plot''' windows.

|-
|04:36
|In the '''Python plot''' window, check the '''Sum''' node and '''Cout''' node.

|-
|04:43
|And click on the '''Plot''' button. You can see the output of the '''sum''' and '''carry''' node.

|-
|04:51
|Close the '''Python''' plot window.

|-
|04:54
|The '''subcircuit''' file can also have '''model''' or '''subcircuit components''' within it.

|-
|05:01
|These '''components''' can be from existing '''eSim libraries'''.

|-
|05:06
|If the '''models''' or '''subcircuits''' are not present in '''eSim library''' then the user has to define the same.

|-
|05:14
|For example: Let us open the '''UJT subcircuit''' file present in '''eSim'''.

|-
|05:21
|In this file, there is a '''subcircuit''' of a '''Half adder''' and this is from '''eSim libraries'''.

|-
|05:29
|Hence the statement, '''dot include''' is added in this file.

|-
|05:35
|Here, the '''model RMOD''' and '''Emitter''' are the two '''models''' which are defined by the user.

|-
|05:43
|These '''model''' files are not available under '''eSim libraries'''.

|-
|05:48
|Hence, you need to mention the '''parameters''' in the '''spice model''' format.

|-
|05:54
|If any '''subcircuit''' is used, then the '''parameters''' are defined in the '''spice subcircuit''' format.

|-
|06:04
|Let us summarize.

In this tutorial, we learnt to upload an external '''spice subcircuit''' file in '''eSim'''

|-
|06:11
|Do you have questions in this '''Spoken Tutorial'''? Please visit this site.

|-
|06:17
|For any general or technical questions on '''eSim''', visit the '''FOSSEE''' forum and post your question.

|-
|06:25
|The '''FOSSEE''' team coordinates the '''Circuit Simulation''' project.

|-
|06:30
|We give '''Certificates''' and '''Honorarium''' to the contributors. For more details, please visit this site.

|-
|06:40
|The '''FOSSEE''' team coordinates the '''Lab Migration''' project. For more details, please visit this site.

|-
|06:50
|'''Spoken Tutorial''' Project is funded by '''NMEICT''', '''MHRD''', '''Govt. of India'''.

|-
|06:57
|This is Gloria N from IIT Bombay signing off. Thank you

ESim/C3/Editing-a-Subcircuit/English-timed

2021-06-28T10:05:45Z

Pratik kamble: Created page with "{| border="1" |- | '''Time''' | '''Narration''' |- |00:01 | Welcome to the spoken tutorial on '''Editing a Subcircuit''' in '''eSim'''. |- |00:08 |In this tutorial, using..."

{| border="1"
|-
| '''Time'''
| '''Narration'''

|-
|00:01
| Welcome to the spoken tutorial on '''Editing a Subcircuit''' in '''eSim'''.

|-
|00:08
|In this tutorial, using '''eSim''' we will learn to-

To edit a '''Subcircuit'''.

To modify the '''component schematic'''.

|-
|00:19
|To record this tutorial, we will use-

'''Ubuntu Linux OS''' version 16.04

'''eSim''' version 2.0

|-
|00:32
|To practice this tutorial, you should know

To create and '''simulate''' a '''circuit''' and a '''subcircuit''' in '''eSim'''.

|-
|00:41
|If not, watch the prerequisite '''eSim''' tutorials on this website.

|-
|00:47
|To launch '''eSim''', you need to double-click on the '''eSim''' icon on your '''Desktop'''.

|-
|00:53
|I have already opened '''eSim'''.

|-
|00:57
|On the '''eSim''' window, click on the '''Subcircuit''' button from the left toolbar.

|-
|01:04
|A '''subcircuit''' tab will open up.

|-
|01:08
|In the previous tutorial, we have seen to create a '''Subcircuit'''.

|-
|01:14
|Let us now edit a '''Subcircuit''' of a '''Half adder'''.

|-
|01:19
|In the '''subcircuit''' tab, click on the '''Edit Subcircuit Schematic''' button.

|-
|01:25
|The '''Subcircuit library''' opens up.

|-
|01:29
|Select the '''Half underscore adder''' and click on the '''Open''' button.

|-
|01:37
|The '''schematic''' of '''Half adder subcircuit''' opens in '''eeschema'''.

|-
|01:43
|Press '''F1''' key to zoom in the '''schematic'''.

|-
|01:48
|Let us connect an additional '''Inverter gate''' to the output of the '''AND gate'''.

|-
|01:54
|On '''eeschema''', click on the '''Place Component''' tool from the right toolbar.

|-
|02:01
|Click on the '''editor'''. In the '''Filter''' field, type '''eSim underscore Digital'''.

|-
|02:09
|Select '''d underscore Inverter''' and click on the '''OK''' button. Place it below the '''PORT D'''.

|-
|02:17
|The '''inverter''' is tied to the cursor. Place it below the '''PORT D'''.

|-
|02:25
|Connect a '''wire''' from '''Pin 3''' of the '''AND gate''' to '''Pin 1''' of the '''Inverter gate'''.

|-
|02:33
|A '''junction''' will be placed.

|-
|02:36
|Now, we will connect a '''Port''' to the '''Inverter''' output.

|-
|02:41
|Click on the '''Place Component''' tool from the right toolbar. Click on the '''editor'''.

|-
|02:49
|In the '''Filter''' field, type '''eSim underscore Miscellaneous'''. Select '''Port''' from the list.

|-
|02:59
|Click on the drop-down arrow. Select '''Unit E''' and click on the '''OK''' button.

|-
|03:08
|Place the '''Port E''' near the output '''pin''' of the '''Inverter'''.

|-
|03:13
|Place the cursor on the '''Port Unit E''' and press the '''R''' key to rotate.

|-
|03:20
|In the '''Clarify selection''' window, select '''component''' '''Port U''' and press the '''R''' key.

|-
|03:27
|Connect the '''output pin''' of the '''Inverter''' to '''Port Unit E'''.

|-
|03:33
|The '''Port Unit E''' will be '''pin 5''' of the '''component schematic'''.

|-
|03:39
|Now we will annotate the '''schematic'''.

|-
|03:43
|Click on the '''Annotate schematic components''' icon from the top toolbar.

|-
|03:49
|Keep the default settings. Click on the '''Annotate''' button. Click on the '''OK''' button.

|-
|03:57
|Press '''Ctrl+S''' keys together to save the '''schematic'''.

|-
|04:02
|To generate a '''netlist''', click on '''Generate Netlist'''.

|-
|04:07
|Select the '''Spice''' tab and check the '''Default Format'''.

|-
|04:14
|Click on the '''Generate''' button. Then click on the '''Save''' button.

|-
|04:22
|This creates the '''KiCad netlist''' of the '''Half adder subcircuit'''.

|-
|04:28
|Let us go back to the '''eSim''' window.

|-
|04:32
|In the '''Subcircuit''' tab, click on the '''Convert Kicad to Ngspice''' button.

|-
|04:39
|You can specify the '''transient analysis parameters''' or leave them blank.

|-
|04:45
|I am leaving these values blank. Skip the '''Ngspice Model''' and '''Device Modeling''' tabs.

|-
|04:54
|If any '''device modeling''' or '''subcircuit''' is used, please specify here.

|-
|05:00
|Press the '''Convert''' button in the '''Kicad to Ngspice''' tab.

|-
|05:05
|Click on the '''OK''' button in the '''Information''' dialog box.

|-
|05:10
|This creates the '''Ngspice netlist''' of the '''subcircuit'''.

|-
|05:15
|An additional '''port''' is added to the '''Half adder subcircuit'''.

|-
|05:20
|Hence, the '''component schematic''' has to be modified to include '''pin 5'''.

|-
|05:26
|Go back to the '''Half Adder schematic'''.

|-
|05:30
|On the '''schematic editor''', click on the '''Library Editor''' icon from the top toolbar.

|-
|05:37
|It directs us to the '''Part Library Editor''' window.

|-
|05:42
|Click on the '''File''' option from the top menu, and click on the '''Current Library''' option.

|-
|05:51
|Scroll down and choose '''eSim underscore Subckt'''. Click on the '''OK''' button.

|-
|06:00
|You can see the '''path''' of the selected '''library''' is displayed on top of the '''Part Library''' window.

|-
|06:08
|Click on the '''Load component to edit from the current library''' icon in the top toolbar.

|-
|06:16
|Click on the '''Half underscore adder''' and click on the '''OK''' button.

|-
|06:24
|Place the cursor on '''Pin 4, Cout'''.

|-
|06:28
|Press '''M''' key to move the '''pin''' and place it just below '''pin 3'''.

|-
|06:34
|Click on '''Add pins to component''' tool from the right toolbar.

|-
|06:40
|Click on the '''editor'''. '''Pin Properties''' window will appear. Enter '''Pin name''' as '''Out'''.

|-
|06:50
|If you wish, you can give any other '''Pin name''' of your choice.

|-
|06:55
|'''Pin Number''' should match with the '''Port Unit''' name.

|-
|06:59
|'''Port E''' represents '''Pin 5''' of the '''subcircuit'''. Enter '''Pin Number''' as '''5'''.

|-
|07:08
|Enter '''Orientation''' as '''left''' as it is an '''output pin'''. Enter '''Electrical Type''' as '''Output'''.

|-
|07:18
|Keep '''Graphic Style''' as '''Line'''.

|-
|07:22
|You can choose '''Orientation''' and '''Electrical Type''' based on the requirement of the '''subcircuit'''. Click on the '''OK''' button.

|-
|07:33
|The pin is attached to the cursor. Place it below '''Pin 4''' with a single click.

|-
|07:40
|Now, let us save the '''schematic''' symbol. Press '''Ctrl+S''' keys together to save the '''schematic'''.

|-
|07:49
|In the '''Confirmation''' box click on the '''Yes''' button.

|-
|07:54
|In the second '''Confirmation''' box, click on the '''Yes''' button

|-
|07:59
|You can save the '''component''' using the '''Save Current Library to Disc''' icon from the top toolbar.

|-
|08:07
|You can select the current '''library''' using the '''Select Working Library''' option.

|-
|08:14
|You can delete the '''component''' using the '''Delete''' option.

|-
|08:19
|You can also use '''Update current component in current library''' option from the top toolbar.

|-
|08:27
|This will save the modified '''component''' to the current '''library'''.

|-
|08:32
|There is an option '''Create a new component from the current one''' in the top toolbar.

|-
|08:39
|This imports the '''schematic''' of the '''components''' and can be used to create a new one.

|-
|08:45
|Let us now close the '''Part Library Editor''' window.

|-
|08:50
|Now, let us '''simulate''' a '''circuit''' with the newly added '''subcircuit''' and its '''component'''.

|-
|08:57
|Let us open the '''Half underscore Adder''' from the '''Example''' folder of '''eSim'''.

|-
|09:03
|On the '''eSim''' window, click on the '''Open Project''' button from the top menu.

|-
|09:09
|Locate the directory where '''eSim''' is installed and click on the '''Example''' folder. Select '''Half underscore Adder''' and then click on '''Open'''.

|-
|09:24
|The '''Half underscore Adder''' is added to the '''eSim''' window under '''Projects'''.

|-
|09:30
|To open the '''schematic''', select '''Half Adder''' from '''Projects'''.

|-
|09:35
|Click on the '''Open Schematic''' button from the left toolbar.

|-
|09:40
|It directs us to the '''schematic editor'''. Zoom in the '''schematic''' by pressing '''F1''' key.

|-
|09:49
|Let us replace the '''Half Adder subcircuit''' with the modified '''Half Adder component'''.

|-
|09:55
|Click on the '''Place Component''' tool from the left toolbar. Click on the '''editor'''.

|-
|10:03
|In the '''Filter''' field, type '''eSim underscore Subckt'''.

|-
|10:08
|Scroll down and select the '''Half underscore adder'''. Click on the '''OK''' button.

|-
|10:16
|Place and connect it as shown here.

|-
|10:20
|Similarly connect '''DAC, plot V1''' and global label '''out''' as shown here.

|-
|10:27
|Now annotate the '''schematic''' using '''Annotate Schematic Components''' from the top toolbar.

|-
|10:34
|Generate the '''Spice netlist'''. Refer to previous tutorials to learn annotation and generating '''netlist''' of the '''schematic'''.

|-
|10:44
|Save the '''schematic''' by pressing '''Ctrl+S''' keys together.

|-
|10:49
|Let us go back to the '''eSim''' window.

|-
|10:53
|Click on '''Convert Kicad to Ngspice''' from the left toolbar

|-
|10:59
|Let us not change the '''Transient Analysis parameters'''.

|-
|11:04
|Click on the '''Source details''' tab. Enter '''5V''' for '''DC source, V1''' and '''V2'''.

|-
|11:13
|Skip the '''Ngspice Model''' and '''Device Modeling''' tab.

|-
|11:17
|In the '''Subcircuit''' tab, click on the '''ADD''' button.

|-
|11:22
|Click on '''Half underscore Adder''' and then click on the '''Open''' button.

|-
|11:29
|In the '''KiCad to Ngspice''' tab, press the '''Convert''' button. Click the '''OK''' button in the '''Information''' box.

|-
|11:40
|Now to generate '''plots''', click on the '''Simulation''' button from the left toolbar.

|-
|11:47
|An '''Ngspice terminal''' and '''plot''' windows open along with a '''python plot''' window.

|-
|11:53
|Since both the '''inputs''' are '''5''' volts, the '''sum''' is '''0''', '''carry''' will be '''5''' volts and the '''Output''' will be '''0''' volts.

|-
|12:04
|Close the '''Ngspice plots''' and '''terminal''' windows.

|-
|12:08
|In the '''Python plot''', check the '''Sum''' node,'''cout''' node and the '''Out''' node.

|-
|12:15
|Click on the '''Plot''' button. You can see the '''plots''' for '''sum, cout''' and '''Out''' nodes.

|-
|12:24
|Close the '''Python plot''' window.

|-
|12:27
|Let us now summarise. In this tutorial, we learnt-

To edit a '''Subcircuit''' and

To modify the '''component schematic'''.

|-
|12:40
|Do you have questions in this '''Spoken Tutorial'''? Please visit this site.

|-
|12:46
|For any general or technical questions on '''eSim''', visit the '''FOSSEE''' forum and post your question.

|-
|12:54
|The '''FOSSEE''' team coordinates the '''Circuit Simulation''' project.

|-
|12:59
|We give '''Certificates''' and '''Honorarium''' to the contributors. For more details, please visit this site.

|-
|13:09
|The '''FOSSEE''' team coordinates the '''Lab Migration''' project. For more details, please visit this site.

|-
|13:18
|'''Spoken Tutorial''' Project is funded by '''NMEICT''', '''MHRD''', '''Govt. of India'''. For more details, visit this site.

|-
|13:26
|This is Gloria N from IIT Bombay signing off. Thank you

ESim/C3/Uploading-a-Spice-Device-Model/English-timed

2021-06-17T12:39:23Z

Pratik kamble: Created page with "{| border="1" |- | '''Time''' | '''Narration''' |- |00:01 | Welcome to the spoken tutorial on '''Uploading a Spice Device Model''' in '''eSim'''. |- |00:08 |In this tutorial..."

{| border="1"
|-
| '''Time'''
| '''Narration'''

|-
|00:01
| Welcome to the spoken tutorial on '''Uploading a Spice Device Model''' in '''eSim'''.

|-
|00:08
|In this tutorial, using '''eSim''' we will learn -

To create a '''Schottky Diode''' using the '''Upload''' option.

|-
|00:17
| To record this tutorial, we will use-

'''Ubuntu Linux OS ''' version 16.04

'''eSim '''version 2.0

|-
|00:28
|To practice this tutorial, you should know to

create a '''circuit schematic''' and

'''simulate''' the '''netlist''' file in '''eSim'''.

|-
|00:39
|If not, watch the prerequisite '''eSim''' tutorials on this website.

|-
|00:45
|The '''device model''' file begins with a '''dot model''' statement.

|-
|00:50
|'''mname''' indicates the '''model''' name like '''diode model 1N4007, 1N534A'''.
'''Component type''' indicates the '''type''' of '''model''' used.

|-
|01:05
|Example: '''D''' is used for '''Diode''','''M''' for '''MOSFET''',and
'''NPN''' or '''PNP''' for '''BJT'''.

|-
|01:15
|'''pname''' is the '''parameter''' name and '''pval''' is the '''parameter''' value.

|-
|01:22
|The '''model library''' files added using the '''Upload''' option will be saved in the '''User Libraries''' folder under '''device Model Library''' directory.

|-
|01:35
|The '''model library''' files are used with the '''components''' present in '''eSim underscore Devices'''.

|-
|01:44
|You can also refer to the '''spice models''' available in the '''Ngspice''' manual.

|-
|01:51
| To launch '''eSim''', you need to double-click on the '''eSim''' icon on your '''Desktop'''.

|-
|01:58
|I have already opened '''eSim'''. Pause the video here.

|-
|02:02
|Download the '''Schottky diode 1N5711 library''' file from the '''Code file''' section available on this page.

|-
|02:13
|Save it on your '''Desktop''' with '''dot lib''' extension.

|-
|02:19
| On the '''eSim''' window, click on the '''Model Editor''' button from the left toolbar.

|-
|02:26
|In the previous tutorial, we have seen how to add a '''Device model''' using the '''New''' option.

|-
|02:35
|Now, we will add a '''Device model library''' using the '''Upload''' option.

|-
|02:42
|On the ''' Model Editor''' tab, click on the '''Upload''' button.

|-
|02:47
|I have already downloaded the '''Schottky diode IN5711 model''' and saved it on my '''Desktop'''.

|-
|02:57
|Click on the '''Desktop'''. Click on the '''Schottky dot lib''' file.

|-
|03:04
|Click on the '''Open''' button.

|-
|03:07
|A pop-up window '''Model Name''' will appear.

|-
|03:11
|In the '''Enter Model Library Name''', type new model name as '''Schottky'''. Click on the '''OK''' button.

|-
|03:21
|The '''device model Schottky''' and its '''xml''' file will be saved under the '''User libraries''' folder.

|-
|03:30
|Let us '''simulate''' the '''characteristics''' of '''Schottky diode'''.

|-
|03:35
|We will open the example '''Diode Characteristics''' from the '''eSim Examples''' folder.

|-
|03:43
|On the '''eSim''' window, click on the '''Open Project''' option from the top menu.

|-
|03:50
|Locate the '''directory''' where the '''eSim''' is installed.

|-
|03:55
|Click on the '''Examples''' folder.

|-
|03:59
|Scroll down and select the '''Diode underscore characteristics'''.

|-
|04:04
|Click on the '''Open''' button. The '''Diode characteristics''' example is added to the '''eSim''' window under '''Projects'''.

|-
|04:14
|To see the '''schematic''', select '''Diode characteristics'''.

|-
|04:19
|Click on the '''Open Schematic''' button from the left toolbar. It directs us to the '''schematic editor'''.

|-
|04:28
|Press '''F1''' key to zoom in the '''schematic'''.

|-
|04:33
|Let us go back to the '''eSim''' window.

|-
|04:37
|On the '''eSim''' window,select the '''Diode underscore characteristics'''.

|-
|04:43
|Click on the '''Convert Kicad to Ngspice''' button from the left toolbar.

|-
|04:49
|In the '''Analysis''' tab, select '''DC'''.

|-
|04:53
|Scroll down to enter values.

Enter '''Source 1''' as '''V1'''.

|-
|05:01
|Enter '''Start''' as '''0'''.

Enter '''Increment''' as '''0.1'''.

Enter '''Stop''' as '''0.4'''.

|-
|05:12
|In the '''Source Details''' tab, enter the value as '''1'''.

|-
|05:17
|Skip the '''Ngspice Model''' tab.

|-
|05:20
|Click on the '''Device Modeling''' tab.

|-
|05:24
|Click on the '''ADD''' button. Double-click on the '''User Libraries ''' folder.

|-
|05:31
|Click on '''Schottky dot lib''' file and click on the '''Open''' button.

|-
|05:37
|On the '''Kicad to Ngspice''' tab, click on the '''Convert''' button.

|-
|05:43
|Click on the '''OK''' button in the '''Information''' dialog box.

|-
|05:48
|Now, let us generate the '''plots'''.

|-
|05:51
|On the '''eSim''' window, click on the '''Simulation''' button from the left toolbar.

|-
|05:58
|The '''diode''' has a '''knee voltage''' or '''turn-on voltage''' of around '''0.2'''.

|-
|06:05
|The '''forward current''' is '''95 microampere'''.

|-
|06:10
|These '''diodes''' are used in '''power rectification''' applications. Close the '''Ngspice terminals''' and '''plots'''.

|-
|06:20
|In the '''Python plot''' window, check the '''In''' and '''Out''' nodes.

|-
|06:25
|Then click on the '''Plot''' button.

|-
|06:29
|You can see the '''input''' and '''output plot'''. Close the '''Python plot'''.

|-
|06:36
|Let us now summarise.

|-
|06:39
|In this tutorial, we learnt to create

'''Schottky Diode''' using '''Upload''' option.

|-
|06:47
|Do you have questions in this '''Spoken Tutorial'''?

|-
|06:51
|Choose the minute and second where you have the question.

|-
|06:55
|Explain your question briefly.

|-
|06:59
|Someone from the '''FOSSEE''' team will answer them. Please visit this site.

|-
|07:07
|For any general or technical questions on '''eSim''', visit the '''FOSSEE''' forum and post your question.

|-
|07:15
|The '''FOSSEE''' team coordinates the '''Circuit Simulation''' project.

|-
|07:20
|We give '''Certificates''' and '''Honorarium''' to the contributors. For more details, please visit this site.

|-
|07:29
|The '''FOSSEE''' team coordinates the '''Lab Migration''' project. For more details, please visit this site.

|-
|07:38

|'''Spoken Tutorial''' Project is funded by '''NMEICT''', '''MHRD''', '''Govt. of India'''. For more details, visit this site.

|-
|07:50
|This is Gloria N from IIT Bombay signing off. Thank you

|-
|}

ESim/C2/PCB-Layout-for-Astable-Multivibrator/English-timed

2021-06-17T12:30:02Z

Pratik kamble: Created page with "{| border="1" |- | '''Time''' | '''Narration''' |- |00:01 | Welcome to the spoken tutorial on “'''PCB Layout for Astable Multivibrator'''”. |- |00:07 | In this tutorial,..."

{| border="1"
|-
| '''Time'''
| '''Narration'''

|-
|00:01
| Welcome to the spoken tutorial on “'''PCB Layout for Astable Multivibrator'''”.

|-
|00:07
| In this tutorial, we will learn to -

Create a '''PCB layout''' for an '''Astable Multivibrator''' and

Generate '''Gerber files'''.

|-
|00:18
| To record this tutorial, we will use-

'''Ubuntu Linux OS '''16.04

'''eSim '''version 1.1.2

|-
|00:29
|To practice this tutorial, you should know to:

Create a '''Schematic''' in '''eSim'''.

Assign '''components''' to '''footprints''' and

Set '''design parameters''' for '''PCB layout'''.

|-
|00:43
|If not, please see the prerequisite '''eSim''' tutorials on this website.

|-
|00:48
|Earlier in this series, we learnt how to

Create a '''Schematic''' in '''eSim'''

Map '''footprints'''

Set '''design parameters''' for a '''PCB '''layout.

|-
|01:01
|I am going to reinforce the idea with the example of an '''Astable Multivibrator'''.

|-
|01:07
|Now watch me for the next one minute.

|-
|01:11
| A considerable part of this activity has been fast forwarded.

|-
|01:16
|I am adding '''connectors''' and mapping the '''components''' with their '''footprints'''.

|-
|03:29
|I have set the '''design rules''', drawn the '''board outline''' and placed a few''' tracks'''.

|-
|03:36
| The partially made '''layout''' is available in the '''Code files''' link.

|-
|03:41
|Pause the video to download and extract the code files to your '''Desktop.'''

|-
|03:47
|We will use the downloaded code file to practice the rest of the tutorial.

|-
|03:52
| Now launch '''eSim'''.

|-
|03:55
|I have already opened '''eSim'''. Click on '''Open Project '''on the left toolbar.

|-
|04:02
|Browse to '''Desktop''', click on '''ASM underscore PCB'''. Then click on the '''Open''' button at the bottom right corner.

|-
|04:12
|| Double-click on '''ASM underscore PCB'''.

|-
|04:16
|Click on '''Open Schematic''' button on the left toolbar.

|-
|04:22
| The '''schematic''' for '''Astable Multivibrator''' opens up.

|-
|04:26
|Click on '''PCB new Tool '''in the top toolbar.

|-
| 04:31
| '''Pcbnew Layout Editor''' window opens up.

|-
|04:35
| I have already placed '''tracks''' for most of the '''airwires'''.

|-
|04:40
|Now, let us see how to convert the remaining '''airwires''' into '''tracks.'''

|-
|04:46
| Under the '''Layer''' tab on the right side of the '''Pcbnew window, '''click once on''' B.Cu'''.

|-
|04:53
| Click on '''Place '''button in the top toolbar and then select '''Track '''from the menu.

|-
|05:01
| Zoom into the '''Layout editor''' using the '''F1''' key.

|-
|05:05
|This can also be done using the scroll key of the mouse.

|-
|05:10
|Let us now place '''tracks''' for connecting '''capacitor C1''' to '''LED1.'''

|-
|05:16
| Click on '''node 1 '''of''' C1.'''

|-
|05:21
|And drag the cursor to '''node 2 '''of''' LED1.'''

|-
|05:25
|Double-click on''' node 2''' of '''LED1 '''to complete the '''track'''.

|-
|05:31
| Press '''ESC''' key. Now let us place a '''ground plane''' to connect all the '''ground nodes'''.

|-
|05:39
| Click on the''' Add filled zones''' button on the right of the '''Pcbnew window.'''

|-
|05:45
| Click once, slightly above the top-left corner of the '''board outline'''.

|-
|05:52
| Now, let’s place the '''ground plane''' on the '''Bottom Copper layer'''.

|-
|05:56
|To do so, click on '''B.Cu''' under''' Layer '''column.

|-
|06:02
|Then click on '''GND''' under''' Net '''column.

|-
|06:07
| Click on the '''OK '''button at the bottom right corner of the '''Copper Zone Properties '''window.

|-
|06:14
| Drag the cursor with the pencil icon horizontally towards the right.

|-
|06:20
|Click once, slightly above the top-right vertex of the '''outline'''.

|-
|06:26
| Let us move this cursor vertically, towards the bottom-right vertex of the '''board'''.

|-
|06:32
|Click once slightly below the bottom-right vertex.

|-
|06:36
| We shall now finish drawing a rectangular '''ground plane outline'''.

|-
|06:42
|Note that we have to double-click to finish the rectangular '''ground plane outline'''.

|-
|06:48
| I have finished the '''ground plane outline.'''

|-
|06:51
|Note that we have to ensure that the''' ground plane outline''' lies outside the''' board outline'''.

|-
|06:59
|Right-click inside the '''board outline'''.

|-
|07:03
|Click on '''Fill or Refill all zones '''button from the drop-down menu.

|-
|07:09
|We have successfully added a '''ground plane''' to the '''board'''.

|-
|07:14
| Press '''Esc''' key to exit the '''Add filled zones '''tool.

|-
| 07:19
| Let us now perform '''Design Rule Check''' i.e '''DRC''', for the '''layout''' we created.

|-
|07:26
|Click on '''Perform Design Rules check '''present at the top of the '''Pcbnew''' toolbar.

|-
|07:33
|Click on '''Start DRC. '''

|-
|07:37
|This checks if any '''design element''' violates the '''design parameters '''set earlier.

|-
|07:44
|I have no errors in my design.

|-
|07:48
| Click the '''OK''' button at the bottom right corner, to exit the '''DRC Control '''window.

|-
|07:55
| Let us press '''Ctrl '''and '''S '''keys together to save our work.

|-
|08:01
|We will now create '''gerber files''' for this '''board'''.

|-
|08:05
| Click on the '''Plot '''button at the top of the '''Pcbnew''' toolbar.

|-
|08:10
|Let us select the '''layers'''.

|-
|08:13
|Click on the tab below '''Plot format''' and select '''Gerber '''out of the 6 options.

|-
|08:20
| Let us select the''' layers''' for which we want the '''gerber files'''.

|-
|08:25
|I will select '''B.Cu, F.Silks '''and''' Edge.Cuts '''by clicking on the boxes to the left.

|-
|08:37
| Click on the '''Browse '''button at the top right corner of '''Plot '''window.

|-
|08:42
| Let us navigate to the desired '''directory''' where we wish to save the '''gerber files'''.

|-
|08:47
|Click on the '''Desktop'''. Double-click on '''ASM underscore PCB.'''

|-
|08:53
|Now click on the '''Open '''button at the bottom right of the '''Select Output Directory '''window.

|-
|09:00
|Click on '''No '''button in the '''Plot Output Directory '''window.

|-
|09:05
|Now click on the '''Plot '''button at the bottom of the '''Plot '''window.

|-
|09:10
|Acknowledgement messages will appear in the '''Messages''' window.

|-
|09:14
| Now, let us generate the '''drill file''' in '''gerber format''' for our designed '''board'''.

|-
|09:19
| Click on '''Generate Drill File '''at the bottom of the '''Plot '''window.

|-
|09:24
|Select the '''Millimeters '''option from the '''Drill Units''' section.

|-
|09:29
|Select the '''Gerber '''option under the '''Drill Map File Format''' section, if not selected.

|-
|09:37
|Select the '''Absolute '''option from the '''Drill Origin''' section, if not selected.

|-
|09:43
| We will leave the rest of the settings as they are.

|-
|09:47
| Click the '''Drill File '''option at the right of the '''Drill Files Generation '''window.

|-
|09:53
| An acknowledgement message will appear in the '''Messages '''window.

|-
|09:58
| Click on the '''Close '''button of the '''Drill Files Generation '''window.

|-
|10:04
| Click the''' Close '''button at the bottom right corner of the '''Plot '''window.

|-
|10:09
| Let us save our work by pressing '''Ctrl''' and '''S''' keys simultaneously.

|-
|10:16
| Now we will view the '''gerber files '''created.

|-
|10:20
|Open the '''terminal''' by pressing '''Ctrl, Alt '''and''' T '''keys together.

|-
|10:26
|Type '''gerbview''' and press the '''Enter '''key.

|-
|10:31
| Click on '''File '''at the top left corner, and select '''Load Gerber File '''option.

|-
|10:39
|Let us browse to the '''directory''' where we had saved our '''gerber files'''.

|-
|10:44
|I will click on '''Desktop'''. Then double-click on''' ASM underscore PCB.'''

|-
|10:52
| Press '''Ctrl '''and '''A '''keys simultaneously to select all the '''gerber files'''.

|-
|10:59
|Click on the '''Open '''button at the bottom right corner of the '''Open Gerber file '''window.

|-
|11:05
| We can see the '''PCB Layout '''that we created in '''Gerber format'''.

|-
| 11:11
| Let us summarize.

|-
|11:13
|In this tutorial, we learnt to-

Create a '''PCB layout''' for an '''Astable Multivibrator'''.

Generate '''Gerber files'''.

|-
|11:23
| Please post your timed queries in this forum.

|-
|11:27
| Please post your general queries on eSim in this forum.

|-
|11:32
| '''FOSSEE''' team coordinates the '''Lab Migration''' project.

|-
|11:36
|'''FOSSEE''' team coordinates the '''Circuit Simulation Project'''.

|-
|11:41
|Spoken Tutorial Project is funded by NMEICT, MHRD, Govt. of India. For more details, visit this website.

|-
|11:48
| This is Saurabh from IIT Bombay, signing off. Thank you.

|-
|}

ESim/C2/Laying-Tracks-on-PCB/English-timed

2021-06-17T12:25:51Z

Pratik kamble: Created page with "{| border="1" |- | '''Time''' | '''Narration''' |- |00:01 | Welcome to the spoken tutorial on “'''Laying Tracks on Printed Circuit Board'''”. |- |00:07 | In this tutoria..."

{| border="1"
|-
| '''Time'''
| '''Narration'''

|-
|00:01
| Welcome to the spoken tutorial on “'''Laying Tracks on Printed Circuit Board'''”.

|-
|00:07
| In this tutorial, we will learn to -

Place '''tracks''' on '''printed circuit board.'''

Add '''dimension''' and '''text''' on '''Silkscreens.'''

Generate '''Gerber files '''and view them.

|-
|00:20
| This tutorial is recorded using -

'''Ubuntu Linux''' OS version 16.04

'''eSim '''version 1.1.2

|-
|00:31
|To practice this tutorial, you should know to:

Read a '''PCB netlist.'''

Draw '''outline''' and setup '''design parameters''' for a '''board'''.

Move and orient '''footprints'''.

|-
|00:43
|If not, see the prerequisite '''eSim''' tutorials on this website.

|-
|00:48
| I have already opened '''eSim''' on my machine.

|-
|00:50
| Let us open example '''7805VoltageRegulator.''' I have saved this on my '''Desktop'''.

|-
| 00:59
| I have already read the '''netlist''', created an '''outline''' and set the '''design parameters'''.

|-
|01:05
|Click on '''Open Project '''from the left toolbar.

|-
|01:09
|And navigate to the location where you have saved this.

|-
|01:13
|I will browse to '''Desktop.''' Click on '''7805VoltageRegulator.'''

|-
|01:19
|Click on the '''Open '''button at the bottom right corner of this window.

|-
|01:24
| Click on '''Open Schematic''' button on the left toolbar, to open the '''schematic'''.

|-
|01:30
| Using '''F1 '''I will zoom into the '''schematic'''.

|-
|01:34
|Click on '''Tools''' button at the top toolbar, and select '''Layout Printed Circuit Board'''. Let me resize this window.

|-
|01:45
|I have moved and oriented the '''footprints''', such that there is minimum intersection between '''airwires'''.

|-
|01:52
|Let us see how to convert the '''airwires''' into '''tracks.'''

|-
| 01:56
|Under the '''Layer''' tab on the right side of the '''Pcbnew window, '''click on '''B.Cu '''once.

|-
|02:03
|'''Layer''' selected will be indicated by a '''blue arrow''' on the left side of '''B.Cu'''.

|-
|02:09
|Click on '''Place '''button in the top toolbar, and select '''Track '''from the menu.

|-
|02:15
| Let us place '''tracks''' for connecting the '''capacitor C2''' to the '''output terminal J2.'''

I will zoom into the '''layout screen.'''

|-
|02:24
| Click on '''node 1 '''of '''C2.'''

|-
|02:28
| Let us drag this '''track''' from '''node 1''' of '''C2''' to '''node 1 '''of '''J2, '''by dragging the cursor till '''node 1 '''of '''J2.'''

|-
|02:36
| Double-click on '''node 1 '''of '''J2 '''to complete the '''track'''.

|-
|02:40
| Similarly connect all the other '''nodes''' except the '''Ground nodes'''.

|-
|02:45
| Press '''Esc '''key to exit the '''Place Track''' tool.

|-
|02:49
| '''Ground nodes '''are denoted by '''GND '''designation.

|-
| 02:54
| Let us place a '''ground plane''' to connect all the '''ground nodes'''.

|-
|02:58
|Click on '''Add filled zones''' button located at the right side of the '''Pcbnew window.'''

|-
|03:04
| Click once, slightly above the top-left corner of the '''board outline'''.

|-
|03:09
| Let us place the '''ground plane''' on '''Bottom Copper layer'''.

|-
|03:13
| To do so, click on '''B.Cu''' under '''Layer '''column.

|-
|03:18
| Click on '''GND''' under '''Net '''column.

|-
|03:22
| Click on '''OK '''button at the bottom right corner of the '''Copper Zone Properties '''window.

|-
|03:28
| Drag the cursor with the pencil icon horizontally towards the right. 

|-
|03:34
| Click once, slightly above the top-right vertex of the '''outline'''.

|-
|03:39
| Let us move this cursor vertically, towards the bottom-right vertex of the '''board'''.

|-
|03:45
| Click once slightly below bottom-right vertex.

|-
|03:49
| Similarly, we will draw a rectangular '''ground plane outline '''around '''board outline.'''

|-
|03:56
| Please do not confuse '''board outline '''with '''ground plane outline.'''

|-
|04:01
|I have completed the '''ground plane outline.'''

|-
|04:04
| Note that the '''ground plane outline''' should lie outside the '''board outline'''.

|-
|04:09
|Right-click inside the '''board outline'''.

|-
|04:12
| Click on '''Fill or Refill all zones '''button from the menu.

|-
|04:17
| We have added a '''ground plane''' to the '''board'''.

|-
|04:20
| Press '''Esc''' key to exit the '''Add filled zones '''tool.

|-
|04:25
|Let us now perform '''Design Rule Check''' i.e '''DRC''', for the '''layout''' we created.

|-
|04:32
| It checks whether the '''design''' created is compliant with the '''Design Rules''' set earlier.

|-
|04:38
| Click on '''Perform Design Rules check '''present at the top of the '''Pcbnew''' toolbar.

|-
|04:44
|Click on '''Start DRC.'''

|-
|04:47
| This checks if any '''design element''' violates the '''design parameters '''set earlier.

|-
|04:52
| If there are any '''design''' errors, they will be displayed in '''Error Messages''' window.

|-
|04:58
| In my case, there are no errors.

|-
|05:01
| Click '''OK''' button at the bottom right corner to exit the '''DRC Control '''window.

|-
| 05:07
| Now let us see how to add text on our '''board'''.

|-
|05:11
|Let us click on '''F.Silks layer '''to place text on the '''Front Silk Layer'''.

|-
|05:19
| Click on '''Place '''button from top toolbar and select '''Text '''option from the dropdown menu.

|-
|05:27
| Click once on the '''Pcbnew '''window.

|-
|05:31
| I will type '''7805VoltageRegulator '''in the '''Text '''window.

|-
|05:37
| Click on '''OK '''button at the bottom right corner of the '''Text Properties '''window.

|-
|05:43
| The '''typed text''' will be tied to the cursor.

|-
|05:47
| Drag cursor to bottom right corner of the '''layout screen '''and click once.

|-
|05:53
| We can see the '''text''' is placed in light blue color.

|-
| 05:58
| Please make sure to click inside the '''board outline.'''

|-
|06:02
| Now let us see how to add '''dimensions''' to our '''board design.'''

|-
|06:07
|Click on '''Margin '''layer.

|-
|06:10
| Click on '''Place '''at top toolbar and select '''Dimension '''option.

|-
|06:16
| Click once on either vertex of the '''board layout.''' I have chosen the top-right vertex.

|-
|06:23
| Let us drag the cursor towards the bottom right vertex in a straight line.

|-
|06:30
| Press '''Enter''' key twice. The '''dimension''' will be placed for the vertical edge of the '''board'''.

|-
|06:37
| We will perform similar steps for placing horizontal '''dimensions''' of the '''layout'''.

|-
|06:43
| Let us press '''Ctrl '''and '''S '''keys together to save the work.

|-
|06:49
| Let us now create '''gerber files''' for this '''board'''.

|-
|06:53
| Click on '''Plot '''button at the top of the '''Pcbnew''' toolbar.

|-
|06:58
| Click on the tab below '''Plot format'''. Select '''Gerber '''out of the 6 options.

|-
|07:05
| Let us select the '''layers''' for which we want the '''gerber files'''.

|-
|07:10
| I will select '''F.Cu, B.Cu, F.Silks '''and '''Edge.Cuts''' and '''Margin layers '''by clicking on the boxes to the left.

|-
|07:24
| Click on '''Browse '''button at the top right of '''Plot '''window.

|-
|07:29
|Let us navigate to the desired directory where we want to save the '''gerber files'''.

|-
|07:35
| Click on '''Desktop''', double-click on '''7805VoltageRegulator.'''

|-
|07:43
| Click on '''Open '''button at bottom right corner of '''Select Output Directory '''window.

|-
|07:50
| Click on '''No '''button of '''Plot Output Directory '''window.

|-
|07:57
|Click on '''Plot''' button located at the bottom of '''Plot '''window.
|-
|08:02
| Acknowledgement messages will appear in the '''Messages''' window.

|-
|08:06
| Let us generate the '''drill file''' in '''gerber format''' for our designed '''board'''.

|-
|08:11
|Click on '''Generate Drill File '''at the bottom of the '''Plot '''window.

|-
|08:16
|Click on '''Browse '''button at top right corner of '''Drill Files Generation '''window.

|-
|08:23
| I will navigate to '''Desktop/7805VoltageRegulator.'''

|-
|08:29
| Click on '''Open''' button at the bottom right corner of '''Drill Files Generation '''window.

|-
|08:35
| If '''Plot Output Directory''' window appears, Click on '''No''' button in the middle of '''Plot Output Directory '''window.

|-
|08:42
|Click on '''Gerber '''option placed in the middle of '''Drill Files Generation '''window if not selected.

|-
|08:52
|Click on '''Drill File '''option present at the right side of '''Drill Files Generation '''window.

|-
|08:58
| An acknowledgement message will appear in the '''Messages '''window.

|-
|09:02
|Click on '''Close '''button in the middle of '''Drill Files Generation '''window.

|-
|09:08
| Click on '''Close '''button at the bottom right corner of '''Plot '''window.

|-
|09:13
| Let us save our work by pressing '''Ctrl''' and '''S''' keys simultaneously.

|-
|09:19
| Now we will view the '''gerbers '''created.

|-
|09:22
| Open the '''terminal''' by pressing '''Ctrl, Alt '''and '''T '''keys together.

|-
|09:31
|Type '''gerbview''' and press '''Enter '''.

|-
|09:35
|Click on '''File '''from the top left corner, and select '''Load Gerber File '''option.

|-
|09:43
| Let us browse to directory where we have saved the '''gerber files'''.

|-
|09:48
| I will click on '''Desktop,''' and then double-click on '''7805VoltageRegulator.'''

|-
|09:56
| Press '''Ctrl '''and '''A '''keys at the same time to select all the '''gerber files'''.

|-
|10:02
| Click on '''Open '''button at the bottom right corner of the '''Open Gerber file '''window.

|-
|10:08
|We can see the '''PCB Layout''' we created in '''Gerber format'''.

|-
|10:13
|This is the '''FR4 grade''' copper cladded '''sheet''' on which we will transfer our design to.

|-
|10:19
|After etching and drilling appropriate '''holes''', this is how the '''board''' will look.

|-
|10:24
| '''Components''' can now be mounted and soldered on this '''board'''.

|-
|10:28
|This is how the '''board''' looks after '''components''' are soldered on it.

|-
|10:32
|With this, we come to the end of this tutorial. Let us summarize.

|-
|10:38
|In this tutorial, we learnt to :

Place '''tracks''' on '''printed circuit board.'''

Add '''dimension''' and '''text''' on '''Silkscreens.'''

Generate '''Gerber files '''and view them.

|-
|10:51
| Please post your timed queries in this forum.

|-
|10:54
| Please post your general queries on '''eSim''' in this forum.

|-
|11:00
| '''FOSSEE''' team coordinates the '''Lab Migration''' project.

|-
|11:06
|'''FOSSEE''' team coordinates the '''Circuit Simulation''' project.

|-
|11:10
| '''Spoken Tutorial''' Project is funded by '''NMEICT, MHRD''', Govt. of India.
For more details, visit this website.

|-
|11:17
|This is Saurabh from '''IIT Bombay''', signing off. Thank you.

|-
|}

ESim/C2/Setting-Parameters-for-PCB-designing/English-timed

2021-06-17T12:23:02Z

Pratik kamble: Created page with "{| border="1" |- | '''Time''' | '''Narration''' |- |00:01 |Welcome to the '''spoken tutorial '''on “'''Setting Parameters for Designing PCB'''”. |- |00:07 |In this tut..."

{| border="1"

|-
| '''Time'''
| '''Narration'''

|-
|00:01
|Welcome to the '''spoken tutorial '''on “'''Setting Parameters for Designing PCB'''”.

|-
|00:07
|In this tutorial, we will learn to -

Read a''' PCB netlist.'''

Draw '''outline '''and setup '''design parameters''' for a '''board.'''

Move and orient '''footprints'''.

|-
|00:22
| This tutorial is recorded using -

'''Ubuntu Linux OS''' version 16.04 and

'''eSim '''version 1.1.2

|-
|00:34
|To practice this tutorial, you should know:

To design and '''simulate''' a '''circuit''' in '''eSim.'''

To map '''components''' with '''footprints''' in '''CvPcb.'''

To create '''netlist''' for '''PCB Design''' in '''eSim.'''

|-
|00:50
|If not, watch the prerequisite '''eSim''' tutorials on this website.

|-
|00:56
| I have opened''' eSim''' on my machine.

|-
|00:59
| Let us open '''7805VoltageRegulator '''example.

|-
|01:14
| Click on '''Open Project '''button from the left toolbar.

|-
|01:21
|Click on '''Desktop'''. Click on '''7805VoltageRegulator.''' Click on '''Open '''button at the bottom right corner.

|-
|01:30
| Click on '''Open Schematic''' button from left toolbar, to open the '''schematic'''.

|-
|01:37
| The '''schematic''' will open. Click on '''Cvpcb '''shortcut at the top toolbar.

|-
|01:45
|I have mapped the '''components''' with appropriate '''footprints '''and generated '''netlist '''for it.

|-
|01:51
|I will switch back to the '''eSim schematic editor'''.

|-
|01:54
|Click on '''Tools''' at the top toolbar and select the '''Layout Printed Circuit Board''' option.

|-
|02:02
|If you get a '''Confirmation''' box, click on '''Yes'''.

|-
|02:07
| An empty '''layout screen''' is seen in the '''Pcbnew '''window.

|-
|02:11
| On the top toolbar, click on '''Read netlist.''' '''Netlist''' window will appear.

|-
|02:19
| Click on '''Browse '''button, and navigate to '''Desktop '''location.

|-
|02:25
|Double-click on '''7805VoltageRegulator.'''Click on '''7805VoltageRegulator.net'''.

|-
|02:35
|Click on '''Open '''button at the bottom right corner of this window.

|-
|02:40
| The '''netlist''' will be loaded.

|-
|02:43
| Click on '''Read Current Netlist '''button at the top right corner of '''Netlist '''window.

|-
|02:49
|If there is an error it will appear in red color in the '''Messages''' window. In my case, there are no errors.

|-
|02:56
|Click on the '''Close '''button at the top right corner of the '''Netlist '''window.

|-
|03:03
|The''' footprints''' mapped with the '''components''' appear on '''layout screen''' in a bundled manner.

|-
|03:09
| Let us draw an '''outline''' for the '''board''' we are creating.

|-
|03:13
| To place an '''outline''' for the '''board''' on '''Edge.Cuts''' '''layer,''' right-click on the '''layout screen.'''

|-
|03:19
|Click on '''Select working layer.''' Click on '''Edge.Cuts.'''

|-
|03:25
| Alternately, working '''layer''' can be selected from the right side of the '''panel'''.

|-
|03:30
|Under the '''Layer '''option, working '''layer'''s of a '''board''' are listed.

|-
|03:35
|'''Front Copper '''and''' Bottom Copper''' will be used for placing '''tracks'''.

|-
|03:41
|'''Front Silk, Edge.Cuts '''and''' Margin layer'''will be used for placing text and dimension.

|-
|03:49
|Click on the right side of '''Edge.Cuts layer. ''' A '''blue arrow '''will appear next to the '''Edge.Cuts.'''

|-
|03:59
|Click on '''Place '''at the top toolbar of '''Pcbnew '''window.

|-
|04:04
|Click on '''Line or Polygon '''from the menu.

|-
|04:08
|A pencil tied to your cursor will appear on the layout screen.

|-
|04:13
|We will use this to draw the '''outline'''.

|-
|04:16
|Click on the '''layout screen '''and move the pencil horizontally to a certain extent.

|-
|04:22
|Click on the location where we want to finish the line.

|-
|04:26
|A yellow line will appear on the '''layout screen'''.

|-
|04:30
|We will draw a rectangular shaped '''outline''' using the method demonstrated.

|-
|04:37
| We have created a rectangular shape as the '''outline''' for the '''board'''. Press '''Esc''' key to exit '''Line or Polygon''' tool.

|-
|04:46
| Now let us separate and place the '''footprints'''.

|-
|04:50
|I will now zoom in to see the '''footprints''' on the '''layout''' clearly, using the '''F1''' key.

|-
|04:57
|Right-click on '''Screw underscore Terminal underscore 01x02'''.

|-
|05:04
|Select '''Footprint J1 on F.Cu''' and select the '''Move '''option.

|-
|05:11
|Move the cursor tied to the '''footprint''' horizontally towards left.

|-
|05:17
|Click once on the '''layout screen '''to place the''' footprint.'''

|-
|05:21
| To properly orient this '''footprint''', right-click on '''Screw underscore Terminal underscore 01x02.'''

|-
|05:30
|Select '''Footprint J1 on F.Cu.'''

Let us select the '''Rotate + '''option.

|-
|05:40
| Similarly we will move and orient all other '''footprints''', according to our design.

|-
|05:46
|All the '''components''' should be inside the rectangular '''outline''' drawn.

|-
|05:51
| Press '''Shift''' and '''?''' keys together.

|-
|05:56
|This will open all the keyboard shortcuts available under '''Hotkeys List '''window.

|-
|06:03
| We can use '''Hotkeys''' or the demonstrated methods for placing and orienting the '''footprints'''.

|-
|06:10
| Click on '''Close '''button at bottom right corner of the '''Hotkeys List '''window.

|-
|06:15
|You may or may not see white wires, representing interconnected '''footprints'''.

|-
|06:21
| If you do not see them, click on '''Show or Hide board ratsnest''' button at the '''panel''' of '''Pcbnew '''window.

|-
|06:30
|White wires are called as '''airwires'''.

|-
|06:34
| I have already moved and oriented the '''footprints''' to get minimum intersection between '''airwires'''.

|-
|06:40
| Let us set the '''parameters''' to place '''tracks''' on the '''layout'''.

|-
|06:44
| Click on '''Design Rules '''option given at the top side of the toolbar. Click on '''Design Rules '''from the menu.

|-
|06:53
| We will change the default '''track''' width from 0.25 mm to 1.2 mm.

|-
|07:00
|Click on the window below '''Track Width.''' Let us clear the present value using '''Backspace '''key.
Type the number '''1.2.'''

|-
|07:10
| This will make all '''tracks''' placed in future, of '''1.2 millimeter''' width.

|-
|07:16
|You can select the '''track''' width according to your requirements.

|-
|07:20
| Click on '''Global Design Rules''' at the top of the '''Design Rules Editor''' window.

|-
|07:27
|Click on the tab in front of '''Min track width.'''

|-
|07:32
|Let us clear the present value using '''Backspace''' key. Then type the number '''1.2 '''in this space.

|-
|07:42
| This ensures that any '''track''' placed on any '''layer,''' is of minimum 1.2 mm width.

|-
|07:50
| Click on the '''Ok '''button at the bottom right corner.

|-
|07:54
| Now let us check the '''drill hole''' size of '''X1''', that is '''Lm_7805'''.

|-
|08:02
| Place cursor on '''Node 1''' of '''X1''' and press '''E''' key.

|-
|08:08
| '''Pad Properties '''window''':'''

|-
|08:11
| We can see the '''drill hole '''properties such as shape, size of this particular '''pad'''.

|-
|08:17
|We can see the default '''drill hole''' size for this particular '''pad''' is 1 millimeter.

|-
|08:23
| The default '''drill hole''' size and shape for different '''footprints''' may vary. We can change it according to our need.

|-
|08:32
| Click on the '''Ok '''button at the bottom right corner of the '''Pad Properties''' window.

|-
|08:38
| Let us press '''Ctrl '''and '''S '''keys''' '''together to save the work.

|-
|08:44
| With this, we come to the end of this tutorial. Let us summarize.

|-
|08:49
|In this tutorial, we learnt to :

Read a''' PCB netlist.'''

Draw '''outline '''and setup '''design parameters''' for a '''board.'''

Move and orient '''footprints'''.

|-
|09:01
| Please post your timed queries in this forum.

|-
|09:05
| Please post your general queries on eSim in this forum.

|-
|09:10
| '''FOSSEE''' team coordinates the '''Lab Migration''' project.

|-
|09:15
| '''FOSSEE''' team coordinates the '''Circuit Simulation''' project.

|-
|09:20
| '''Spoken Tutorial''' Project is funded by '''NMEICT, MHRD''', Govt. of India. For more details, visit this website.

|-
|09:27
| This is Saurabh from '''IIT Bombay''' signing off. Thank you.

|-
|}

ESim/C2/Mapping-Components-with-Footprints/English-timed

2021-06-17T12:18:06Z

Pratik kamble: Created page with "{| border="1" | '''Time''' | '''Narration''' |- |00:01 |Welcome to the '''spoken tutorial '''on “'''Mapping components''' with''' footprints'''”. |- |00:06 |In this tut..."

{| border="1"

| '''Time'''
| '''Narration'''

|-
|00:01
|Welcome to the '''spoken tutorial '''on “'''Mapping components''' with''' footprints'''”.

|-
|00:06
|In this tutorial, we will learn''' '''to :

Add '''connectors '''to a''' schematic.'''

Map''' components''' with '''footprints''' using '''CvPcb.'''

Generate '''netlist''' for '''PCB design.'''

|-
|00:20
|This tutorial is recorded using-

'''Ubuntu Linux OS version 16.04''' and

'''eSim '''version '''1.1.2'''

|-
|00:32
| To practice this tutorial, you should know:

The basic concepts of '''electronic circuits.'''

To create''' circuit schematic''' in '''eSim.'''

To '''simulate''' the '''netlist''' in '''eSim.'''

|-
|00:45
| If not, watch the prerequisite '''eSim''' spoken tutorials on this website.

|-
|00:51
| I have already opened '''eSim''' on my machine.

|-
|00:55
| Let us open example''' “7805VoltageRegulator”''' from the''' Examples''' folder of '''eSim.'''

|-
|01:02
| Click on the '''Open Project''' button from the left toolbar.

|-
|01:07
| Then browse to the '''directory''' where you have installed '''eSim.'''

|-
|01:11
| I will double-click on '''Downloads'''. Double-click on '''eSim hyphen 1.1.2'''.

|-
|01:19
| Double-click on '''Examples'''. Click on '''7805VoltageRegulator.'''

|-
|01:22
| Click on '''Open '''button at the bottom right corner'''.'''

|-
|01:32
|To open the '''schematic''', click on '''Open Schematic''' button on the left toolbar.

|-
|01:38
| The''' eSim Schematic Editor '''opens. I will zoom into the '''schematic'''.

|-
|01:44
|This circuit uses''' AC sine wave''' as input and '''Lm_7805 subcircuit '''as a '''voltage regulator.'''

|-
|01:54
| I will switch back to the '''eSim''' main window.

|-
|01:58
|Click on '''Simulation''' button from the left toolbar.

|-
|02:02
| We have given the '''AC signal''' as input.

|-
|02:06
|We can see the '''rectified 5 volts DC '''output.

|-
|02:10
| Let us learn how to map '''footprints''' with '''components'''.

|-
|02:15
|I will switch back to '''eSim Schematic''' '''Editor'''.

|-
|02:19
| The '''schematic''' contains '''plots, labels '''and '''sources, '''which are essential for '''simulation'''.

|-
|02:27
|These '''components''' are not required for '''PCB designing.'''

|-
|02:31
|Let us delete the '''components''' that are not required for '''PCB designing'''.

|-
|02:36
|Right-click on '''sine source''' and select the '''Delete Component '''option.

|-
|02:43
|Right-click on '''plot_v1''' that is '''U1 component''' and select the '''Delete Component '''option.

|-
|02:51
|Similarly, we will delete the remaining plots, '''labels''' and '''components''' which are not required.

|-
|02:58
| I have deleted other '''components '''and their connections.

|-
|03:02
| Let us now add a '''connector '''for the output of the '''circuit schematic'''.

|-
|03:07
| Click on '''Place Component '''button from the right toolbar.

|-
|03:12
|Click anywhere on the '''schematic.'''

|-
|03:15
| Type '''Conn '''in the''' Filter '''field.

|-
|03:19
|Click on '''Conn underscore 01x02.'''

|-
|03:26
|Click on '''OK '''button at the bottom right of the '''Component Selection''' window.

|-
|03:32
| '''Conn underscore 01x02 '''will appear to be tied to the cursor.

|-
|03:38
| Let us place the '''Conn underscore 01x02''' on the right side of the '''schematic'''.

|-
|03:45
|Click once to place the '''connector''' on the right side of the '''schematic'''.

|-
|03:50
| We also need a '''connector''' at the input to connect the external '''power supply.'''

|-
|03:56
|We have already selected '''Place component''' tool.

|-
|04:00
|Click anywhere on the '''eSim Schematic Editor '''window'''.'''

|-
|04:04
| Type '''Screw underscore Terminal''' in the '''filter '''box.

|-
|04:09
|Click on '''Screw underscore underscore 01x02 '''from the list.

|-
|04:18
|Click '''OK '''button at the bottom right corner of '''Component''' '''Selection''' window.

|-
|04:24
|Click once to place the '''connector''' on the left side of the '''schematic'''.

|-
|04:29
| Let us rotate '''Screw underscore Terminal underscore 01x02'''.

|-
|04:35
|Right-click on '''Screw underscore Terminal underscore 01x02 '''component.

|-
|04:42
|Select '''Orient Component '''from the drop-down menu and select '''Mirror II (two) '''option.

|-
|04:50
| Now, let us connect the '''connector'''s using wires.

|-
|04:54
|We have learnt to place wires earlier in this series.

|-
|04:59
|You can refer to the prerequisite tutorials, if required.

|-
|05:04
|Let us connect '''pin 1''' of '''Screw_Terminal underscore 01x02''' to the wire connecting '''D3''' and '''D4'''.

|-
| 05:16
|I have connected rest of the '''nodes''' to their respective '''connectors.'''

|-
|05:21
| All the '''components''' are connected.

|-
|05:24
|Let us '''annotate '''the '''schematic''' and perform '''ERC '''for the '''circuit schematic'''.

|-
|05:31
| Please refer to the prerequisite tutorials to learn how to perform '''Annotation '''and '''ERC.'''

|-
|05:38
|Let us now save the '''schematic'''.

|-
|05:41
|Press '''Ctrl '''and''' S''' keys together to save this '''schematic.'''

|-
|05:46
|We will now learn how to map the '''components''' with their''' footprints.'''

|-
|05:51
|'''Footprint''' is the '''layout''' of a '''component''' which is placed on the '''Printed Circuit Board'''.

|-
|05:57
|Click on the '''Run CvPcb to associate components and footprints '''button at the top of the''' eSim Schematic Editor'''.

|-
|06:06
|This opens '''Cvpcb window.'''

|-
|06:09
|If you’re using '''Cvpcb''' for the first time, you will get a confirmation box.

|-
|06:15
|Here, click on the '''OK '''button.

|-
|06:18
|If you get another dialog box titled '''Confirmation, '''click on '''No''' button.

|-
|06:25
| The '''Cvpcb''' window is divided into three '''panels.'''

|-
|06:30
|The left '''panel''' shows the '''Libraries''' of the '''footprints'''.

|-
| 06:35
|The middle '''panel''' is divided into 3 columns.

|-
|06:39
|The first column in the middle '''panel''' shows the serial number.

|-
|06:44
|The second column in the middle '''panel''' shows the reference '''ID''' of the '''components''' used in the '''schematic'''.

|-
|06:51
|The third column in the middle '''panel''' shows the values of the corresponding '''components''', if any.

|-
|06:58
|The right '''panel''' gives a list of '''footprints''' available in the '''libraries'''.

|-
|07:03
| The top menu of '''Cvpcb''' window has 3 options to filter the''' footprints'''.

|-
|07:09
|This will filter the '''footprints''' by '''keywords'''.

|-
|07:13
|This will filter the '''footprints''' by '''pin count'''.

|-
|07:17
|This will filter the '''footprints''' by the '''library'''.

|-
| 07:21
| Now we will map the '''components''' with their appropriate '''footprints'''.

|-
|07:26
| Click on the option '''Filter footprints list by library''' from the top menu.

|-
|07:33
|If any other filters other than '''Filter footprints list by library '''are selected, please uncheck them.

|-
| 07:41
| Please note that we are designing a '''board''' for '''Through Hole components'''.

|-
| 07:46
|'''Footprints''' which are meant for '''Through hole components''', will have '''THT '''in their description.

|-
| 07:53
| '''Footprints''' which are meant for '''Surface Mount Device components''', will have '''SMD '''in their description.

|-
|08:00
| Click on '''C1, '''the first row '''C1''' will be highlighted.

|-
|08:05
| Click on '''Capacitors_THT '''from the leftmost '''panel''' for selection of '''footprints''' of '''Through hole capacitors'''.

|-
|08:15
| The list of '''Capacitors underscore THT footprints''' for selected component '''C1''' will be available.

|-
|08:24
| We can also view the selected '''footprint'''.

|-
|08:26
| To do so, select any '''footprint '''from the right '''panel'''.

|-
|08:32
|Click on '''View selected footprint''' from the top '''panel'''.

|-
|08:37
| This will open '''footprint''' window which displays the image of the selected '''footprint'''.

|-
|08:43
| Now let us map the '''associated footprint''' for '''component C1.'''

|-
|08:48
| Let us locate the '''footprint''' with '''D 5.0 mm''' and '''P 2.50 mm'''.

|-
|08:55
| Double-click on it to '''assign''' this '''footprint'''.

|-
|08:59
| For '''J1 connector''': Click on '''J1, '''click on '''Connectors underscore Terminal underscore Blocks '''from the leftmost '''panel'''.

|-
|09:10
|Locate '''TerminalBlock underscore Altech underscore AK300 hyphen 2 underscore P5.00mm '''in the rightmost '''panel'''.

|-
|09:24
| Double-click on it to '''assign''' this '''footprint''' to '''J1'''.

|-
|09:28
| For '''J2 connector''': Click on '''J2''', click on '''Pin_Headers '''from the leftmost '''panel'''.

|-
|09:36
|Locate '''Pin underscore Headers colon Pin underscore Header underscore Straight underscore 1x02 underscore Pitch2.54mm '''.
Double-click on it.

|-
|09:52
| For '''Lm_7805:''' Click on''' Lm_7805 '''

|-
|09:56
|Click on '''TO underscore SOT underscore Packages underscore THT '''from the leftmost '''panel'''.

|-
|10:11
|Locate '''T0 hyphen 220 hyphen 3 underscore Vertical '''from the rightmost '''panel'''.

|-
|10:20
| Double-click on it to '''assign''' this '''footprint'''.

|-
|10:24
| I have mapped rest of the '''components''' with their appropriate '''footprints'''.

|-
|10:29
| Now we will save this '''footprint association'''.

|-
|10:33
| Click on '''Save footprint association in schematic component footprint fields''' at the left corner of the top toolbar.

|-
| 10:41
|This is a very important step and should not be skipped.

|-
|10:45
| It '''assigns''' the selected '''footprints''' to the '''components''' present in the '''schematic'''.

|-
|10:50
| Let us now generate the''' netlist '''for '''circuit schematic '''required for''' PCB layout'''.

|-
|10:56
| I will go back to the '''eSim Schematic editor''' window.

|-
|11:00
|Click on '''Generate netlist '''button at the top of '''eSim Schematic Editor '''window.

|-
|11:06
|Click on '''Pcbnew''' tab Check the option '''Default format.'''

|-
|11:12
| Click on '''Generate '''button. Then click on '''Save '''button at the bottom right corner.

|-
|11:20
| '''dot net netlist''' file contains information about '''components''' and '''footprints assigned'''.

|-
|11:26
| This is crucial for '''Printed Circuit Board designing'''.

|-
|11:30
| With this, we come to the end of this tutorial. Let us summarize.

|-
|11:36
|In this tutorial, we learnt to :

Add '''connectors '''to a '''schematic.'''

Map '''components''' with '''footprints''' using '''CvPcb''' and

Generate '''netlist''' for '''PCB design.'''

|-
|11:48
| Please post your timed queries in this forum.

|-
|11:52
| Please post your general queries on '''eSim''' in this forum.

|-
|11:57
| '''FOSSEE''' team coordinates the '''Lab Migration''' project.

|-
|12:02
| '''FOSSEE''' team coordinates the '''Circuit Simulation''' project.

|-
|12:07
| '''Spoken Tutorial '''Project is funded by '''NMEICT, MHRD,''' Govt. of India.

|-
|12:13
|This is Saurabh from '''IIT Bombay''' signing off.Thank you.
|-
|}

ESim/C2/Simulating-an-Astable-Multivibrator/English-timed

2021-06-17T12:14:02Z

Pratik kamble: Created page with "{| border="1" |- | '''Time''' | '''Narration''' |- |00:01 |Welcome to the spoken tutorial on '''Simulating Astable Multivibrator '''in '''eSim'''. |- | 00:07 | In this tutor..."

{| border="1"
|-
| '''Time'''
| '''Narration'''

|-
|00:01
|Welcome to the spoken tutorial on '''Simulating Astable Multivibrator '''in '''eSim'''.

|-
| 00:07
| In this tutorial, we will -

Create and '''simulate''' an '''Astable Multivibrator'''.

Understand '''dot cir '''and '''dot cir dot out''' files and

Observe and understand the '''Ngspice terminal'''.

|-
|00:24
| To record this tutorial, we will use-

'''Ubuntu Linux OS '''16.04 and

'''eSim '''version 1.1.2

|-
|00:36
|To practice this tutorial, basic knowledge of electronics is required.

|-
|00:41
|Earlier, we learnt how to create a '''schematic''' for an''' RC circuit.'''

|-
|00:47
| Now I am going to reinforce the idea with an '''Astable Multivibrator circuit.'''

|-
|00:53
| The '''Astable Multivibrator circuit''' is as shown.

|-
|00:57
|Watch me for the next one minute as I create this '''circuit''' in '''eSim'''.

|-
|01:04
|A considerable part of this activity has been fast forwarded.

|-
|01:49
|I am placing a few '''components''' and making a few connections.

|-
|01:54
| It is expected that you know how to create a '''schematic''' in '''eSim'''.

|-
|01:59
| In case you do not know, please watch the prerequisite '''eSim''' tutorials.

|-
|02:50
| The partially made '''circuit schematic''' is available in the '''Code files link'''.

|-
|02:55
| Pause the video to download and extract the '''code files''' on your '''Desktop.'''

|-
|03:01
| We will use the downloaded '''code file''' to practice the rest of the tutorial.

|-
|03:06
|Launch '''eSim '''on your machine.

|-
|03:09
| I have already opened '''eSim.'''

|-
|03:12
| Click on '''Open Project '''button on the left toolbar.

|-
|03:17
| Browse to the '''Desktop''' location and click on '''AstableMultivibrator.'''

|-
|03:23
| Then click on the '''Open '''button.

|-
|03:26
| Click on the''' Open Schematic''' button on the left toolbar.

|-
|03:31
|Press the '''F1 '''key to zoom into the '''schematic'''.

|-
|03:35
| If you have zoomed in or zoomed out too much, fit the '''schematic''' back to default.

|-
|03:41
|To do this, press the '''Esc''' key, and click on the '''View '''option on the top toolbar.

|-
|03:49
| Select the '''Fit on Screen '''option.

|-
|03:53
| It will fit the '''schematic''' back to its default resolution. I will zoom in again.

|-
|04:03
|The wires should be connected end-to-end for '''components''', and not external '''outlines'''.

|-
|04:11
|I will demonstrate a common mistake now.

|-
|04:14
|Select the '''Place Wire''' tool.

|-
|04:17
| I have clicked on one end of '''eSim underscore R'''.

|-
|04:22
| I will drag it to the exterior outline of the '''eSim underscore LED''' and double-click.

|-
|04:29
| The empty green box shows that the connection is not proper.

|-
|04:34
| Press '''Ctrl''' and '''Z''' keys simultaneously to undo the changes just made.

|-
| 04:40
| Let us properly connect the '''eSim_LED''' present on the right side of the '''schematic'''.

|-
|04:46
|Click on '''Place Wire '''tool on the right toolbar.

|-
|04:50
| Click on the unconnected '''node''' of the '''resistor'''. Then drag the cursor till '''node 1''' of '''eSim underscore LED'''

|-
|05:00
|Click once on the''' eSim underscore LED node '''to place the wire. Press '''Esc''' key.

|-
|05:07
|Select the '''Place Wire''' tool and click on the''' node 2''' of '''eSim underscore LED'''.

|-
|05:16
| Drag the cursor till the wire connecting the adjacent '''transistor''' and '''capacitor'''.

|-
|05:22
| Click once on the existing wire. Now press the '''Esc''' key.

|-
|05:28
|If the wires are placed properly, you will see a green dot where the wires intersect.
This is called a '''junction'''.

|-
|05:37
|Right-click on''' plot underscore v1 '''and select the''' Copy component''' option.

|-
|05:44
| '''plot underscore v1 '''will be tied to the cursor.

|-
|05:48
|Drag the cursor near the '''LED '''on the right side.

|-
|05:53
| Place it next to the''' LED '''by clicking once on the '''editor'''.

|-
|05:58
|Click on '''Place Global Label''' on the right toolbar, to place a '''global label'''.

|-
|06:04
| Click once on the '''editor''' screen. Type the text '''LED2 '''and click on''' OK.'''

|-
|06:14
| '''LED2 global label '''will be tied to the cursor.

|-
|06:18
| Place the '''LED2 global label''' near the''' LED '''on the right side, by clicking once on the '''editor''' once.

|-
|06:25
| Rotate the '''global label''' if required.

|-
|06:30
|Right-click on '''eSim_CP1'''.

|-
|06:34
| Choose the '''Edit Component''' option, and select '''Value.'''

|-
|06:39
| Erase the value '''eSim underscore CP1 '''using '''Backspace''' key and type''' 22u.''' Click on '''OK.'''

|-
|06:49
| Note that we are using '''polarised capacitor'''.

|-
|06:53
| Right-click on '''eSim underscore R'''.

|-
|06:57
| Place the cursor on '''Edit Component''', and select the '''Value''' option.

|-
|07:04
| Erase the value '''eSim underscore R '''using '''Backspace''' key and type''' 1k.''' Click on '''OK.'''

|-
|07:13
|We will assign a value to the''' DC source''' later.

|-
|07:18
| Connect '''plot_v1 '''and '''LED2 global label '''to the '''junction''' as shown.

|-
|07:28
|Press '''Ctrl''' and '''S''' keys simultaneously to save the work.

|-
|07:33
|Click on '''Annotate Schematic''' tool on the top toolbar.

|-
|07:38
| Click on '''Annotate''' option, and then on '''OK'''.

|-
|07:43
| Press '''Ctrl''' and '''S''' keys simultaneously to save the work.

|-
|07:48
|Click on''' Perform electrical rules check '''on the top toolbar. Click on '''Run.'''

|-
|07:55
|We can see three warnings regarding '''global label''', which can be ignored.

|-
|08:02
| Click on '''Delete Markers''' and then click on '''Close.'''

|-
|08:08
| More information on '''ERC errors''' is given in the '''Additional Reading Material '''of this tutorial.

|-
|08:15
| Click on '''Generate Netlist''' on the top toolbar.

|-
|08:20
| Click on '''Spice''' tab, and check the '''Default Format''' option.

|-
|08:26
| Then click on '''Generate''' option, and click on '''Save'''.

|-
| 08:32
|Now I will switch back to''' eSim '''main window.

|-
|08:36
|Double-click on '''AstableMultivibrator.'''

|-
|08:40
| Click on''' Convert Kicad to Ngspice convertor.'''

|-
|08:44
| Type the values for '''transient parameters''' as shown.

|-
|08:49
|Click on the '''Source details''' tab.

|-
|08:52
|Type the value of '''DC source''' as '''9'''. You should enter only numeric values of '''voltages'''.

|-
|09:02
| Click on '''Device Modeling '''tab.

|-
|09:05
| Click on the '''Add''' button under '''d1:esim underscore led.'''

|-
|09:11
| Double-click on '''Diode''' folder, select '''LED.lib''' file and click on the '''Open''' button.

|-
|09:20
|Similarly add the '''library files''' for '''d2:esim underscore led'''

|-
|09:26
|Click on the '''Add''' button under '''q1:esim underscore npn.'''

|-
|09:33
| Double-click on '''Transistor''' folder, select '''BC547B.lib''' and click on the '''Open''' button.

|-
|09:42
|Similarly add the '''library files''' for '''q2:esim_npn'''

|-
|09:50
|Now press the '''Convert '''button to convert the''' KiCad netlist '''to''' Ngspice netlist.'''

|-
|09:56
| A confirmation dialog box appears, click on '''OK.'''

|-
|10:01
|Click on '''Simulation '''button on the '''eSim '''toolbar to simulate the example.

|-
|10:08
|'''Ngspice terminal '''and '''plot '''windows open along with a '''Python plot''' window.

|-
|10:15
| '''Ngspice terminal''' shows the values of the '''voltages''' at the '''nodes'''.

|-
|10:21
|'''Ngspice commands''' can be entered to see plots in this '''terminal'''.

|-
|10:27
| Type the following text in the '''Ngspice terminal''' and press the '''Enter''' key.

|-
|10:34
|We can see the '''voltage''' at '''nodes LED1 '''and''' LED2 '''combined in a single plot.

|-
|10:43
|Any error will be displayed on the''' Ngspice terminal''' or the value will be replaced with a question mark.

|-
|10:50
|I will switch to '''Python Plot''' window.

|-
|10:53
|Click on''' LED1, LED2 '''and''' IN '''check-boxes in the '''Python plot''' window.

|-
|11:02
| Scroll down and click on the '''Plot''' button.

|-
|11:06
|If '''analysis time parameters''' are not set properly, '''Python Plotting''' error will be generated.

|-
|11:13
| For this particular '''circuit, step time''' is in '''milliseconds'''.

|-
|11:18
|Right-click on '''AstableMultivibrator''' and select the '''Refresh''' option.

|-
|11:24
| The '''dot cir''' file shows the '''netist '''file of the '''schematic'''.

|-
|11:29
| It contains the information about the '''node''' connections and values of '''components'''.

|-
|11:35
|The '''cir dot out''' file is passed to '''ngspice''' for running '''simulations'''.

|-
|11:41
| It contains information about the '''device''' and '''subcircuit models''' used in the''' KiCad to Ngspice '''conversion tool.

|-
|11:49
| It also contains the '''analysis time parameters'''.

|-
| 11:53
| Let us summarize.

|-
|11:55
|In this tutorial, we learnt to-

Create and '''simulate''' an '''Astable Multivibrator.'''

Understand '''dot cir '''and '''dot cir dot out''' files.

Observe and understand the '''Ngspice terminal'''.

|-
|12:11
| Please post your timed queries in this forum.

|-
|12:15
|Please post your general queries on '''eSim''' in this forum.

|-
|12:20
| '''FOSSEE''' team coordinates the '''Lab Migration''' project.

|-
|12:24
|'''FOSSEE''' team coordinates the '''Circuit Simulation''' project.

|-
|12:29
|Spoken Tutorial Project is funded by NMEICT, MHRD, Govt. of India. For more details, visit this website.

|-
|12:36
|This is Saurabh from IIT Bombay, signing off. Thank you.

|-
|}

ESim/C2/Schematic-Creation-and-Simulation/English-timed

2021-06-17T12:08:58Z

Pratik kamble:

{|border=1
|-
| '''Time'''
|'''Narration'''

|-
| 00:01
| Welcome to the spoken tutorial on “'''Schematic Creation '''and '''Simulation '''using''' eSim'''”

|-
| 00:08
| In this tutorial, using '''eSim,''' we will learn to-

Create '''circuit schematic'''

Generate '''spice netlist'''

Convert spice '''netlist '''to '''ngspice '''format

Simulate the '''netlist'''

|-
| 00:26
| To record this tutorial, we will use-

'''Ubuntu Linux OS '''16.04

'''eSim '''version 1.1.2.

|-
| 00:38
| To practice this tutorial, basic knowledge of '''analog '''and''' digital electronics''' is required.

|-
|00:47
| To launch '''eSim''', double-click on the '''eSim''' icon on your desktop.

|-
| 00:55
| Alternately, you can also open '''eSim''' from the '''terminal.'''

|-
| 01:01
| To do so, press '''Ctrl, Alt '''and '''T''' keys together. Now, type '''esim''' and press '''Enter.'''

|-
| 01:11
| '''eSim '''window opens up.

|-
| 01:14
| Note that the project files created will be saved in the''' eSim-Workspace''' directory, by default. Press “'''Ok'''” in the dialog box.

|-
| 01:27
| Let us now create an '''RC circuit schematic '''and simulate it.

|-
| 01:33
| Click on the '''New Project button''', to create a new project. In the “'''Enter Project name'''” field, type '''RC '''and click on '''OK'''.

|-
| 01:47
| Please note that spaces are not allowed in the Project name.

|-
| 01:53
| Our new project '''RC''' will now appear under '''Projects.'''

|-
| 01:59
| '''Double-click''' on '''RC '''to select the project.

|-
| 02:04
| To create the '''circuit schematic''', click''' Open Schematic''' button on the left toolbar.

|-
| 02:12
| Click on '''Yes in''' the''' confirmation '''dialog box.

|-
| 02:17
| Ignore the '''eeschema error''' by clicking '''OK'''.

|-
| 02:22
| The '''Schematic editor '''window opens up.

|-
| 02:26
| Let us now add '''components''' to the '''schematic'''.

|-
| 02:31
| Click on '''Place component '''tool from the right toolbar. Now click anywhere on the '''editor'''.

|-
| 02:40
| Type '''eSim_Devices''' in the '''Filter''' field.

|-
| 02:49
| Then select '''R''' and click on '''OK'''. Now click anywhere on the '''editor'''.

|-
| 03:00
| Place the '''resistor R '''on the '''editor, '''by clicking on the '''editor '''once.

|-
| 03:07
| Zoom in by pressing '''F1.'''

|-
| 03:11
| You can also do so, by scrolling the scroll button of your mouse.

|-
| 03:18
| Click on the '''editor '''once again.

|-
| 03:22
| Type again '''eSim_Devices''' in the '''Filter''' field. Then select '''C''' and click on '''OK'''.

|-
| 03:33
| Place the '''capacitor C '''on the '''editor '''as done before.

|-
| 03:39
| Click again on the '''editor'''.

|-
| 03:43
| Type '''eSim_Sources''' in the '''Filter''' field,

|-
| 03:50
| select '''sine''' and click on '''OK'''.

|-
| 03:56
| Place the '''sine '''on the '''editor '''as done before.

|-
| 04:02
| Similarly, type '''gnd '''and place a '''ground terminal '''on '''editor'''.

|-
| 04:12
| Similarly, type '''eSim_Plot, '''select the''' plot_v1 '''and place it on the '''editor.'''

|-
| 04:26
| We need one more plot for output.

|-
| 04:30
|Place the cursor on '''plot_v1''', right click and select '''copy component'''. Now '''place it '''on the editor.

|-
| 04:45
| This is the '''plot component '''used to plot '''voltages '''at the required '''nodes.'''

|-
|04:52
| Let us now add '''labels''' to the '''schematic'''.

|-
| 04:56
|The '''labels''' are used to name the required '''nodes '''in the circuit.

|-
| 05:02
|This will help us understand the '''netlist''' and connection of our circuit.

|-
| 05:09
| Click on '''Place global label '''tool from the right toolbar. Now click anywhere on the '''editor.'''

|-
| 05:19
|Type '''IN '''in text field and click on '''OK.'''

|-
| 05:27
| Similarly, place one more label '''OUT '''in editor.

|-
| 05:36
| Let us move and arrange the components to create the '''RC circuit.'''

|-
| 05:42
| To move the '''resistor, '''place the cursor on it and press the key ''''m''''.

|-
| 05:50
| Place it at the preferred location, by clicking on editor again.

|-
| 05:57
| To rotate the '''resistor, '''place the cursor on it and press the key ''''r'.'''

|-
| 06:05
|Similarly, move the '''plot components '''and '''labels, '''as shown.

|-
| 06:11
| Now, let us connect the various components using wires.

|-
| 06:16
| Click on '''Place wire '''button''' '''from the right toolbar

|-
| 06:22
|Click on one end of the '''sine source'''.

|-
| 06:26
|Move the cursor point to one end of the '''resistor '''and click on it.

|-
| 06:33
| Similarly, connect all the components as demonstrated here.

|-
| 06:40
| The '''plot''' components are placed at the '''output '''and '''input nodes'''.

|-
| 06:45
|This helps us to view the corresponding '''voltage waveforms '''on simulation.

|-
| 06:53
| To '''annotate '''the '''schematic components''', Click on '''Annotate '''button from the top toolbar.

|-
| 07:01
|Click on '''Annotate '''and then click on '''OK.''' The '''schematic '''is now '''annotated'''.

|-
| 07:11
| To assign a value to the '''resistor''', right-click on it and choose '''Edit Component.'''

|-
| 07:18
|Click on '''Value'''. Type '''1k '''and click on '''OK'''.

|-
| 07:26
| Similarly, assign value '''1u''' for '''capacitor.'''

|-
| 07:33
| Now let us do '''electrical rules check '''for this '''schematic'''.

|-
| 07:38
| Click on '''Perform electrical rules check '''button on the '''top toolbar '''. Click on '''Run'''.

|-
| 07:47
| We can see the errors -

'''global label not connected''''' '' and''' a pin is not driven to components'''

|-
| 07:58
| Ignore''' '''the '''global label not connected '''error, since we have used the '''labels '''for naming the '''nodes '''only.

|-
| 08:06
| Close the '''ERC '''window.

|-
| 08:09
| Note that the '''ground terminal pin is '''highlighted by a green arrow in the '''schematic.'''

|-
| 08:17
| It means that this '''pin '''is not driven by any power source.

|-
| 08:22
| To prevent this, let us place a '''power flag.'''

|-
| 08:26
| Click on '''Place component '''tool. Click on the '''Schematic editor'''.

|-
| 08:33
| Type '''PWR underscore FLAG and Click OK'''. Place it on the '''schematic editor.'''

|-
| 08:47
| Connect this '''power flag '''to the '''ground terminal '''using a wire.

|-
| 08:53
| This indicates that a power source will be connected here.

|-
| 08:59
| Now repeat the '''electrical rules check'''.

|-
| 09:04
| There will be only '''global label not connected''' errors, which can be '''ignored.'''

|-
| 09:12
| Click on '''Delete Markers''' and then click on '''Close.'''

|-
| 09:18
| Now let us generate the''' netlist '''of this '''circuit.'''

|-
| 09:23
| Click on '''Generate netlist '''button''' '''from the top toolbar.

|-
|09:29
| Click on the '''Spice '''tab. Check the option '''Default format '''and then click on '''Generate.''' Click on '''Save.'''

|-
| 09:41
| A Kicad''' netlist '''of the '''RC circuit '''has been generated. Now minimise the '''schematic editor.'''

|-
| 09:51
| Now, let us add simulation parameters to this '''netlist.'''

|-
| 09:57
| Click on '''Convert Kicad to Ngspice '''from '''eSim '''toolbar.

|-
| 10:04
| Let us add '''transient parameters''' in '''Analysis tab.'''

|-
| 10:09
| By default, '''Transient''' is selected.

|-
| 10:13
| Scroll down to enter values in the '''Transient analysis''' fields.

|-
| 10:20
| Make '''Start Time '''equal to '''0 '''by doing the following:

|-
| 10:27
| Type '''0 '''in the start textbox.

|-
| 10:32
| Similarly, make the '''Step time 5 milliseconds''' and '''Stop time 30 milliseconds.'''

|-
| 10:43
| Let us add the '''source details'''

|-
| 10:45
| To do so, click on '''Source details''' tab.

|-
| 10:51
| '''Enter '''the '''offset value '''as '''0 '''and press '''Tab.'''

|-
| 10:57
| Type '''5 '''for '''amplitude''', '''50 '''for '''frequency '''and''' 0 '''for both '''delay time '''and '''damping factor'''.

|-
| 11:10
| We will talk about the '''Ngspice Model, Device Modelling and subcircuits tab '''in later tutorials.

|-
| 11:20
| Press the '''Convert '''button to '''convert the kicad netlist to ngspice netlist'''

|-
|11:28
| A confirmation dialog box appears. Here let's click O'''k.'''

|-
| 11:35
| Close the '''kicad to ngspice''' tool by clicking close at the top right corner of the window.

|-
| 11:43
| Click on '''simulation '''from the '''eSim '''toolbar to simulate the '''example.'''

|-
| 11:50
| An '''ngspice terminal '''and '''plot '''windows open along with a '''python plot''' window.

|-
| 11:58
| The plot waveforms show '''transient analysis '''of the '''RC '''circuit.

|-
| 12:04
| Close the '''Ngspice terminal '''and '''plot''' window.

|-
| 12:09
| Select the python plot window by clicking on '''Plotting''' tab in the dock area.

|-
| 12:16
| Maximize the '''Python''' plot window.

|-
| 12:20
| To plot the output: Check the '''IN '''and '''OUT''' nodes and click on the '''plot''' button.

|-
| 12:28
| The '''output plot''' is shown in '''blue''' and '''input plot '''in '''red.'''

|-
| 12:35
| To view the '''rms values''' of '''node voltages,''' click on the '''multimeter''' button.

|-
| 12:42
| The '''Multimeter''' window opens up, which will be on top of all other windows.

|-
| 12:49
| '''Maximise''' the '''schematic '''and '''drag''' the '''multimeter windows''' on the corresponding nodes of schematic.

|-
| 12:59
| Let us see how to '''simulate''' a circuit involving '''semiconductor devices''' and '''subcircuits'''.

|-
| 13:06
| Let us simulate '''7805VoltageRegulator''' circuit, which has '''diode'''s and a '''LM7805 regulator IC'''.

|-
| 13:16
| Click on '''Open Project''' button from the left toolbar.

|-
|13:21
|Click on '''Desktop.''' Click on '''7805VoltageRegulator.'''

|-
|13:27
|And click on the '''Open button''' at the bottom right corner.

|-
|13:32
|In the '''Projects '''window of '''eSim, '''double-click on '''7805VoltageRegulator.'''

|-
| 13:39
| Click on '''Open Schematic''' button from the left toolbar.

|-
| 13:44
| I have annotated, performed '''ERC''', and generated the '''spice netlist''' for this circuit.

|-
| 13:51
| I will now switch back to the '''eSim Main Window'''

|-
| 13:55
| Now, let us add '''simulation parameters''' to this '''netlist.'''

|-
| 14:00
| Click on '''Convert Kicad to Ngspice '''from '''eSim '''toolbar.

|-
| 14:06
| I have already added the parameter values in the '''Analysis and source details''' tab.

|-
| 14:14
| Let us assign '''device''' '''models''' to the '''semiconductor '''components inside the '''schematic'''.

|-
| 14:21
| To do so, click on '''Device Modelling '''tab.

|-
| 14:26
| We will add a '''device model''' for '''Diode 1: esim_diode'''

|-
|14:33
| Click on '''Add '''and then double-click on '''Diode.'''

|-
|14:38
| Click on '''D.lib''' Then click on the '''Open''' button.

|-
| 14:44
|We will perform the same steps for the remaining '''diodes''' as well.

|-
| 14:50
| Now let’s add the '''subcircuit''' file for '''LM_7805 subcircuit'''. To do so, click on '''Subcircuits '''tab.

|-
| 15:01
| Click on '''Add''' Double-click on '''lm7805 '''folder and then click on the '''Open''' button.

|-
| 15:10
| Press the '''Convert '''button to convert the''' kicad netlist '''to '''ngspice netlist'''.

|-
|15:16
| A confirmation dialog box appears. Here let's click '''Ok.'''

|-
| 15:22
| Click on '''simulation '''from the left''' '''toolbar.

|-
| 15:27
| An '''ngspice terminal '''and ngspice '''plot '''windows opens along with a '''python plot''' window.

|-
|15:37
| Click on''' in1, in2 '''and''' out '''checkboxes in the '''python plot''' window.

|-
|15:46
| Scroll down and click on '''plot''' button.

|-
| 15:51
| Now let us summarize.

|-
|15:54
| In this tutorial, we learnt how to-

Create '''circuit schematic '''

Generate spice '''netlist'''

Convert spice '''netlist '''to '''ngspice '''format

Simulate the '''netlist'''

|-
| 16:10
| Please post your timed queries in this forum.

|-
| 16:14
| Please post your general queries on eSim in this forum.

|-
| 16:20
| '''FOSSEE''' team coordinates the TBC project.

|-
| 16:30
| Spoken Tutorial Project is funded by '''NMEICT, MHRD''', Govt. of India. For more details, visit this website.

|-
| 16:36
| This is Usha from IIT Bombay, signing off. Thank you.

|-
|}

ESim/C2/Schematic-Creation-and-Simulation/English-timed

2021-06-17T12:07:22Z

Pratik kamble: Created page with "'''Schematic Creation and Simulation using eSim''' '''Author: Gaurav Supal''' '''Keywords: Video tutorial, eSim, Schematic, Simulation, EDA, Ngspice, analysis, transient, su..."

'''Schematic Creation and Simulation using eSim'''

'''Author: Gaurav Supal'''

'''Keywords: Video tutorial, eSim, Schematic, Simulation, EDA, Ngspice, analysis, transient, subcircuit, spice'''

{|border=1
|-
| '''Time'''
|'''Narration'''

|-
| 00:01
| Welcome to the spoken tutorial on “'''Schematic Creation '''and '''Simulation '''using''' eSim'''”

|-
| 00:08
| In this tutorial, using '''eSim,''' we will learn to-

Create '''circuit schematic'''

Generate '''spice netlist'''

Convert spice '''netlist '''to '''ngspice '''format

Simulate the '''netlist'''

|-
| 00:26
| To record this tutorial, we will use-

'''Ubuntu Linux OS '''16.04

'''eSim '''version 1.1.2.

|-
| 00:38
| To practice this tutorial, basic knowledge of '''analog '''and''' digital electronics''' is required.

|-
|00:47
| To launch '''eSim''', double-click on the '''eSim''' icon on your desktop.

|-
| 00:55
| Alternately, you can also open '''eSim''' from the '''terminal.'''

|-
| 01:01
| To do so, press '''Ctrl, Alt '''and '''T''' keys together. Now, type '''esim''' and press '''Enter.'''

|-
| 01:11
| '''eSim '''window opens up.

|-
| 01:14
| Note that the project files created will be saved in the''' eSim-Workspace''' directory, by default. Press “'''Ok'''” in the dialog box.

|-
| 01:27
| Let us now create an '''RC circuit schematic '''and simulate it.

|-
| 01:33
| Click on the '''New Project button''', to create a new project. In the “'''Enter Project name'''” field, type '''RC '''and click on '''OK'''.

|-
| 01:47
| Please note that spaces are not allowed in the Project name.

|-
| 01:53
| Our new project '''RC''' will now appear under '''Projects.'''

|-
| 01:59
| '''Double-click''' on '''RC '''to select the project.

|-
| 02:04
| To create the '''circuit schematic''', click''' Open Schematic''' button on the left toolbar.

|-
| 02:12
| Click on '''Yes in''' the''' confirmation '''dialog box.

|-
| 02:17
| Ignore the '''eeschema error''' by clicking '''OK'''.

|-
| 02:22
| The '''Schematic editor '''window opens up.

|-
| 02:26
| Let us now add '''components''' to the '''schematic'''.

|-
| 02:31
| Click on '''Place component '''tool from the right toolbar. Now click anywhere on the '''editor'''.

|-
| 02:40
| Type '''eSim_Devices''' in the '''Filter''' field.

|-
| 02:49
| Then select '''R''' and click on '''OK'''. Now click anywhere on the '''editor'''.

|-
| 03:00
| Place the '''resistor R '''on the '''editor, '''by clicking on the '''editor '''once.

|-
| 03:07
| Zoom in by pressing '''F1.'''

|-
| 03:11
| You can also do so, by scrolling the scroll button of your mouse.

|-
| 03:18
| Click on the '''editor '''once again.

|-
| 03:22
| Type again '''eSim_Devices''' in the '''Filter''' field. Then select '''C''' and click on '''OK'''.

|-
| 03:33
| Place the '''capacitor C '''on the '''editor '''as done before.

|-
| 03:39
| Click again on the '''editor'''.

|-
| 03:43
| Type '''eSim_Sources''' in the '''Filter''' field,

|-
| 03:50
| select '''sine''' and click on '''OK'''.

|-
| 03:56
| Place the '''sine '''on the '''editor '''as done before.

|-
| 04:02
| Similarly, type '''gnd '''and place a '''ground terminal '''on '''editor'''.

|-
| 04:12
| Similarly, type '''eSim_Plot, '''select the''' plot_v1 '''and place it on the '''editor.'''

|-
| 04:26
| We need one more plot for output.

|-
| 04:30
|Place the cursor on '''plot_v1''', right click and select '''copy component'''. Now '''place it '''on the editor.

|-
| 04:45
| This is the '''plot component '''used to plot '''voltages '''at the required '''nodes.'''

|-
|04:52
| Let us now add '''labels''' to the '''schematic'''.

|-
| 04:56
|The '''labels''' are used to name the required '''nodes '''in the circuit.

|-
| 05:02
|This will help us understand the '''netlist''' and connection of our circuit.

|-
| 05:09
| Click on '''Place global label '''tool from the right toolbar. Now click anywhere on the '''editor.'''

|-
| 05:19
|Type '''IN '''in text field and click on '''OK.'''

|-
| 05:27
| Similarly, place one more label '''OUT '''in editor.

|-
| 05:36
| Let us move and arrange the components to create the '''RC circuit.'''

|-
| 05:42
| To move the '''resistor, '''place the cursor on it and press the key ''''m''''.

|-
| 05:50
| Place it at the preferred location, by clicking on editor again.

|-
| 05:57
| To rotate the '''resistor, '''place the cursor on it and press the key ''''r'.'''

|-
| 06:05
|Similarly, move the '''plot components '''and '''labels, '''as shown.

|-
| 06:11
| Now, let us connect the various components using wires.

|-
| 06:16
| Click on '''Place wire '''button''' '''from the right toolbar

|-
| 06:22
|Click on one end of the '''sine source'''.

|-
| 06:26
|Move the cursor point to one end of the '''resistor '''and click on it.

|-
| 06:33
| Similarly, connect all the components as demonstrated here.

|-
| 06:40
| The '''plot''' components are placed at the '''output '''and '''input nodes'''.

|-
| 06:45
|This helps us to view the corresponding '''voltage waveforms '''on simulation.

|-
| 06:53
| To '''annotate '''the '''schematic components''', Click on '''Annotate '''button from the top toolbar.

|-
| 07:01
|Click on '''Annotate '''and then click on '''OK.''' The '''schematic '''is now '''annotated'''.

|-
| 07:11
| To assign a value to the '''resistor''', right-click on it and choose '''Edit Component.'''

|-
| 07:18
|Click on '''Value'''. Type '''1k '''and click on '''OK'''.

|-
| 07:26
| Similarly, assign value '''1u''' for '''capacitor.'''

|-
| 07:33
| Now let us do '''electrical rules check '''for this '''schematic'''.

|-
| 07:38
| Click on '''Perform electrical rules check '''button on the '''top toolbar '''. Click on '''Run'''.

|-
| 07:47
| We can see the errors -

'''global label not connected''''' '' and''' a pin is not driven to components'''

|-
| 07:58
| Ignore''' '''the '''global label not connected '''error, since we have used the '''labels '''for naming the '''nodes '''only.

|-
| 08:06
| Close the '''ERC '''window.

|-
| 08:09
| Note that the '''ground terminal pin is '''highlighted by a green arrow in the '''schematic.'''

|-
| 08:17
| It means that this '''pin '''is not driven by any power source.

|-
| 08:22
| To prevent this, let us place a '''power flag.'''

|-
| 08:26
| Click on '''Place component '''tool. Click on the '''Schematic editor'''.

|-
| 08:33
| Type '''PWR underscore FLAG and Click OK'''. Place it on the '''schematic editor.'''

|-
| 08:47
| Connect this '''power flag '''to the '''ground terminal '''using a wire.

|-
| 08:53
| This indicates that a power source will be connected here.

|-
| 08:59
| Now repeat the '''electrical rules check'''.

|-
| 09:04
| There will be only '''global label not connected''' errors, which can be '''ignored.'''

|-
| 09:12
| Click on '''Delete Markers''' and then click on '''Close.'''

|-
| 09:18
| Now let us generate the''' netlist '''of this '''circuit.'''

|-
| 09:23
| Click on '''Generate netlist '''button''' '''from the top toolbar.

|-
|09:29
| Click on the '''Spice '''tab. Check the option '''Default format '''and then click on '''Generate.''' Click on '''Save.'''

|-
| 09:41
| A Kicad''' netlist '''of the '''RC circuit '''has been generated. Now minimise the '''schematic editor.'''

|-
| 09:51
| Now, let us add simulation parameters to this '''netlist.'''

|-
| 09:57
| Click on '''Convert Kicad to Ngspice '''from '''eSim '''toolbar.

|-
| 10:04
| Let us add '''transient parameters''' in '''Analysis tab.'''

|-
| 10:09
| By default, '''Transient''' is selected.

|-
| 10:13
| Scroll down to enter values in the '''Transient analysis''' fields.

|-
| 10:20
| Make '''Start Time '''equal to '''0 '''by doing the following:

|-
| 10:27
| Type '''0 '''in the start textbox.

|-
| 10:32
| Similarly, make the '''Step time 5 milliseconds''' and '''Stop time 30 milliseconds.'''

|-
| 10:43
| Let us add the '''source details'''

|-
| 10:45
| To do so, click on '''Source details''' tab.

|-
| 10:51
| '''Enter '''the '''offset value '''as '''0 '''and press '''Tab.'''

|-
| 10:57
| Type '''5 '''for '''amplitude''', '''50 '''for '''frequency '''and''' 0 '''for both '''delay time '''and '''damping factor'''.

|-
| 11:10
| We will talk about the '''Ngspice Model, Device Modelling and subcircuits tab '''in later tutorials.

|-
| 11:20
| Press the '''Convert '''button to '''convert the kicad netlist to ngspice netlist'''

|-
|11:28
| A confirmation dialog box appears. Here let's click O'''k.'''

|-
| 11:35
| Close the '''kicad to ngspice''' tool by clicking close at the top right corner of the window.

|-
| 11:43
| Click on '''simulation '''from the '''eSim '''toolbar to simulate the '''example.'''

|-
| 11:50
| An '''ngspice terminal '''and '''plot '''windows open along with a '''python plot''' window.

|-
| 11:58
| The plot waveforms show '''transient analysis '''of the '''RC '''circuit.

|-
| 12:04
| Close the '''Ngspice terminal '''and '''plot''' window.

|-
| 12:09
| Select the python plot window by clicking on '''Plotting''' tab in the dock area.

|-
| 12:16
| Maximize the '''Python''' plot window.

|-
| 12:20
| To plot the output: Check the '''IN '''and '''OUT''' nodes and click on the '''plot''' button.

|-
| 12:28
| The '''output plot''' is shown in '''blue''' and '''input plot '''in '''red.'''

|-
| 12:35
| To view the '''rms values''' of '''node voltages,''' click on the '''multimeter''' button.

|-
| 12:42
| The '''Multimeter''' window opens up, which will be on top of all other windows.

|-
| 12:49
| '''Maximise''' the '''schematic '''and '''drag''' the '''multimeter windows''' on the corresponding nodes of schematic.

|-
| 12:59
| Let us see how to '''simulate''' a circuit involving '''semiconductor devices''' and '''subcircuits'''.

|-
| 13:06
| Let us simulate '''7805VoltageRegulator''' circuit, which has '''diode'''s and a '''LM7805 regulator IC'''.

|-
| 13:16
| Click on '''Open Project''' button from the left toolbar.

|-
|13:21
|Click on '''Desktop.''' Click on '''7805VoltageRegulator.'''

|-
|13:27
|And click on the '''Open button''' at the bottom right corner.

|-
|13:32
|In the '''Projects '''window of '''eSim, '''double-click on '''7805VoltageRegulator.'''

|-
| 13:39
| Click on '''Open Schematic''' button from the left toolbar.

|-
| 13:44
| I have annotated, performed '''ERC''', and generated the '''spice netlist''' for this circuit.

|-
| 13:51
| I will now switch back to the '''eSim Main Window'''

|-
| 13:55
| Now, let us add '''simulation parameters''' to this '''netlist.'''

|-
| 14:00
| Click on '''Convert Kicad to Ngspice '''from '''eSim '''toolbar.

|-
| 14:06
| I have already added the parameter values in the '''Analysis and source details''' tab.

|-
| 14:14
| Let us assign '''device''' '''models''' to the '''semiconductor '''components inside the '''schematic'''.

|-
| 14:21
| To do so, click on '''Device Modelling '''tab.

|-
| 14:26
| We will add a '''device model''' for '''Diode 1: esim_diode'''

|-
|14:33
| Click on '''Add '''and then double-click on '''Diode.'''

|-
|14:38
| Click on '''D.lib''' Then click on the '''Open''' button.

|-
| 14:44
|We will perform the same steps for the remaining '''diodes''' as well.

|-
| 14:50
| Now let’s add the '''subcircuit''' file for '''LM_7805 subcircuit'''. To do so, click on '''Subcircuits '''tab.

|-
| 15:01
| Click on '''Add''' Double-click on '''lm7805 '''folder and then click on the '''Open''' button.

|-
| 15:10
| Press the '''Convert '''button to convert the''' kicad netlist '''to '''ngspice netlist'''.

|-
|15:16
| A confirmation dialog box appears. Here let's click '''Ok.'''

|-
| 15:22
| Click on '''simulation '''from the left''' '''toolbar.

|-
| 15:27
| An '''ngspice terminal '''and ngspice '''plot '''windows opens along with a '''python plot''' window.

|-
|15:37
| Click on''' in1, in2 '''and''' out '''checkboxes in the '''python plot''' window.

|-
|15:46
| Scroll down and click on '''plot''' button.

|-
| 15:51
| Now let us summarize.

|-
|15:54
| In this tutorial, we learnt how to-

Create '''circuit schematic '''

Generate spice '''netlist'''

Convert spice '''netlist '''to '''ngspice '''format

Simulate the '''netlist'''

|-
| 16:10
| Please post your timed queries in this forum.

|-
| 16:14
| Please post your general queries on eSim in this forum.

|-
| 16:20
| '''FOSSEE''' team coordinates the TBC project.

|-
| 16:30
| Spoken Tutorial Project is funded by '''NMEICT, MHRD''', Govt. of India. For more details, visit this website.

|-
| 16:
| This is Usha from IIT Bombay, signing off. Thank you.

|-
|}

ExpEYES/C2/Overview-of-ExpEYES/English-timed

2021-06-17T07:14:08Z

Pratik kamble: Created page with "{| border=1 ||'''Time''' ||'''Narration''' |- |00:01 | Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''Overview of ExpEYES Junior'''. |- |00:06 |In this tutorial, we will learn abou..."

{| border=1
||'''Time'''
||'''Narration'''

|-
|00:01
| Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''Overview of ExpEYES Junior'''.

|-
|00:06
|In this tutorial, we will learn about,

'''ExpEYES''' webpage

Different experiments using '''ExpEYES junior''' device

Content available in various tutorials in '''ExpEYES''' series

|-
|00:23
|To record this tutorial, I am using

'''Ubuntu Linux''' OS 16.04
'''ExpEYES''' version 3.1.0 and
'''Firefox browser''' version 60.0

|-
|00:38
|To follow this tutorial, you should have

Knowledge of basic high school Physics.

|-
|00:45
|Here are the important links to open '''ExpEYES'''.

[http://expeyes.in/ http://expeyes.in]

[http://expeyes.in/ejun.html http://expeyes.in/ejun.html]

|-
|00:51
| Open your default web browser.

|-
|00:54
| In the address bar type [http://expeyes.in/ejun.html http://expeyes.in/ejun.html] and press '''Enter'''.

|-
|01:07
| '''ExpEYES''' page opens.

|-
|01:10
| Scroll down to the page.

|-
|01:12
| Here we can see various experiments that can done using '''ExpEYES junior''' device.

|-
|01:19
| Click on the experiment as per your choice.

|-
|01:23
| For example, I am choosing '''AC generator'''. Click on '''AC generator''' link.

|-
|01:30
| '''AC generator''' page opens. Here we can see the connections and plot for '''AC generator''' experiment.

|-
|01:40
| Similarly users can create their own experiments using '''ExpEYES junior''' device.

|-
|01:47
|This is the ExpEYES junior device

|-
|01:51
|This is the interface of '''ExpEYES junior''' software.

|-
|01:56
| Now, we will briefly go through the individual tutorials in this series.

|-
|02:01
| We will begin with '''Introduction to ExpEYES Junior'''.

|-
|02:05
|This tutorial explains,

About '''ExpEYES Junior''' device

Features

How to buy the device

Installation on different operating systems.

|-
|02:20
|Let us listen to the video clipping of the tutorial.

|-
|02:39
|The next tutorial is '''Panel connections and software interface.'''

|-
|02:44
|This tutorial explains about,

Various '''terminals''' on the panel,

Accessory set and Software interface.

|-
|02:56
|Here is the video clipping of the tutorial.

|-
|03:16
| The next tutorial is '''Communicating to ExpEYES using Python.'''

|-
|03:21
| This tutorial will explains how to -

Measure '''AC voltage''' using '''Python'''

Generate '''square''' and '''sine waves'''

Measure capacitance and resistance using '''Python'''

|-
|03:36
| Let us listen to the video clipping of the tutorial.

|-
|03:56
| The next tutorial in the series is '''Conductivity of ionic solutions.'''

|-
|04:02
|This tutorial explains how to

Measure '''Conductivity'''

Calculate resistance of '''ionic solutions'''.

|-
|04:12
|Here is the video clipping.

|-
|04:30
|The next tutorial is '''Electro-Magnetism.'''

This tutorial explains about,

Electro-magnetic induction

|-
|04:40
|Mutual induction of coils

Voltage induced by a rotating magnet

Resonance of driven pendulum.

|-
|04:51
| Let us listen to the video clipping.

|-
|05:10
|The next tutorial is '''Characteristics of Sound Waves'''

|-
|05:14
|This tutorial explains about,

Frequency response and forced oscillations of a sound source

Calculate velocity of sound

Interference and beats of sound waves

|-
|05:30
| Let us listen to the video clipping.

|-
|05:55
|The next tutorial is '''Steady state response of circuits.'''

|-
|06:00
|This tutorial will explain how to-

Calculate Phase shift values

AC phase shift in: RC, RL and LCR circuits.

|-
|06:12
|Let us listen to the video clipping.

|-
|06:33
| The next tutorial is '''Transient Response of Circuits. '''

|-
|06:38
|This tutorial will explain about-

Transient response of RC, RL and LCR circuits

Under damped discharge of LCR circuit

RC integration and differentiation

|-
|06:55
| Let us listen to the video clipping.

|-
|07:19
|The next tutorial is '''Diode Rectifier and Transistor.'''

|-
|07:24
|This tutorial explains about,

PN Junction diode

Diode as rectifier

Diode & LED IV characteristics and

Transistor CE

|-
|07:41
|Let us listen to the video clipping of the tutorial.

|-
|08:01
|Let us summarize. In this tutorial, we have learnt about,

'''ExpEYES''' webpage

Different experiments using '''ExpEYES junior''' device

Content available in various tutorials in '''ExpEYES''' series

|-
|08:19
| '''ExpEYES Junior''' is designed and developed by the '''PHOENIX''' project of '''Inter-University Accelerator Centre, New Delhi'''.

|-
|08:27
|The video at the following link summarises the Spoken Tutorial Project. Please download and watch it.

|-
|08:35
|The Spoken Tutorial Project Team, conducts workshops and gives certificates. For more details, please write to us. '''contact@spoken-tutorial.org'''

|-
|08:44
|Do you have questions in this '''Spoken Tutorial?''' Please visit this site

|-
|08:50
| Choose the minute and second where you have the question.

|-
|08:54
| Explain your question briefly. Someone from our team will answer them.

|-
| 09:00
| The Spoken Tutorial forum is for specific questions on this tutorial.

|-
|09:05
| Please do not post unrelated and general questions on them

|-
|09:08
| This will help reduce the clutter With less clutter, we can use this discussions as instructional material.

|-
|09:18
| '''Spoken Tutorial '''project is funded by '''NMEICT, MHRD''', Government of India.

|-
|09:24
| More information on this mission is given at this link.

|-
| 09:29
| This tutorial is contributed by Kaushik Datta and Madhuri Ganapathi. Thank you for watching.
|-
|}

Avogadro/C2/Overview-of-Avogadro/English-timed

2021-06-17T07:08:49Z

Pratik kamble: Created page with "{| border=1 ||'''Time''' ||'''Narration''' |- |00:01 | Welcome to this spoken tutorial on '''Overview of Avdogadro'''. |- |00:05 |In this tutorial we will learn,..."

{| border=1
||'''Time'''
||'''Narration'''

|-
|00:01
| Welcome to this spoken tutorial on '''Overview of Avdogadro'''.

|-
|00:05
|In this tutorial we will learn,

About '''Avogadro''' software

Download and installation of '''Avogadro'''

To open the documentation page

|-
|00:19
|About '''Avogadro '''interface

Benefits of '''Avogadro''' and

Play video clippings of '''Avogadro''' tutorials available on our website.

|-
|00:31
| To record this tutorial, I am using,

Ubuntu Linux OS version 14.04

Avogadro version 1.1.1

Mozilla Firefox Browser 58.0.2

A working internet connection.

|-
|00:50
|To follow this tutorial you should have knowledge of high School Chemistry.

|-
|00:57
| '''Avogadro''' is a three dimensional molecular builder, editor and visualization tool.

|-
|01:03
|It is free and open source software.

|-
|01:06
|We can build, load and edit 3D structures of various molecules.

|-
|01:12
|It runs on '''Windows''', '''Mac OSX''' and '''Linux''' operating systems.

|-
|01:18
| Now we will download '''Avogadro''' on '''Windows '''operating system.

|-
|01:23
| Open your default browser. In the address bar type '''avogadro.cc ''' and press '''Enter'''.

|-
|01:32
| Click on '''Download link'''.

|-
|01:35
| A dialog box opens, prompting us to save the file.

|-
|01:40
| Click on '''Save File''' button.

|-
|01:43
|'''Avogadro.exe''' file downloads to the '''Downloads''' folder.

|-
|01:48
| To install '''Avogadro''', double click on '''Avogadro.exe''' file. '''Avogadro setup Wizard''' opens.

|-
|01:58
| Click '''Next''' button in the '''wizard''' window.

|-
| 02:02
| Click on '''I Agree''' button to continue installation.

|-
|02:07
| Click on '''Create Avogadro Desktop Icon''' check box. Then click on '''Next''' button.

|-
|02:15
| Click again on '''Next''' button.

|-
|02:18
| Then click on '''Install''' button. Installation takes a few seconds.

|-
|02:25
| Click on '''Finish''' button in the wizard window to complete the installation.

|-
|02:31
|'''Avogadro''' interface opens. Let's learn to install '''Avogadro''' in '''Mac OSX'''.

|-
|02:39
| Open the default web browser in '''Mac OSX'''.

|-
|02:43
|In the '''address bar''' type: [https://avogadro.cc/ https://avogadro.cc].

|-
|02:50
| Click on the '''Download''' link.

|-
|02:53
|'''Download Avogadro from SourceForge '''page opens.

|-
|02:58
| A dialog box opens prompting us to save the file.

|-
|03:03
| Select the '''Save File''' radio button.

|-
|03:06
| Then click on '''OK''' button at the bottom.

|-
|03:10
| '''Avogadro''' downloads as '''.dmg''' file to the '''Downloads''' folder.

|-
|03:16
| Double-click the folder to open it. '''Avogadro''' file browser opens.

|-
|03:22
| Drag the '''Avogadro''' icon to '''Applications''' folder.

|-
|03:26
|'''Avogadro''' software will be copied to the '''Applications''' folder.

|-
|03:31
| Click on '''Applications''' icon on the left panel to open it.

|-
|03:36
| Notice the '''Avogadro''' icon in the '''Applications''' folder. Click on '''Avogadro''' icon.

|-
|03:44
| '''Unidentified developer''' message appears.

|-
|03:48
|Click on the '''Ok''' button at the bottom.

|-
|03:52
| Open '''System Preferences '''window and select '''Security & Privacy '''option.

|-
|03:59
| In '''Security & Privacy''' window, select '''Click the lock to make changes''' icon.

|-
|04:05
| In the '''unlock Security & Privacy preferences''' box, type '''username''' and '''password'''.

|-
|04:12
| Click '''Unlock''' button at the bottom.

|-
|04:15
|Under '''Allow apps downloaded from:''' select '''Anywhere''' radio button.

|-
|04:21
| Then click on '''Allow From Anywhere '''button.

|-
|04:25
| Click on '''Click the lock to make changes''' icon.

|-
|04:30
| Close the '''Security & Privarcy''' window.

|-
|04:34
| Click on '''Avogadro''' icon.

|-
|04:37
| A message box opens. In the box click '''Open''' button.

|-
|04:43
| '''Avogadro''' application opens.

|-
|04:46
| This means we have installed '''Avogadro''' successfully on our '''Mac OSX '''machine.

|-
|04:53
| Now, we will learn to install '''Avogadro''' on '''Ubuntu Linux''' machine.

|-
|04:58
|In '''Ubuntu Linux''' OS, we can directly download '''Avogadro''' using either-

'''Synaptic Package Manager''' or

'''Ubuntu Software center'''.

|-
|05:08
|I have already opened '''Ubuntu Software center''' using the '''Launcher'''.

|-
|05:13
| In the Search box type '''avogadro'''.

'''Avogadro''' icon appears.

Click on the icon.

|-
|05:22
| Below the icon, you can see a button named '''More Info'''. Click on this button.

|-
|05:29
| A window opens with all the information about '''Avogadro'''.

|-
|05:34
|On the right side of the window, click on '''Install''' button.

|-
|05:39
| Once the installation starts, '''Authenticate''' dialog-box opens.

|-
|05:44
| Type the '''system password''' and click on Authenticate''' button at the bottom. Installation takes a few seconds.

|-
|05:53
| Once the installation is complete, you can see a green coloured tick mark on the '''Avogadro''' icon.

|-
| 06:00
| This means we have successfully installed '''Avogadro''' on our '''Ubuntu Linux '''machine.

|-
|06:07
| Install '''Java Virtual Machine''' for smooth working of '''Avogadro''' software.

|-
|06:13
|Here is the link to install java. https://java.com/download.

|-
|06:16
| Now I will show the documentation page of '''Avogadro'''.

|-
|06:21
| Open your default web browser.

|-
|06:24
|In the address bar type:
[https://avogadro.cc/docs/ h][https://avogadro.cc/docs/ ttps://avogadro.cc/docs/]

|-
|06:32
| A new page open with the details about documentation of '''Avogadro'''.

|-
|06:39
| This is the '''Avogadro''' interface.

|-
|06:42
| It has a standard '''menu bar''' with menu items.

|-
|06:46
|We will learn about each of these in detail in the series.

|-
|06:52
| Below the menu bar we have various tool bars.

|-
|06:57
| Now we will see the benefits of '''Avogadro'''.

|-
|07:01
|It offers flexible high quality '''rendering'''

Energy minimisation can be done for the molecules to obtain stable conformations.

|-
|07:12
|It has a huge '''fragment library''' to load inbuilt structures

Files can be exported to '''png''', '''jpg''', '''bmp''' file formats.

|-
|07:24
|Two or more structures can be built or loaded on the panel.

|-
|07:29
| Now, we will briefly go through the individual tutorials created in this series.

|-
|07:35
| The first tutorial, '''Build molecules''' explains how to,

Build molecules

Show '''fragment library'''

|-
|07:44
|Set up force field and optimize geometry

Measure bond lengths, bond angles and dihedral angles.

|-
|07:53
| Here is the video clipping of this tutorial.

|-
|08:08
| The next tutorial is '''Edit Molecules'''. This tutorial explains about, editing properties in '''Avogadro.'''

|-
|08:18
|Let us listen to the video clipping of the tutorial.

|-
|08:33
| The next tutorial in the series is '''Create surfaces'''.

|-
|08:37
|This tutorial explains about, Properties of molecules, label the atoms with partial charge

|-
|08:44
|Create '''Van der waals''' surfaces.

|-
|08:47
| Let us listen to the video clipping of this tutorial.

|-
|09:05
| Next tutorial is '''Hydrogen Bonding'''.

|-
|09:08
|This tutorial explains, How to configure '''Avogadro'''

|-
|09:12
|Show hydrogen bonding in molecules

|-
|09:18
|Show force display type and dipole moments in molecules.

|-
|09:23
| Let us listen to the video clipping of the tutorial.

|-
|09:37
| Next tutorial is '''General Features in Avogadro'''.

|-
|09:42
|This tutorial explains about, Proton transfer in molecules by changing pH values

|-
|09:50
|Load crystal structure and show '''Miller''' planes Build super cells and nanotubes

|-
|09:57
|Show geometries in coordination compounds.

|-
|10:01
| Let us listen to the video clipping of this tutorial.

|-
|10:20
| Next tutorial is''' Stereoisomerism'''. This tutorial explains about, '''Stereoisomerism''' with examples.

|-
|10:30
| Let us listen to the video clipping of this tutorial.

|-
|10:48
| Next tutorial is''' File Extensions.'''

|-
|10:52
|This tutorial explains about, How to prepare input files for computational chemistry programmes

|-
|11:00
|View molecular orbitals and calculate IR spectrum.

|-
| 11:04
| Let us listen to the video clipping of this tutorial.

|-
| 11:20
| Let us summarise now.

|-
|11:22
|In this tutorial we have learnt,

About '''Avogadro''' software

Download and installation of '''Avogadro'''

|-
|11:32
|To open the documentation page

About '''Avogadro '''interface

Benefits of '''Avogadro '''and

|-
|11:40
|Play video clippings of '''Avogadro''' tutorials available on our website.

|-
|11:47
|As an assignment,

Install '''Avogadro''' on your machine.

Open '''Avogadro''' interface and explore.

|-
|11:55
|Another assignment.

Go through the menus and tool bars.

Change the background colour of the Panel.

|-
|12:04
| The video at the following link summarises the Spoken Tutorial project. Please download and watch it.

|-
|12:12
| The '''Spoken Tutorial Project '''team: conducts workshops and gives certificates

|-
|12:18
|For more details, please write to us.

|-
|12:21
|Do you have questions in THIS Spoken Tutorial?

Please visit this site Choose the minute and second where you have the question

Explain your question briefly Someone from our team will answer them

|-
|12:38
|The Spoken Tutorial forum is for specific questions on this tutorial

Please do not post unrelated and general questions on them

This will help reduce the clutter

With less clutter, we can use this discussion as instructional material.

|-
|12:56
| Spoken Tutorial Project is funded by '''NMEICT, MHRD,''' Government of India. More information on this mission is available at this link.

|-
| 13:07
| This is Madhuri Ganapathi from, IIT Bombay signing off. Thank you for watching.
|-
|}

Arduino/C3/Sending-data-to-the-cloud-using-IoT-devices/English-timed

2021-06-17T06:56:41Z

Pratik kamble: Created page with " {| border="1" |- || '''Time''' || '''Narration''' |- |00:02 | Welcome to the''' '''Spoken Tutorial on '''Sending data to the cloud using IoT devices.''' |- |00:08 |In this..."

{| border="1"
|-
|| '''Time'''
|| '''Narration'''

|-
|00:02
| Welcome to the''' '''Spoken Tutorial on '''Sending data to the cloud using IoT devices.'''

|-
|00:08
|In this tutorial, we will learn how to

Establish connection between '''ESP8266-01''' and '''DHT11 sensor'''

Collect '''Temperature''' and '''Humidity''' values given by '''DHT11 sensor'''

|-
|00:25
|Use '''ThingSpeak''' platform to store and visualize '''sensor''' readings and

Download the '''data''' in '''CSV''' file

|-
|00:35
|To follow this tutorial, you should have a basic knowledge of:

'''Wireless Communication '''

'''C or C++ '''programming language

'''ThingSpeak''' account and

Write '''API Key'''

|-
|00:50
|If not, then go through the relevant '''Arduino''' spoken tutorials on this website.

|-
|00:56
|To record this tutorial, here I am using:
'''Ubuntu Linux 16.04''' OS

'''Arduino UNO board'''

'''Arduino IDE'''

|-
|01:08
|We also require some external components such as
'''DHT11 Sensor'''

'''MB102 Breadboard Power Supply Module'''

|-
|01:17
| '''ESP8266-01 WiFi Module'''

Recall that we have learnt about the '''pins''' of '''ESP8266-01 WiFi module''' in the earlier tutorial.

|-
|01:28
| This '''wifi module''' is widely used for the development of '''IoT applications'''.

|-
|01:34
|It has a '''built-in System on Chip''' with integrated '''TCP/IP stack.'''

|-
|01:40
|We will be using the '''MQTT protocol''' to send '''data''' over the '''network'''.

|-
|01:45
|'''MQTT''' stands for '''Message Queuing Telemetry Transport.'''

|-
|01:50
|It is a simple '''messaging protocol''', designed for devices with low '''bandwidth'''.

We can read and publish '''data''' from '''sensors''' on the cloud.

|-
|02:00
|We will see the circuit connection of''' DHT11 '''and''' WiFi module''' with '''Arduino'''.

|-
|02:06
| Connect the '''VCC pin''' of the '''DHT11 sensor''' to the '''5V pin''' of '''Arduino'''.

|-
|02:12
|Connect the '''ground pin''' of the '''DHT11 sensor''' to the '''ground pin''' of '''Arduino'''.

|-
|02:17
|Connect '''Data pin''' of '''DHT11 sensor''' to '''GPIO2''' of '''ESP8266 Module'''.

|-
|02:24
|Note: The '''ESP8266 module''' works only on '''3.3V'''.

Connecting it to '''5V''' may damage the''' Wi-Fi module'''.

|-
| 02:34
| Next we will see how to set up the''' MB102 module''' on '''Breadboard'''.

|-
|02:40
|We need to use the '''3.3V''' supply to power up the '''wifi module'''.

|-
|02:45
|Make sure that the yellow coloured '''jumpers''' in the '''modules''' are fixed on the '''3.3V''' and '''OFF pins'''.

|-
|02:53
| Keep the white button of the '''module''' towards the right side of the '''breadboard''' as shown in the image.

|-
|02:59
|These are '''pins''' in pairs at the bottom of the '''MB102 module'''.

|-
|03:04
|Place these '''pins''' of the '''module''' on the '''power rails''' of the '''breadboard''' as shown in the image.

|-
|03:10
|We can see a '''power jack point''' on the '''MB102 module'''.

|-
|03:14
|Plug in a '''9V-1A adapter''' in this '''power jack'''.

|-
|03:19
| To turn '''ON''' or '''OFF''' the '''MB102 module''', we have to press the white button.

|-
|03:25
|When the green light is turned '''on''', it means the '''module''' is switched '''on'''.

|-
|03:29
|Now the setup of the '''MB102 module''' is completed.

|-
| 03:34
| Let us see the other circuit connections.

|-
| 03:37
|Connect '''VCC''' and '''CH_PD pins''' of '''ESP8266''' to '''3.3V pin''' of '''MB102 power supply module'''.

|-
|03:48
| Connect '''GND''' pin of '''ESP8266''' to '''ground pin''' of '''MB102 power supply module'''.

|-
|03:55
| Connect the '''RST''' that is '''Reset pin''' of '''ESP8266 module''' to one end of the '''push button'''.
This '''push button''' is used for '''reset'''ting the '''WiFi module'''.

|-
|04:05
|Connect the other end of the '''push button''' to the '''ground terminal''' of '''Arduino'''

Connect '''GPIO pin 0''' of '''ESP8266 module''' to '''ground'''.

|-
|04:16
|Connect the '''Tx pin''' of '''ESP8266''' to the '''Tx pin''' of the '''Arduino'''.

Connect the '''Rx pin''' of '''ESP8266''' to the''' Rx pin''' of the '''Arduino'''.

|-
|04:29
|This is the live setup of the connection, as shown in the circuit diagram.

|-
|04:34
|Now we will write the program in '''Arduino IDE''' for interfacing '''WiFi module '''and''' DHT11 Sensor.'''

|-
|04:40
|The files used in this tutorial are available in the '''Code files '''link on this tutorial page.

Please download and extract them. Make a copy and then use them while practising

|-
|04:52
| Open '''Arduino IDE'''.

|-
|04:56
| Connect your '''Arduino board''' to your PC.

|-
|04:59
|First, we need to know the name of the '''port''' to which '''Arduino''' is connected.

|-
|05:03
|In the menu bar, go to the '''Tools''' menu. Select '''port''' option.

|-
|05:08
|In my case, the '''port''' is '''ttyUSB0. '''Note down your '''port''' name.

|-
|05:16
|'''Windows''' users can skip the steps below as the '''port''' is detected automatically.

|-
|05:23
| Open the'''terminal''' by pressing'''Ctrl+Alt+t''' keys simultaneously.

|-
|05:30
|Type, '''sudo space chmod space a+rw space slash dev slash ttyUSB0'''

|-
|05:45
|In my case, the '''port''' name is '''ttyUSB0'''

|-
|05:50
|You have to specify your '''port''' name. Press '''Enter'''.

|-
|05:55
|Enter the '''password''' for the system and press '''Enter'''.

|-
|06:00
|The above '''command''' gives '''read-write permission''' to the '''USB port.'''

|-
|06:05
| Switch back to '''Arduino IDE.'''

|-
|06:08
|Next we will configure the '''ESP8266 module''' to communicate.

|-
|06:13
|Click on the '''File''' menu. Select '''Preferences'''.

|-
| 06:17
|New window will appear. In the '''Settings''' tab, go to the '''Additional Boards Manager URLs '''section.

|-
| 06:26
|Add this '''json URL'''. This will help to download '''ESP8266 WiFi module '''in''' Arduino IDE.'''

|-
| 06:35
|Click on the '''OK''' button at the bottom of the window.

|-
|06:39
|In the menu bar, click on the '''Tools''' menu and select '''Board'''. Then select the '''Board Manager''' option.

|-
| 06:47
|A new window will appear.

|-
| 06:49
|In the top right, we can see a '''search tab'''.

|-
| 06:53
|Here, type '''ESP8266''' and press '''Enter'''.

|-
| 06:58
|Select '''ESP8266 by ESP8266 Community'''.

|-
| 07:04
|In the version drop down box, select the '''latest version '''of the '''module'''.

|-
| 07:09
|Click on the '''Install '''button to install the '''module'''.

|-
| 07:13
|Installation will take few minutes to complete. Wait until it is installed successfully.

|-
|07:19
|The '''ESP8266 module''' is now installed in the '''Arduino IDE'''.

|-
| 07:24
|Click on the '''Close''' button at the right bottom of the window.

|-
| 07:28
| Next, we need to download a''' DHT sensor library''' to successfully run the code.

|-
| 07:33
|Click on the '''Sketch''' option. Select '''Include Library''' and then click on '''Manage Libraries'''.

|-
|07:41
|A new window will open.

|-
| 07:43
|Type '''Simple DHT''' on the '''search''' box.

|-
| 07:47
|Select the latest version and install the '''Simple DHT by Winlin'''.

|-
| 07:53
|Make sure that the above steps are done successfully before proceeding further.

|-
| 07:58
|Click on the '''Close''' button at the right bottom of the window.

|-
| 08:02
| Type the code as shown. We have included the '''DHT and ESP8266 libraries''' to the code.

|-
| 08:11
|Here, we have to enter our '''channel Write API key '''which we generated already.

|-
|08:19
|'''SSID''' is the '''name''' of the '''Wi-Fi module'''.

|-
| 08:22
|'''Pass''' is the '''passcode '''to join the '''Wi-Fi network'''.

|-
| 08:26
|You have to give a unique '''ssid''' and '''password'''. This is the '''Thingspeak api server''', where we will be uploading the '''data'''.

|-
|08:36
|Define the '''data pin''' of '''DHT11 sensor''' connected to '''ESP8266 module''' as shown here.

|-
| 08:44
|This '''code''' sets the '''DHT11 data pin'''.

|-
| 08:48
|This line of '''code''' creates a '''client''' to the specified '''IP address''' or '''server'''.

|-
|08:56
|Type this '''code''' in the '''void setup function'''.

|-
| 09:00
|Here, the '''baud rate''' is '''set''' to '''115200''' as the '''WiFi module''' works on '''115200 baud rate'''.

|-
| 09:10
|The connection is established with the '''ssid''' and '''password''' which we declared earlier.

|-
| 09:18
|We will establish a connection between '''ThingSpeak server '''and''' ESP8266 WiFi module. '''

|-
|09:24
|Type this '''code''' in the '''void loop function'''.

|-
| 09:28
|We have '''declared''' two '''variables''' for '''humidity''' and '''temperature'''. This will read the '''temperature''' and '''humidity''' values.

|-
| 09:37
|First check whether the connection is established between the '''ThingSpeak cloud''' and '''WiFi module.'''

|-
| 09:43
|Then the '''data''' including '''humidity, temperature''' and '''API keys''' will be sent to the '''server'''.

|-
| 09:50
|Based on the '''API key''' value, the '''ThingSpeak server''' automatically selects the '''channel'''.

|-
| 09:56
|This prints the '''data''' on the '''ThingSpeak server''' where the '''WiFi module''' will be connected.

|-
| 10:10
|We are done with the required coding.

|-
|10:13
|Let us '''compile''' and save the program.

|-
| 10:16
|Click on the''' Compile''' button to verify the''' program.'''

|-
| 10:21
|A pop up window will appear to save the current '''program'''.

|-
| 10:25
|Name the '''program''' as '''DHT11_IoT '''and click on the '''Save''' button to save the '''program'''.

|-
|10:35
|Now, before uploading the '''program''' we have to select the '''ESP8266 module'''.

|-
| 10:41
|Click on the '''Tools''' option and select '''board'''. Scroll down and select '''Generic ESP8266 Module'''.

|-
|10:49
|Next step is to select the '''Reset''' option.

|-
| 10:53
|In the menu bar, select '''Tools'''. Go to the '''Reset Method'''.

|-
| 10:58
|Select '''no dtr (aka ck).''' This will help to '''reset''' the '''wifi module''' manually.

|-
|11:07
|Next we need to '''set''' the '''built in LED''' of '''ESP8266 Module'''.

|-
|11:12
|Again select '''Tools'''. Go to the '''Builtin LED '''option. Set the''' Builtin LED''' to '''1.'''

|-
|11:20
|Now click on the '''Upload''' button to upload the current '''program''' on''' ESP8266-01. '''

|-
| 11:27
|We can see the '''program''' getting uploaded at the bottom of the screen.

|-
| 11:31
|Now the '''program''' has been successfully uploaded.

|-
|11:35
| After uploading the '''code''', disconnect the '''GPIO pin 0''' of '''ESP8266 module''' from ground.

|-
| 11:43
|First, the '''DHT11 module''' will get connected to the '''WiFi network'''.

|-
| 11:47
|It will read '''temperature''' and '''humidity''' data from the '''sensor'''.
After a few seconds, these values will be uploaded to '''ThingSpeak channel'''

|-
|11:59
|Let's see our output on our '''channel''' created on '''ThingSpeak'''. Go to the '''ThingSpeak''' page.

|-
| 12:07
|We can see a graph of '''temperature''' and '''humidity''' values from the '''DHT11 sensor'''.

|-
| 12:13
| Next, we will see how to export the current data of''' DHT11 sensor'''.

|-
|12:18
|Click on the '''Data Import/Export''' option on the '''GUI''' of your '''channel'''.

|-
|12:24
|Scroll down to see the '''Export''' option on the left side. Select the time zone as shown here.

|-
|12:32
|Now click on '''Download''' button. Click on the '''Save''' button.

|-
|12:38
|Let us open the downloaded '''CSV''' file.

|-
|12:41
|Go to the '''Downloads''' folder and open the '''CSV''' file.

|-
|12:46
|Click on the OK button at the bottom of the window.

|-
|12:50
|This is the '''temperature''' and '''humidity data''' that is collected from the '''sensor'''.

|-
|12:55
|With the '''ThingSpeak''' platform, it is possible to fetch the device reading in '''CSV''' file.

|-
| 13:01
| This is useful to help '''data analytics''' using '''R''' or '''Matlab'''.
Go through the '''R Spoken tutorials''' for '''data analytics'''.

|-
| 13:10
| This brings us to the end of this tutorial. Let us summarize.

|-
|13:15
|In this tutorial, we learnt to:

Establish connection between '''ESP8266-01''' and '''DHT11 sensor'''

Collect '''Temperature''' and '''Humidity''' values given by '''DHT11 Sensor'''

|-
|13:25
|Use '''ThingSpeak''' platform to store and visualize '''sensor''' readings and
Download the '''data''' in '''CSV''' file

|-
|13:39
|The video at the following link summarizes the Spoken Tutorial project. Please download and watch it.

|-
|13:45
|The''' Spoken Tutorial Project''' Team conducts workshops and gives certificates.
For more details, please write to us.

|-
|13:54
| Please post your timed queries in this forum.

|-
|13:58
| The Spoken Tutorial project is funded by MHRD, Government of India.

|-
| 14:04
|This tutorial has been contributed by FOSSEE and Spoken Tutorial Project, IIT Bombay.

|-
|14:10
|This is Saurabh signing off. Thanks for watching.
|-
|}

Arduino/C3/Introduction-to-IoT/English-timed

2021-06-17T06:50:02Z

Pratik kamble: Created page with " {| border =1 | '''Time''' | '''Narration''' |- | 00:01 | Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''Introduction to IOT.''' |- | 00:05 | In this tutorial, we will learn about: '..."

{| border =1
| '''Time'''
| '''Narration'''

|-
| 00:01
| Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''Introduction to IOT.'''

|-
| 00:05
| In this tutorial, we will learn about:

'''Internet of Things IOT'''

Working of '''IoT'''

'''ThingSpeak''' platform

|-
| 00:15
| To follow this tutorial, you should have a basic knowledge of:

'''Arduino'''

'''DHT11 Sensor''' and '''ESP8266-01 module'''

|-
|00:29
| If not, then go through the relevant '''Arduino''' spoken tutorials on this website.

|-
|00:35
| To record this tutorial, I am using:

'''Ubuntu Linux''' 16.04 OS

|-
| 00:42
| '''IoT''' is a network of physical '''devices''' with '''sensors''' and '''embedded software'''

These '''devices''' connect to the '''internet''' and exchange '''data'''.

|-
| 00:53
| One of the most common examples of '''IoT''' is “Smart Home”.

|-
|00:58
| It allows you to control '''devices''' connected to the '''internet''' from home or anywhere.

|-
| 01:04
| Smart '''supply chains''' help in real time tracking of goods while they are on the road.

|-
| 01:10
| '''Activity Trackers''' helps to capture heart rate pattern, calorie expenditure etc

|-
| 01:17
| '''IoT systems''' has 4 main components:

'''Sensor'''
'''Connectivity'''
'''Data Processing'''
'''User Interface'''

|-
| 01:30
| '''Sensors''' collect the '''data''' from the surrounding environment where the '''IoT system''' is kept.

|-
| 01:36
| The '''data''' collected by the '''sensors''' need to be sent to the '''end user'''.

|-
| 01:41
| We can use any '''wireless communications''' to send and receive '''data'''.

|-
| 01:46
| '''Data processing''' involves checking the '''format''' or type of '''data''' sent by the '''sensor'''.

|-
| 01:52
| The raw '''data''' which was collected by the '''sensor''' is delivered in synchronized form to the '''end user'''.

|-
| 02:01
| We will use '''ThinkSpeak''' platform to demonstrate the working of '''IoT'''.

|-
| 02:06
|'''ThingSpeak''' platform is free and open to all users.

It allows you to control and monitor your '''IoT devices'''.

It creates an '''IoT dashboard''' for '''data analyzation''' and '''visualization'''.

|-
| 02:22
| Let us go to '''Thingspeak''' webpage.

|-
| 02:25
| Open the '''web browser''' in your computer and go to this '''link'''.

|-
| 02:31
| First we have to create an '''account''' in '''Thingspeak''' before proceeding further.

|-
|02:37
| Below the '''Email textbox''', click on '''Create one''' option to create a '''user account''' for yourself.

|-
| 02:44
|In the '''Email address''' column, enter your working '''email ID'''.

|-
| 02:48
|In the '''Location''' section, select the country you are living in.

|-
| 02:52
|Enter your first and last name in respective columns. Click on the '''Continue''' button.

|-
| 02:59
| To use this application as a '''MATLAB''' platform, you must enter your work or '''organization email ID'''.

|-
| 03:07
|In this tutorial, we will not use the '''MATLAB''' platform.

|-
| 03:11
|Click on the checkbox for “'''Use this email for my MathWorks Account”.'''

|-
|03:17
|Then click on the '''Continue''' button.

|-
|03:20
|You will receive a message to verify your '''email ID''' for this website.

|-
| 03:25
|Open the '''email''' and click on''' Verify your email '''button.
It will show as “ '''Your profile was verified”.'''

|-
| 03:34
| Go back to your '''login page''' and click on '''Continue'''.

|-
| 03:38
|You will be asked to create a '''password''' for your '''ThingSpeak account'''.

|-
| 03:43
|Type your '''password''' and click on the '''Online Service Agreement ''' checkbox. Click on '''Continue'''.

|-
| 03:50
| A '''Sign-up Successful '''screen appears with your '''registered email ID'''. Click on the '''OK''' button.

|-
| 03:58
| It will finally ask the intent of using '''ThingSpeak''' platform.

|-
| 04:03
|Select '''Personal, non commercial projects '''and click on the '''OK''' button.

|-
| 04:09
|Close the current tab and open the following link in a new tab.

|-
| 04:15
| '''Login''' to your '''ThingSpeak account''' with your '''registered email ID''' and '''password'''. Click on the '''New Channel''' button.

|-
| 04:24
| I will give the '''channel''' name as '''DHT11_IoT'''.

|-
| 04:31
|In the '''Description''' field, I will give the description as '''IoT, DHT11, ESP8266-01.'''

|-
| 04:42
|It makes it easy for others to find your '''channel''' on '''ThingSpeak server''' if you wish to '''publish''' it.

|-
| 04:49
|As we want to save temperature and humidity data, type '''Temperature''' in '''Field 1'''

|-
| 04:56
|Click on the '''Field 2''' checkbox and type '''Humidity'''.

|-
| 05:01
|Now scroll down to the bottom of the page. Click on the '''Show Status '''check box. Now click on the '''Save Channel''' button.

|-
| 05:11
|This is how the '''graph outline''' will look once the '''channel''' is created.

|-
| 05:16
| Click on the '''API Keys''' option on the top menu.

|-
| 05:21
|Once the '''channel''' is created, it will generate a '''Write API key''' and '''Read API key'''.

|-
| 05:28
|'''API key''' is called '''Application Programming Interface key'''.

|-
| 05:32
|These are '''16 digit code''' used for '''programming''' purposes.

|-
| 05:37
| '''Write API''' key''' is needed when you want to store '''data''' in the '''channel'''.

|-
| 05:43
|'''Read API key''' is needed when you want to retrieve the '''data''' already stored in the '''channel'''.

|-
| 05:49
| From the '''generated API keys''', we will need the''' Write API key''' while writing the code.

|-
| 05:56
|Copy the '''Write API key''' and paste it in any '''text editor''' like '''Notepad'''. We will require this key for future use.

|-
| 06:06
|In the next tutorial, we will see how to

Collect temperature and humidity values given by '''DHT11 Sensor'''

|-
| 06:15
|Store and visualize '''sensor''' readings in the '''ThingSpeak''' platform

Download the '''data''' in '''CSV''' file from the '''ThingSpeak''' platform

|-
| 06:26
| With this we come to the end of this tutorial. Let us summarize.

|-
| 06:31
| In this tutorial, we learnt :

'''Internet of Things'''

Working of '''IoT'''

'''ThingSpeak''' platform

|-
| 06:42
| The video at the following link summarizes the Spoken Tutorial project. Please download and watch it.

|-
| 06:50
| The''' Spoken Tutorial Project''' Team conducts workshops and gives certificates. For more details, please write to us.

|-
| 06:59
| Please post your timed queries in this forum.

|-
| 07:03
| The Spoken Tutorial project is funded by MHRD, Government of India.

|-
| 07:09
| This tutorial has been contributed by FOSSEE and Spoken Tutorial Project, IIT Bombay. Thank you for watching.

|}

Apps-On-Physics/C3/Wheatstone's-Bridge-and-Potentiometer/English-timed

2021-06-14T09:08:20Z

Pratik kamble: Created page with "{|border=1 |- || '''Time''' || '''Narration''' |- |00:01 |Welcome to the spoken tutorial on '''Wheatstone Bridge''' and '''Potentiometer.''' |- |00:07 |At the end of this tu..."

{|border=1
|-
|| '''Time'''
|| '''Narration'''

|-
|00:01
|Welcome to the spoken tutorial on '''Wheatstone Bridge''' and '''Potentiometer.'''

|-
|00:07
|At the end of this tutorial you will be able to,

Simulate the working of '''wheatstone bridge'''.

Solve a numerical based on '''wheatstone bridge'''.

|-
|00:18
|Simulate the working of '''potentiometer'''.

Solve a numerical based on '''potentiometer'''.

|-
|00:27
| Here I am using,

Ubuntu Linux OS version 16.04

Firefox Web Browser version 62.0.3

|-
|00:40
| To follow this tutorial, learner should be familiar with '''Apps on Physics'''.

For the Pre-requisites tutorials please visit this site.

|-
|00:51
|| In this tutorial we will use,

'''Wheatstone's Bridge''' and ''' Potentiometer Apps'''.

|-
|00:59
| To open the App, right-click on '''wheatstonebridge_en.htm''' file.

Select '''Open with Firefox Web Browser''' option.

|-
|01:12
|| The '''App''' opens in the browser.

|-
|01:15
|| '''Wheatstone’s bridge''' is a simple circuit for measuring the unknown resistance.

|-
|01:21
|| '''Meter bridge''' uses the same principle for practical purpose. First we will learn about the circuit connections.

|-
|01:31
|| The circuit shows a simple series-parallel arrangement of resistances.

|-
|01:37
|| The resistances are connected between the voltage supply and ground.

|-
|01:43
| A '''galvanometer''' is connected between the two parallel branches of resistances.

|-
|01:49
| '''Galvanometer''' is a device to detect small changes in current in the circuit.

|-
|01:56
| The negative terminal of the '''galvanometer''' is connected to the wire of 1 cm.

|-
|02:03
|The measurement of the wire is shown by the scale. We can drag the sliding contact along the wire.

|-
|02:11
| In the green panel the '''Sliding resistor''' is that of the wire.

|-
|02:17
|We can vary the '''Sliding resistor''' from 1 '''ohm''' to 1000 '''ohms'''.

|-
|02:23
| In the green panel we can also edit the values of '''Comparable resistor .''' It is the standard resistance of the circuit.

|-
|02:33
| '''Voltage of the power supply''' can take values from 1 to 10 '''Volts'''.

|-
|02:39
|We can also change the '''Resistance of the meter.'''

|-
|02:43
|'''Resistance of the meter ''' depends on the comparable resistor.

|-
|02:48
| At the bottom of control panel there are two check boxes.
'''Indicate voltage ''' and '''Indicate amperage'''

|-
|02:56
| Select both the check-boxes.

|-
|03:00
|Observe that the values of voltage and current are shown in the circuit.

|-
|03:06
| We can calculate the unknown resistance when the '''bridge''' is balanced.

|-
|03:12
| Let us now see how to balance the '''bridge'''.

|-
|03:16
| Press '''F5''' key on the keyboard to restart the '''App'''.

|-
|03:20
| Click on '''Indicate voltage '''and''' Indicate amperage''' check-boxes.

|-
|03:26
|To balance the '''bridge''', drag the sliding contact to get a zero '''amperage'''.

|-
|03:32
| We can also drag the slider in the green panel to change the '''amperage'''.

|-
|03:38
| Observe the value of voltage and current at each resistance.

|-
|03:44
|The values are balanced in series-parallel arrangement of resistances.

|-
|03:51
| At the point when '''amperage''' is zero, we can calculate the unknown resistance.

|-
|03:57
|At the bottom of the yellow panel, a message appears.
It reads “'''Now the resistance can be calculated”.'''

|-
|04:06
| '''Calculate resistance''' button is now active.

|-
|04:10
| Click on the '''Calculate resistance ''' button.

|-
|04:13
| In the white coloured box the value of unknown resistance is displayed.

|-
|04:19
| The measured value for '''Rx''' is 690 '''ohms'''. Here the value may change for you.

|-
|04:28
| Click on the '''New measurement '''button '''for measuring the next set of values'''.

|-
|04:34
| Again drag the sliding contact to zero.

|-
|04:38
| Click on '''Calculate resistance''' button.

|-
|04:41
| Observe the change in the value of unknown resistance.

|-
|04:44
|This is because, '''galvanometer''' is a sensitive device.

|-
|04:50
|It will change the value every time when we click on the '''New measurement''' button.

|-
|04:56
| Press '''F5''' key on the keyboard to restart the '''App'''.

|-
|05:01
| Let us change the '''Comparable resistor''' to 1000 '''ohms'''.

|-
|05:06
| Observe that '''Resistance of the meter''' changes to 10 '''ohms'''.

|-
|05:11
| Now let us calculate the unknown resistance.

|-
|05:15
| The formula to calculate the unknown resistance is,

'''Rx ={R2/R1} x R3'''

|-
|05:25
| '''R1''' and '''R2''' are '''sliding resistance'''. '''R3''' is the '''comparable resistance'''.

|-
|05:33
| Change the '''Comparable resistance''' to 800 '''ohms ''' and press '''Enter'''.

|-
|05:39
| Again get the zero '''amperage''' by dragging the slider.

|-
|05:44
| Now in the formula substitute value of '''R1''' as 117.5 ohms, '''R2''' as 82.5 ohms and '''R3''' as 800 ohms.

|-
|05:57
| Here the calculated value of unknown resistance in 561.7 '''ohms'''.

|-
|06:05
| Here you can get a different value as the '''galvanometer''' is sensitive.

|-
|06:11
| Now let us compare with the value shown in the '''App'''.

|-
|06:15
| Click on the '''Calculate resistance '''button. Observe that the calculated value is comparable with the measured value.

|-
|06:24
| As an assignment solve this numerical.

|-
|06:29
| Let us explore the '''Potentiometer''' '''App'''.

|-
|06:33
| Follow the same steps to open the '''App'''.

|-
|06:37
| The interface opens with the '''potentiometer''' circuit.

|-
|06:42
| The '''potentiometer''' is a voltage divider used for measuring voltage. It is also used to control the flow of current.

|-
|06:53
| The circuit has three resistors.

|-
|06:56
| Here two resistors are connected in series and used as a '''sliding resistor'''.

|-
|07:03
| The third resistor is the '''Resistance of the '''appliance.'''

|-
|07:08
| The voltmeter is connected in parallel to the resistance.

|-
|07:13
| The voltmeter shows the output voltage of the circuit.

|-
|07:18
| A scale is provided to take the measurement of voltage at that particular point.

|-
|07:25
| The reading on scale is from 0.0 cm to 1.0 cm.

|-
|07:32
| Drag the '''Position of the sliding contact''' to 0.4 cm.

|-
|07:38
| The value of voltage at this point is 1.87 V(Volts).

|-
|07:44
| Now increase the '''Resistance of the appliance '''to 1000 '''ohms'''.

|-
|07:49
| Observe that the value of output voltage increased to 1.93 '''volts'''.

|-
|07:56
|If we increase the value of '''potentiometer''' resistance, output voltage increases.

|-
|08:03
| We can also calculate the voltage using the '''Ohm’s Law.'''

|-
|08:08
| Check the check-box '''Indicate amperage'''.

|-
|08:12
| Note that resistance till the point 0.4 cm is 39.5 '''ohms'''.

|-
|08:20
| So we can calculate voltage using formula

'''V=IR'''

|-
|08:27
|I have already substituted the values of current and resistance from the '''App'''.

|-
|08:34
|The value for voltage is almost same as that for measured value.

|-
|08:40
| The graph is plotted for '''Voltage v/s length''' of the scale.

|-
|08:45
| The blue point shows the value of voltage at point 0.4 '''cm'''.

|-
|08:52
| Change the value of '''Sliding resistor''' to 1000 '''ohms''' and press '''Enter'''.

|-
|08:59
| Observe that the value of current has decreased to 0.004 A.

|-
|09:07
| So here we can say that '''potentiometer''' controls the flow of current.

|-
|09:13
| Let us make a tabular column to study a graph of '''voltage v/s length'''.

|-
|09:19
| Press '''F5''' key on the keyboard to restart '''App'''.

|-
|09:24
| Change the value of '''Voltage of the power supply''' to 10 '''V''' and press '''Enter'''.

|-
|09:31
| Drag the '''sliding contact''' to 0.0 cm. The resistance and voltage at this point are zero.

|-
|09:41
| Drag the '''sliding contact''' to 0.1 '''cm'''. Click on the '''Indicate amperage''' check box.

|-
|09:50
| Tabulate the values of '''length''', '''current''' and '''voltage''' in the tabular column.

|-
|09:56
| Drag sliding contact to 0.2 cm and tabulate the values in the table.

|-
|10:04
|Similarly take four more values and enter these values in the table.

|-
|10:10
| Here is the completed table.

|-
|10:13
|Observe that if length increases the output voltage also increases.

|-
|10:19
|Hence the graph is linear.

|-
|10:23
| As an assignment

|-
|10:25
|Change the values of resistance of the appliance to 500 '''ohms''', 700 '''ohms''' and 800 '''ohms'''.

Find the output voltage.

|-
| 10:38
|Let us summarise

|-
|10:40
|In this tutorial we have,

Simulated the working of '''wheatstone bridge'''.

Solved a numerical based on '''wheatstone bridge'''.

Simulated the working of '''potentiometer'''

Solved numerical based on '''potentiometer'''

|-
|10:59
|These Apps were created by Walter-fendt and his team.

|-
|11:04
| The video at the following link summarizes the Spoken Tutorial project. Please download and watch it.

|-
|11:12
| The '''Spoken Tutorial Project''' team,conducts workshops gives certificates. For more details, please write to us.

|-
|11:22
| Please post your timed queries in this forum.

|-
|11:26
| Spoken Tutorial Project is funded by MHRD, Government of India.

|-
|11:32
| This is Himanshi Karwanje from IIT-Bombay. Thank you for joining.
|-
|}

LibreOffice-Suite-Writer-6.3/C4/Using-Track-changes/English

2020-11-13T09:12:18Z

Pratik kamble:

Title: Using Track Changes

Author: Pratik Kamble

Novice Reviewer: Nikita Misal and Pooja Moolya

Domain Reviewer: Praveen and Nancy

Keywords: Peer review, Edit document, Add comment, Reject Track change, Accept Track changes, Record Track change, Show Record Track changes

{| border=1
|-
| align=center| Visual Cue
| align=center| Narration
|-
|| Slide - '''Title'''

|| Welcome to the spoken tutorial on''' Using Track Changes '''in '''Writer.'''
|-
|| Slide - '''Learning objective'''
|| In this tutorial, we will learn how to:

* '''Peer review''' a '''document '''using '''Track changes '''option
* '''Edit''' a '''document''' using '''Record changes''' option and
* Add '''comments''' in a '''document'''

|-
|| Slide - '''System Requirements'''
|| This tutorial is recorded using

* '''Ubuntu linux OS '''version '''18.04 '''and
* '''LibreOffice Suite '''version '''6.3.5'''

|-
|| Slide - '''Track changes'''
||
* '''Track changes''' helps the '''reviewer''' to keep track of the changes
* This feature is especially important for those who use '''Writer''' in workgroups.
* It helps the '''reviewer''' to give '''comments'''

|-
|| Slide''': Code files'''
||
* The files used in this tutorial have been provided to you in the''' Code files''' link on this tutorial page.
* Pls download and extract the file.
* Make a copy and then use it for practising.

|-"
|| Open '''Seven-reasons-to-adopt-FOSS.odt'''
|| Open the file '''Seven-reasons-to-adopt-FOSS.odt '''which you have downloaded from '''Code Files '''link.
|-
|| Click on Icon '''Show track changes functions'''

Point to '''Changes toolbar '''
|| Click on the''' Show Track Changes Functions '''icon''' '''in''' '''the '''Standard toolbar'''.

The '''Track''' '''changes toolbar''' appears at the bottom of the '''Writer''' window.
|-
|| Point to '''Show Track Changes''' and '''Record Track Changes '''
|| Make sure that the '''Show Track Changes''' and

'''Record Track Changes''' icons are enabled.

If not, then enable these by clicking on them.
|-"
|| Only Narration

Click on '''Edit '''>> '''Track Changes''' >> '''Record''' (Only Highlight)
|| Let us see another way to enable these options.

Go to the '''Edit''' '''menu''' select '''Track''' '''Changes '''from''' '''the''' '''list

And check the '''Record '''and '''Show '''options.
|-"
|| Only Narration
|| Now let’s type a new text in our '''document'''.
|-"
|| Cursor next to point 2

Type '''“Linux is a virus resistant operating system since each user has a distinct data space and cannot directly access the program files”. '''
|| Keep cursor next to the point 2 and type-

'''“Linux is a virus resistant operating system since each user has a distinct data space and cannot directly access the program files”. '''
|-"
|| Press Enter
|| Then press '''Enter.'''
|-"
|| Point to point no 3
|| We can see that point number 2 has become a new point, that is number 3.
|-"
|| Point to new line
|| Note that the newly added text is in a different color.
|-"
|| Cursor on new line
|| Hover the cursor on the newly added text.

A message is displayed -''' “Inserted: Unknown Author”,''' followed by date and time of insertion.
|-"
|| Only Narration
|| Let us replace '''Unknown author''' with our name.
|-"
|| Tools >> options
|| For that, click on the '''Tools menu''' in the '''menu bar''' and select '''Options.'''
|-"
|| Point to''' Options-Libreoffice-User Data '''
|| '''Options '''dialog box opens up.
|-"
|| Select User Data from list under LibreOffice

Type '''First/last name/initials'''
|| On the left, under '''LibreOffice, '''select '''User Data '''option from the list.

In the '''Address '''section,''' '''type your name in the '''First/last name/initials''' field, as shown.

Notice that our '''initials''' are auto-filled.
|-"
|| Click on '''Apply''' and '''Ok''' button
|| Click on the '''Apply''' button and then on the '''OK''' button at the bottom.
|-"
|| Click on File >> Properties
|| Now click on the '''File menu''' in the '''menu bar '''and select '''Properties.'''
|-"
|| Point to '''Properties'''
|| '''Properties''' dialog box opens up.
|-"
|| Click on Reset Properties button
|| In the '''General''' tab, click on the '''Reset''' '''properties''' button.
|-"
|| Point to created

|| Notice that in the created section in the center of the dialog box, your name appears.
|-"
|| Click on '''OK '''button
|| Click on the '''OK''' button to close the dialog box.
|-"
|| Only Narration
|| Now onwards, the person making the '''comment''' can easily be identified in the '''document'''.
|-"
|| Cursor on first point
|| Let us delete the second sentence from point no. 1 -

'''“It can be installed on all computers without restriction or needing to pay license fees to vendors'''”.
|-"
|| Point to deletion line
|| Note that the deletion does not actually remove''' '''the line.

But marks it as a line suggested for deletion.
|-"
|| Cursor on deleted line
|| Hover the cursor on the deleted line.

We see a message '''Deleted''' followed by the updated '''username''', with date and time.
|-"
|| Only Narration
|| Using this feature, we can modify the '''document''' by adding or deleting changes.
|-"
|| Press''' Ctrl + S, '''Click on the''' X '''icon
|| Save the changes and close the file.
|-"
|| Slide: More about Track Changes
|| Next, let us learn more about '''Track Changes.'''

* More than one person can edit the same '''document.'''
* '''LibreOffice Writer''' will show each edit in different colors.
* This will help the readers to distinguish one '''reviewer’s''' work from the other.

|-"
|| Open the document '''Government-support-for-FOSS-in-India.odt '''
|| Now open the file '''Government-support-for-FOSS-in-India.odt'''

which you have downloaded from '''Code Files '''link'''.'''
|-"
|| Point to deleted lines
|| In this '''document,''' we can see several additions and deletions have been done.
|-"
|| Cursor on Deleted text in Point 1
|| Hover '''cursor''' on the deleted text in point 1.

It displays the deletion done by '''Guru.'''
|-"
|| Cursor at the last point and Press Enter
|| Keep the '''cursor''' at the end of the last point and press '''Enter'''.
|-"
|| Type “CDAC, NIC, NRC-FOSS are institutions of Government of India which develop and promote FOSS”.
|| Then type the following text-

'''“CDAC, NIC, NRC-FOSS are institutions of Government of India which develop and promote FOSS'''. “
|-"
|| Point to different color
|| We can see the color of this text is different from the color edited by '''Guru.'''
|-"
|| Cursor on newly type text
|| Hover the '''cursor''' on the newly typed text.

It shows your name along with the date and time.
|-"
|| Only Narration

Only Narration
|| This indicates that more than one person can edit the same '''document.'''

Note - This is possible only if the '''author''' gives '''editing rights''' to other readers.
|-"
|| Only Narration
|| Now we will learn how the '''author''' can accept or reject changes made by another '''reviewer'''.
|-"
|| Only Narration
|| Let us assume, I am the '''author''' and I will accept or reject the '''edits''' made by '''Guru.'''
|-"
|| Cursor on word '''Reason '''

Right Click on mouse and select Accept change option (Only highlight)

Click on '''Accept Track Change icon'''

|| In point no 2, click on the deleted text '''reasons'''.

Right-click the mouse and select the '''Accept Change''' option.

Another way is to click on''' Accept Track Change''' icon in the '''Track Changes toolbar '''

|-"
|| Point towards deleted word reasons
|| The text “'''reasons'''” gets deleted as per the change suggested by the '''reviewer.'''
|-"

|| Cursor on text needs

Click on '''Accept Track Change '''icon
|| On the same line, click the on the text '''needs.'''

Again click on the '''Accept Track Change '''icon in the '''Track Changes toolbar.'''
|-"
|| Point to text '''needs'''
|| Observe that the text '''needs''' gets included, as per the change suggested by the '''reviewer'''.
|-"
|| Only Narration
|| Using this feature, '''edits''' suggested by '''reviewers'''

can be accepted by the '''author'''.
|-"
|| Cursor on Point 1 deleted text

Click on '''Reject Track change icon'''
|| In point no 1, click on the deleted text.

Then click on the '''Reject Track change '''icon in the '''Track''' '''Changes''' '''toolbar.'''
|-"
|| Point to text

|| Observe that the text becomes normal.

The suggestions given by the '''reviewer''' was to delete the text.

But that suggestion has been '''rejected''' by the '''author.'''
|-"
|| Cursor on point no 5
|| Move the cursor to point no 5.
|-"
|| Select entire text

Click '''Reject Track Change '''icon
|| Select the entire text and click on the '''Reject Track Change '''icon

in the '''Track''' '''Changes''' '''toolbar.'''
|-"
|| Cursor on point 4 (Only Highlight)

Right click on mouse >> select Reject Change on
|| We can also reject a change by right-clicking on the mouse''' '''and''' '''selecting''' Reject change. '''
|-"
|| Only Narration
|| This deletes the entire text inserted by the '''reviewer.'''
|-"
|| Click on '''Show Track Changes''' and '''Record Track Changes '''
|| Disable the '''Show Track Changes''' and '''Record Track Changes''' icons by clicking on them.
|-"
|| Only Narration
|| Move the cursor to point no 5
|-"
|| Press '''Backspace''' key

|| Now delete the blank '''space''' by pressing the '''Backspace''' key on the keyboard.
|-"
|| Only Narration
|| Now onwards any further editing will not be marked separately.
|-"
|| Press Ctrl + S
|| Pause the tutorial.

Save''' '''the file after accepting or rejecting changes

To incorporate all the suggestions.

|-"
|| Only Narration
|| Another feature in '''Writer''' is inserting and deleting a '''comment.'''

It helps users to exchange ideas and suggestions, which are important.
|-"
|| Only Narration
|| In our '''document''', we will add a '''comment''' to the word '''e-governance'''.
|-"
|| Select word '''e-governance''' right click and select '''comment'''
|| In point no. 3, select the word '''e-governance.'''

Then right-click and select the '''Comment''' option.
|-"
|| Point to '''Insert Comment''' icon in '''Track''' '''Changes''' toolbar
|| We can also add '''comments'''

by clicking on the '''Insert Comment''' icon in the '''Track''' '''Changes''' toolbar.
|-"
|| Point to comment box
|| A '''comment''' box appears on the right side of the '''document.'''
|-"
|| Type “ What is e-governance?” in the comment box
|| In the '''comment''' box, type the '''comment''' as “'''What is e-governance?”'''
|-"
|| Point to commenters name date and time
|| We can see the '''commenter’s''' name along with date and time.
|-"
|| Only Narration
|| Next, we will see how one can reply to a '''comment'''.
|-"
|| Cursor on Comment box

Click on Insert comment
|| Once again keep the cursor on the '''comment''' box.

Then click on the '''Insert''' '''Comment''' icon located in the '''Standard''' '''toolbar.'''
|-"
|| Point to newly added reply comment box
|| We can see a new '''Reply''' '''Comment''' box gets added to our document.
|-"
|| Type “It means electronic governance”
|| Inside the '''reply''' '''comment''' box type '''“It means electronic governance'''”
|-"
|| Only narration
|| Let us delete the newly added '''comment “It means''' '''electronic governance'''”
|-"
|| Click on down arrow >> select '''Delete comment'''
|| Click on the down-arrow icon in the '''Reply''' '''comment''' box and select '''Delete comment '''option.
|-"
|| Delete the comment What is e governance
|| Repeat the same steps to delete the comment “'''What is e governance ?” '''
|-"
|| Point to word e-governance
|| We see that both the '''comments''' are now deleted.

And also the word is no more highlighted.
|-"
|| Click on Record Track change icon in the track changes toolbar
|| To delete another person’s comments, first disable the '''Record Track Change''' icon.

And then press '''Delete''' key on the keyboard.
|-"
|| Press''' Ctrl + S, '''Click on the''' X ''' icon
|| Save and close the file.
|-"
|| Only Narration
|| This brings us to the end of this tutorial.

Let us summarise.
|-"
|| Slide: '''Summary'''

|| In this tutorial, we learnt how to
* '''Peer review''' a '''document''' using '''Track changes '''option
* Edit a '''document''' using '''Record changes''' option
* Add '''comments''' in a '''document'''

|-"
|| Slide: '''Assignment'''
|| As an assignment:

* Open''' Seven-Reason-to-adopt-FOSS.odt '''file
* Delete and correct the word '''available''' using '''Record changes'''
* Use '''Accept''' '''change''' option to accept the changes

|-"
|| Slide: '''About spoken tutorial project'''
|| The video at the following link summarises the spoken tutorial project.

Please download and watch it.
|-"
|| Slide: '''Spoken Tutorial workshops'''
|| We conduct workshops using '''spoken tutorials '''and give certificates.

For more details, Please contact us.
|-"
|| Slide: '''Forums Specific Questions'''
|| Please post your timed queries in this forum.
|-"
|| Slide: '''Acknowledgment'''
|| The''' Spoken Tutorial '''project is funded by '''MHRD''' Govt of India.
|-"
|| Slide: '''Thank you'''
|| This tutorial was originally contributed by IT for Change in 2012.

This is Pratik Kamble along with the Spoken Tutorial team from''' IIT Bombay''' signing off.

Thank you for watching.
|-
|}

LibreOffice-Suite-Writer-6.3/C4/Using-Track-changes/English

2020-11-13T09:11:57Z

Pratik kamble:

Title: Using Track Changes

Author: Pratik Kamble

Novice Reviewer: Nikita Misal and Pooja Moolya

Domain Reviewer: Praveen and Nancy

Keywords: Peer review, Edit document, Add comment, Reject Track change, Accept Track changes, Record Track change, Show Record Track changes

{| border=1
|-
| align=center| Visual Cue
| align=center| Narration
|-
|| Slide - '''Title'''

|| Welcome to the spoken tutorial on''' Using Track Changes '''in '''Writer.'''
|-
|| Slide - '''Learning objective'''
|| In this tutorial, we will learn how to:

* '''Peer review''' a '''document '''using '''Track changes '''option
* '''Edit''' a '''document''' using '''Record changes''' option and
* Add '''comments''' in a '''document'''

|-
|| Slide - '''System Requirements'''
|| This tutorial is recorded using

* '''Ubuntu linux OS '''version '''18.04 '''and
* '''LibreOffice Suite '''version '''6.3.5'''

|-
|| Slide - '''Track changes'''
||
* '''Track changes''' helps the '''reviewer''' to keep track of the changes
* This feature is especially important for those who use '''Writer''' in workgroups.
* It helps the '''reviewer''' to give '''comments'''

|-
|| Slide''': Code files'''
||
* The files used in this tutorial have been provided to you in the''' Code files''' link on this tutorial page.
* Pls download and extract the file.
* Make a copy and then use it for practising.

|-"
|| Open '''Seven-reasons-to-adopt-FOSS.odt'''
|| Open the file '''Seven-reasons-to-adopt-FOSS.odt '''which you have downloaded from '''Code Files '''link.
|-
|| Click on Icon '''Show track changes functions'''

Point to '''Changes toolbar '''
|| Click on the''' Show Track Changes Functions '''icon''' '''in''' '''the '''Standard toolbar'''.

The '''Track''' '''changes toolbar''' appears at the bottom of the '''Writer''' window.
|-
|| Point to '''Show Track Changes''' and '''Record Track Changes '''
|| Make sure that the '''Show Track Changes''' and

'''Record Track Changes''' icons are enabled.

If not, then enable these by clicking on them.
|-"
|| Only Narration

Click on '''Edit '''>> '''Track Changes''' >> '''Record''' (Only Highlight)
|| Let us see another way to enable these options.

Go to the '''Edit''' '''menu''' select '''Track''' '''Changes '''from''' '''the''' '''list

And check the '''Record '''and '''Show '''options.
|-"
|| Only Narration
|| Now let’s type a new text in our '''document'''.
|-"
|| Cursor next to point 2

Type '''“Linux is a virus resistant operating system since each user has a distinct data space and cannot directly access the program files”. '''
|| Keep cursor next to the point 2 and type-

'''“Linux is a virus resistant operating system since each user has a distinct data space and cannot directly access the program files”. '''
|-"
|| Press Enter
|| Then press '''Enter.'''
|-"
|| Point to point no 3
|| We can see that point number 2 has become a new point, that is number 3.
|-"
|| Point to new line
|| Note that the newly added text is in a different color.
|-"
|| Cursor on new line
|| Hover the cursor on the newly added text.

A message is displayed -''' “Inserted: Unknown Author”,''' followed by date and time of insertion.
|-"
|| Only Narration
|| Let us replace '''Unknown author''' with our name.
|-"
|| Tools >> options
|| For that, click on the '''Tools menu''' in the '''menu bar''' and select '''Options.'''
|-"
|| Point to''' Options-Libreoffice-User Data '''
|| '''Options '''dialog box opens up.
|-"
|| Select User Data from list under LibreOffice

Type '''First/last name/initials'''
|| On the left, under '''LibreOffice, '''select '''User Data '''option from the list.

In the '''Address '''section,''' '''type your name in the '''First/last name/initials''' field, as shown.

Notice that our '''initials''' are auto-filled.
|-"
|| Click on '''Apply''' and '''Ok''' button
|| Click on the '''Apply''' button and then on the '''OK''' button at the bottom.
|-"
|| Click on File >> Properties
|| Now click on the '''File menu''' in the '''menu bar '''and select '''Properties.'''
|-"
|| Point to '''Properties'''
|| '''Properties''' dialog box opens up.
|-"
|| Click on Reset Properties button
|| In the '''General''' tab, click on the '''Reset''' '''properties''' button.
|-"
|| Point to created

|| Notice that in the created section in the center of the dialog box, your name appears.
|-"
|| Click on '''OK '''button
|| Click on the '''OK''' button to close the dialog box.
|-"
|| Only Narration
|| Now onwards, the person making the '''comment''' can easily be identified in the '''document'''.
|-"
|| Cursor on first point
|| Let us delete the second sentence from point no. 1 -

'''“It can be installed on all computers without restriction or needing to pay license fees to vendors'''”.
|-"
|| Point to deletion line
|| Note that the deletion does not actually remove''' '''the line.

But marks it as a line suggested for deletion.
|-"
|| Cursor on deleted line
|| Hover the cursor on the deleted line.

We see a message '''Deleted''' followed by the updated '''username''', with date and time.
|-"
|| Only Narration
|| Using this feature, we can modify the '''document''' by adding or deleting changes.
|-"
|| Press''' Ctrl + S, '''Click on the''' X '''icon
|| Save the changes and close the file.
|-"
|| Slide: More about Track Changes
|| Next, let us learn more about '''Track Changes.'''

* More than one person can edit the same '''document.'''
* '''LibreOffice Writer''' will show each edit in different colors.
* This will help the readers to distinguish one '''reviewer’s''' work from the other.

|-"
|| Open the document '''Government-support-for-FOSS-in-India.odt '''
|| Now open the file '''Government-support-for-FOSS-in-India.odt'''

which you have downloaded from '''Code Files '''link'''.'''
|-"
|| Point to deleted lines
|| In this '''document,''' we can see several additions and deletions have been done.
|-"
|| Cursor on Deleted text in Point 1
|| Hover '''cursor''' on the deleted text in point 1.

It displays the deletion done by '''Guru.'''
|-"
|| Cursor at the last point and Press Enter
|| Keep the '''cursor''' at the end of the last point and press '''Enter'''.
|-"
|| Type “CDAC, NIC, NRC-FOSS are institutions of Government of India which develop and promote FOSS”.
|| Then type the following text-

'''“CDAC, NIC, NRC-FOSS are institutions of Government of India which develop and promote FOSS'''. “
|-"
|| Point to different color
|| We can see the color of this text is different from the color edited by '''Guru.'''
|-"
|| Cursor on newly type text
|| Hover the '''cursor''' on the newly typed text.

It shows your name along with the date and time.
|-"
|| Only Narration

Only Narration
|| This indicates that more than one person can edit the same '''document.'''

Note - This is possible only if the '''author''' gives '''editing rights''' to other readers.
|-"
|| Only Narration
|| Now we will learn how the '''author''' can accept or reject changes made by another '''reviewer'''.
|-"
|| Only Narration
|| Let us assume, I am the '''author''' and I will accept or reject the '''edits''' made by '''Guru.'''
|-"
|| Cursor on word '''Reason '''

Right Click on mouse and select Accept change option (Only highlight)

Click on '''Accept Track Change icon'''

|| In point no 2, click on the deleted text '''reasons'''.

Right-click the mouse and select the '''Accept Change''' option.

Another way is to click on''' Accept Track Change''' icon in the '''Track Changes toolbar '''

|-"
|| Point towards deleted word reasons
|| The text “'''reasons'''” gets deleted as per the change suggested by the '''reviewer.'''
|-"

|| Cursor on text needs

Click on '''Accept Track Change '''icon
|| On the same line, click the on the text '''needs.'''

Again click on the '''Accept Track Change '''icon in the '''Track Changes toolbar.'''
|-"
|| Point to text '''needs'''
|| Observe that the text '''needs''' gets included, as per the change suggested by the '''reviewer'''.
|-"
|| Only Narration
|| Using this feature, '''edits''' suggested by '''reviewers'''

can be accepted by the '''author'''.
|-"
|| Cursor on Point 1 deleted text

Click on '''Reject Track change icon'''
|| In point no 1, click on the deleted text.

Then click on the '''Reject Track change '''icon in the '''Track''' '''Changes''' '''toolbar.'''
|-"
|| Point to text

|| Observe that the text becomes normal.

The suggestions given by the '''reviewer''' was to delete the text.

But that suggestion has been '''rejected''' by the '''author.'''
|-"
|| Cursor on point no 5
|| Move the cursor to point no 5.
|-"
|| Select entire text

Click '''Reject Track Change '''icon
|| Select the entire text and click on the '''Reject Track Change '''icon

in the '''Track''' '''Changes''' '''toolbar.'''
|-"
|| Cursor on point 4 (Only Highlight)

Right click on mouse >> select Reject Change on
|| We can also reject a change by right-clicking on the mouse''' '''and''' '''selecting''' Reject change. '''
|-"
|| Only Narration
|| This deletes the entire text inserted by the '''reviewer.'''
|-"
|| Click on '''Show Track Changes''' and '''Record Track Changes '''
|| Disable the '''Show Track Changes''' and '''Record Track Changes''' icons by clicking on them.
|-"
|| Only Narration
|| Move the cursor to point no 5
|-"
|| Press '''Backspace''' key

|| Now delete the blank '''space''' by pressing the '''Backspace''' key on the keyboard.
|-"
|| Only Narration
|| Now onwards any further editing will not be marked separately.
|-"
|| Press Ctrl + S
|| Pause the tutorial.

Save''' '''the file after accepting or rejecting changes

To incorporate all the suggestions.

|-"
|| Only Narration
|| Another feature in '''Writer''' is inserting and deleting a '''comment.'''

It helps users to exchange ideas and suggestions, which are important.
|-"
|| Only Narration
|| In our '''document''', we will add a '''comment''' to the word '''e-governance'''.
|-"
|| Select word '''e-governance''' right click and select '''comment'''
|| In point no. 3, select the word '''e-governance.'''

Then right-click and select the '''Comment''' option.
|-"
|| Point to '''Insert Comment''' icon in '''Track''' '''Changes''' toolbar
|| We can also add '''comments'''

by clicking on the '''Insert Comment''' icon in the '''Track''' '''Changes''' toolbar.
|-"
|| Point to comment box
|| A '''comment''' box appears on the right side of the '''document.'''
|-"
|| Type “ What is e-governance?” in the comment box
|| In the '''comment''' box, type the '''comment''' as “'''What is e-governance?”'''
|-"
|| Point to commenters name date and time
|| We can see the '''commenter’s''' name along with date and time.
|-"
|| Only Narration
|| Next, we will see how one can reply to a '''comment'''.
|-"
|| Cursor on Comment box

Click on Insert comment
|| Once again keep the cursor on the '''comment''' box.

Then click on the '''Insert''' '''Comment''' icon located in the '''Standard''' '''toolbar.'''
|-"
|| Point to newly added reply comment box
|| We can see a new '''Reply''' '''Comment''' box gets added to our document.
|-"
|| Type “It means electronic governance”
|| Inside the '''reply''' '''comment''' box type '''“It means electronic governance'''”
|-"
|| Only narration
|| Let us delete the newly added '''comment “It means''' '''electronic governance'''”
|-"
|| Click on down arrow >> select '''Delete comment'''
|| Click on the down-arrow icon in the '''Reply''' '''comment''' box and select '''Delete comment '''option.
|-"
|| Delete the comment What is e governance
|| Repeat the same steps to delete the comment “'''What is e governance ?” '''
|-"
|| Point to word e-governance
|| We see that both the '''comments''' are now deleted.

And also the word is no more highlighted.
|-"
|| Click on Record Track change icon in the track changes toolbar
|| To delete another person’s comments, first disable the '''Record Track Change''' icon.

And then press '''Delete''' key on the keyboard.
|-"
|| Press''' Ctrl + S, '''Click on the''' X ''' icon
|| Save and close the file.
|-"
|| Only Narration
|| This brings us to the end of this tutorial.

Let us summarise.
|-"
|| Slide: '''Summary'''

|| In this tutorial, we learnt how to
* '''Peer review''' a '''document''' using '''Track changes '''option
* Edit a '''document''' using '''Record changes''' option
* Add '''comments''' in a '''document'''

|-"
|| Slide: '''Assignment'''
|| As an assignment:

* Open''' Seven-Reason-to-adopt-FOSS.odt '''file
* Delete and correct the word '''available''' using '''Record changes'''
* Use '''Accept''' '''change''' option to accept the changes

|-"
|| Slide: '''About spoken tutorial project'''
|| The video at the following link summarises the spoken tutorial project.

Please download and watch it.
|-"
|| Slide: '''Spoken Tutorial workshops'''
|| We conduct workshops using '''spoken tutorials '''and give certificates.

For more details, Please contact us.
|-"
|| Slide: '''Forums Specific Questions'''
|| Please post your timed queries in this forum.
|-"
|| Slide: '''Acknowledgment'''
|| The''' Spoken Tutorial '''project is funded by '''MHRD''' Govt of India.
|-"
|| Slide: '''Thank you'''
|| This tutorial was originally contributed by IT for change in 2012.

This is Pratik Kamble along with the Spoken Tutorial team from''' IIT Bombay''' signing off.

Thank you for watching.
|-
|}

LibreOffice-Suite-Writer-6.3/C4/Typing-in-local-languages/English

2020-11-13T09:00:27Z

Pratik kamble:

Title: Typing in Local Languages

Author: Pratik Kamble

Novice Reviewer:

Domain Reviewer: Praveen and Nancy

Keywords: Language Support, Hindi, Hindi KaGaPa Phonetic, Show Keyboard Layout

{|border=1
|'''Time'''
|'''Narration'''
|-
|| Slide - '''Title'''
|| Welcome to the''' '''spoken tutorial on '''Typing in Local Languages''' in '''LibreOffice Writer'''
|-
|| Slide''' - Learning Objectives'''
|| In this tutorial, we will learn to:

* Install '''Language packages '''in '''Writer'''
* Configure '''Local Language''' setting''' '''and
* Type text in '''Local Language'''

|-
|| Slide''':''' '''System Requirements'''
|| This tutorial is recorded using

* '''Ubuntu Linux OS''' version''' 18.04 '''and
* '''LibreOffice Suite '''version '''6.3.5'''

|-
| Slide:''' Code files'''
|
* The files used in this tutorial have been provided to you in the''' Code files''' link on this tutorial page.
* Pls download and extract the file.
* Make a copy and then use it for practising.

|-
|| Only Narration
|| Now, I will explain how to configure '''Local language''' typing in '''Writer'''.

For demonstration we will use '''Hindi''' language.
|-
|| Only Narration
|| To type in '''Hindi,''' we need '''Lohit Deva '''packages.
|-
|| Only Narration
|| In the latest version of '''Ubuntu Linux''', the '''Lohit''' '''Deva''' packages are installed by default.
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Now let’s install or check''' packages''' for '''Devnagri font '''through the '''terminal.'''
|-
|| Open Terminal by pressing Ctrl + Alt +T
|| Open the '''terminal''' by pressing '''Ctrl + Alt + T '''keys together.
|-
|| Type

sudo apt install fonts-lohit-deva [Enter]
|| Type the following '''command''' in the '''terminal'''

'''sudo apt install fonts-lohit-deva''' and press '''Enter'''
|-
|| Enter password and Press Enter
|| Type the '''admin password''' if prompted and press '''Enter.'''
|-
|| Point to message
|| You could get a message “'''fonts-lohit-deva is already the newest version”.'''

This means the '''font lohit-deva''' is already on your system.

Else the language '''package''' will get installed.
|-
|| Click on '''X''' icon
|| Once the installation is over, close the '''terminal.'''
|-
|| Click on '''Show Application''' icon
|| Now click on the '''Show Applications''' or '''Dash home''' icon at the bottom left of the screen.
|-
|| Type '''language support >> '''press '''Enter'''
|| In the '''search bar''', type '''language support '''and then click on the '''Language Support '''icon.
|-
|| Point to pop up box

Click on''' Remind me later '''
|| If the''' language support''' is not installed completely, you may get a pop-up message box.

Click on the '''Remind Me Later''' button to close it.
|-
|| '''Language Support '''dialog box''' '''

Click on '''Install/ Remove Languages '''button
|| Now we are in the '''Language Support '''dialog box.

Under the''' Language '''tab, click on the''' Install/ Remove Languages '''button.
|-
|| '''Installed Languages '''dialog box
|| '''Installed Languages''' dialog box opens up.

Scroll and choose the '''Language''' of your choice from the displayed list.
|-
|| Point to '''English'''

Select''' Hindi'''
|| We can see that '''English '''is already selected by default.

We will choose another language, say '''Hindi.'''
|-
|| Put check mark

Click on '''Apply''' button
|| Put a check mark in the checkbox for '''Hindi.'''

Then click on the '''Apply '''button at the bottom.
|-
|| '''Authentication Required '''pop-up

Type '''admin password''' and click on '''Authenticate '''button
|| A pop-up appears saying '''Authentication Required.'''

Type the '''admin password''' in the '''Password''' field and click on the '''Authenticate '''button.
|-
|| '''Applying Changes''' dialog box

Only Narration
|| '''Applying Changes''' pop-up box opens and it shows a progress bar.

It may take some time to install the newly selected language '''package'''.
|-
||Slide - '''Package Installation error'''
|| If you get error like '''Failed to download packages”'''

Refer to the'''Additional Reading Material''' of this tutorial.

|-
|| Only Narration
|| Once done, the installation dialog box closes by itself.
|-
|| Point to '''Hindi''' language
|| Now, go to the '''Language for menus and windows''' section and scroll down.

We can see the newly added language '''Hindi.'''
|-
|| Point to '''Keyboard input method system '''

Point to '''IBus'''
|| Make sure that the '''Keyboard input method system''' is set to '''IBus'''.

If not, then select it from the drop-down.
|-
|| Click on '''Close''' button
|| Now click on the '''Close''' button at the bottom right.
|-
|| Click on''' Show Application'''
|| Click on the '''Show Applications''' or '''Dash home''' icon at the bottom left of the screen again.
|-
|| Type '''Settings''' and Click on '''Settings'''
|| In the '''search bar,''' type '''Settings''' and click on the '''Settings''' icon.
|-
|| Click on '''Settings - > Region & Language'''
|| On the left, we can see list of '''Settings''' option

If not click on the back button to go back to the '''Settings''' page

From the list select'''Region & Language''' option
|-
|| Click on '''Input sources''' -> '''Plus''' symbol
|| To add the newly installed language''' Hindi, '''click on the''' plus '''symbol below the '''Input Sources '''section.
|-
|| Point to Add and Input Source

Click on 3 dots icon and select '''Hindi'''
|| '''Add an input source '''window''' '''opens.

From the list, select '''Hindi'''.

|-
|| Only Narration
|| In case if '''Hindi '''language option is not available

Click on the 3 dots icon..

|-
|| Point to various options
|| It has various options for '''Hindi input'''.
|-
|| Select '''Hindi (KaGaPa phonetic''')
|| Select '''Hindi (KaGaPa phonetic''')
|-
|| Click on Add button
|| Then click on the '''Add''' button located at the top right corner of the window.
|-
|| Point to '''Input Sources -> Hindi'''
|| Now we can see the selected language '''Hindi''' as one of the '''Input Sources '''item'''.'''
|-
|| Click on X icon
|| Close the '''Settings''' window by clicking on '''X''' icon.
|-
|| Point to '''en'''
|| Go to the '''Taskbar''' located at the top right corner of the desktop screen.

We can see the “'''en'''” drop-down which is called the '''Input Language menu'''.
|-
|| Click on Down arrow
|| Click on the down arrow.
|-
|| Point to '''Hindi KaGaPa'''
|| We see the newly added '''Hindi (KaGaPa phonetic''')''' '''language along with '''English US.'''
|-
|| Only Narration
|| To type in the newly added language, we need to restart the computer.

|-
|| Press Ctrl+Alt+T
|| Now open the '''terminal''' by pressing Ctrl + Alt + T keys together
|-
| | [Terminal] type: sudo reboot

Enter the admin password
| | In the '''terminal''', type '''sudo reboot '''and press '''Enter.'''

Type the '''admin password''' if prompted and press '''Enter.'''
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Our system has now rebooted.
|-
|| Open Terminal Ctrl + Alt + T
||Open the '''terminal''' by pressing '''Ctrl + Alt+ T''' keys together
|-
|| Type locale -a

Enter password
|| In the '''terminal''' type the following '''command:'''

'''locale''' '''-a '''and press '''Enter'''

Type the '''admin''' '''password''' if prompted and press '''Enter.'''
|-
|| Point to '''hi_IN '''or''' hi_IN.utf8'''
|| We can see a list of languages along with newly added language that '''hi_IN '''or''' hi_IN.utf8'''
|-
|| Only Narration
|| That means that we have successfully installed the new '''input''' language, that is '''Hindi.'''
|-
|| Open new writer document
|| Now open a new writer document
|-
|| Type '''Welcome to Spoken Tutorial'''
|| Now type '''Welcome to Spoken Tutorial '''and''' '''press''' Enter.'''
|-
|| Point to status bar (English)
|| As we have set '''English''' as the default language, we can see the same in the '''status bar.'''
|-
|| Only Narration

Click on en Down arrow

Select '''Hindi KaGaPa'''
|| Let us change the language from '''English''' to '''Hindi'''.

To do so, click on the '''Input Language '''down arrow next to '''en''' at the top right corner of the '''Task bar.'''

Then select '''Hindi (KaGaPa phonetic).'''
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Let’s see how the '''Hindi''' keyboard layout looks like.
|-
|| Click on '''Show Keyboard Layout'''

|| So, first click on the '''Input Language '''down arrow.

Then select '''Show Keyboard Layout.'''
|-
|| Point to the Hindi keyboard
|| The '''keyboard''' layout indicates the output we will get by typing on our '''keyboard.'''

Please refer to the '''Keyboard''' whenever required.
|-
|| Only Narration

Only Narration
|| In case if you find any difficulty in typing '''Hindi''' text

Please refer '''Additional reading material '''i.e '''Show Keyboard''' '''Layout'''
|-
|| Click on '''Close'''
|| Click on the '''Close''' button to close the '''keyboard layout.'''
|-
|| Switch to the '''Writer document'''
|| Switch to the '''Writer '''document.
|-
|| Type''' स्पॊकन ट्युटॊरियल मेें आपका स्वागत है'''

Point to '''Hindi '''in the status bar
|| In a new line type the '''Hindi''' text as shown.

When we type, notice that now the '''status bar '''shows''' Hindi.'''
|-
|| Press Enter

Point to '''English (India) '''in the status bar
|| Now press '''Enter.'''

Notice that now the '''status bar '''shows''' English (India).'''
|-
|| Type some random text in Hindi
|| But if you start typing again, it will type in '''Hindi''' not in '''English.'''
|-
|| Ctrl + Z
|| Let me undo this change.
|-
|| Press Super key (Windows key) and Spacebar
|| We can change our '''Input language'''

By pressing the '''Super key '''or''' Windows key''' along with the '''Spacebar.'''
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Likewise you can install any language of your choice and practice on your own.
|-
|| Press''' Ctrl + S, '''Click on the''' X '''icon
|| Save and close the file.
|-
|| Only Narration
|| This brings us to the end of this spoken tutorial.

Let us summarise
|-
|| Slide: '''Summary'''
|| In this tutorial, we learnt to:

* Install '''Language packages '''in '''Writer'''
* Configure '''Local language''' setting''' '''and
* Type text in '''Local''' '''Language'''

|-
|| Slide: '''Assignment'''
|| As an assignment

* Open '''practice.odt '''file
* Use''' Hindi KaGaPa Phonetic'''
* Type '''I like Spoken tutorial((मुझे स्पोकन ट्यूटोरियल पसंद है) '''in''' Hindi '''

|-
|| Slide: '''About spoken tutorial project'''
|| The video at the following link summarises the spoken tutorial project

Please download and watch it.
|-
|| Slide: '''Spoken Tutorial workshops'''
|| We conduct workshops using spoken tutorials''' '''and give certificates.

For more details, Please contact us.
|-
|| Slide: '''Forums Specific Questions'''
|| Please post your timed queries in this forum.
|-
|| Slide: '''Acknowledgment'''
|| The '''Spoken Tutorial '''project is funded by '''MHRD''' Govt of India
|-
|| Slide:''' Thank you'''
|| This tutorial was originally contributed by IT for Change in 2012.

This is Pratik Kamble along with the Spoken Tutorial team from '''IIT Bombay''' signing off.

Thank you for watching.
|-
|}

LibreOffice-Suite-Writer-6.3/C4/Typing-in-local-languages/English

2020-11-09T08:16:04Z

Pratik kamble: Created page with "Title: Typing in Local Languages Author: Pratik Kamble Novice Reviewer: Domain Reviewer: Praveen and Nancy Keywords: Language Support, Hindi, Hindi KaGaPa Phonetic, Show..."

Title: Typing in Local Languages

Author: Pratik Kamble

Novice Reviewer:

Domain Reviewer: Praveen and Nancy

Keywords: Language Support, Hindi, Hindi KaGaPa Phonetic, Show Keyboard Layout

{|border=1
|'''Time'''
|'''Narration'''
|-
|| Slide - '''Title'''
|| Welcome to the''' '''spoken tutorial on '''Typing in Local Languages''' in '''LibreOffice Writer'''
|-
|| Slide''' - Learning Objectives'''
|| In this tutorial, we will learn to:

* Install '''Language packages '''in '''Writer'''
* Configure '''Local Language''' setting''' '''and
* Type text in '''Local Language'''

|-
|| Slide''':''' '''System Requirements'''
|| This tutorial is recorded using

* '''Ubuntu Linux OS''' version''' 18.04 '''and
* '''LibreOffice Suite '''version '''6.3.5'''

|-
| Slide:''' Code files'''
|
* The files used in this tutorial have been provided to you in the''' Code files''' link on this tutorial page.
* Pls download and extract the file.
* Make a copy and then use it for practising.

|-
|| Only Narration
|| Now, I will explain how to configure '''Local language''' typing in '''Writer'''.

For demonstration we will use '''Hindi''' language.
|-
|| Only Narration
|| To type in '''Hindi,''' we need '''Lohit Deva '''packages.
|-
|| Only Narration
|| In the latest version of '''Ubuntu Linux''', the '''Lohit''' '''Deva''' packages are installed by default.
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Now let’s install or check''' packages''' for '''Devnagri font '''through the '''terminal.'''
|-
|| Open Terminal by pressing Ctrl + Alt +T
|| Open the '''terminal''' by pressing '''Ctrl + Alt + T '''keys together.
|-
|| Type

sudo apt install fonts-lohit-deva [Enter]
|| Type the following '''command''' in the '''terminal'''

'''sudo apt install fonts-lohit-deva''' and press '''Enter'''
|-
|| Enter password and Press Enter
|| Type the '''admin password''' if prompted and press '''Enter.'''
|-
|| Point to message
|| You could get a message “'''fonts-lohit-deva is already the newest version”.'''

This means the '''font lohit-deva''' is already on your system.

Else the language '''package''' will get installed.
|-
|| Click on '''X''' icon
|| Once the installation is over, close the '''terminal.'''
|-
|| Click on '''Show Application''' icon
|| Now click on the '''Show Applications''' or '''Dash home''' icon at the bottom left of the screen.
|-
|| Type '''language support >> '''press '''Enter'''
|| In the '''search bar''', type '''language support '''and then click on the '''Language Support '''icon.
|-
|| Point to pop up box

Click on''' Remind me later '''
|| If the''' language support''' is not installed completely, you may get a pop-up message box.

Click on the '''Remind Me Later''' button to close it.
|-
|| '''Language Support '''dialog box''' '''

Click on '''Install/ Remove Languages '''button
|| Now we are in the '''Language Support '''dialog box.

Under the''' Language '''tab, click on the''' Install/ Remove Languages '''button.
|-
|| '''Installed Languages '''dialog box
|| '''Installed Languages''' dialog box opens up.

Scroll and choose the '''Language''' of your choice from the displayed list.
|-
|| Point to '''English'''

Select''' Hindi'''
|| We can see that '''English '''is already selected by default.

We will choose another language, say '''Hindi.'''
|-
|| Put check mark

Click on '''Apply''' button
|| Put a check mark in the checkbox for '''Hindi.'''

Then click on the '''Apply '''button at the bottom.
|-
|| '''Authentication Required '''pop-up

Type '''admin password''' and click on '''Authenticate '''button
|| A pop-up appears saying '''Authentication Required.'''

Type the '''admin password''' in the '''Password''' field and click on the '''Authenticate '''button.
|-
|| '''Applying Changes''' dialog box

Only Narration
|| '''Applying Changes''' pop-up box opens and it shows a progress bar.

It may take some time to install the newly selected language '''package'''.
|-
||Slide - '''Package Installation error'''
|| '''Failed to download packages”'''

Refer '''Additional Reading Material''' of this tutorial.

|-
|| Only Narration
|| Once done, the installation dialog box closes by itself.
|-
|| Point to '''Hindi''' language
|| Now, go to the '''Language for menus and windows''' section and scroll down.

We can see the newly added language '''Hindi.'''
|-
|| Point to '''Keyboard input method system '''

Point to '''IBus'''
|| Make sure that the '''Keyboard input method system''' is set to '''IBus'''.

If not, then select it from the drop-down.
|-
|| Click on '''Close''' button
|| Now click on the '''Close''' button at the bottom right.
|-
|| Click on''' Show Application'''
|| Click on the '''Show Applications''' or '''Dash home''' icon at the bottom left of the screen again.
|-
|| Type '''Settings''' and Click on '''Settings'''
|| In the '''search bar,''' type '''Settings''' and click on the '''Settings''' icon.
|-
|| Click on '''Settings - > Region & Language'''
|| Under the heading '''Settings''' on the left, we can see list of '''Settings''' option

If not click on the back button to go back to the '''Settings''' page

From the list select'''Region & Language''' option
|-
|| Click on '''Input sources''' -> '''Plus''' symbol
|| To add the newly installed language''' Hindi, '''click on the''' plus '''symbol below the '''Input Sources '''section.
|-
|| Point to Add and Input Source

Click on 3 dots icon and select '''Hindi'''
|| '''Add an input source '''window''' '''opens.

From the list, select '''Hindi'''.

If not visible click on the 3 dots icon.
|-
|| Type Hindi and click on Other option
|| In the '''search bar''', type '''Hindi''' and click on it
|-
|| Only Narration
|| In case if '''Hindi '''language option is not available

Click on the '''Other''' option, then search and''' '''select''' Hindi'''.
|-
|| Point to various options
|| It has various options for '''Hindi input'''.
|-
|| Select '''Hindi (KaGaPa phonetic''')
|| Select '''Hindi (KaGaPa phonetic''')
|-
|| Click on Add button
|| Then click on the '''Add''' button located at the top right corner of the window.
|-
|| Point to '''Input Sources -> Hindi'''
|| Now we can see the selected language '''Hindi''' as one of the '''Input Sources '''item'''.'''
|-
|| Click on X icon
|| Close the '''Settings''' window by clicking on '''X''' icon.
|-
|| Point to '''en'''
|| Go to the '''Taskbar''' located at the top right corner of the desktop screen.

We can see the “'''en'''” drop-down which is called the '''Input Language menu'''.
|-
|| Click on Down arrow
|| Click on the down arrow.
|-
|| Point to '''Hindi KaGaPa'''
|| We see the newly added '''Hindi (KaGaPa phonetic''')''' '''language along with '''English US.'''
|-
|| Only Narration
|| To type in the newly added language, we need to restart the computer.
|-
|| Switch to terminal
|| Switch to the '''terminal.'''
|-
|| Press Ctrl+Alt+T
|| Now once again open the '''terminal''' by pressing Ctrl + Alt + T keys together
|-
| | [Terminal] type: sudo reboot

Enter the admin password
| | In the '''terminal''', type '''sudo reboot '''and press '''Enter.'''

Type the '''admin password''' if prompted and press '''Enter.'''
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Our system has now rebooted.
|-
|| Open Terminal Ctrl + Alt + T
|| Once again open the '''terminal''' by pressing '''Ctrl + Alt+ T''' keys together
|-
|| Type locale -a

Enter password
|| In the '''terminal''' type the following '''command:'''

'''locale''' '''-a '''and press '''Enter'''

Type the '''admin''' '''password''' if prompted and press '''Enter.'''
|-
|| Point to '''hi_IN '''or''' hi_IN.utf8'''
|| We can see a list of languages along with newly added language that '''hi_IN '''or''' hi_IN.utf8'''
|-
|| Only Narration
|| That means that we have successfully installed the new '''input''' language, that is '''Hindi.'''
|-
|| Open new writer document
|| Now open a new writer document
|-
|| Type '''Welcome to Spoken Tutorial'''
|| Now type '''Welcome to Spoken Tutorial '''and''' '''press''' Enter.'''
|-
|| Point to status bar (English)
|| As we have set '''English''' as the default language, we can see the same in the '''status bar.'''
|-
|| Only Narration

Click on en Down arrow

Select '''Hindi KaGaPa'''
|| Let us change the language from '''English''' to '''Hindi'''.

To do so, click on the '''Input Language '''down arrow next to '''en''' at the top right corner of the '''Task bar.'''

Then select '''Hindi (KaGaPa phonetic).'''
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Let’s see how the '''Hindi''' keyboard layout looks like.
|-
|| Click on '''Show Keyboard Layout'''

|| So, first click on the '''Input Language '''down arrow.

Then select '''Show Keyboard Layout.'''
|-
|| Point to the Hindi keyboard
|| The '''keyboard''' layout indicates the output we will get by typing on our '''keyboard.'''

Please refer to the '''Keyboard''' whenever required.
|-
|| Only Narration

Only Narration
|| In case if you find any difficulty in typing '''Hindi''' text

Please refer '''Additional reading material '''i.e '''Show Keyboard''' '''Layout'''
|-
|| Click on '''Close'''
|| Click on the '''Close''' button to close the '''keyboard layout.'''
|-
|| Switch to the '''Writer document'''
|| Switch to the '''Writer '''document.
|-
|| Type''' स्पॊकन ट्युटॊरियल मेें आपका स्वागत है'''

Point to '''Hindi '''in the status bar
|| In a new line type the '''Hindi''' text as shown.

When we type, notice that now the '''status bar '''shows''' Hindi.'''
|-
|| Press Enter

Point to '''English (India) '''in the status bar
|| Now press '''Enter.'''

Notice that now the '''status bar '''shows''' English (India).'''
|-
|| Type some random text in Hindi
|| But if you start typing again, it will type in '''Hindi''' not in '''English.'''
|-
|| Ctrl + Z
|| Let me undo this change.
|-
|| Press Super key (Windows key) and Spacebar
|| We can change our '''Input language'''

By pressing the '''Super key '''or''' Windows key''' along with the '''Spacebar.'''
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Likewise you can install any language of your choice and practice on your own.
|-
|| Press''' Ctrl + S, '''Click on the''' X '''icon
|| Save and close the file.
|-
|| Only Narration
|| This brings us to the end of this spoken tutorial.

Let us summarise
|-
|| Slide: '''Summary'''
|| In this tutorial, we learnt to:

* Install '''Language packages '''in '''Writer'''
* Configure '''Local language''' setting''' '''and
* Type text in '''Local''' '''Language'''

|-
|| Slide: '''Assignment'''
|| As an assignment

* Open '''practice.odt '''file
* Use''' Hindi KaGaPa Phonetic'''
* Type '''I like Spoken tutorial '''in''' Hindi '''

|-
|| Slide: '''About spoken tutorial project'''
|| The video at the following link summarises the spoken tutorial project

Please download and watch it.
|-
|| Slide: '''Spoken Tutorial workshops'''
|| We conduct workshops using spoken tutorials''' '''and give certificates.

For more details, Please contact us.
|-
|| Slide: '''Forums Specific Questions'''
|| Please post your timed queries in this forum.
|-
|| Slide: '''Acknowledgment'''
|| The '''Spoken Tutorial '''project is funded by '''MHRD''' Govt of India
|-
|| Slide:''' Thank you'''
|| This tutorial was originally contributed by DesiCrew Solutions Pvt. Ltd. in 2011.

This is Pratik Kamble along with the Spoken Tutorial team from '''IIT Bombay''' signing off.

Thank you for watching.
|-
|}

LibreOffice Suite Writer 6.3

2020-10-20T10:47:37Z

Pratik kamble:

LibreOffice Suite Writer 6.3

2020-10-20T10:17:33Z

Pratik kamble:

=== Introduction ===

LibreOffice Writer is the word processor component of the LibreOffice Suite.It is the equivalent of Microsoft Word in Microsoft Office Suite. It is a free and open source software so it can be shared, modified and distributed without any restrictions. It provides the features of a word processor like edit text, text modifications, adding images, tables, objects, spell check, auto correct, etc. In addition, it provides the following important features:

* Export to PDF

* Built-in Drawing tools

* Page layout methods

__TOC__

=== Basic Level ===

#Introduction to LibreOffice Writer 6.3.5:
#*About LibreOffice Writer
#*Various toolbars in Writer
#*How to open a new and existing document
#*How to save and close a document in Writer
#*How to save as MS Word document
#*How to export as a PDF document
#*How save in different file format .odt, pdf, html .docx
#*How to change font name
#*How to change font size
#*How use to Align Centre
#Typing text and basic formatting in Writer 6.3.5
#*Alignment options in Writer
#*Difference between Bullets and Numbering
#*Various Bullets and Numbering options
#*How to Cut, Copy and Paste
#*How to make the text Bold, Underline, Italic
#*How to change Font name
#*How to change Font size
#*How to change Font color
#*How to align left, right, justified and centre
#Inserting images, hyperlinks, bookmarks in Writer 6.3.5
#*Inserting an Image file in Writer
#*Resizing the image
#*Moving the image to the desired location
#*Inserting a Hyperlink in Writer document
#*Inserting a Bookmark in Writer document
#*Customising the Bookmark feature
#*How to use Target in Document
#*How to create Path to another document
#*How to use Target file feature
#Table and Table Properties
#*Insert table
#*Add row
#*Modify row
#*Adjust table properties
#*Minimize column width
#*Table toolbar
#*Center Align
#*Alignment
#*Background color
#*Align bottom
#*Distribute columns evenly
#*Optimize Size
#*Split Table
#*Copy heading
#*Center Vertically
#*Auto format Styles
#Viewing and printing a document in Writer
#*How to use Print options
#*View Normal layout
#*View Web layout
#*How to view in Full screen mode
#*How to use Zoom slider
#*How to use Zoom head
#*How to use Zoom factor
#*Different Zoom & View layout options
#*How to use Fit width option
#*How to use Fit width and height option
#*How to use Print Preview option
#*Use Book view option
==Intermediate Level==
#Using Find, Replace and Autocorrect
#*Use Find and Replace option
#*Use Spell check option
#*Use Autocorrect feature
#*How to add abbreviation
#*How to Find Previous
#*How to Find Next
#*Use Find All option
#*Use Previous page option
#*Use Next page option
#*Use Replace All option
#*Change Language Settings
#*How to use Automatic Spell checking feature
#*How to Ignore double spaces feature
#Creating Newsletters
#*Use Column break option feature
#*How to Check Word count in the document
#*How to Add Image and Banner in the document
#*How to Add Text animation in the document
#*How to Add Watermark in the document
#*How to Highlight Text
#*Use Font Effects option
#*Use Drawing toolbar option
#*Check the Character count

LibreOffice Suite Writer 6.3

2020-10-20T10:15:15Z

Pratik kamble:

=== Introduction ===

LibreOffice Writer is the word processor component of the LibreOffice Suite.It is the equivalent of Microsoft Word in Microsoft Office Suite. It is a free and open source software so it can be shared, modified and distributed without any restrictions. It provides the features of a word processor like edit text, text modifications, adding images, tables, objects, spell check, auto correct, etc. In addition, it provides the following important features:

* Export to PDF

* Built-in Drawing tools

* Page layout methods

__TOC__

=== Basic Level ===

#Introduction to LibreOffice Writer 6.3.5:
#*About LibreOffice Writer
#*Various toolbars in Writer
#*How to open a new and existing document
#*How to save and close a document in Writer
#*How to save as MS Word document
#*How to export as a PDF document
#*How save in different file format .odt, pdf, html .docx
#*How to change font name
#*How to change font size
#*How use to Align Centre
#Typing text and basic formatting in Writer 6.3.5
#*Alignment options in Writer
#*Difference between Bullets and Numbering
#*Various Bullets and Numbering options
#*How to Cut, Copy and Paste
#*How to make the text Bold, Underline, Italic
#*How to change Font name
#*How to change Font size
#*How to change Font color
#*How to align left, right, justified and centre
#Inserting images, hyperlinks, bookmarks in Writer 6.3.5
#*Inserting an Image file in Writer
#*Resizing the image
#*Moving the image to the desired location
#*Inserting a Hyperlink in Writer document
#*Inserting a Bookmark in Writer document
#*Customising the Bookmark feature
#*How to use Target in Document
#*How to create Path to another document
#*How to use Target file feature
#Table and Table Properties
#*Insert table
#*Add row
#*Modify row
#*Adjust table properties
#*Minimize column width
#*Table toolbar
#*Center Align
#*Alignment
#*Background color
#*Align bottom
#*Distribute columns evenly
#*Optimize Size
#*Split Table
#*Copy heading
#*Center Vertically
#*Auto format Styles
#Viewing and printing a document in Writer
#*How to use Print options
#*View Normal layout
#*View Web layout
#*How to view in Full screen mode
#*How to use Zoom slider
#*How to use Zoom head
#*How to use Zoom factor
#*Different Zoom & View layout options
#*How to use Fit width option
#*How to use Fit width and height option
#*How to use Print Preview option
#*Use Book view option
#Using Find, Replace and Autocorrect
#*Use Find and Replace option
#*Use Spell check option
#*Use Autocorrect feature
#*How to add abbreviation
#*How to Find Previous
#*How to Find Next
#*Use Find All option
#*Use Previous page option
#*Use Next page option
#*Use Replace All option
#*Change Language Settings
#*How to use Automatic Spell checking feature
#*How to Ignore double spaces feature
#Creating Newsletters
#*Use Column break option feature
#*How to Check Word count in the document
#*How to Add Image and Banner in the document
#*How to Add Text animation in the document
#*How to Add Watermark in the document
#*How to Highlight Text
#*Use Font Effects option
#*Use Drawing toolbar option
#*Check the Character count

LibreOffice-Suite-Writer-6.3/C3/Header,-Footer-and-Notes/English

2020-10-20T09:55:02Z

Pratik kamble:

Title: Header Footer and notes

Author: Pratik Kamble

Novice Reviewer:

Domain Reviewer: Praveen and Nancy

Keywords: Insert Header, Insert Footer, Insert Endnote, Insert Footnote, Removed Header and Footer

{|border=1
|-
| align=center| Visual Cue
| align=center| Narration

|-
|| Slide: Title Slide
|| Welcome to the '''spoken tutorial''' on '''Header, Footer and Notes.'''

|-
| Slide: Learning Objectives
|In this tutorial, we will learn how to:

* Insert '''Header'''
* Insert '''Footer'''
* Remove '''Header '''and''' Footer''' from the first page and
* Insert '''Footnote''' and '''Endnote''' in a '''document'''

|-
|| Slide: System Requirements
|| This tutorial is recorded using

* '''Ubuntu Linux OS''' version '''18.04''' and
* '''LibreOffice Suite '''version '''6.3.5'''

|-
|| Open '''Newsletter.odt '''file
|| Open the file '''Newsletter.odt '''which we have created earlier.
|-
|| '''Slide: Code files'''
||
* This file has been provided to you in the''' Code files''' link on this tutorial page.
* Pls download and extract the file.
* Make a copy and then use it for practising.

|-
|| Only Narration
|| First we will learn how to insert a '''Footer''' in our '''document'''.
|-
|| Click '''Insert '''>> '''Header and Footer'''

Click on '''Use Header Footer '''
|| Click on the '''Insert''' menu in the '''menu bar''' and go to the '''Header and Footer '''option.

Now check the''' Use header/footer menu''' option, if it is unchecked.
|-
|| Click on bottom text area
|| Scroll the page and click on the bottom of the text area to display the '''Footer''' marker.
|-
|| Point to '''Footer''' marker

Click on Plus symbol

Point to newly added '''Footer'''
|| The '''Footer''' marker appears in our '''document'''.

Click on the '''Plus''' symbol next to the word '''Footer.'''

We see that the '''Footer''' is added to the bottom of the page.
|-
|| Click on Insert

|| Another way to add a '''Footer''' in our '''document'''

is by clicking on the '''Insert menu''' in the '''menu''' '''bar.'''
|-
|| Click on Insert >>Header and Footer >> Footer >> Default Style option

Only highlight >> DO NOT CLICK
|| Go to the '''Header and''' '''Footer '''option.''' '''

Select''' Footer '''sub-menu and choose the '''Default''' '''style '''option.
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Either ways, the cursor is in the '''footer '''area.
|-
||

Click on Down arrow in '''Footer Default style'''

Select '''Insert Page number'''
|| To add a page number in the '''footer''', click on the down arrow of '''Footer Default style. '''

Then select''' Insert Page Number''' option.
|-
|| Point to 1 in footer area

|| Immediately, we see that the number '''1''' is displayed in the '''footer.'''
|-
|| Double-click on number 1
|| In order to give different '''styles''' to the page number, double-click on number '''1.'''
|-
|| Point to '''Edit fields''' dialog box
|| '''Edit Fields '''dialog box opens up.
|-
|| Point to different section
|| We have 3 different sections under '''Edit''' '''fields''':
* '''Type'''
* '''Select''' and
* '''Format'''

|-
|| Point to '''Format '''options

Point to abc lowercase
ABC uppercase
|| Under the '''Format''' section, we can see many '''formats''' like
* '''a b c''' in lowercase
* '''A B C '''in uppercase and many more

|-
|| Select '''1st 2nd 3rd >> '''Click on '''OK''' button
|| I will select the '''format 1st 2nd 3rd '''and then click on the '''OK''' button at the bottom.
|-
|| Point to the page number
|| Observe that the numbering '''format''' for page 1 changes from '''1''' to '''1st.'''
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Next, let us learn to insert a '''Header''' into the '''document.'''
|-
|| Click on the top of the text area

Point to the '''Header''' marker
|| Scroll above and click on the top of the text area in the '''document'''.

The '''Header''' marker appears in our '''document'''.
|-
|| Click on the '''plus''' symbol

Point to '''Header'''
|| If not, click on the '''plus''' symbol next to the word '''Header.'''

The '''Header''' gets inserted at the top of the page.
|-
|| Only Narration

Cursor on the Insert Field icon
|| Let us now insert the date in the '''Header.'''

To do so, go to the '''Insert field''' icon located in the '''Standard''' '''toolbar.'''
|-
|| Click on down arrow icon and select Date option
|| Now click on the down arrow icon and select the '''Date''' option from the list.
|-
|| Select '''Date '''
|| The current date is displayed in the '''Header '''area.

You can edit this to any date of your choice, if you wish.
|-
|| Double click on '''Date'''
|| To change the date''' format, '''double-click on the date'''.'''
|-
|| Select 31 Dec 1999 >> Click on '''OK''' button
|| Here we will select the format as '''31. Dec. 1999''' and click on the '''OK '''button.
|-
|| Point to Date
|| The date''' format''' has now changed as per our selection.
|-
|| Keep cursor on page 2, column 1 - before the words In view of this……

Press '''Backspace''' key repeatedly
|| In case the alignment of the content has changed, please realign by pressing the '''Backspace''' key.

Repeat this till the text is on page 1 and column 2.
|-
|| Press '''Enter''' key repeatedly
|| Then press '''Enter''' key repeatedly to align the text below the '''banner'''.
|-
|| Click on''' Toggle print preview'''
|| Now click on the '''Toggle print preview''' icon in the '''Standard toolbar.'''
|-
|| Point to '''Date '''and '''Page number '''

'''Editor can enlarge this for clarity'''
|| The date appears at the top of each page and the page number at the bottom.
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Note - '''header''' and '''footer''' will be replicated on all the pages of the '''document.'''
|-
|| Click on '''Close preview'''
|| Click on the '''Close Preview''' button to close the preview.
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Next let’s learn how to add a '''margin''' and '''shadow''' '''style''' to our '''document.'''
|-
|| Click on Page icon in the sidebar deck
|| Click on the '''Page''' icon located in the '''Sidebar deck.'''
|-
|| Click Styles>> More option
|| Under '''Styles''' option, click on the '''More Options''' icon or the '''gear '''icon.
|-
|| Point to '''Page Style: Default Style '''dialog box opens up

Point to several tabs
|| '''Page Style: Default Style''' dialog box opens up.

There are several tabs which can be used to customize the '''page style''' as per our preferences.
|-
|| Click on Footer tab

Check mark on '''Footer on'''
|| Click on the '''Footer''' tab.

Put a check on the '''Footer on''' option, if not already checked.
|-
|| Set '''left margin''' to '''1.00 cm'''

Click on '''Plus''' symbol repeatedly
|| Now set the '''left margin '''space to''' 1.00 cm '''by clicking on the '''plus''' symbol repeatedly.
|-
|| Click on '''More '''

Point to '''Border/Background'''
|| To add a '''border''' or a '''shadow''' to the '''footer''', click on the '''More '''button.

'''Border/Background''' dialog box opens up.
|-
|| Click on Borders tab

Point to Shadow style and point to various option
|| Click on the '''Borders''' tab, if not already selected.

Under the '''Shadow''' '''Style '''section, we can see various options to position the shadow.
|-
|| Select '''Cast Shadow''' to the top right
|| Select '''Cast shadow to bottom right '''icon'''.'''
|-
|| Point to Color option

Under '''Color '''section click on down arrow
|| Under the '''Color''' option, '''Gray''' is the default shadow colour.

To choose a different colour, click on the down arrow.
|-
|| Point to color palette box >> Choose '''blue''' color
|| You may choose any color of your choice from the '''Color palette box.'''

I will choose '''blue'''.
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Leave all the other settings as default in the '''Border/Background''' dialog box.
|-
|| Click on '''OK '''button
|| Then click on the '''OK '''button.
|-
|| '''>> Page Style: Default Style''' dialog boxClick on '''Apply''' button >> '''OK '''button
|| In the''' Page Style: Default Style''' dialog box, click on the '''Apply''' button and then on the '''OK '''button.
|-
|| Click on Sidebar deck icon
|| Close''' '''the''' Sidebar deck.'''
|-
|| Scroll down >> Point to shadow effect
|| Scroll down to see the''' shadow effect '''added to the '''Footer.'''
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Next, we will learn how to remove the '''Header '''and''' Footer '''from a specific page.
|-
|| Only Narration

Cursor on the first page
|| Let’s remove '''Header''' from the first page of our '''document'''.

So first click the cursor anywhere on the first page of the '''document.'''
|-
|| '''Styles '''>> '''Manage styles '''
|| In the '''Sidebar deck,''' select the '''Styles''' icon.
|-
|| Point to '''Styles''' panels opens up
|| '''Styles''' '''panel''' opens up.

|-
|| Click on Page styles icon
Select First Page
|| Now click on '''Page Styles''' icon and from the list select '''First Page''' option

|-
|| Double click on First Page option
|| Now double-click on the''' First Page '''option
|-
|| Click on X icon of sidebar deck
|| Close the '''Sidebar deck'''.
|-
|| Scroll up and down the pages to show the result
|| Observe that the '''Header '''and''' Footer '''are now removed only from the first page.
|-
|| Re-adjust the text alignment in column 2 of page 1
|| You may need to re-adjust the text alignment once again, as shown.
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Next, let’s learn about '''Footnotes''' and '''Endnotes''' in '''Writer.'''
|-
|| Slide : Footnote and Endnotes (a)

||
* '''Footnotes''' appear at the bottom of the page on which they are referred

* Whereas '''Endnotes''' are collected at the end of a '''document '''or '''chapter'''

|-
|| Slide: Footnote and Endnotes (b)
||
* The '''anchor''' for the '''note''' is inserted at the current cursor position
* '''Anchor''' helps users to go directly to a particular part of the page
* You can choose between '''automatic''' '''numbering''' or a '''custom symbol''' for the '''notes'''

|-
||

Select word '''Apache License''' from the second paragraph
|| Let us see how the '''Footnote''' can be added to a word in the '''document'''.

Select the word '''Apache License '''from''' '''the''' '''second paragraph, in column 1 of page 1.
|-
|| Point to Insert '''Footnote''' '''icon'''
|| In the '''Standard toolbar''' click on the '''Insert''' '''Footnote icon.'''
|-
|| Click on '''Insert''' >> '''Footnote and Endnote >> Footnote'''

Only Highlight
|| We can also insert '''Footnote''' in our '''document''' by clicking on the '''Insert''' menu.

Then click on the '''Footnote and Endnote '''and select the''' Footnote '''option'''.'''
|-
|| Point to added '''Footnote'''
|| Both ways, the '''Footnote''' is added to our document with the '''character''' as '''1.'''
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Let’s type the text for our '''Footnote'''.
|-
|| '''Footnote >> '''Type “'''open source software license ”'''
|| Type “'''open source software license”.'''
|-
|| Only Narration
|| In a similar way, let's add another '''footnote''' in our '''document.'''
|-
|| Select the word '''copyleft''' from the second column on page 1

Click on '''Insert Footnote''' icon
|| Select the word '''copyleft''' from the second column on page 1.

Click on the '''Insert''' '''Footnote''' icon in the '''Standard toolbar.'''
|-
|| Point to '''Footnote 2'''
|| One more '''Footnote''' gets added to our page, this time under the second column.
|-
|| Type '''permissive license'''
|| Now type the text for the '''footnote '''as “'''permissive license”.'''
|-
|| Click on the '''character 1 '''in the '''footnote''' >> word '''Apache License'''

|| Let’s click on '''character 1 '''in the '''Footnote '''under column 1.

We are directed to the word '''Apache License '''in the '''document'''.
|-
|| Point to the '''character 1''' next to the word '''Apache License'''

|| Notice the '''character 1''' next to the word '''Apache License.'''

This is the '''anchor''' of the inserted '''Footnote'''.
|-
|| Hover the cursor over this slowly.
|| Hover the cursor over this '''anchor''' slowly.

The cursor turns into a pointing finger.
|-
|| Click
|| Now click on it.
|-
|| Highlight the footnote.
|| We are immediately directed to the bottom of the page where the '''Footnote '''is recorded.
|-
|| Point to '''1'''
|| The '''Character''' option is used to define the '''character''' or '''symbol''' for the current '''Footnote.'''
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Let me demonstrate how to change the '''character''' for '''Footnote 1.'''
|-
|| Scroll back up >> place the cursor between the word '''License '''and '''footnote anchor 1'''.
|| Scroll back and place the cursor between the word '''License '''and '''footnote anchor 1'''.

|-
|| Right click and select
'''Footnote/Endnote'''
|| Then right-click and select the '''Footnote or Endnote''' option.

|-
|| Point to''' Edit Footnote/Endnote'''
|| '''Edit''' '''Footnote/Endnote''' dialog box opens up.
|-
|| Point to Numbering
|| '''Numbering''' is the type of numbering that we want to use for '''Footnotes''' and '''Endnotes'''.
|-
|| Point to Automatic
|| The “'''Automatic'''” option automatically assigns number to the '''Footnotes''' or '''Endnotes.'''
|-
|| Click '''Choose''' button

Select '''asterisk'''
|| Click on the '''Choose''' button next to the '''Character''' field.

Select the '''asterisk''' character and click the '''OK''' button.
|-
|| Click on '''OK''' button
|| Click the '''OK''' button to close the '''Edit '''dialog box.
|-
|| Point to '''Footnote''' field
|| The '''character '''of''' footnote 1 '''is now set to the '''asterisk symbol. '''
|-
|| Click on the '''anchor'''
|| Click on the '''anchor'''.
|-
|| Point to '''Footnote 1 '''as '''asterisk symbol'''
|| '''Footnote 1 '''is now seen as an '''asterisk symbol'''.
|-
|| Point to second '''Footnote'''
|| We can also see that our second '''footnote''' has now turned to numerical '''1'''.
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Now let us change the '''character''' of '''Footnote 1''' back to '''numerical'''.
|-
|| Scroll back up >> place the cursor between the word '''License '''and '''footnote anchor 1'''.
|| Scroll back up and place the cursor between the word '''License '''and '''footnote anchor asterisk'''.
|-
|| Right click and select

'''Footnote/Endnote'''
|| Then right-click and select the '''Footnote or Endnote''' option.
|-
|| Point to Footnote/Endnote
|| '''Edit Footnote/Endnote''' dialog box opens up.
|-
|| Select Automatic and Click on OK
|| Under the '''Numbering''' option select '''Automatic''' and then click on the '''OK''' button.
|-
|| Point to footnote 1
|| We can see the '''asterisk symbol''' has changed to '''numerical '''once again'''.'''
|-
|| Scroll down to the '''footnotes'''
|| Scroll down and look at the '''footnotes''' and observe the changes.
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Let’s learn to highlight the '''footnotes'''.
|-
|| Click on footnote text no. 2
|| Click on any one '''footnote '''text.
|-
|| Point to the '''formatting''' drop-down at the top left
|| Look at the '''formatting''' drop-down at the top left, which says '''Footnote'''.
|-
|| Click on the drop-down arrow
|| Click on the drop-down arrow.
|-
|| Click on the drop-down next to '''Endnote''' >> select '''Edit Style'''
|| Now click on the drop-down next to '''Footnote''' and select '''Edit Style'''.
|-
|| '''Paragraph Style: Footnote''' dialog box
|| '''Paragraph Style: Footnote''' dialog box opens up.
|-
|| Click '''Highlighting''' tab and '''Color''' tab
|| Click on the '''Highlighting''' tab and then on '''Color''' tab
|-
||

Choose yellow
|| In the colour palette, choose a highlight colour.

I will choose yellow.
|-
|| Click '''Apply''' button >> '''OK''' button
|| At the bottom click on the '''Apply''' button and then on the '''OK''' button
|-
|| Point to the highlighted '''footnotes'''
|| Look at the '''footnotes''' and observe the highlight.
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Next I will demonstrate how to add an '''endnote''' in our '''document'''.
|-
|| Select the word Mozilla Public License
|| Select the word '''Mozilla Public License '''from''' '''paragraph 2 in column 1 of page 1.
|-
|| Click on Insert Endnote icon
|| Click on the '''Insert''' '''Endnote''' icon located in the '''Standard''' '''toolbar.'''
|-
|| Point to newly added Endnote
|| '''Endnote''' gets added at the end of the '''document, '''on a new page.

If a document has chapters, then the '''endnotes''' will appear at the end of each chapter.
|-
|| Type this text in endnote '''an open source/free software license”'''
|| Type the following text in the '''endnote - “an open source/free software license”'''
|-
|| Only Narration
|| We can change the default '''Roman''' '''numerals''' to other '''style '''options also.
|-
|| Click Tools >> Footnote and Endnotes
|| To do so, click on the '''Tools''' menu and then select the '''Footnote and Endnotes''' option.
|-
|| Point to Footnote/Endnote dialog box
|| '''Footnote/Endnote''' settings dialog box opens up.
|-
|| Point to Autonumbering (Only Highlight)
|| Under the''' Endnotes '''tab,''' '''we see the''' Auto Numbering '''section.
|-
|| Point to Numbering section
|| Using this option we can the change '''Numbering''' '''style''' as per our choice.

You may explore this further on your own.
|-
|| Close the dialog box click on X icon
|| Close the dialog box by clicking on '''X''' icon.
|-
|| Press''' Ctrl + S, '''Click on the''' X '''icon
|| Now let us save all the changes and close the file.
|-
|| Only Narration
|| This brings us to the end of this tutorial.

Let us summarize.
|-
|| Slide: Summary
|| In this tutorial, we learnt how to:

* Insert '''Header'''
* Insert '''Footer'''
* Remove '''Header '''and''' Footer''' from the first page
* Insert '''Footnote''' and '''Endnote''' in a '''document'''

|-
|| Slide: Assignment
|| As an assignment

* Open '''practice.odt '''file
* Add a '''Header''' and '''Footer''' to the '''document'''
* Insert your name in the '''Header'''
* Insert '''Page Count''' in the '''Footer'''
* Add an '''Endnote''' stating '''where the page ends'''

|-
|| Slide: About spoken tutorial project
|| The video at the following summarises the Spoken Tutorial project

Please download and watch it.
|-
|| Slide: Spoken Tutorial workshops
|| We conduct workshops using '''spoken tutorials '''and give certificates.

For more details, Please contact us.

|-
|| Slide: Forums Specific Questions
|| Post your timed queries in this forum.

|-
|| Slide: Acknowledgment
|| The '''Spoken Tutorial''' project is funded by MHRD Govt of India.
|-
|| Slide: Thank you
|| This tutorial was originally contributed by DesiCrew Solutions Pvt. Ltd. in 2011

This is Pratik Kamble along with the Spoken Tutorial team from''' IIT Bombay '''signing off.

Thank you for watching.
|-
|}

LibreOffice-Suite-Writer-6.3/C4/Using-Track-changes/English

2020-10-20T09:30:11Z

Pratik kamble:

Title: Using Track Changes

Author: Pratik Kamble

Novice Reviewer: Nikita Misal and Pooja Moolya

Domain Reviewer: Praveen and Nancy

Keywords: Peer review, Edit document, Add comment, Reject Track change, Accept Track changes, Record Track change, Show Record Track changes

{| border=1
|-
| align=center| Visual Cue
| align=center| Narration
|-
|| Slide - '''Title'''

|| Welcome to the spoken tutorial on''' Using Track Changes '''in '''Writer.'''
|-
|| Slide - '''Learning objective'''
|| In this tutorial, we will learn how to:

* '''Peer review''' a '''document '''using '''Track changes '''option
* '''Edit''' a '''document''' using '''Record changes''' option and
* Add '''comments''' in a '''document'''

|-
|| Slide - '''System Requirements'''
|| This tutorial is recorded using

* '''Ubuntu linux OS '''version '''18.04 '''and
* '''LibreOffice Suite '''version '''6.3.5'''

|-
|| Slide - '''Track changes'''
||
* '''Track changes''' helps the '''reviewer''' to keep track of the changes
* This feature is especially important for those who use '''Writer''' in workgroups.
* It helps the '''reviewer''' to give '''comments'''

|-
|| Slide''': Code files'''
||
* The files used in this tutorial have been provided to you in the''' Code files''' link on this tutorial page.
* Pls download and extract the file.
* Make a copy and then use it for practising.

|-"
|| Open '''Seven-reasons-to-adopt-FOSS.odt'''
|| Open the file '''Seven-reasons-to-adopt-FOSS.odt '''which you have downloaded from '''Code Files '''link.
|-
|| Click on Icon '''Show track changes functions'''

Point to '''Changes toolbar '''
|| Click on the''' Show Track Changes Functions '''icon''' '''in''' '''the '''Standard toolbar'''.

The '''Track''' '''changes toolbar''' appears at the bottom of the '''Writer''' window.
|-
|| Point to '''Show Track Changes''' and '''Record Track Changes '''
|| Make sure that the '''Show Track Changes''' and

'''Record Track Changes''' icons are enabled.

If not, then enable these by clicking on them.
|-"
|| Only Narration

Click on '''Edit '''>> '''Track Changes''' >> '''Record''' (Only Highlight)
|| Let us see another way to enable these options.

Go to the '''Edit''' '''menu''' select '''Track''' '''Changes '''from''' '''the''' '''list

And check the '''Record '''and '''Show '''options.
|-"
|| Only Narration
|| Now let’s type a new text in our '''document'''.
|-"
|| Cursor next to point 2

Type '''“Linux is a virus resistant operating system since each user has a distinct data space and cannot directly access the program files”. '''
|| Keep cursor next to the point 2 and type-

'''“Linux is a virus resistant operating system since each user has a distinct data space and cannot directly access the program files”. '''
|-"
|| Press Enter
|| Then press '''Enter.'''
|-"
|| Point to point no 3
|| We can see that point number 2 has become a new point, that is number 3.
|-"
|| Point to new line
|| Note that the newly added text is in a different color.
|-"
|| Cursor on new line
|| Hover the cursor on the newly added text.

A message is displayed -''' “Inserted: Unknown Author”,''' followed by date and time of insertion.
|-"
|| Only Narration
|| Let us replace '''Unknown author''' with our name.
|-"
|| Tools >> options
|| For that, click on the '''Tools menu''' in the '''menu bar''' and select '''Options.'''
|-"
|| Point to''' Options-Libreoffice-User Data '''
|| '''Options '''dialog box opens up.
|-"
|| Select User Data from list under LibreOffice

Type '''First/last name/initials'''
|| On the left, under '''LibreOffice, '''select '''User Data '''option from the list.

In the '''Address '''section,''' '''type your name in the '''First/last name/initials''' field, as shown.

Notice that our '''initials''' are auto-filled.
|-"
|| Click on '''Apply''' and '''Ok''' button
|| Click on the '''Apply''' button and then on the '''OK''' button at the bottom.
|-"
|| Click on File >> Properties
|| Now click on the '''File menu''' in the '''menu bar '''and select '''Properties.'''
|-"
|| Point to '''Properties'''
|| '''Properties''' dialog box opens up.
|-"
|| Click on Reset Properties button
|| In the '''General''' tab, click on the '''Reset''' '''properties''' button.
|-"
|| Point to created

|| Notice that in the created section in the center of the dialog box, your name appears.
|-"
|| Click on '''OK '''button
|| Click on the '''OK''' button to close the dialog box.
|-"
|| Only Narration
|| Now onwards, the person making the '''comment''' can easily be identified in the '''document'''.
|-"
|| Cursor on first point
|| Let us delete the second sentence from point no. 1 -

'''“It can be installed on all computers without restriction or needing to pay license fees to vendors'''”.
|-"
|| Point to deletion line
|| Note that the deletion does not actually remove''' '''the line.

But marks it as a line suggested for deletion.
|-"
|| Cursor on deleted line
|| Hover the cursor on the deleted line.

We see a message '''Deleted''' followed by the updated '''username''', with date and time.
|-"
|| Only Narration
|| Using this feature, we can modify the '''document''' by adding or deleting changes.
|-"
|| Press''' Ctrl + S, '''Click on the''' X '''icon
|| Save the changes and close the file.
|-"
|| Slide: More about Track Changes
|| Next, let us learn more about '''Track Changes.'''

* More than one person can edit the same '''document.'''
* '''LibreOffice Writer''' will show each edit in different colors.
* This will help the readers to distinguish one '''reviewer’s''' work from the other.

|-"
|| Open the document '''Government-support-for-FOSS-in-India.odt '''
|| Now open the file '''Government-support-for-FOSS-in-India.odt'''

which you have downloaded from '''Code Files '''link'''.'''
|-"
|| Point to deleted lines
|| In this '''document,''' we can see several additions and deletions have been done.
|-"
|| Cursor on Deleted text in Point 1
|| Hover '''cursor''' on the deleted text in point 1.

It displays the deletion done by '''Guru.'''
|-"
|| Cursor at the last point and Press Enter
|| Keep the '''cursor''' at the end of the last point and press '''Enter'''.
|-"
|| Type “CDAC, NIC, NRC-FOSS are institutions of Government of India which develop and promote FOSS”.
|| Then type the following text-

'''“CDAC, NIC, NRC-FOSS are institutions of Government of India which develop and promote FOSS'''. “
|-"
|| Point to different color
|| We can see the color of this text is different from the color edited by '''Guru.'''
|-"
|| Cursor on newly type text
|| Hover the '''cursor''' on the newly typed text.

It shows your name along with the date and time.
|-"
|| Only Narration

Only Narration
|| This indicates that more than one person can edit the same '''document.'''

Note - This is possible only if the '''author''' gives '''editing rights''' to other readers.
|-"
|| Only Narration
|| Now we will learn how the '''author''' can accept or reject changes made by another '''reviewer'''.
|-"
|| Only Narration
|| Let us assume, I am the '''author''' and I will accept or reject the '''edits''' made by '''Guru.'''
|-"
|| Cursor on word '''Reason '''

Right Click on mouse and select Accept change option (Only highlight)

Click on '''Accept Track Change icon'''

|| In point no 2, click on the deleted text '''reasons'''.

Right-click the mouse and select the '''Accept Change''' option.

Another way is to click on''' Accept Track Change''' icon

In the '''Track Changes toolbar '''

|-"
|| Point towards deleted word reasons
|| The text “'''reasons'''” gets deleted as per the change suggested by the '''reviewer.'''
|-"

|| Cursor on text needs

Click on '''Accept Track Change '''icon
|| On the same line, click the on the text '''needs.'''

Again click on the '''Accept Track Change '''icon in the '''Track Changes toolbar.'''
|-"
|| Point to text '''needs'''
|| Observe that the text '''needs''' gets included, as per the change suggested by the '''reviewer'''.
|-"
|| Only Narration
|| Using this feature, '''edits''' suggested by '''reviewers'''

can be accepted by the '''author'''.
|-"
|| Cursor on Point 1 deleted text

Click on '''Reject Track change icon'''
|| In point no 1, click on the deleted text.

Then click on the '''Reject Track change '''icon in the '''Track''' '''Changes''' '''toolbar.'''
|-"
|| Point to text

|| Observe that the text becomes normal.

The suggestions given by the '''reviewer''' was to delete the text.

But that suggestion has been '''rejected''' by the '''author.'''
|-"
|| Cursor on point no 5
|| Move the cursor to point no 5.
|-"
|| Select entire text

Click '''Reject Track Change '''icon
|| Select the entire text and click on the '''Reject Track Change '''icon

in the '''Track''' '''Changes''' '''toolbar.'''
|-"
|| Cursor on point 4 (Only Highlight)

Right click on mouse >> select Reject Change on
|| We can also reject a change by right-clicking on the mouse''' '''and''' '''selecting''' Reject change. '''
|-"
|| Only Narration
|| This deletes the entire text inserted by the '''reviewer.'''
|-"
|| Click on '''Show Track Changes''' and '''Record Track Changes '''
|| Disable the '''Show Track Changes''' and '''Record Track Changes''' icons by clicking on them.
|-"
|| Only Narration
|| Move the cursor to point no 5
|-"
|| Press '''Backspace''' key

|| Now delete the blank '''space''' by pressing the '''Backspace''' key on the keyboard.
|-"
|| Only Narration
|| Now onwards any further editing will not be marked separately.
|-"
|| Press Ctrl + S
|| Pause the tutorial.

Save''' '''the file after accepting or rejecting changes

To incorporate all the suggestions.

|-"
|| Only Narration
|| Another feature in '''Writer''' is inserting and deleting a '''comment.'''

It helps users to exchange ideas and suggestions, which are important.
|-"
|| Only Narration
|| In our '''document''', we will add a '''comment''' to the word '''e-governance'''.
|-"
|| Select word '''e-governance''' right click and select '''comment'''
|| In point no. 3, select the word '''e-governance.'''

Then right-click and select the '''Comment''' option.
|-"
|| Point to '''Insert Comment''' icon in '''Track''' '''Changes''' toolbar
|| We can also add '''comments'''

by clicking on the '''Insert Comment''' icon in the '''Track''' '''Changes''' toolbar.
|-"
|| Point to comment box
|| A '''comment''' box appears on the right side of the '''document.'''
|-"
|| Type “ What is e-governance?” in the comment box
|| In the '''comment''' box, type the '''comment''' as “'''What is e-governance?”'''
|-"
|| Point to commenters name date and time
|| We can see the '''commenter’s''' name along with date and time.
|-"
|| Only Narration
|| Next, we will see how one can reply to a '''comment'''.
|-"
|| Cursor on Comment box

Click on Insert comment
|| Once again keep the cursor on the '''comment''' box.

Then click on the '''Insert''' '''Comment''' icon located in the '''Standar''' '''toolbar.'''
|-"
|| Point to newly added reply comment box
|| We can see a new '''Reply''' '''Comment''' box gets added to our document.
|-"
|| Type “It means electronic governance”
|| Inside the '''reply''' '''comment''' box type '''“It means electronic governance'''”
|-"
|| Only narration
|| Let us delete the newly added '''comment “It means''' '''electronic governance'''”
|-"
|| Click on down arrow >> select '''Delete comment'''
|| Click on the down-arrow icon in the '''Reply''' '''comment''' box and select '''Delete comment '''option.
|-"
|| Delete the comment What is e governance
|| Repeat the same steps to delete the comment “'''What is e governance ?” '''
|-"
|| Point to word e-governance
|| We see that both the '''comments''' are now deleted.

And also the word is no more highlighted.
|-"
|| Click on Record Track change icon in the track changes toolbar
|| To delete another person’s comments, first disable the '''Record Track Change''' icon.

And then press '''Delete''' key on the keyboard.
|-"
|| Press''' Ctrl + S, '''Click on the''' X ''' icon
|| Save and close the file.
|-"
|| Only Narration
|| This brings us to the end of this tutorial.

Let us summarise.
|-"
|| Slide: '''Summary'''

|| In this tutorial, we learnt how to
* '''Peer review''' a '''document''' using '''Track changes '''option
* Edit a '''document''' using '''Record changes''' option
* Add '''comments''' in a '''document'''

|-"
|| Slide: '''Assignment'''
|| As an assignment:

* Open''' Seven-Reason-to-adopt-FOSS.odt '''file
* Delete and correct the word '''available''' using '''Record changes'''
* Use '''Accept''' '''change''' option to accept the changes

|-"
|| Slide: '''About spoken tutorial project'''
|| The video at the following link summarises the spoken tutorial project.

Please download and watch it.
|-"
|| Slide: '''Spoken Tutorial workshops'''
|| We conduct workshops using '''spoken tutorials '''and give certificates.

For more details, Please contact us.
|-"
|| Slide: '''Forums Specific Questions'''
|| Please post your timed queries in this forum.
|-"
|| Slide: '''Acknowledgment'''
|| The''' Spoken Tutorial '''project is funded by '''MHRD''' Govt of India.
|-"
|| Slide: '''Thank you'''
|| This tutorial was originally contributed by DesiCrew Solutions Pvt. Ltd. in 2011.

This is Pratik Kamble along with the Spoken Tutorial team from''' IIT Bombay''' signing off.

Thank you for watching.
|-
|}

LibreOffice-Suite-Writer-6.3/C4/Using-Track-changes/English

2020-10-20T09:16:20Z

Pratik kamble:

Title: Using Track Changes

Author: Pratik Kamble

Novice Reviewer: Nikita Misal and Pooja Moolya

Domain Reviewer: Praveen and Nancy

Keywords: Peer review, Edit document, Add comment, Reject Track change, Accept Track changes, Record Track change, Show Record Track changes

{| border=1
|-
| align=center| Visual Cue
| align=center| Narration
|-
|| Slide - '''Title'''

|| Welcome to the spoken tutorial on''' Using Track Changes '''in '''Writer.'''
|-
|| Slide - '''Learning objective'''
|| In this tutorial, we will learn how to:

* '''Peer review''' a '''document '''using '''Track changes '''option
* '''Edit''' a '''document''' using '''Record changes''' option and
* Add '''comments''' in a '''document'''

|-
|| Slide - '''System Requirements'''
|| This tutorial is recorded using

* '''Ubuntu linux OS '''version '''18.04 '''and
* '''LibreOffice Suite '''version '''6.3.5'''

|-
|| Slide - '''Track changes'''
||
* '''Track changes''' helps the '''reviewer''' to keep track of the changes
* This feature is especially important for those who use '''Writer''' in workgroups.
* It helps the '''reviewer''' to give '''comments'''

|-
|| Slide''': Code files'''
||
* The files used in this tutorial have been provided to you in the''' Code files''' link on this tutorial page.
* Pls download and extract the file.
* Make a copy and then use it for practising.

|-"
|| Open '''Seven-reasons-to-adopt-FOSS.odt'''
|| Open the file '''Seven-reasons-to-adopt-FOSS.odt '''which you have downloaded from '''Code Files '''link.
|-
|| Click on Icon '''Show track changes functions'''

Point to '''Changes toolbar '''
|| Click on the''' Show Track Changes Functions '''icon''' '''in''' '''the '''Standard toolbar'''.

The '''Track''' '''changes toolbar''' appears at the bottom of the '''Writer''' window.
|-
|| Point to '''Show Track Changes''' and '''Record Track Changes '''
|| Make sure that the '''Show Track Changes''' and

'''Record Track Changes''' icons are enabled.

If not, then enable these by clicking on them.
|-"
|| Only Narration

Click on '''Edit '''>> '''Track Changes''' >> '''Record''' (Only Highlight)
|| Let us see another way to enable these options.

Go to the '''Edit''' '''menu''' select '''Track''' '''Changes '''from''' '''the''' '''list

And check the '''Record '''and '''Show '''options.
|-"
|| Only Narration
|| Now let’s type a new text in our '''document'''.
|-"
|| Cursor next to point 2

Type '''“Linux is a virus resistant operating system since each user has a distinct data space and cannot directly access the program files”. '''
|| Keep cursor next to the point 2 and type-

'''“Linux is a virus resistant operating system since each user has a distinct data space and cannot directly access the program files”. '''
|-"
|| Press Enter
|| Then press '''Enter.'''
|-"
|| Point to point no 3
|| We can see that point number 2 has become a new point, that is number 3.
|-"
|| Point to new line
|| Note that the newly added text is in a different color.
|-"
|| Cursor on new line
|| Hover the cursor on the newly added text.

A message is displayed -''' “Inserted: Unknown Author”,''' followed by date and time of insertion.
|-"
|| Only Narration
|| Let us replace '''Unknown author''' with our own name.
|-"
|| Tools >> options
|| For that, click on the '''Tools menu''' in the '''menu bar''' and select '''Options.'''
|-"
|| Point to''' Options-Libreoffice-User Data '''
|| '''Options '''dialog box opens up.
|-"
|| Select User Data from list under LibreOffice

Type '''First/last name/initials'''
|| On the left, under '''LibreOffice, '''select '''User Data '''option from the list.

In the '''Address '''section,''' '''type your name in the '''First/last name/initials''' field, as shown.

Notice that our '''initials''' are auto-filled.
|-"
|| Click on '''Apply''' and '''Ok''' button
|| Click on the '''Apply''' button and then on the '''OK''' button at the bottom.
|-"
|| Click on File >> Properties
|| Now click on the '''File menu''' in the '''menu bar '''and select '''Properties.'''
|-"
|| Point to '''Properties'''
|| '''Properties''' dialog box opens up.
|-"
|| Click on Reset Properties button
|| In the '''General''' tab, click on the '''Reset''' '''properties''' button.
|-"
|| Point to created

|| Notice that in the created section in the center of the dialog box, your name appears.
|-"
|| Click on '''OK '''button
|| Click on the '''OK''' button to close the dialog box.
|-"
|| Only Narration
|| Now onwards, the person making the '''comment''' can easily be identified in the '''document'''.
|-"
|| Cursor on first point
|| Let us delete the second sentence from point no. 1 -

'''“It can be installed on all computers without restriction or needing to pay license fees to vendors'''”.
|-"
|| Point to deletion line
|| Note that the deletion does not actually remove''' '''the line.

But marks it as a line suggested for deletion.
|-"
|| Cursor on deleted line
|| Hover the cursor on the deleted line.

We see a message '''Deleted''' followed by the updated '''username''', with date and time.
|-"
|| Only Narration
|| Using this feature, we can modify the '''document''' by adding or deleting changes.
|-"
|| Press''' Ctrl + S, '''Click on the''' X '''icon
|| Save the changes and close the file.
|-"
|| Slide: More about Track Changes
|| Next, let's learn more about '''Track Changes.'''

* More than one person can edit the same '''document.'''
* '''LibreOffice Writer''' will show each edit in different colors.
* This will help the readers to distinguish one '''reviewer’s''' work from the other.

|-"
|| Open the document '''Government-support-for-FOSS-in-India.odt '''
|| Now open the file '''Government-support-for-FOSS-in-India.odt'''

which you have downloaded from '''Code Files '''link'''.'''
|-"
|| Point to deleted lines
|| In this '''document,''' we can see several additions and deletions have been done.
|-"
|| Cursor on Deleted text in Point 1
|| Hover '''cursor''' on the deleted text in point 1.

It displays the deletion done by '''Guru.'''
|-"
|| Cursor at the last point and Press Enter
|| Keep the '''cursor''' at the end of the last point and press '''Enter'''.
|-"
|| Type “CDAC, NIC, NRC-FOSS are institutions of Government of India which develop and promote FOSS”.
|| Then type the following text-

'''“CDAC, NIC, NRC-FOSS are institutions of Government of India which develop and promote FOSS'''. “
|-"
|| Point to different color
|| We can see the color of this text is different from the color edited by '''Guru.'''
|-"
|| Cursor on newly type text
|| Hover the '''cursor''' on the newly typed text.

It shows your name along with the date and time.
|-"
|| Only Narration

Only Narration
|| This indicates that more than one person can edit the same '''document.'''

Note - This is possible only if the '''author''' gives '''editing rights''' to other readers.
|-"
|| Only Narration
|| Now we will learn how the '''author''' can accept or reject changes made by another '''reviewer'''.
|-"
|| Only Narration
|| Let us assume, I am the '''author''' and I will accept or reject the '''edits''' made by '''Guru.'''
|-"
|| Cursor on word '''Reason '''

Right Click on mouse and select Accept change option (Only highlight)

Click on '''Accept Track Change icon'''

|| In point no 2, click on the deleted text '''reasons'''.

Right-click the mouse and select the '''Accept Change''' option.

Another way is to click on''' Accept Track Change''' icon

In the '''Track Changes toolbar '''

|-"
|| Point towards deleted word reasons
|| The text “'''reasons'''” gets deleted as per the change suggested by the '''reviewer.'''
|-"

|| Cursor on text needs

Click on '''Accept Track Change '''icon
|| On the same line, click the on the text '''needs.'''

Again click on the '''Accept Track Change '''icon in the '''Track Changes toolbar.'''
|-"
|| Point to text '''needs'''
|| Observe that the text '''needs''' gets included, as per the change suggested by the '''reviewer'''.
|-"
|| Only Narration
|| Using this feature, '''edits''' suggested by '''reviewers'''

can be accepted by the '''author'''.
|-"
|| Cursor on Point 1 deleted text

Click on '''Reject Track change icon'''
|| In point no 1, click on the deleted text.

Then click on the '''Reject Track change '''icon in the '''Track''' '''Changes''' '''toolbar.'''
|-"
|| Point to text

|| Observe that the text becomes normal.

The suggestion given by the '''reviewer''' was to delete the text.

But that suggestion has been '''rejected''' by the '''author.'''
|-"
|| Cursor on point no 5
|| Move the cursor to point no 5.
|-"
|| Select entire text

Click '''Reject Track Change '''icon
|| Select the entire text and click on the '''Reject Track Change '''icon

in the '''Track''' '''Changes''' '''toolbar.'''
|-"
|| Cursor on point 4 (Only Highlight)

Right click on mouse >> select Reject Change on
|| We can also reject a change by right-clicking on the mouse''' '''and''' '''selecting''' Reject change. '''
|-"
|| Only Narration
|| This deletes the entire text inserted by the '''reviewer.'''
|-"
|| Click on '''Show Track Changes''' and '''Record Track Changes '''
|| Disable the '''Show Track Changes''' and '''Record Track Changes''' icons by clicking on them.
|-"
|| Only Narration
|| Move the cursor to point no 5
|-"
|| Press '''Backspace''' key

|| Now delete the blank '''space''' by pressing the '''Backspace''' key on the keyboard.
|-"
|| Only Narration
|| Now onwards any further editing will not be marked separately.
|-"
|| Press Ctrl + S
|| Pause the tutorial.

Save''' '''the file after accepting or rejecting changes

To incorporate all the suggestions.

|-"
|| Only Narration
|| Another feature in '''Writer''' is inserting and deleting a '''comment.'''

It helps users to exchange ideas and suggestions, which are important.
|-"
|| Only Narration
|| In our '''document''', we will add a '''comment''' to the word '''e-governance'''.
|-"
|| Select word '''e-governance''' right click and select '''comment'''
|| In point no. 3, select the word '''e-governance.'''

Then right-click and select the '''Comment''' option.
|-"
|| Point to '''Insert Comment''' icon in '''Track''' '''Changes''' toolbar
|| We can also add '''comments'''

by clicking on the '''Insert Comment''' icon in the '''Track''' '''Changes''' toolbar.
|-"
|| Point to comment box
|| A '''comment''' box appears on the right side of the '''document.'''
|-"
|| Type “ What is e-governance?” in the comment box
|| In the '''comment''' box, type the '''comment''' as “'''What is e-governance?”'''
|-"
|| Point to commenters name date and time
|| We can see the '''commenter’s''' name along with date and time.
|-"
|| Only Narration
|| Next, we will see how one can reply to a '''comment'''.
|-"
|| Cursor on Comment box

Click on Insert comment
|| Once again keep the cursor on the '''comment''' box.

Then click on the '''Insert''' '''Comment''' icon located in the '''Standar''' '''toolbar.'''
|-"
|| Point to newly added reply comment box
|| We can see a new '''Reply''' '''Comment''' box gets added to our document.
|-"
|| Type “It means electronic governance”
|| Inside the '''reply''' '''comment''' box type '''“It means electronic governance'''”
|-"
|| Only narration
|| Let us delete the newly added '''comment “It means''' '''electronic governance'''”
|-"
|| Click on down arrow >> select '''Delete comment'''
|| Click on the down-arrow icon in the '''Reply''' '''comment''' box and select '''Delete comment '''option.
|-"
|| Delete the comment What is e governance
|| Repeat the same steps to delete the comment “'''What is e governance ?” '''
|-"
|| Point to word e-governance
|| We see that both the '''comments''' are now deleted.

And also the word is no more highlighted.
|-"
|| Click on Record Track change icon in the track changes toolbar
|| To delete another person’s comments, first disable the '''Record Track Change''' icon.

And then press '''Delete''' key on the keyboard.
|-"
|| Press''' Ctrl + S, '''Click on the''' X ''' icon
|| Save and close the file.
|-"
|| Only Narration
|| This brings us to the end of this tutorial.

Let us summarise.
|-"
|| Slide: '''Summary'''

|| In this tutorial, we learnt how to
* '''Peer review''' a '''document''' using '''Track changes '''option
* Edit a '''document''' using '''Record changes''' option
* Add '''comments''' in a '''document'''

|-"
|| Slide: '''Assignment'''
|| As an assignment:

* Open''' Seven-Reason-to-adopt-FOSS.odt '''file
* Delete and correct the word '''available''' using '''Record changes'''
* Use '''Accept''' '''change''' option to accept the changes

|-"
|| Slide: '''About spoken tutorial project'''
|| The video at the following link summarises the spoken tutorial project.

Please download and watch it.
|-"
|| Slide: '''Spoken Tutorial workshops'''
|| We conduct workshops using '''spoken tutorials '''and give certificates.

For more details, Please contact us.
|-"
|| Slide: '''Forums Specific Questions'''
|| Please post your timed queries in this forum.
|-"
|| Slide: '''Acknowledgment'''
|| The''' Spoken Tutorial '''project is funded by '''MHRD''' Govt of India.
|-"
|| Slide: '''Thank you'''
|| This tutorial was originally contributed by DesiCrew Solutions Pvt. Ltd. in 2011.

This is Pratik Kamble along with the Spoken Tutorial team from''' IIT Bombay''' signing off.

Thank you for watching.
|-
|}

LibreOffice-Suite-Writer-6.3/C4/Using-Track-changes/English

2020-10-20T08:44:05Z

Pratik kamble:

Title: Using Track Changes

Author: Pratik Kamble

Novice Reviewer: Nikita Misal and Pooja Moolya

Domain Reviewer: Praveen and Nancy

Keywords: Peer review, Edit document, Add comment, Reject Track change, Accept Track changes, Record Track change, Show Record Track changes

{| border=1
|-
| align=center| Visual Cue
| align=center| Narration
|-
|| Slide - '''Title'''

|| Welcome to the spoken tutorial on''' Using Track Changes '''in '''Writer.'''
|-
|| Slide - '''Learning objective'''
|| In this tutorial, we will learn how to:

* '''Peer review''' a '''document '''using '''Track changes '''option
* '''Edit''' a '''document''' using '''Record changes''' option and
* Add '''comments''' in a '''document'''

|-
|| Slide - '''System Requirements'''
|| This tutorial is recorded using

* '''Ubuntu linux OS '''version '''18.04 '''and
* '''LibreOffice Suite '''version '''6.3.5'''

|-
|| Slide - '''Track changes'''
||
* '''Track changes''' helps the '''reviewer''' to keep track of changes
* This feature is especially important for those who use '''Writer''' in workgroups.
* It helps the '''reviewer''' to give '''comments'''

|-
|| Slide''': Code files'''
||
* The files used in this tutorial have been provided to you in the''' Code files''' link on this tutorial page.
* Pls download and extract the file.
* Make a copy and then use it for practising.

|-"
|| Open '''Seven-reasons-to-adopt-FOSS.odt'''
|| Open the file '''Seven-reasons-to-adopt-FOSS.odt '''which you have downloaded from '''Code Files '''link.
|-
|| Click on Icon '''Show track changes functions'''

Point to '''Changes toolbar '''
|| Click on the''' Show Track Changes Functions '''icon''' '''in''' '''the '''Standard toolbar'''.

The '''Track''' '''changes toolbar''' appears at the bottom of the '''Writer''' window.
|-
|| Point to '''Show Track Changes''' and '''Record Track Changes '''
|| Make sure that the '''Show Track Changes''' and

'''Record Track Changes''' icons are enabled.

If not, then enable these by clicking on them.
|-"
|| Only Narration

Click on '''Edit '''>> '''Track Changes''' >> '''Record''' (Only Highlight)
|| Let us see another way to enable these options.

Go to the '''Edit''' '''menu''' select '''Track''' '''Changes '''from''' '''the''' '''list

And check the '''Record '''and '''Show '''options.
|-"
|| Only Narration
|| Now let’s type a new text in our '''document'''.
|-"
|| Cursor next to point 2

Type '''“Linux is a virus resistant operating system since each user has a distinct data space and cannot directly access the program files”. '''
|| Keep cursor next to the point 2 and type-

'''“Linux is a virus resistant operating system since each user has a distinct data space and cannot directly access the program files”. '''
|-"
|| Press Enter
|| Then press '''Enter.'''
|-"
|| Point to point no 3
|| We can see that point number 2 has become a new point, that is number 3.
|-"
|| Point to new line
|| Note that the newly added text is in a different color.
|-"
|| Cursor on new line
|| Hover the cursor on the newly added text.

A message is displayed -''' “Inserted: Unknown Author”,''' followed by date and time of insertion.
|-"
|| Only Narration
|| Let us replace '''Unknown author''' with our own name.
|-"
|| Tools >> options
|| For that, click on the '''Tools menu''' in the '''menu bar''' and select '''Options.'''
|-"
|| Point to''' Options-Libreoffice-User Data '''
|| '''Options '''dialog box opens up.
|-"
|| Select User Data from list under LibreOffice

Type '''First/last name/initials'''
|| On the left, under '''LibreOffice, '''select '''User Data '''option from the list.

In the '''Address '''section,''' '''type your name in the '''First/last name/initials''' field, as shown.

Notice that our '''initials''' are auto-filled.
|-"
|| Click on '''Apply''' and '''Ok''' button
|| Click on the '''Apply''' button and then on the '''OK''' button at the bottom.
|-"
|| Click on File >> Properties
|| Now click on the '''File menu''' in the '''menu bar '''and select '''Properties.'''
|-"
|| Point to '''Properties'''
|| '''Properties''' dialog box opens up.
|-"
|| Click on Reset Properties button
|| In the '''General''' tab, click on the '''Reset''' '''properties''' button.
|-"
|| Point to created

|| Notice that in the created section in the center of the dialog box, your name appears.
|-"
|| Click on '''OK '''button
|| Click on the '''OK''' button to close the dialog box.
|-"
|| Only Narration
|| Now onwards, the person making the '''comment''' can easily be identified in the '''document'''.
|-"
|| Cursor on first point
|| Let us delete the second sentence from point no. 1 -

'''“It can be installed on all computers without restriction or needing to pay license fees to vendors'''”.
|-"
|| Point to deletion line
|| Note that the deletion does not actually remove''' '''the line.

But marks it as a line suggested for deletion.
|-"
|| Cursor on deleted line
|| Hover the cursor on the deleted line.

We see a message '''Deleted''' followed by the updated '''username''', with date and time.
|-"
|| Only Narration
|| Using this feature, we can modify the '''document''' by adding or deleting changes.
|-"
|| Press''' Ctrl + S, '''Click on the''' X '''icon
|| Save the changes and close the file.
|-"
|| Slide: More about Track Changes
|| Next, let's learn more about '''Track Changes.'''

* More than one person can edit the same '''document.'''
* '''LibreOffice Writer''' will show each edit in different colors.
* This will help the readers to distinguish one '''reviewer’s''' work from the other.

|-"
|| Open the document '''Government-support-for-FOSS-in-India.odt '''
|| Now open the file '''Government-support-for-FOSS-in-India.odt'''

which you have downloaded from '''Code Files '''link'''.'''
|-"
|| Point to deleted lines
|| In this '''document,''' we can see several additions and deletions have been done.
|-"
|| Cursor on Deleted text in Point 1
|| Hover '''cursor''' on the deleted text in point 1.

It displays the deletion done by '''Guru.'''
|-"
|| Cursor at the last point and Press Enter
|| Keep the '''cursor''' at the end of the last point and press '''Enter'''.
|-"
|| Type “CDAC, NIC, NRC-FOSS are institutions of Government of India which develop and promote FOSS”.
|| Then type the following text-

'''“CDAC, NIC, NRC-FOSS are institutions of Government of India which develop and promote FOSS'''. “
|-"
|| Point to different color
|| We can see the color of this text is different from the color edited by '''Guru.'''
|-"
|| Cursor on newly type text
|| Hover the '''cursor''' on the newly typed text.

It shows your name along with the date and time.
|-"
|| Only Narration

Only Narration
|| This indicates that more than one person can edit the same '''document.'''

Note - This is possible only if the '''author''' gives '''editing rights''' to other readers.
|-"
|| Only Narration
|| Now we will learn how the '''author''' can accept or reject changes made by another '''reviewer'''.
|-"
|| Only Narration
|| Let us assume, I am the '''author''' and I will accept or reject the '''edits''' made by '''Guru.'''
|-"
|| Cursor on word '''Reason '''

Right Click on mouse and select Accept change option (Only highlight)

Click on '''Accept Track Change icon'''

|| In point no 2, click on the deleted text '''reasons'''.

Right-click the mouse and select the '''Accept Change''' option.

Another way is to click on''' Accept Track Change''' icon

In the '''Track Changes toolbar '''

|-"
|| Point towards deleted word reasons
|| The text “'''reasons'''” gets deleted as per the change suggested by the '''reviewer.'''
|-"

|| Cursor on text needs

Click on '''Accept Track Change '''icon
|| On the same line, click the on the text '''needs.'''

Again click on the '''Accept Track Change '''icon in the '''Track Changes toolbar.'''
|-"
|| Point to text '''needs'''
|| Observe that the text '''needs''' gets included, as per the change suggested by the '''reviewer'''.
|-"
|| Only Narration
|| Using this feature, '''edits''' suggested by '''reviewers'''

can be accepted by the '''author'''.
|-"
|| Cursor on Point 1 deleted text

Click on '''Reject Track change icon'''
|| In point no 1, click on the deleted text.

Then click on the '''Reject Track change '''icon in the '''Track''' '''Changes''' '''toolbar.'''
|-"
|| Point to text

|| Observe that the text becomes normal.

The suggestion given by the '''reviewer''' was to delete the text.

But that suggestion has been '''rejected''' by the '''author.'''
|-"
|| Cursor on point no 5
|| Move the cursor to point no 5.
|-"
|| Select entire text

Click '''Reject Track Change '''icon
|| Select the entire text and click on the '''Reject Track Change '''icon

in the '''Track''' '''Changes''' '''toolbar.'''
|-"
|| Cursor on point 4 (Only Highlight)

Right click on mouse >> select Reject Change on
|| We can also reject a change by right-clicking on the mouse''' '''and''' '''selecting''' Reject change. '''
|-"
|| Only Narration
|| This deletes the entire text inserted by the '''reviewer.'''
|-"
|| Click on '''Show Track Changes''' and '''Record Track Changes '''
|| Disable the '''Show Track Changes''' and '''Record Track Changes''' icons by clicking on them.
|-"
|| Only Narration
|| Move the cursor to point no 5
|-"
|| Press '''Backspace''' key

|| Now delete the blank '''space''' by pressing the '''Backspace''' key on the keyboard.
|-"
|| Only Narration
|| Now onwards any further editing will not be marked separately.
|-"
|| Press Ctrl + S
|| Pause the tutorial.

Save''' '''the file after accepting or rejecting changes

To incorporate all the suggestions.

|-"
|| Only Narration
|| Another feature in '''Writer''' is inserting and deleting a '''comment.'''

It helps users to exchange ideas and suggestions, which are important.
|-"
|| Only Narration
|| In our '''document''', we will add a '''comment''' to the word '''e-governance'''.
|-"
|| Select word '''e-governance''' right click and select '''comment'''
|| In point no. 3, select the word '''e-governance.'''

Then right-click and select the '''Comment''' option.
|-"
|| Point to '''Insert Comment''' icon in '''Track''' '''Changes''' toolbar
|| We can also add '''comments'''

by clicking on the '''Insert Comment''' icon in the '''Track''' '''Changes''' toolbar.
|-"
|| Point to comment box
|| A '''comment''' box appears on the right side of the '''document.'''
|-"
|| Type “ What is e-governance?” in the comment box
|| In the '''comment''' box, type the '''comment''' as “'''What is e-governance?”'''
|-"
|| Point to commenters name date and time
|| We can see the '''commenter’s''' name along with date and time.
|-"
|| Only Narration
|| Next, we will see how one can reply to a '''comment'''.
|-"
|| Cursor on Comment box

Click on Insert comment
|| Once again keep the cursor on the '''comment''' box.

Then click on the '''Insert''' '''Comment''' icon located in the '''Standar''' '''toolbar.'''
|-"
|| Point to newly added reply comment box
|| We can see a new '''Reply''' '''Comment''' box gets added to our document.
|-"
|| Type “It means electronic governance”
|| Inside the '''reply''' '''comment''' box type '''“It means electronic governance'''”
|-"
|| Only narration
|| Let us delete the newly added '''comment “It means''' '''electronic governance'''”
|-"
|| Click on down arrow >> select '''Delete comment'''
|| Click on the down-arrow icon in the '''Reply''' '''comment''' box and select '''Delete comment '''option.
|-"
|| Delete the comment What is e governance
|| Repeat the same steps to delete the comment “'''What is e governance ?” '''
|-"
|| Point to word e-governance
|| We see that both the '''comments''' are now deleted.

And also the word is no more highlighted.
|-"
|| Click on Record Track change icon in the track changes toolbar
|| To delete another person’s comments, first disable the '''Record Track Change''' icon.

And then press '''Delete''' key on the keyboard.
|-"
|| Press''' Ctrl + S, '''Click on the''' X ''' icon
|| Save and close the file.
|-"
|| Only Narration
|| This brings us to the end of this tutorial.

Let us summarise.
|-"
|| Slide: '''Summary'''

|| In this tutorial, we learnt how to
* '''Peer review''' a '''document''' using '''Track changes '''option
* Edit a '''document''' using '''Record changes''' option
* Add '''comments''' in a '''document'''

|-"
|| Slide: '''Assignment'''
|| As an assignment:

* Open''' Seven-Reason-to-adopt-FOSS.odt '''file
* Delete and correct the word '''available''' using '''Record changes'''
* Use '''Accept''' '''change''' option to accept the changes

|-"
|| Slide: '''About spoken tutorial project'''
|| The video at the following link summarises the spoken tutorial project.

Please download and watch it.
|-"
|| Slide: '''Spoken Tutorial workshops'''
|| We conduct workshops using '''spoken tutorials '''and give certificates.

For more details, Please contact us.
|-"
|| Slide: '''Forums Specific Questions'''
|| Please post your timed queries in this forum.
|-"
|| Slide: '''Acknowledgment'''
|| The''' Spoken Tutorial '''project is funded by '''MHRD''' Govt of India.
|-"
|| Slide: '''Thank you'''
|| This tutorial was originally contributed by DesiCrew Solutions Pvt. Ltd. in 2011.

This is Pratik Kamble along with the Spoken Tutorial team from''' IIT Bombay''' signing off.

Thank you for watching.
|-
|}

LibreOffice-Suite-Writer-6.3/C4/Using-Track-changes/English

2020-10-16T13:11:37Z

Pratik kamble: Created page with "Title: Using Track Changes Author: Pratik Kamble Novice Reviewer: Nikita Misal and Pooja Moolya Domain Reviewer: Praveen and Nancy Keywords: Peer review, Edit document, A..."

Title: Using Track Changes

Author: Pratik Kamble

Novice Reviewer: Nikita Misal and Pooja Moolya

Domain Reviewer: Praveen and Nancy

Keywords: Peer review, Edit document, Add comment, Reject Track change, Accept Track changes, Record Track change, Show Record Track changes

{| border=1
|-
| align=center| Visual Cue
| align=center| Narration
|-
|| Slide - '''Title'''

|| Welcome to the spoken tutorial on''' Using Track Changes '''in '''Writer.'''
|-
|| Slide - '''Learning objective'''
|| In this tutorial, we will learn how to:
* '''Peer review''' a '''document '''using '''Track changes '''option
* '''Edit''' a '''document''' using '''Record changes''' option and
* Add '''comments''' in a '''document'''

|-
|| Slide - '''System Requirements'''
|| This tutorial is recorded using
* '''Ubuntu Linux OS '''version '''18.04''' and
* '''LibreOffice Suite '''version '''6.3.5'''

|-
|| Slide - '''Track changes'''
||
* '''Track changes''' helps the '''reviewer''' to keep track of the changes
* This feature is especially important for those who use '''Writer''' in workgroups.
* It helps the '''reviewer''' to give '''comments'''

|-
|| Slide''': Code files'''
||
* The files used in this tutorial have been provided to you in the''' Code files''' link on this tutorial page.
* Pls download and extract the file.
* Make a copy and then use it for practising.

|-
|| Open '''Seven-reasons-to-adopt-FOSS.odt'''
|| Open the file '''Seven-reasons-to-adopt-FOSS.odt '''which you have downloaded from '''Code Files '''link.
|-
|| Click on Icon '''Show track changes functions'''

Point to '''Changes toolbar '''
|| Click on the''' Show Track Changes Functions '''icon''' '''in''' '''the '''Standard toolbar'''.

The '''Track''' '''changes toolbar''' appears at the bottom of the '''Writer''' window.
|-
|| Point to '''Show Track Changes''' and '''Record Track Changes '''
|| Make sure that the '''Show Track Changes''' and

'''Record Track Changes''' icons are enabled.

If not, then enable these by clicking on them.
|-
|| Only Narration

Click on '''Edit '''>> '''Track Changes''' >> '''Record''' (Only Highlight)
|| Let us see another way to enable these options.

Go to the '''Edit''' '''menu''' select '''Track''' '''Changes '''from''' '''the''' '''list

And check the '''Record '''and '''Show '''options.
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Now let’s type a new text in our '''document'''.
|-
|| Cursor next to point 2

Type '''“Linux is a virus resistant operating system since each user has a distinct data space and cannot directly access the program files”. '''
|| Keep cursor next to the point 2 and type-

'''“Linux is a virus resistant operating system since each user has a distinct data space and cannot directly access the program files”. '''
|-
|| Press Enter
|| Then press '''Enter.'''
|-
|| Point to point no 3
|| We can see that point number 2 has become a new point, that is number 3.
|-
|| Point to new line
|| Note that the newly added text is in a different color.
|-
|| Cursor on new line
|| Hover the cursor on the newly added text.

A message is displayed -''' “Inserted: Unknown Author”,''' followed by date and time of insertion.
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Let us replace '''Unknown author''' with our own name.
|-
|| Tools >> options
|| For that, click on the '''Tools menu''' in the '''menu bar''' and select '''Options.'''
|-
|| Point to''' Options-Libreoffice-User Data '''
|| '''Options '''dialog box opens up.
|-
|| Select User Data from list under LibreOffice

Type '''First/last name/initials'''
|| On the left, under '''LibreOffice, '''select '''User Data '''option from the list.

In the '''Address '''section,''' '''type your name in the '''First/last name/initials''' field, as shown.

Notice that our '''initials''' are auto-filled.
|-
|| Click on '''Apply''' and '''Ok''' button
|| Click on the '''Apply''' button and then on the '''OK''' button at the bottom.
|-
|| Click on File >> Properties
|| Now click on the '''File menu''' in the '''menu bar '''and select '''Properties.'''
|-
|| Point to '''Properties'''
|| '''Properties''' dialog box opens up.
|-
|| Click on Reset Properties button
|| In the '''General''' tab, click on the '''Reset''' '''properties''' button.
|-
|| Point to created

|| Notice that, in the '''Created''' section in the center of the dialog box, your name appears.
|-
|| Click on '''OK '''button
|| Click on the '''OK''' button to close the dialog box.
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Now onwards, the person making the '''comment''' can easily be identified in the '''document'''.
|-
|| Cursor on first point
|| Let us delete the second sentence from point no. 1 -

'''“It can be installed on all computers without restriction or needing to pay license fees to vendors'''”.
|-
|| Point to deletion line
|| Note that the deletion does not actually remove''' '''the line.

But marks it as a line suggested for deletion.
|-
|| Cursor on deleted line
|| Hover the cursor on the deleted line.

We see a message '''Deleted''' followed by the updated '''username''', with date and time.
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Using this feature, we can modify the '''document''' by adding or deleting changes.
|-
||Press''' Ctrl + S, '''Click on the''' X '''icon
||Save the changes and close the file.
|-
|| Slide: More about Track Changes
|| Next, let's learn more about '''Track Changes.'''

* More than one person can edit the same '''document.'''
* '''LibreOffice Writer''' will show each edit in different colors.
* This will help the readers to distinguish one '''reviewer’s''' work from the other.

|-
|| Open the document '''Government-support-for-FOSS-in-India.odt '''
|| Now open the file '''Government-support-for-FOSS-in-India.odt'''

which you have downloaded from '''Code Files '''link'''.'''
|-
|| Point to deleted lines
|| In this '''document,''' we can see several additions and deletions have been done.
|-
|| Cursor on Deleted text in Point 1
|| Hover '''cursor''' on the deleted text in point 1.

It displays the deletion done by '''Guru.'''
|-
|| Cursor at the last point and Press Enter
|| Keep the '''cursor''' at the end of the last point and press '''Enter'''.
|-
|| Type “CDAC, NIC, NRC-FOSS are institutions of Government of India which develop and promote FOSS”.
|| Then type the following text-

'''“CDAC, NIC, NRC-FOSS are institutions of Government of India which develop and promote FOSS'''. “
|-
|| Point to different color
|| We can see the color of this text is different from the color edited by '''Guru.'''
|-
|| Cursor on newly type text
|| Hover the '''cursor''' on the newly typed text.

It shows your name along with the date and time.
|-
|| Only Narration

Only Narration
|| This indicates that more than one person can edit the same '''document.'''

Note - This is possible only if the '''author''' gives '''editing rights''' to other readers.
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Now we will learn how the '''author''' can accept or reject changes made by another '''reviewer'''.
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Let us assume, I am the '''author''' and I will accept or reject the '''edits''' made by '''Guru.'''
|-
|| Cursor on word '''Reason '''

Right Click on mouse and select Accept change option (Only highlight)

Click on '''Accept Track Change icon'''

|| In point no 2, click on the deleted text '''reasons'''.

Right-click the mouse and select the '''Accept Change''' option.

Another way is to click on''' Accept Track Change''' icon

In the'''Track Changes toolbar '''
|- "
||
|| Then click on the '''Accept Track Change '''icon in the '''Track''' '''Changes''' '''toolbar.'''
|- "
|| Right click on mouse and select Accept change (Only Highlight)
|| Another way is to right-click the mouse and select the '''Accept Change''' option.
|-
|| Point towards deleted word reasons
|| The text “'''reasons'''” gets deleted as per the change suggested by the '''reviewer.'''
|-
|| Cursor on text needs

Click on '''Accept Track Change '''icon
|| On the same line, click the on the text '''needs.'''

Again click on the '''Accept Track Change '''icon in the '''Track Changes toolbar.'''
|-
|| Point to text '''needs'''
|| Observe that the text '''needs''' gets included, as per the change suggested by the '''reviewer'''.
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Using this feature, '''edits''' suggested by '''reviewers'''

can be accepted by the '''authors'''.
|-
|| Cursor on Point 1 deleted text

Click on '''Reject Track change icon'''
|| In point no 1, click on the deleted text.

Then click on the '''Reject Track change '''icon in the '''Track''' '''Changes''' '''toolbar.'''
|-
|| Point to text

|| Observe that the text becomes normal.

The suggestion given by the '''reviewer''' was to delete the text.

But that suggestion has been '''rejected''' by the '''author.'''
|-
|| Cursor on point no 5
|| Move the cursor to point no 5.
|-
|| Select entire text

Click '''Reject Track Change '''icon
|| Select the entire text and click on the '''Reject Track Change '''icon

Located in the '''Track''' '''Changes''' '''toolbar.'''
|-
|| Cursor on point 4 (Only Highlight)

Right click on mouse >> select Reject Change on
|| We can also reject a change by right-clicking on the mouse''' '''and''' '''selecting''' Reject change. '''
|-
|| Only Narration
|| This deletes the entire text inserted by the '''reviewer.'''
|-
|| Click on '''Show Track Changes''' and '''Record Track Changes '''
|| Disable the '''Show Track Changes''' and '''Record Track Changes''' icons by clicking on them.
|-
|| Press '''Backspace''' key

|| Move the cursor to point no 5 Now delete the blank '''space''' by pressing the '''Backspace''' key on the keyboard.
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Now onwards any further editing will not be marked separately.
|-
|| Press Ctrl + S
|| Pause the tutorial.

Save''' '''the file after accepting or rejecting changes to incorporate all the suggestions.

Then resume the tutorial
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Another feature in '''Writer''' is inserting and deleting a '''comment.'''

It helps users to exchange ideas and suggestions, which are important.
|-
|| Only Narration
|| In our '''document''', we will add a '''comment''' to the word '''e-governance'''.
|-
|| Select word '''e-governance''' right click and select '''comment'''
|| In point no. 3, select the word '''e-governance.'''

Then right-click and select the '''Comment''' option.
|-
|| Point to '''Insert Comment''' icon in '''Track''' '''Changes''' toolbar
|| We can also add '''comments''' by clicking on the '''Insert Comment''' icon in the '''Track''' '''Changes''' toolbar.
|-
|| Point to comment box
|| A '''comment''' box appears on the right side of the '''document.'''
|-
|| Type “ What is e-governance?” in the comment box
|| In the '''comment''' box, type the '''comment''' as “'''What is e-governance?”'''
|-
|| Point to commenters name date and time
|| We can see the '''commenter’s''' name along with date and time.
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Next, we will see how one can reply to a '''comment'''.
|-
|| Cursor on Comment box

Click on Insert comment
|| Once again keep the cursor on the '''comment''' box.

Then click on the '''Insert''' '''Comment''' icon located in the '''Standard''' '''toolbar.'''
|-
|| Point to newly added reply comment box
|| We can see a new '''Reply''' '''Comment''' box gets added to our document.
|-
|| Type “It means electronic governance”
|| Inside the '''reply''' '''comment''' box type '''“It means electronic governance'''”
|-
|| Only narration
|| Let us delete the newly added '''comment “It means''' '''electronic governance'''”
|-
|| Click on down arrow >> select '''Delete comment'''
|| To do so, click on the down-arrow icon in the '''Reply''' '''comment''' box and select '''Delete comment '''option.
|-
|| Delete the comment What is e governance
|| Repeat the same steps to delete the comment “'''What is e governance ?” '''
|-
| | Point to word e-governance
| | We see that both the '''comments''' are now deleted.

Also the word is no more highlighted.
|-
| | Click on Record Track change icon in the track changes toolbar
| | To delete another person’s comments, first disable the '''Record Track Change'''icon.

And then press '''Delete''' key on the keyboard.
|-
||Press''' Ctrl + S, '''Click on the''' X '''icon
||Save and close the file.
|-
|| Only Narration
|| This brings us to the end of this tutorial.

Let us summarise.
|-
|| Slide: '''Summary'''

|| In this tutorial, we learnt how to

* '''Peer review''' a '''document''' using '''Track changes '''option
* Edit a '''document''' using '''Record changes''' option
* Add '''comments''' in a '''document'''

|-
|| Slide: '''Assignment'''
|| As an assignment:

* Open''' Seven-Reason-to-adopt-FOSS.odt '''file which is provided in '''Code Files''' link
* Delete and correct the word '''available''' using '''Record changes'''
* Use '''Accept''' '''change''' option to accept the changes

|-
|| Slide: '''About spoken tutorial project'''
|| The video at the following link summarises the spoken tutorial project.

Please download and watch it.
|-
|| Slide: '''Spoken Tutorial workshops'''
|| We conduct workshops using '''spoken tutorials '''and give certificates.

For more details, Please contact us.
|-
|| Slide: '''Forums Specific Questions'''
|| Please post your timed queries in this forum.
|-
|| Slide: '''Acknowledgment'''
|| The''' Spoken Tutorial '''project is funded by '''MHRD''' Govt of India.
|-
|| Slide: '''Thank you'''
|| This tutorial was originally contributed by DesiCrew Solutions Pvt. Ltd. in 2011.

This is Pratik Kamble along with the Spoken Tutorial team from''' IIT Bombay''' signing off.

Thank you for watching.
|-
|}

LibreOffice-Suite-Writer-6.3/C3/Header,-Footer-and-Notes/English

2020-10-15T06:09:21Z

Pratik kamble:

Title: Header Footer and notes

Author: Pratik Kamble

Novice Reviewer:

Domain Reviewer: Praveen and Nancy

Keywords: Insert Header, Insert Footer, Insert Endnote, Insert Footnote, Removed Header and Footer

{|border=1
|-
| align=center| Visual Cue
| align=center| Narration

|-
|| Slide: Title Slide
|| Welcome to the '''spoken tutorial''' on '''Header, Footer and Notes.'''

|-
| Slide: Learning Objectives
|In this tutorial, we will learn how to:

* Insert '''Header'''
* Insert '''Footer'''
* Remove '''Header '''and''' Footer''' from the first page and
* Insert '''Footnote''' and '''Endnote''' in a '''document'''

|-
|| Slide: System Requirements
|| This tutorial is recorded using

* '''Ubuntu Linux OS''' version '''18.04''' and
* '''LibreOffice Suite '''version '''6.3.5'''

|-
|| Open '''Newsletter.odt '''file
|| Open the file '''Newsletter.odt '''which we have created earlier.
|-
|| '''Slide: Code files'''
||
* This file has been provided to you in the''' Code files''' link on this tutorial page.
* Pls download and extract the file.
* Make a copy and then use it for practising.

|-
|| Only Narration
|| First we will learn how to insert a '''Footer''' in our '''document'''.
|-
|| Click '''Insert '''>> '''Header and Footer'''

Click on '''Use Header Footer '''
|| Click on the '''Insert''' menu in the '''menu bar''' and go to the '''Header and Footer '''option.

Now check the''' Use header/footer menu''' option, if it is unchecked.
|-
|| Click on bottom text area
|| Scroll the page and click on the bottom of the text area to display the '''Footer''' marker.
|-
|| Point to '''Footer''' marker

Click on Plus symbol

Point to newly added '''Footer'''
|| The '''Footer''' marker appears in our '''document'''.

Click on the '''Plus''' symbol next to the word '''Footer.'''

We see that the '''Footer''' is added to the bottom of the page.
|-
|| Click on Insert

|| Another way to add a '''Footer''' in our '''document'''

is by clicking on the '''Insert menu''' in the '''menu''' '''bar.'''
|-
|| Click on Insert >>Header and Footer >> Footer >> Default Style option

Only highlight >> DO NOT CLICK
|| Go to the '''Header and''' '''Footer '''option.''' '''

Select''' Footer '''sub-menu and choose the '''Default''' '''style '''option.
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Either ways, the cursor is in the '''footer '''area.
|-
||

Click on Down arrow in '''Footer Default style'''

Select '''Insert Page number'''
|| To add a page number in the '''footer''', click on the down arrow of '''Footer Default style. '''

Then select''' Insert Page Number''' option.
|-
|| Point to 1 in footer area

|| Immediately, we see that the number '''1''' is displayed in the '''footer.'''
|-
|| Double-click on number 1
|| In order to give different '''styles''' to the page number, double-click on number '''1.'''
|-
|| Point to '''Edit fields''' dialog box
|| '''Edit Fields '''dialog box opens up.
|-
|| Point to different section
|| We have 3 different sections under '''Edit''' '''fields''':
* '''Type'''
* '''Select'''
* '''Format'''

|-
|| Point to '''Format '''options

Point to abc lowercase
ABC uppercase
|| Under the '''Format''' section, we can see many '''formats''' like
* '''a b c''' in lowercase
* '''A B C '''in uppercase and many more

|-
|| Select '''1st 2nd 3rd >> '''Click on '''OK''' button
|| I will select the '''format 1st 2nd 3rd '''and then click on the '''OK''' button at the bottom.
|-
|| Point to the page number
|| Observe that the numbering '''format''' for page 1 changes from '''1''' to '''1st.'''
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Next, let’s learn to insert a '''Header''' into the '''document.'''
|-
|| Click on the top of the text area

Point to the '''Header''' marker
|| Scroll above and click on the top of the text area in the '''document'''.

The '''Header''' marker appears in our '''document'''.
|-
|| Click on the '''down''' '''arrow''' symbol

Point to '''Header'''
|| If not, click on the '''plus''' '''down''' '''arrow''' symbol next to the word '''Header.'''

The '''Header''' gets inserted at the top of the page.
|-
|| Only Narration

Cursor on the Insert Field icon
|| Let us now insert the date in the '''Header.'''

To do so, go to the '''Insert field''' icon located in the '''Standard''' '''toolbar.'''
|-
|| Click on down arrow icon and select Date option
|| Now click on the down arrow icon and select the '''Date''' option from the list.
|-
|| Select '''Date '''
|| The current date is displayed in the '''Header '''area.

You can edit this to any date of your choice, if you wish.
|-
|| Double click on '''Date'''
|| To change the date''' format, '''double-click on the date'''.'''
|-
|| Select 31 Dec 1999 >> Click on '''OK''' button
|| Here we will select the format as '''31. Dec. 1999''' and click on the '''OK '''button.
|-
|| Point to Date
|| The date''' format''' has now changed as per our selection.
|-
|| Keep cursor on page 2, column 1 - before the words In view of this……

Press '''Backspace''' key repeatedly
|| In case the alignment of the content has changed, please realign by pressing the '''Backspace''' key.

Repeat this till the text is on page 1 and column 2.
|-
|| Press '''Enter''' key repeatedly
|| Then press '''Enter''' key repeatedly to align the text below the '''banner'''.
|-
|| Click on''' Toggle print preview'''
|| Now click on the '''Toggle print preview''' icon in the '''Standard toolbar.'''
|-
|| Point to '''Date '''and '''Page number '''

'''Editor can enlarge this for clarity'''
|| The date appears at the top of each page and the page number at the bottom.
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Note - '''header''' and '''footer''' will be replicated on all the pages of the '''document.'''
|-
|| Click on '''Close preview'''
|| Click on the '''Close Preview''' button to close the preview.
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Next let’s learn how to add a '''margin''' and '''shadow''' '''style''' to our '''document.'''
|-
|| Click on Page icon in the sidebar deck
|| Click on the '''Page''' icon located in the '''Sidebar deck.'''
|-
|| Click Styles>> More option
|| Under '''Styles''' option, click on the '''More Options''' icon or the '''gear '''icon.
|-
|| Point to '''Page Style: Default Style '''dialog box opens up

Point to several tabs
|| '''Page Style: Default Style''' dialog box opens up.

There are several tabs which can be used to customize the '''page style''' as per our preferences.
|-
|| Click on Footer tab

Check mark on '''Footer on'''
|| Click on the '''Footer''' tab.

Put a check on the '''Footer on''' option, if not already checked.
|-
|| Set '''left margin''' to '''1.00 cm'''

Click on '''Plus''' symbol repeatedly
|| Now set the '''left margin '''space to''' 1.00 cm '''by clicking on the '''plus''' symbol repeatedly.
|-
|| Click on '''More '''

Point to '''Border/Background'''
|| To add a '''border''' or a '''shadow''' to the '''footer''', click on the '''More '''button.

'''Border/Background''' dialog box opens up.
|-
|| Click on Borders tab

Point to Shadow style and point to various option
|| Click on the '''Borders''' tab, if not already selected.

Under the '''Shadow''' '''Style '''section, we can see various options to position the shadow.
|-
|| Select '''Cast Shadow''' to the top right
|| Select '''Cast shadow to bottom right '''icon'''.'''
|-
|| Point to Color option

Under '''Color '''section click on down arrow
|| Under the '''Color''' option, '''Gray''' is the default shadow colour.

To choose a different colour, click on the down arrow.
|-
|| Point to color palette box >> Choose '''blue''' color
|| You may choose any color of your choice from the '''Color palette box.'''

I will choose '''blue'''.
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Leave all the other settings as default in the '''Border/Background''' dialog box.
|-
|| Click on '''OK '''button
|| Then click on the '''OK '''button.
|-
|| '''>> Page Style: Default Style''' dialog boxClick on '''Apply''' button >> '''OK '''button
|| In the''' Page Style: Default Style''' dialog box, click on the '''Apply''' button and then on the '''OK '''button.
|-
|| Click on Sidebar deck icon
|| Close''' '''the''' Sidebar deck.'''
|-
|| Scroll down >> Point to shadow effect
|| Scroll down to see the''' shadow effect '''added to the '''Footer.'''
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Next, we will learn how to remove the '''Header '''and''' Footer '''from a specific page.
|-
|| Only Narration

Cursor on the first page
|| Let’s remove the ''' ''' '''Header''' from the first page of our '''document'''.

So first click the cursor anywhere on the first page of the '''document.'''
|-
|| '''Styles '''>> '''Manage styles '''
|| In the '''Sidebar deck,''' select the '''Styles''' icon.
|-
|| Point to '''Styles''' panels opens up
|| '''Styles''' '''panel''' opens up.

|-
|| Click on Page styles icon
Select First Page
|| Now click on '''Page Styles''' icon and from the list select '''First Page''' option

|-
|| Double click on First Page option
|| Now double-click on the''' First Page '''option
|-
|| Click on X icon of sidebar deck
|| Close the '''Sidebar deck'''.
|-
|| Scroll up and down the pages to show the result
|| Observe that the '''Header '''and''' Footer '''are now removed only from the first page.
|-
|| Re-adjust the text alignment in column 2 of page 1
|| You may need to re-adjust the text alignment once again, as shown.
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Next, let’s learn about '''Footnotes''' and '''Endnotes''' in '''Writer.'''
|-
|| Slide : Footnote and Endnotes (a)

'''Editor can do this'''
||
* Infographics can be shown in the video instead of the text slide'''Footnotes''' appear at the bottom of the page on which they are referred

* Whereas '''Endnotes''' are collected at the end of a '''document '''or '''chapter'''

|-
|| Slide: Footnote and Endnotes (b)
||
* The '''anchor''' for the '''note''' is inserted at the current cursor position
* '''Anchor''' helps users to go directly to a particular part of the page
* You can choose between '''automatic''' '''numbering''' or a''' custom symbol''' for the '''notes'''

|-
||

Select word '''Apache License''' from the second paragraph
|| Let us see how the '''Footnote''' can be added to a word in the '''document'''.

Select the word '''Apache License '''from''' '''the''' '''second paragraph, in column 1 of page 1.
|-
|| Point to Insert '''Footnote''' '''icon'''
|| In the '''Standard toolbar''' click on the '''Insert''' '''Footnote icon.'''
|-
|| Click on '''Insert''' >> '''Footnote and Endnote >> Footnote'''

Only Highlight
|| We can also insert '''Footnote''' in our '''document''' by clicking on the '''Insert''' menu.

Then click on the '''Footnote and Endnote '''and select the''' Footnote '''option'''.'''
|-
|| Point to added '''Footnote'''
|| Both ways, the '''Footnote''' is added to our document with the '''character''' as '''1.'''
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Let’s type the text for our '''Footnote'''.
|-
|| '''Footnote >> '''Type “'''open source software license ”'''
|| Type “'''open source software license”.'''
|-
|| Only Narration
|| In a similar way, let's add another '''footnote''' in our '''document.'''
|-
|| Select the word '''copyleft''' from the second column on page 1

Click on '''Insert Footnote''' icon
|| Select the word '''copyleft''' from the second column on page 1.

Click on the '''Insert''' '''Footnote''' icon in the '''Standard toolbar.'''
|-
|| Point to '''Footnote 2'''
|| One more '''Footnote''' gets added to our page, this time under the second column.
|-
|| Type '''permissive license'''
|| Now type the text for the '''footnote '''as “'''permissive license”.'''
|-
|| Click on the '''character 1 '''in the '''footnote''' >> word '''Apache License'''

|| Let’s click on '''character 1 '''in the '''Footnote '''under column 1.

We are directed to the word '''Apache License '''in the '''document'''.
|-
|| Point to the '''character 1''' next to the word '''Apache License'''

|| Notice the '''character 1''' next to the word '''Apache License.'''

This is the '''anchor''' of the inserted '''Footnote'''.
|-
|| Hover the cursor over this slowly.
|| Hover the cursor over this '''anchor''' slowly.

The cursor turns into a pointing finger.
|-
|| Click
|| Now click on it.
|-
|| Highlight the footnote.
|| We are immediately directed to the bottom of the page where the '''Footnote '''is recorded.
|-
|| Point to '''1'''
|| The “'''Character'''” option is used to define the '''character''' or '''symbol''' for the current '''Footnote.'''
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Let me demonstrate how to change the '''character''' for '''Footnote 1.'''
|-
|| Scroll back up >> place the cursor between the word '''License '''and '''footnote anchor 1'''.
|| Scroll back and place the cursor between the word '''License '''and '''footnote anchor 1'''.

|-
|| Right click and select
'''Footnote/Endnote'''
|| Then right-click and select the '''Footnote or Endnote''' option.

|-
|| Point to''' Edit Footnote/Endnote'''
|| '''Edit''' '''Footnote/Endnote''' dialog box opens up.
|-
|| Point to Numbering
|| '''Numbering''' is the type of numbering that we want to use for '''Footnotes''' and '''Endnotes'''.
|-
|| Point to Automatic
|| The “'''Automatic'''” option automatically assigns numbers to the '''Footnotes''' or '''Endnotes.'''
|-
|| Click '''Choose''' button

Select '''asterisk'''
|| Click on the '''Choose''' button next to the '''Character''' field.

Select the '''asterisk''' character and click the '''OK''' button.
|-
|| Click on '''OK''' button
|| Click the '''OK''' button to close the '''Edit '''dialog box.
|-
|| Point to '''Footnote''' field
|| The '''character '''of''' footnote 1 '''is now set to the '''asterisk symbol. '''
|-
|| Click on the '''anchor'''
|| Click on the '''anchor'''.
|-
|| Point to '''Footnote 1 '''as '''asterisk symbol'''
|| '''Footnote 1 '''is now seen as an '''asterisk symbol'''.
|-
|| Point to second '''Footnote'''
|| We can also see that our second '''footnote''' has now turned to numerical '''1'''.
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Now let us change the '''character''' of '''Footnote 1''' back to '''numerical'''.
|-
|| Scroll back up >> place the cursor between the word '''License '''and '''footnote anchor 1'''.
|| Scroll back up and place the cursor between the word '''License '''and '''footnote anchor asterisk'''.
|-
|| Right click and select

'''Footnote/Endnote'''
|| Then right-click and select the '''Footnote or Endnote''' option.
|-
|| Point to Footnote/Endnote
|| '''Edit Footnote/Endnote''' dialog box opens up.
|-
|| Select Automatic and Click on OK
|| Under the '''Numbering''' option select '''Automatic''' and then click on the '''OK''' button.
|-
|| Point to footnote 1
|| We can see the '''asterisk symbol''' has changed to '''numerical '''once again'''.'''
|-
|| Scroll down to the '''footnotes'''
|| Scroll down and look at the '''footnotes''' and observe the changes.
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Let’s learn to highlight the '''footnotes'''.
|-
|| Click on footnote text no. 2
|| Click on any one '''footnote '''text.
|-
|| Point to the '''formatting''' drop-down at the top left
|| Look at the '''formatting''' drop-down at the top left, which says '''Footnote'''.
|-
|| Click on the drop-down arrow
|| Click on the drop-down arrow.
|-
|| Click on the drop-down next to '''Endnote''' >> select '''Edit Style'''
|| Now click on the drop-down next to '''Footnote''' and select '''Edit Style'''.
|-
|| '''Paragraph Style: Footnote''' dialog box
|| '''Paragraph Style: Footnote''' dialog box opens up.
|-
|| Click '''Highlighting''' tab and '''Color''' tab
|| Click on the '''Highlighting''' tab and then on '''Color''' tab
|-
||

Choose yellow
|| In the colour palette, choose a highlight colour.

I will choose yellow.
|-
|| Click '''Apply''' button >> '''OK''' button
|| At the bottom click on the '''Apply''' button and then on the '''OK''' button
|-
|| Point to the highlighted '''footnotes'''
|| Look at the '''footnotes''' and observe the highlight.
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Next I will demonstrate how to add an '''endnote''' in our '''document'''.
|-
|| Select the word Mozilla Public License
|| Select the word '''Mozilla Public License '''from''' '''paragraph 2 in column 1 of page 1.
|-
|| Click on Insert Endnote icon
|| Click on the '''Insert''' '''Endnote''' icon located in the '''Standard''' '''toolbar.'''
|-
|| Point to newly added Endnote
|| '''Endnote''' gets added at the end of the '''document, '''on a new page.

If a document has chapters, then the '''endnotes''' will appear at the end of each chapter.
|-
|| Type this text in endnote '''an open source/free software license”'''
|| Type the following text in the '''endnote - “an open source/free software license”'''
|-
|| Only Narration
|| We can change the default '''Roman''' '''numerals''' to other '''style '''options also.
|-
|| Click Tools >> Footnote and Endnotes
|| To do so, click on the '''Tools''' menu and then select the '''Footnote and Endnotes''' option.
|-
|| Point to Footnote/Endnote dialog box
|| '''Footnote/Endnote''' settings dialog box opens up.
|-
|| Point to Autonumbering (Only Highlight)
|| Under the''' Endnotes '''tab,''' '''we see the''' Auto Numbering '''section.
|-
|| Point to Numbering section
|| Using this option we can change '''Numbering''' '''style''' as per our choice.

You may explore this further on your own.
|-
|| Close the dialog box click on X icon
|| Close the dialog box by clicking on '''X''' icon.
|-
|| Press''' Ctrl + S, '''Click on the''' X '''icon
|| Now let us save all the changes and close the file.
|-
|| Only Narration
|| This brings us to the end of this tutorial.

Let us summarize.
|-
|| Slide: Summary
|| In this tutorial, we learnt how to:

* Insert '''Header'''
* Insert '''Footer'''
* Remove '''Header '''and''' Footer''' from the first page
* Insert '''Footnote''' and '''Endnote''' in a '''document'''

|-
|| Slide: Assignment
|| As an assignment

* Open '''practice.odt '''file
* Add a '''Header''' and '''Footer''' to the '''document'''
* Insert your name in the '''Header'''
* Insert '''Page Count''' in the '''Footer'''
* Add an '''Endnote''' stating '''where the page ends'''

|-
|| Slide: About spoken tutorial project
|| The video at the following summarises the Spoken Tutorial project

Please download and watch it.
|-
|| Slide: Spoken Tutorial workshops
|| We conduct workshops using '''spoken tutorials '''and give certificates.

For more details, Please contact us.

|-
|| Slide: Forums Specific Questions
|| Post your timed queries in this forum.

|-
|| Slide: Acknowledgment
|| The '''Spoken Tutorial''' project is funded by MHRD Govt of India.
|-
|| Slide: Thank you
|| This tutorial was originally contributed by DesiCrew Solutions Pvt. Ltd. in 2011

This is Pratik Kamble along with the Spoken Tutorial team from''' IIT Bombay '''signing off.

Thank you for watching.
|-
|}

LibreOffice-Suite-Writer-6.3/C3/Header,-Footer-and-Notes/English

2020-10-15T06:07:50Z

Pratik kamble:

Title: Header Footer and notes

Author: Pratik Kamble

Novice Reviewer:

Domain Reviewer: Praveen and Nancy

Keywords: Insert Header, Insert Footer, Insert Endnote, Insert Footnote, Removed Header and Footer

{|border=1
|-
| align=center| Visual Cue
| align=center| Narration

|-
|| Slide: Title Slide
|| Welcome to the '''spoken tutorial''' on '''Header, Footer and Notes.'''

|-
| Slide: Learning Objectives
|In this tutorial, we will learn how to:

* Insert '''Header'''
* Insert '''Footer'''
* Remove '''Header '''and''' Footer''' from the first page and
* Insert '''Footnote''' and '''Endnote''' in a '''document'''

|-
|| Slide: System Requirements
|| This tutorial is recorded using

* '''Ubuntu Linux OS''' version '''18.04''' and
* '''LibreOffice Suite '''version '''6.3.5'''

|-
|| Open '''Newsletter.odt '''file
|| Open the file '''Newsletter.odt '''which we have created earlier.
|-
|| '''Slide: Code files'''
||
* This file has been provided to you in the''' Code files''' link on this tutorial page.
* Pls download and extract the file.
* Make a copy and then use it for practising.

|-
|| Only Narration
|| First we will learn how to insert a '''Footer''' in our '''document'''.
|-
|| Click '''Insert '''>> '''Header and Footer'''

Click on '''Use Header Footer '''
|| Click on the '''Insert''' menu in the '''menu bar''' and go to the '''Header and Footer '''option.

Now check the''' Use header/footer menu''' option, if it is unchecked.
|-
|| Click on bottom text area
|| Scroll the page and click on the bottom of the text area to display the '''Footer''' marker.
|-
|| Point to '''Footer''' marker

Click on Plus symbol

Point to newly added '''Footer'''
|| The '''Footer''' marker appears in our '''document'''.

Click on the '''Plus''' symbol next to the word '''Footer.'''

We see that the '''Footer''' is added to the bottom of the page.
|-
|| Click on Insert

|| Another way to add a '''Footer''' in our '''document'''

is by clicking on the '''Insert menu''' in the '''menu''' '''bar.'''
|-
|| Click on Insert >>Header and Footer >> Footer >> Default Style option

Only highlight >> DO NOT CLICK
|| Go to the '''Header and''' '''Footer '''option.''' '''

Select''' Footer '''sub-menu and choose the '''Default''' '''style '''option.
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Either ways, the cursor is in the '''footer '''area.
|-
||

Click on Down arrow in '''Footer Default style'''

Select '''Insert Page number'''
|| To add a page number in the '''footer''', click on the down arrow of '''Footer Default style. '''

Then select''' Insert Page Number''' option.
|-
|| Point to 1 in footer area

|| Immediately, we see that the number '''1''' is displayed in the '''footer.'''
|-
|| Double-click on number 1
|| In order to give different '''styles''' to the page number, double-click on number '''1.'''
|-
|| Point to '''Edit fields''' dialog box
|| '''Edit Fields '''dialog box opens up.
|-
|| Point to different section
|| We have 3 different sections under '''Edit''' '''fields''':
* '''Type'''
* '''Select'''
* '''Format'''

|-
|| Point to '''Format '''options

Point to abc lowercase
ABC uppercase
|| Under the '''Format''' section, we can see many '''formats''' like
* '''a b c''' in lowercase
* '''A B C '''in uppercase and many more

|-
|| Select '''1st 2nd 3rd >> '''Click on '''OK''' button
|| I will select the '''format 1st 2nd 3rd '''and then click on the '''OK''' button at the bottom.
|-
|| Point to the page number
|| Observe that the numbering '''format''' for page 1 changes from '''1''' to '''1st.'''
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Next, let’s learn to insert a '''Header''' into the '''document.'''
|-
|| Click on the top of the text area

Point to the '''Header''' marker
|| Scroll above and click on the top of the text area in the '''document'''.

The '''Header''' marker appears in our '''document'''.
|-
|| Click on the '''down''' '''arrow''' symbol

Point to '''Header'''
|| If not, click on the '''plus''' '''down''' '''arrow''' symbol next to the word '''Header.'''

The '''Header''' gets inserted at the top of the page.
|-
|| Only Narration

Cursor on the Insert Field icon
|| Let us now insert the date in the '''Header.'''

To do so, go to the '''Insert field''' icon located in the '''Standard''' '''toolbar.'''
|-
|| Click on down arrow icon and select Date option
|| Now click on the down arrow icon and select the '''Date''' option from the list.
|-
|| Select '''Date '''
|| The current date is displayed in the '''Header '''area.

You can edit this to any date of your choice, if you wish.
|-
|| Double click on '''Date'''
|| To change the date''' format, '''double-click on the date'''.'''
|-
|| Select 31 Dec 1999 >> Click on '''OK''' button
|| Here we will select the format as '''31. Dec. 1999''' and click on the '''OK '''button.
|-
|| Point to Date
|| The date''' format''' has now changed as per our selection.
|-
|| Keep cursor on page 2, column 1 - before the words In view of this……

Press '''Backspace''' key repeatedly
|| In case the alignment of the content has changed, please realign by pressing the '''Backspace''' key.

Repeat this till the text is on page 1 and column 2.
|-
|| Press '''Enter''' key repeatedly
|| Then press '''Enter''' key repeatedly to align the text below the '''banner'''.
|-
|| Click on''' Toggle print preview'''
|| Now click on the '''Toggle print preview''' icon in the '''Standard toolbar.'''
|-
|| Point to '''Date '''and '''Page number '''

'''Editor can enlarge this for clarity'''
|| The date appears at the top of each page and the page number at the bottom.
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Note - '''header''' and '''footer''' will be replicated on all the pages of the '''document.'''
|-
|| Click on '''Close preview'''
|| Click on the '''Close Preview''' button to close the preview.
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Next let’s learn how to add a '''margin''' and '''shadow''' '''style''' to our '''document.'''
|-
|| Click on Page icon in the sidebar deck
|| Click on the '''Page''' icon located in the '''Sidebar deck.'''
|-
|| Click Styles>> More option
|| Under '''Styles''' option, click on the '''More Options''' icon or the '''gear '''icon.
|-
|| Point to '''Page Style: Default Style '''dialog box opens up

Point to several tabs
|| '''Page Style: Default Style''' dialog box opens up.

There are several tabs which can be used to customize the '''page style''' as per our preferences.
|-
|| Click on Footer tab

Check mark on '''Footer on'''
|| Click on the '''Footer''' tab.

Put a check on the '''Footer on''' option, if not already checked.
|-
|| Set '''left margin''' to '''1.00 cm'''

Click on '''Plus''' symbol repeatedly
|| Now set the '''left margin '''space to''' 1.00 cm '''by clicking on the '''plus''' symbol repeatedly.
|-
|| Click on '''More '''

Point to '''Border/Background'''
|| To add a '''border''' or a '''shadow''' to the '''footer''', click on the '''More '''button.

'''Border/Background''' dialog box opens up.
|-
|| Click on Borders tab

Point to Shadow style and point to various option
|| Click on the '''Borders''' tab, if not already selected.

Under the '''Shadow''' '''Style '''section, we can see various options to position the shadow.
|-
|| Select '''Cast Shadow''' to the top right
|| Select '''Cast shadow to bottom right '''icon'''.'''
|-
|| Point to Color option

Under '''Color '''section click on down arrow
|| Under the '''Color''' option, '''Gray''' is the default shadow colour.

To choose a different colour, click on the down arrow.
|-
|| Point to color palette box >> Choose '''blue''' color
|| You may choose any color of your choice from the '''Color palette box.'''

I will choose '''blue'''.
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Leave all the other settings as default in the '''Border/Background''' dialog box.
|-
|| Click on '''OK '''button
|| Then click on the '''OK '''button.
|-
|| '''>> Page Style: Default Style''' dialog boxClick on '''Apply''' button >> '''OK '''button
|| In the''' Page Style: Default Style''' dialog box, click on the '''Apply''' button and then on the '''OK '''button.
|-
|| Click on Sidebar deck icon
|| Close''' '''the''' Sidebar deck.'''
|-
|| Scroll down >> Point to shadow effect
|| Scroll down to see the''' shadow effect '''added to the '''Footer.'''
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Next, we will learn how to remove the '''Header '''and''' Footer '''from a specific page.
|-
|| Only Narration

Cursor on the first page
|| Let’s remove the ''' ''' '''Header''' from the first page of our '''document'''.

So first click the cursor anywhere on the first page of the '''document.'''
|-
|| '''Styles '''>> '''Manage styles '''
|| In the '''Sidebar deck,''' select the '''Styles''' icon.
|-
|| Point to '''Styles''' panels opens up
|| '''Styles''' '''panel''' opens up.

|-
|| Click on Page styles icon
Select First Page
|| Now click on '''Page Styles''' icon and from the list select '''First Page''' option

|-
|| Double click on First Page option
|| Now double-click on the''' First Page '''option
|-
|| Click on X icon of sidebar deck
|| Close the '''Sidebar deck'''.
|-
|| Scroll up and down the pages to show the result
|| Observe that the '''Header '''and''' Footer '''are now removed only from the first page.
|-
|| Re-adjust the text alignment in column 2 of page 1
|| You may need to re-adjust the text alignment once again, as shown.
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Next, let’s learn about '''Footnotes''' and '''Endnotes''' in '''Writer.'''
|-
|| Slide : Footnote and Endnotes (a)

'''Editor can do this'''
||
* Infographics can be shown in the video instead of the text slide'''Footnotes''' appear at the bottom of the page on which they are referred

* Whereas '''Endnotes''' are collected at the end of a '''document '''or '''chapter'''

|-
|| Slide: Footnote and Endnotes (b)
||
* The '''anchor''' for the '''note''' is inserted at the current cursor position
* '''Anchor''' helps users to go directly to a particular part of the page
* You can choose between '''automatic''' '''numbering''' or a''' custom symbol''' for the '''notes'''

|-
||

Select word '''Apache License''' from the second paragraph
|| Let us see how the '''Footnote''' can be added to a word in the '''document'''.

Select the word '''Apache License '''from''' '''the''' '''second paragraph, in column 1 of page 1.
|-
|| Point to Insert '''Footnote''' '''icon'''
|| In the '''Standard toolbar''' click on the '''Insert''' '''Footnote icon.'''
|-
|| Click on '''Insert''' >> '''Footnote and Endnote >> Footnote'''

Only Highlight
|| We can also insert '''Footnote''' in our '''document''' by clicking on the '''Insert''' menu.

Then click on the '''Footnote and Endnote '''and select the''' Footnote '''option'''.'''
|-
|| Point to added '''Footnote'''
|| Both ways, the '''Footnote''' is added to our document with the '''character''' as '''1.'''
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Let’s type the text for our '''Footnote'''.
|-
|| '''Footnote >> '''Type “'''open source software license ”'''
|| Type “'''open source software license”.'''
|-
|| Only Narration
|| In a similar way, let's add another '''footnote''' in our '''document.'''
|-
|| Select the word '''copyleft''' from the second column on page 1

Click on '''Insert Footnote''' icon
|| Select the word '''copyleft''' from the second column on page 1.

Click on the '''Insert''' '''Footnote''' icon in the '''Standard toolbar.'''
|-
|| Point to '''Footnote 2'''
|| One more '''Footnote''' gets added to our page, this time under the second column.
|-
|| Type '''permissive license'''
|| Now type the text for the '''footnote '''as “'''permissive license”.'''
|-
|| Click on the '''character 1 '''in the '''footnote''' >> word '''Apache License'''

|| Let’s click on '''character 1 '''in the '''Footnote '''under column 1.

We are directed to the word '''Apache License '''in the '''document'''.
|-
|| Point to the '''character 1''' next to the word '''Apache License'''

|| Notice the '''character 1''' next to the word '''Apache License.'''

This is the '''anchor''' of the inserted '''Footnote'''.
|-
|| Hover the cursor over this slowly.
|| Hover the cursor over this '''anchor''' slowly.

The cursor turns into a pointing finger.
|-
|| Click
|| Now click on it.
|-
|| Highlight the footnote.
|| We are immediately directed to the bottom of the page where the '''Footnote '''is recorded.
|-
|| Point to '''1'''
|| The “'''Character'''” option is used to define the '''character''' or '''symbol''' for the current '''Footnote.'''
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Let me demonstrate how to change the '''character''' for '''Footnote 1.'''
|-
|| Scroll back up >> place the cursor between the word '''License '''and '''footnote anchor 1'''.
|| Scroll back and place the cursor between the word '''License '''and '''footnote anchor 1'''.

|-
|| Right click and select
'''Footnote/Endnote'''
|| Then right-click and select the '''Footnote or Endnote''' option.

|-
|| Point to''' Edit Footnote/Endnote'''
|| '''Edit''' '''Footnote/Endnote''' dialog box opens up.
|-
|| Point to Numbering
|| '''Numbering''' is the type of numbering that we want to use for '''Footnotes''' and '''Endnotes'''.
|-
|| Point to Automatic
|| The “'''Automatic'''” option automatically assigns numbers to the '''Footnotes''' or '''Endnotes.'''
|-
|| Click '''Choose''' button

Select '''asterisk'''
|| Click on the '''Choose''' button next to the '''Character''' field.

Select the '''asterisk''' character and click the '''OK''' button.
|-
|| Click on '''OK''' button
|| Click the '''OK''' button to close the '''Edit '''dialog box.
|-
|| Point to '''Footnote''' field
|| The '''character '''of''' footnote 1 '''is now set to the '''asterisk symbol. '''
|-
|| Click on the '''anchor'''
|| Click on the '''anchor'''.
|-
|| Point to '''Footnote 1 '''as '''asterisk symbol'''
|| '''Footnote 1 '''is now seen as an '''asterisk symbol'''.
|-
|| Point to second '''Footnote'''
|| We can also see that our second '''footnote''' has now turned to numerical '''1'''.
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Now let us change the '''character''' of '''Footnote 1''' back to '''numerical'''.
|-
|| Scroll back up >> place the cursor between the word '''License '''and '''footnote anchor 1'''.
|| Scroll back up and place the cursor between the word '''License '''and '''footnote anchor asterisk'''.
|-
|| Right click and select

'''Footnote/Endnote'''
|| Then right-click and select the '''Footnote or Endnote''' option.
|-
|| Point to Footnote/Endnote
|| '''Edit Footnote/Endnote''' dialog box opens up.
|-
|| Select Automatic and Click on OK
|| Under the '''Numbering''' option select '''Automatic''' and then click on the '''OK''' button.
|-
|| Point to footnote 1
|| We can see the '''asterisk symbol''' has changed to '''numerical '''once again'''.'''
|-
|| Scroll down to the '''footnotes'''
|| Scroll down and look at the '''footnotes''' and observe the changes.
|-
||
|| Let’s learn to highlight the '''footnotes'''.
|-
|| Click on footnote text no. 2
|| Click on any one '''footnote '''text.
|-
|| Point to the '''formatting''' drop-down at the top left
|| Look at the '''formatting''' drop-down at the top left, which says '''Footnote'''.
|-
|| Click on the drop-down arrow
|| Click on the drop-down arrow.
|-
|| Click on the drop-down next to '''Endnote''' >> select '''Edit Style'''
|| Now click on the drop-down next to '''Footnote''' and select '''Edit Style'''.
|-
|| '''Paragraph Style: Footnote''' dialog box
|| '''Paragraph Style: Footnote''' dialog box opens up.
|-
|| Click '''Highlighting''' tab and '''Color''' tab
|| Click on the '''Highlighting''' tab and then on '''Color''' tab
|-
||

Choose yellow
|| In the colour palette, choose a highlight colour.

I will choose yellow.
|-
|| Click '''Apply''' button >> '''OK''' button
|| At the bottom click on the '''Apply''' button and then on the '''OK''' button
|-
|| Point to the highlighted '''footnotes'''
|| Look at the '''footnotes''' and observe the highlight.
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Next I will demonstrate how to add an '''endnote''' in our '''document'''.
|-
|| Select the word Mozilla Public License
|| Select the word '''Mozilla Public License '''from''' '''paragraph 2 in column 1 of page 1.
|-
|| Click on Insert Endnote icon
|| Click on the '''Insert''' '''Endnote''' icon located in the '''Standard''' '''toolbar.'''
|-
|| Point to newly added Endnote
|| '''Endnote''' gets added at the end of the '''document, '''on a new page.

If a document has chapters, then the '''endnotes''' will appear at the end of each chapter.
|-
|| Type this text in endnote '''an open source/free software license”'''
|| Type the following text in the '''endnote - “an open source/free software license”'''
|-
|| Only Narration
|| We can change the default '''Roman''' '''numerals''' to other '''style '''options also.
|-
|| Click Tools >> Footnote and Endnotes
|| To do so, click on the '''Tools''' menu and then select the '''Footnote and Endnotes''' option.
|-
|| Point to Footnote/Endnote dialog box
|| '''Footnote/Endnote''' settings dialog box opens up.
|-
|| Point to Autonumbering (Only Highlight)
|| Under the''' Endnotes '''tab,''' '''we see the''' Auto Numbering '''section.
|-
|| Point to Numbering section
|| Using this option we can change '''Numbering''' '''style''' as per our choice.

You may explore this further on your own.
|-
|| Close the dialog box click on X icon
|| Close the dialog box by clicking on '''X''' icon.
|-
|| Press''' Ctrl + S, '''Click on the''' X '''icon
|| Now let us save all the changes and close the file.
|-
|| Only Narration
|| This brings us to the end of this tutorial.

Let us summarize.
|-
|| Slide: Summary
|| In this tutorial, we learnt how to:

* Insert '''Header'''
* Insert '''Footer'''
* Remove '''Header '''and''' Footer''' from the first page
* Insert '''Footnote''' and '''Endnote''' in a '''document'''

|-
|| Slide: Assignment
|| As an assignment

* Open '''practice.odt '''file
* Add a '''Header''' and '''Footer''' to the '''document'''
* Insert your name in the '''Header'''
* Insert '''Page Count''' in the '''Footer'''
* Add an '''Endnote''' stating '''where the page ends'''

|-
|| Slide: About spoken tutorial project
|| The video at the following summarises the Spoken Tutorial project

Please download and watch it.
|-
|| Slide: Spoken Tutorial workshops
|| We conduct workshops using '''spoken tutorials '''and give certificates.

For more details, Please contact us.

|-
|| Slide: Forums Specific Questions
|| Post your timed queries in this forum.

|-
|| Slide: Acknowledgment
|| The '''Spoken Tutorial''' project is funded by MHRD Govt of India.
|-
|| Slide: Thank you
|| This tutorial was originally contributed by DesiCrew Solutions Pvt. Ltd. in 2011

This is Pratik Kamble along with the Spoken Tutorial team from''' IIT Bombay '''signing off.

Thank you for watching.
|-
|}

LibreOffice-Suite-Writer-6.3/C3/Header,-Footer-and-Notes/English

2020-10-15T05:20:08Z

Pratik kamble:

Title: Header Footer and notes

Author: Pratik Kamble

Novice Reviewer:

Domain Reviewer: Praveen and Nancy

Keywords: Insert Header, Insert Footer, Insert Endnote, Insert Footnote, Removed Header and Footer

{|border=1
|-
| align=center| Visual Cue
| align=center| Narration

|-
|| Slide: Title Slide
|| Welcome to the '''spoken tutorial''' on '''Header, Footer and Notes.'''

|-
| Slide: Learning Objectives
|In this tutorial, we will learn how to:

* Insert '''Header'''
* Insert '''Footer'''
* Remove '''Header '''and''' Footer''' from the first page and
* Insert '''Footnote''' and '''Endnote''' in a '''document'''

|-
|| Slide: System Requirements
|| This tutorial is recorded using

* '''Ubuntu Linux OS''' version '''18.04''' and
* '''LibreOffice Suite '''version '''6.3.5'''

|-
|| Open '''Newsletter.odt '''file
|| Open the file '''Newsletter.odt '''which we have created earlier.
|-
|| '''Slide: Code files'''
||
* This file has been provided to you in the''' Code files''' link on this tutorial page.
* Pls download and extract the file.
* Make a copy and then use it for practising.

|-
|| Only Narration
|| First we will learn how to insert a '''Footer''' in our '''document'''.
|-
|| Click '''Insert '''>> '''Header and Footer'''

Click on '''Use Header Footer '''
|| Click on the '''Insert''' menu in the '''menu bar''' and go to the '''Header and Footer '''option.

Now check the''' Use header/footer menu''' option, if it is unchecked.
|-
|| Click on bottom text area
|| Scroll the page and click on the bottom of the text area to display the '''Footer''' marker.
|-
|| Point to '''Footer''' marker

Click on Plus symbol

Point to newly added '''Footer'''
|| The '''Footer''' marker appears in our '''document'''.

Click on the '''Plus''' symbol next to the word '''Footer.'''

We see that the '''Footer''' is added to the bottom of the page.
|-
|| Click on Insert

|| Another way to add a '''Footer''' in our '''document'''

is by clicking the '''Insert menu''' in the '''menu''' '''bar.'''
|-
|| Click on Insert >>Header and Footer >> Footer >> Default Style option

Only highlight >> DO NOT CLICK
|| Go to the '''Header and''' '''Footer '''option.''' '''

Select''' Footer '''sub-menu and choose the '''Default''' '''style '''option.
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Either ways, the cursor is in the '''footer '''area.
|-
||

Click on Down arrow in '''Footer Default style'''

Select '''Insert Page number'''
|| To add a page number in the '''footer''', click on the down arrow of '''Footer Default style. '''

Then select''' Insert Page Number''' option.
|-
|| Point to 1 in footer area

|| Immediately, we see that the number '''1''' is displayed in the '''footer.'''
|-
|| Double-click on number 1
|| In order to give different '''styles''' to the page number, double-click on number '''1.'''
|-
|| Point to '''Edit fields''' dialog box
|| '''Edit Fields '''dialog box opens up.
|-
|| Point to different section
|| We have 3 different sections under '''Edit''' '''fields''':
* '''Type'''
* '''Select'''
* '''Format'''

|-
|| Point to '''Format '''options

Point to abc lowercase
ABC uppercase
|| Under the '''Format''' section, we can see many '''formats''' like
* '''a b c''' in lowercase
* '''A B C '''in uppercase and many more

|-
|| Select '''1st 2nd 3rd >> '''Click on '''OK''' button
|| I will select the '''format 1st 2nd 3rd '''and then click on the '''OK''' button at the bottom.
|-
|| Point to the page number
|| Observe that the numbering '''format''' for page 1 changes from '''1''' to '''1st.'''
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Next, let’s learn to insert a '''Header''' into the '''document.'''
|-
|| Click on the top of the text area

Point to the '''Header''' marker
|| Scroll above and click on the top of the text area in the '''document'''.

The '''Header''' marker appears in our '''document'''.
|-
|| Click on the '''down''' '''arrow''' symbol

Point to '''Header'''
|| If not, click on the '''plus''' '''down''' '''arrow''' symbol next to the word '''Header.'''

The '''Header''' gets inserted at the top of the page.
|-
|| Only Narration

Cursor on the Insert Field icon
|| Let us now insert the date in the '''Header.'''

To do so, go to the '''Insert field''' icon located in the '''Standard''' '''toolbar.'''
|-
|| Click on down arrow icon and select Date option
|| Now click on the down arrow icon and select the '''Date''' option from the list.
|-
|| Select '''Date '''
|| The current date is displayed in the '''Header '''area.

You can edit this to any date of your choice, if you wish.
|-
|| Double click on '''Date'''
|| To change the date''' format, '''double-click on the date'''.'''
|-
|| Select 31 Dec 1999 >> Click on '''OK''' button
|| Here we will select the format as '''31. Dec. 1999''' and click on the '''OK '''button.
|-
|| Point to Date
|| The date''' format''' has now changed as per our selection.
|-
|| Keep cursor on page 2, column 1 - before the words In view of this……

Press '''Backspace''' key repeatedly
|| In case the alignment of the content has changed, please realign by pressing the '''Backspace''' key.

Repeat this till the text is on page 1 and column 2.
|-
|| Press '''Enter''' key repeatedly
|| Then press '''Enter''' key repeatedly to align the text below the '''banner'''.
|-
|| Click on''' Toggle print preview'''
|| Now click on the '''Toggle print preview''' icon in the '''Standard toolbar.'''
|-
|| Point to '''Date '''and '''Page number '''

'''Editor can enlarge this for clarity'''
|| The date appears at the top of each page and the page number at the bottom.
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Note - '''header''' and '''footer''' will be replicated on all the pages of the '''document.'''
|-
|| Click on '''Close preview'''
|| Click on the '''Close Preview''' button to close the preview.
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Next let’s learn how to add a '''margin''' and '''shadow''' '''style''' to our '''document.'''
|-
|| Click on Page icon in the sidebar deck
|| Click on the '''Page''' icon located in the '''Sidebar deck.'''
|-
|| Click Styles>> More option
|| Under '''Styles''' option, click on the '''More Options''' icon or the '''gear '''icon.
|-
|| Point to '''Page Style: Default Style '''dialog box opens up

Point to several tabs
|| '''Page Style: Default Style''' dialog box opens up.

There are several tabs which can be used to customize the '''page style''' as per our preferences.
|-
|| Click on Footer tab

Check mark on '''Footer on'''
|| Click on the '''Footer''' tab.

Put a check on the '''Footer on''' option, if not already checked.
|-
|| Set '''left margin''' to '''1.00 cm'''

Click on '''Plus''' symbol repeatedly
|| Now set the '''left margin '''space to''' 1.00 cm '''by clicking on the '''plus''' symbol repeatedly.
|-
|| Click on '''More '''

Point to '''Border/Background'''
|| To add a '''border''' or a '''shadow''' to the '''footer''', click on the '''More '''button.

'''Border/Background''' dialog box opens up.
|-
|| Click on Borders tab

Point to Shadow style and point to various option
|| Click on the '''Borders''' tab, if not already selected.

Under the '''Shadow''' '''Style '''section, we can see various options to position the shadow.
|-
|| Select '''Cast Shadow''' to the top right
|| Select '''Cast shadow to bottom right '''icon'''.'''
|-
|| Point to Color option

Under '''Color '''section click on down arrow
|| Under the '''Color''' option, '''Gray''' is the default shadow colour.

To choose a different colour, click on the down arrow.
|-
|| Point to color palette box >> Choose '''blue''' color
|| You may choose any color of your choice from the '''Color palette box.'''

I will choose '''blue'''.
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Leave all the other settings as default in the '''Border/Background''' dialog box.
|-
|| Click on '''OK '''button
|| Then click on the '''OK '''button.
|-
|| '''>> Page Style: Default Style''' dialog boxClick on '''Apply''' button >> '''OK '''button
|| In the''' Page Style: Default Style''' dialog box, click on the '''Apply''' button and then on the '''OK '''button.
|-
|| Click on Sidebar deck icon
|| Close''' '''the''' Sidebar deck.'''
|-
|| Scroll down >> Point to shadow effect
|| Scroll down to see the''' shadow effect '''added to the '''Footer.'''
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Next, we will learn how to remove the '''Header '''and''' Footer '''from a specific page.
|-
|| Only Narration

Cursor on the first page
|| Let’s remove the '''footer''' '''Header''' from the first page of our '''document'''.

So first click the cursor anywhere on the first page of the '''document.'''
|-
|| '''Styles '''>> '''Manage styles '''
|| In the '''Sidebar deck,''' select the '''Styles''' icon.
|-
|| Point to '''Styles''' panels opens up
|| '''Styles''' '''panel''' opens up.

|-
|| Click on Page styles icon
Select First Page
|| Now click on '''Page Styles''' icon and from the list select '''First Page''' option

|-
|| Double click on First Page option
|| Now double-click on the''' First Page '''option
|-
|| Click on X icon of sidebar deck
|| Close the '''Sidebar deck'''.
|-
|| Scroll up and down the pages to show the result
|| Observe that the '''Header '''and''' Footer '''are now removed only from the first page.
|-
|| Re-adjust the text alignment in column 2 of page 1
|| You may need to re-adjust the text alignment once again, as shown.
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Next, let’s learn about '''Footnotes''' and '''Endnotes''' in '''Writer.'''
|-
|| Slide : Footnote and Endnotes (a)

'''Editor can do this'''
||
* Infographics can be shown in the video instead of the text slide'''Footnotes''' appear at the bottom of the page on which they are referred

* Whereas '''Endnotes''' are collected at the end of a '''document '''or '''chapter'''

|-
|| Slide: Footnote and Endnotes (b)
||
* The '''anchor''' for the '''note''' is inserted at the current cursor position
* '''Anchor''' helps users to go directly to a particular part of the page
* You can choose between '''automatic''' '''numbering''' or a''' custom symbol''' for the '''notes'''

|-
||

Select word '''Apache License''' from the second paragraph
|| Let us see how the '''Footnote''' can be added to a word in the '''document'''.

Select the word '''Apache License '''from''' '''the''' '''second paragraph, in column 1 of page 1.
|-
|| Point to Insert '''Footnote''' '''icon'''
|| In the '''Standard toolbar''' click on the '''Insert''' '''Footnote icon.'''
|-
|| Click on '''Insert''' >> '''Footnote and Endnote >> Footnote'''

Only Highlight
|| We can also insert '''Footnote''' in our '''document''' by clicking on the '''Insert''' menu.

Then click on the '''Footnote and Endnote '''and select the''' Footnote '''option'''.'''
|-
|| Point to added '''Footnote'''
|| Both ways, the '''Footnote''' is added to our document with the '''character''' as '''1.'''
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Let’s type the text for our '''Footnote'''.
|-
|| '''Footnote >> '''Type “'''open source software license ”'''
|| Type “'''open source software license”.'''
|-
|| Only Narration
|| In a similar way, let's add another '''footnote''' in our '''document.'''
|-
|| Select the word '''copyleft''' from the second column on page 1

Click on '''Insert Footnote''' icon
|| Select the word '''copyleft''' from the second column on page 1.

Click on the '''Insert''' '''Footnote''' icon in the '''Standard toolbar.'''
|-
|| Point to '''Footnote 2'''
|| One more '''Footnote''' gets added to our page, this time under the second column.
|-
|| Type '''permissive license'''
|| Now type the text for the '''footnote '''as “'''permissive license”.'''
|-
|| Click on the '''character 1 '''in the '''footnote''' >> word '''Apache License'''

|| Let’s click on '''character 1 '''in the '''Footnote '''under column 1.

We are directed to the word '''Apache License '''in the '''document'''.
|-
|| Point to the '''character 1''' next to the word '''Apache License'''

|| Notice the '''character 1''' next to the word '''Apache License.'''

This is the '''anchor''' of the inserted '''Footnote'''.
|-
|| Hover the cursor over this slowly.
|| Hover the cursor over this '''anchor''' slowly.

The cursor turns into a pointing finger.
|-
|| Click
|| Now click on it.
|-
|| Highlight the footnote.
|| We are immediately directed to the bottom of the page where the '''Footnote '''is recorded.
|-
|| Point to '''1'''
|| The “'''Character'''” option is used to define the '''character''' or '''symbol''' for the current '''Footnote.'''
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Let me demonstrate how to change the '''character''' for '''Footnote 1.'''
|-
|| Scroll back up >> place the cursor between the word '''License '''and '''footnote anchor 1'''.
|| Scroll back up and place the cursor between the word '''License '''and '''footnote anchor 1'''.

|-
|| Right click and select
'''Footnote/Endnote'''
|| Then right-click and select the '''Footnote or Endnote''' option.

|-
|| Point to''' Edit Footnote/Endnote'''
|| '''Edit''' '''Footnote/Endnote''' dialog box opens up.
|-
|| Point to Numbering
|| '''Numbering''' is the type of numbering that we want to use for '''Footnotes''' and '''Endnotes'''.
|-
|| Point to Automatic
|| The “'''Automatic'''” option automatically assigns numbers to the '''Footnotes''' or '''Endnotes.'''
|-
|| Click '''Choose''' button

Select '''asterisk'''
|| Click on the '''Choose''' button next to the '''Character''' field.

Select the '''asterisk''' character and click the '''OK''' button.
|-
|| Click on '''OK''' button
|| Click the '''OK''' button to close the '''Edit '''dialog box.
|-
|| Point to '''Footnote''' field
|| The '''character '''of''' footnote 1 '''is now set to the '''asterisk symbol. '''
|-
|| Click on the '''anchor'''
|| Click on the '''anchor'''.
|-
|| Point to '''Footnote 1 '''as '''asterisk symbol'''
|| '''Footnote 1 '''is now seen as an '''asterisk symbol'''.
|-
|| Point to second '''Footnote'''
|| We can also see that our second '''footnote''' has now turned to numerical '''1'''.
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Now let us change the '''character''' of '''Footnote 1''' back to '''numerical'''.
|-
|| Scroll back up >> place the cursor between the word '''License '''and '''footnote anchor 1'''.
|| Scroll back up and place the cursor between the word '''License '''and '''footnote anchor asterisk'''.
|-
|| Right click and select

'''Footnote/Endnote'''
|| Then right-click and select the '''Footnote or Endnote''' option.
|-
|| Point to Footnote/Endnote
|| '''Edit Footnote/Endnote''' dialog box opens up.
|-
|| Select Automatic and Click on OK
|| Under the '''Numbering''' option select '''Automatic''' and then click on the '''OK''' button.
|-
|| Point to footnote 1
|| We can see the '''asterisk symbol''' has changed to '''numerical '''once again'''.'''
|-
|| Scroll down to the '''footnotes'''
|| Scroll down and look at the '''footnotes''' and observe the changes.
|-
||
|| Let’s learn to highlight the '''footnotes'''.
|-
|| Click on footnote text no. 2
|| Click on any one '''footnote '''text.
|-
|| Point to the '''formatting''' drop-down at the top left
|| Look at the '''formatting''' drop-down at the top left, which says '''Footnote'''.
|-
|| Click on the drop-down arrow
|| Click on the drop-down arrow.
|-
|| Click on the drop-down next to '''Endnote''' >> select '''Edit Style'''
|| Now click on the drop-down next to '''Footnote''' and select '''Edit Style'''.
|-
|| '''Paragraph Style: Footnote''' dialog box
|| '''Paragraph Style: Footnote''' dialog box opens up.
|-
|| Click '''Highlighting''' tab and '''Color''' tab
|| Click on the '''Highlighting''' tab and then on '''Color''' tab
|-
||

Choose yellow
|| In the colour palette, choose a highlight colour.

I will choose yellow.
|-
|| Click '''Apply''' button >> '''OK''' button
|| At the bottom click on the '''Apply''' button and then on the '''OK''' button
|-
|| Point to the highlighted '''footnotes'''
|| Look at the '''footnotes''' and observe the highlight.
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Next I will demonstrate how to add an '''endnote''' in our '''document'''.
|-
|| Select the word Mozilla Public License
|| Select the words '''Mozilla Public License '''from''' '''paragraph 2 in column 1 of page 1.
|-
|| Click on Insert Endnote icon
|| Click on the '''Insert''' '''Endnote''' icon located in the '''Standard''' '''toolbar.'''
|-
|| Point to newly added Endnote
|| '''Endnote''' gets added at the end of the '''document, '''on a new page.

If a document has chapters, then the '''endnotes''' will appear at the end of each chapter.
|-
|| Type this text in endnote '''an open source/free software license”'''
|| Type the following text in the '''endnote - “an open source/free software license”'''
|-
|| Only Narration
|| We can change the default '''Roman''' '''numerals''' to other '''style '''options also.
|-
|| Click Tools >> Footnote and Endnotes
|| To do so, click on the '''Tools''' menu and then select the '''Footnote and Endnotes''' option.
|-
|| Point to Footnote/Endnote dialog box
|| '''Footnote/Endnote''' settings dialog box opens up.
|-
|| Point to Autonumbering (Only Highlight)
|| Under the''' Endnotes '''tab,''' '''we see the''' Auto Numbering '''section.
|-
|| Point to Numbering section
|| Using this option we can change '''Numbering''' '''style''' as per our choice.

You may explore this further on your own.
|-
|| Close the dialog box click on X icon
|| Close the dialog box by clicking on '''X''' icon.
|-
|| Press''' Ctrl + S, '''Click on the''' X '''icon
|| Now let us save all the changes and close the file.
|-
|| Only Narration
|| This brings us to the end of this tutorial.

Let us summarize.
|-
|| Slide: Summary
|| In this tutorial, we learnt how to:

* Insert '''Header'''
* Insert '''Footer'''
* Remove '''Header '''and''' Footer''' from the first page
* Insert '''Footnote''' and '''Endnote''' in a '''document'''

|-
|| Slide: Assignment
|| As an assignment

* Open '''practice.odt '''file
* Add a '''Header''' and '''Footer''' to the '''document'''
* Insert your name in the '''Header'''
* Insert '''Page Count''' in the '''Footer'''
* Add an '''Endnote''' stating '''where the page ends'''

|-
|| Slide: About spoken tutorial project
|| The video at the following summarises the Spoken Tutorial project

Please download and watch it.
|-
|| Slide: Spoken Tutorial workshops
|| We conduct workshops using '''spoken tutorials '''and give certificates.

For more details, Please contact us.

|-
|| Slide: Forums Specific Questions
|| Post your timed queries in this forum.

|-
|| Slide: Acknowledgment
|| The '''Spoken Tutorial''' project is funded by MHRD Govt of India.
|-
|| Slide: Thank you
|| This tutorial was originally contributed by DesiCrew Solutions Pvt. Ltd. in 2011

This is Pratik Kamble along with the Spoken Tutorial team from''' IIT Bombay '''signing off.

Thank you for watching.
|-
|}

LibreOffice-Suite-Writer-6.3/C3/Header,-Footer-and-Notes/English

2020-10-15T05:19:23Z

Pratik kamble: Created page with "Title: Header Footer and notes Author: Pratik Kamble Novice Reviewer: Domain Reviewer: Praveen and Nancy Keywords: Insert Header, Insert Footer Insert Endnote and Footnot..."

Title: Header Footer and notes

Author: Pratik Kamble

Novice Reviewer:

Domain Reviewer: Praveen and Nancy

Keywords: Insert Header, Insert Footer Insert Endnote and Footnote

{|border=1
|-
| align=center| Visual Cue
| align=center| Narration

|-
|| Slide: Title Slide
|| Welcome to the '''spoken tutorial''' on '''Header, Footer and Notes.'''

|-
| Slide: Learning Objectives
|In this tutorial, we will learn how to:

* Insert '''Header'''
* Insert '''Footer'''
* Remove '''Header '''and''' Footer''' from the first page and
* Insert '''Footnote''' and '''Endnote''' in a '''document'''

|-
|| Slide: System Requirements
|| This tutorial is recorded using

* '''Ubuntu Linux OS''' version '''18.04''' and
* '''LibreOffice Suite '''version '''6.3.5'''

|-
|| Open '''Newsletter.odt '''file
|| Open the file '''Newsletter.odt '''which we have created earlier.
|-
|| '''Slide: Code files'''
||
* This file has been provided to you in the''' Code files''' link on this tutorial page.
* Pls download and extract the file.
* Make a copy and then use it for practising.

|-
|| Only Narration
|| First we will learn how to insert a '''Footer''' in our '''document'''.
|-
|| Click '''Insert '''>> '''Header and Footer'''

Click on '''Use Header Footer '''
|| Click on the '''Insert''' menu in the '''menu bar''' and go to the '''Header and Footer '''option.

Now check the''' Use header/footer menu''' option, if it is unchecked.
|-
|| Click on bottom text area
|| Scroll the page and click on the bottom of the text area to display the '''Footer''' marker.
|-
|| Point to '''Footer''' marker

Click on Plus symbol

Point to newly added '''Footer'''
|| The '''Footer''' marker appears in our '''document'''.

Click on the '''Plus''' symbol next to the word '''Footer.'''

We see that the '''Footer''' is added to the bottom of the page.
|-
|| Click on Insert

|| Another way to add a '''Footer''' in our '''document'''

is by clicking the '''Insert menu''' in the '''menu''' '''bar.'''
|-
|| Click on Insert >>Header and Footer >> Footer >> Default Style option

Only highlight >> DO NOT CLICK
|| Go to the '''Header and''' '''Footer '''option.''' '''

Select''' Footer '''sub-menu and choose the '''Default''' '''style '''option.
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Either ways, the cursor is in the '''footer '''area.
|-
||

Click on Down arrow in '''Footer Default style'''

Select '''Insert Page number'''
|| To add a page number in the '''footer''', click on the down arrow of '''Footer Default style. '''

Then select''' Insert Page Number''' option.
|-
|| Point to 1 in footer area

|| Immediately, we see that the number '''1''' is displayed in the '''footer.'''
|-
|| Double-click on number 1
|| In order to give different '''styles''' to the page number, double-click on number '''1.'''
|-
|| Point to '''Edit fields''' dialog box
|| '''Edit Fields '''dialog box opens up.
|-
|| Point to different section
|| We have 3 different sections under '''Edit''' '''fields''':
* '''Type'''
* '''Select'''
* '''Format'''

|-
|| Point to '''Format '''options

Point to abc lowercase
ABC uppercase
|| Under the '''Format''' section, we can see many '''formats''' like
* '''a b c''' in lowercase
* '''A B C '''in uppercase and many more

|-
|| Select '''1st 2nd 3rd >> '''Click on '''OK''' button
|| I will select the '''format 1st 2nd 3rd '''and then click on the '''OK''' button at the bottom.
|-
|| Point to the page number
|| Observe that the numbering '''format''' for page 1 changes from '''1''' to '''1st.'''
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Next, let’s learn to insert a '''Header''' into the '''document.'''
|-
|| Click on the top of the text area

Point to the '''Header''' marker
|| Scroll above and click on the top of the text area in the '''document'''.

The '''Header''' marker appears in our '''document'''.
|-
|| Click on the '''down''' '''arrow''' symbol

Point to '''Header'''
|| If not, click on the '''plus''' '''down''' '''arrow''' symbol next to the word '''Header.'''

The '''Header''' gets inserted at the top of the page.
|-
|| Only Narration

Cursor on the Insert Field icon
|| Let us now insert the date in the '''Header.'''

To do so, go to the '''Insert field''' icon located in the '''Standard''' '''toolbar.'''
|-
|| Click on down arrow icon and select Date option
|| Now click on the down arrow icon and select the '''Date''' option from the list.
|-
|| Select '''Date '''
|| The current date is displayed in the '''Header '''area.

You can edit this to any date of your choice, if you wish.
|-
|| Double click on '''Date'''
|| To change the date''' format, '''double-click on the date'''.'''
|-
|| Select 31 Dec 1999 >> Click on '''OK''' button
|| Here we will select the format as '''31. Dec. 1999''' and click on the '''OK '''button.
|-
|| Point to Date
|| The date''' format''' has now changed as per our selection.
|-
|| Keep cursor on page 2, column 1 - before the words In view of this……

Press '''Backspace''' key repeatedly
|| In case the alignment of the content has changed, please realign by pressing the '''Backspace''' key.

Repeat this till the text is on page 1 and column 2.
|-
|| Press '''Enter''' key repeatedly
|| Then press '''Enter''' key repeatedly to align the text below the '''banner'''.
|-
|| Click on''' Toggle print preview'''
|| Now click on the '''Toggle print preview''' icon in the '''Standard toolbar.'''
|-
|| Point to '''Date '''and '''Page number '''

'''Editor can enlarge this for clarity'''
|| The date appears at the top of each page and the page number at the bottom.
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Note - '''header''' and '''footer''' will be replicated on all the pages of the '''document.'''
|-
|| Click on '''Close preview'''
|| Click on the '''Close Preview''' button to close the preview.
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Next let’s learn how to add a '''margin''' and '''shadow''' '''style''' to our '''document.'''
|-
|| Click on Page icon in the sidebar deck
|| Click on the '''Page''' icon located in the '''Sidebar deck.'''
|-
|| Click Styles>> More option
|| Under '''Styles''' option, click on the '''More Options''' icon or the '''gear '''icon.
|-
|| Point to '''Page Style: Default Style '''dialog box opens up

Point to several tabs
|| '''Page Style: Default Style''' dialog box opens up.

There are several tabs which can be used to customize the '''page style''' as per our preferences.
|-
|| Click on Footer tab

Check mark on '''Footer on'''
|| Click on the '''Footer''' tab.

Put a check on the '''Footer on''' option, if not already checked.
|-
|| Set '''left margin''' to '''1.00 cm'''

Click on '''Plus''' symbol repeatedly
|| Now set the '''left margin '''space to''' 1.00 cm '''by clicking on the '''plus''' symbol repeatedly.
|-
|| Click on '''More '''

Point to '''Border/Background'''
|| To add a '''border''' or a '''shadow''' to the '''footer''', click on the '''More '''button.

'''Border/Background''' dialog box opens up.
|-
|| Click on Borders tab

Point to Shadow style and point to various option
|| Click on the '''Borders''' tab, if not already selected.

Under the '''Shadow''' '''Style '''section, we can see various options to position the shadow.
|-
|| Select '''Cast Shadow''' to the top right
|| Select '''Cast shadow to bottom right '''icon'''.'''
|-
|| Point to Color option

Under '''Color '''section click on down arrow
|| Under the '''Color''' option, '''Gray''' is the default shadow colour.

To choose a different colour, click on the down arrow.
|-
|| Point to color palette box >> Choose '''blue''' color
|| You may choose any color of your choice from the '''Color palette box.'''

I will choose '''blue'''.
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Leave all the other settings as default in the '''Border/Background''' dialog box.
|-
|| Click on '''OK '''button
|| Then click on the '''OK '''button.
|-
|| '''>> Page Style: Default Style''' dialog boxClick on '''Apply''' button >> '''OK '''button
|| In the''' Page Style: Default Style''' dialog box, click on the '''Apply''' button and then on the '''OK '''button.
|-
|| Click on Sidebar deck icon
|| Close''' '''the''' Sidebar deck.'''
|-
|| Scroll down >> Point to shadow effect
|| Scroll down to see the''' shadow effect '''added to the '''Footer.'''
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Next, we will learn how to remove the '''Header '''and''' Footer '''from a specific page.
|-
|| Only Narration

Cursor on the first page
|| Let’s remove the '''footer''' '''Header''' from the first page of our '''document'''.

So first click the cursor anywhere on the first page of the '''document.'''
|-
|| '''Styles '''>> '''Manage styles '''
|| In the '''Sidebar deck,''' select the '''Styles''' icon.
|-
|| Point to '''Styles''' panels opens up
|| '''Styles''' '''panel''' opens up.

|-
|| Click on Page styles icon
Select First Page
|| Now click on '''Page Styles''' icon and from the list select '''First Page''' option

|-
|| Double click on First Page option
|| Now double-click on the''' First Page '''option
|-
|| Click on X icon of sidebar deck
|| Close the '''Sidebar deck'''.
|-
|| Scroll up and down the pages to show the result
|| Observe that the '''Header '''and''' Footer '''are now removed only from the first page.
|-
|| Re-adjust the text alignment in column 2 of page 1
|| You may need to re-adjust the text alignment once again, as shown.
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Next, let’s learn about '''Footnotes''' and '''Endnotes''' in '''Writer.'''
|-
|| Slide : Footnote and Endnotes (a)

'''Editor can do this'''
||
* Infographics can be shown in the video instead of the text slide'''Footnotes''' appear at the bottom of the page on which they are referred

* Whereas '''Endnotes''' are collected at the end of a '''document '''or '''chapter'''

|-
|| Slide: Footnote and Endnotes (b)
||
* The '''anchor''' for the '''note''' is inserted at the current cursor position
* '''Anchor''' helps users to go directly to a particular part of the page
* You can choose between '''automatic''' '''numbering''' or a''' custom symbol''' for the '''notes'''

|-
||

Select word '''Apache License''' from the second paragraph
|| Let us see how the '''Footnote''' can be added to a word in the '''document'''.

Select the word '''Apache License '''from''' '''the''' '''second paragraph, in column 1 of page 1.
|-
|| Point to Insert '''Footnote''' '''icon'''
|| In the '''Standard toolbar''' click on the '''Insert''' '''Footnote icon.'''
|-
|| Click on '''Insert''' >> '''Footnote and Endnote >> Footnote'''

Only Highlight
|| We can also insert '''Footnote''' in our '''document''' by clicking on the '''Insert''' menu.

Then click on the '''Footnote and Endnote '''and select the''' Footnote '''option'''.'''
|-
|| Point to added '''Footnote'''
|| Both ways, the '''Footnote''' is added to our document with the '''character''' as '''1.'''
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Let’s type the text for our '''Footnote'''.
|-
|| '''Footnote >> '''Type “'''open source software license ”'''
|| Type “'''open source software license”.'''
|-
|| Only Narration
|| In a similar way, let's add another '''footnote''' in our '''document.'''
|-
|| Select the word '''copyleft''' from the second column on page 1

Click on '''Insert Footnote''' icon
|| Select the word '''copyleft''' from the second column on page 1.

Click on the '''Insert''' '''Footnote''' icon in the '''Standard toolbar.'''
|-
|| Point to '''Footnote 2'''
|| One more '''Footnote''' gets added to our page, this time under the second column.
|-
|| Type '''permissive license'''
|| Now type the text for the '''footnote '''as “'''permissive license”.'''
|-
|| Click on the '''character 1 '''in the '''footnote''' >> word '''Apache License'''

|| Let’s click on '''character 1 '''in the '''Footnote '''under column 1.

We are directed to the word '''Apache License '''in the '''document'''.
|-
|| Point to the '''character 1''' next to the word '''Apache License'''

|| Notice the '''character 1''' next to the word '''Apache License.'''

This is the '''anchor''' of the inserted '''Footnote'''.
|-
|| Hover the cursor over this slowly.
|| Hover the cursor over this '''anchor''' slowly.

The cursor turns into a pointing finger.
|-
|| Click
|| Now click on it.
|-
|| Highlight the footnote.
|| We are immediately directed to the bottom of the page where the '''Footnote '''is recorded.
|-
|| Point to '''1'''
|| The “'''Character'''” option is used to define the '''character''' or '''symbol''' for the current '''Footnote.'''
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Let me demonstrate how to change the '''character''' for '''Footnote 1.'''
|-
|| Scroll back up >> place the cursor between the word '''License '''and '''footnote anchor 1'''.
|| Scroll back up and place the cursor between the word '''License '''and '''footnote anchor 1'''.

|-
|| Right click and select
'''Footnote/Endnote'''
|| Then right-click and select the '''Footnote or Endnote''' option.

|-
|| Point to''' Edit Footnote/Endnote'''
|| '''Edit''' '''Footnote/Endnote''' dialog box opens up.
|-
|| Point to Numbering
|| '''Numbering''' is the type of numbering that we want to use for '''Footnotes''' and '''Endnotes'''.
|-
|| Point to Automatic
|| The “'''Automatic'''” option automatically assigns numbers to the '''Footnotes''' or '''Endnotes.'''
|-
|| Click '''Choose''' button

Select '''asterisk'''
|| Click on the '''Choose''' button next to the '''Character''' field.

Select the '''asterisk''' character and click the '''OK''' button.
|-
|| Click on '''OK''' button
|| Click the '''OK''' button to close the '''Edit '''dialog box.
|-
|| Point to '''Footnote''' field
|| The '''character '''of''' footnote 1 '''is now set to the '''asterisk symbol. '''
|-
|| Click on the '''anchor'''
|| Click on the '''anchor'''.
|-
|| Point to '''Footnote 1 '''as '''asterisk symbol'''
|| '''Footnote 1 '''is now seen as an '''asterisk symbol'''.
|-
|| Point to second '''Footnote'''
|| We can also see that our second '''footnote''' has now turned to numerical '''1'''.
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Now let us change the '''character''' of '''Footnote 1''' back to '''numerical'''.
|-
|| Scroll back up >> place the cursor between the word '''License '''and '''footnote anchor 1'''.
|| Scroll back up and place the cursor between the word '''License '''and '''footnote anchor asterisk'''.
|-
|| Right click and select

'''Footnote/Endnote'''
|| Then right-click and select the '''Footnote or Endnote''' option.
|-
|| Point to Footnote/Endnote
|| '''Edit Footnote/Endnote''' dialog box opens up.
|-
|| Select Automatic and Click on OK
|| Under the '''Numbering''' option select '''Automatic''' and then click on the '''OK''' button.
|-
|| Point to footnote 1
|| We can see the '''asterisk symbol''' has changed to '''numerical '''once again'''.'''
|-
|| Scroll down to the '''footnotes'''
|| Scroll down and look at the '''footnotes''' and observe the changes.
|-
||
|| Let’s learn to highlight the '''footnotes'''.
|-
|| Click on footnote text no. 2
|| Click on any one '''footnote '''text.
|-
|| Point to the '''formatting''' drop-down at the top left
|| Look at the '''formatting''' drop-down at the top left, which says '''Footnote'''.
|-
|| Click on the drop-down arrow
|| Click on the drop-down arrow.
|-
|| Click on the drop-down next to '''Endnote''' >> select '''Edit Style'''
|| Now click on the drop-down next to '''Footnote''' and select '''Edit Style'''.
|-
|| '''Paragraph Style: Footnote''' dialog box
|| '''Paragraph Style: Footnote''' dialog box opens up.
|-
|| Click '''Highlighting''' tab and '''Color''' tab
|| Click on the '''Highlighting''' tab and then on '''Color''' tab
|-
||

Choose yellow
|| In the colour palette, choose a highlight colour.

I will choose yellow.
|-
|| Click '''Apply''' button >> '''OK''' button
|| At the bottom click on the '''Apply''' button and then on the '''OK''' button
|-
|| Point to the highlighted '''footnotes'''
|| Look at the '''footnotes''' and observe the highlight.
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Next I will demonstrate how to add an '''endnote''' in our '''document'''.
|-
|| Select the word Mozilla Public License
|| Select the words '''Mozilla Public License '''from''' '''paragraph 2 in column 1 of page 1.
|-
|| Click on Insert Endnote icon
|| Click on the '''Insert''' '''Endnote''' icon located in the '''Standard''' '''toolbar.'''
|-
|| Point to newly added Endnote
|| '''Endnote''' gets added at the end of the '''document, '''on a new page.

If a document has chapters, then the '''endnotes''' will appear at the end of each chapter.
|-
|| Type this text in endnote '''an open source/free software license”'''
|| Type the following text in the '''endnote - “an open source/free software license”'''
|-
|| Only Narration
|| We can change the default '''Roman''' '''numerals''' to other '''style '''options also.
|-
|| Click Tools >> Footnote and Endnotes
|| To do so, click on the '''Tools''' menu and then select the '''Footnote and Endnotes''' option.
|-
|| Point to Footnote/Endnote dialog box
|| '''Footnote/Endnote''' settings dialog box opens up.
|-
|| Point to Autonumbering (Only Highlight)
|| Under the''' Endnotes '''tab,''' '''we see the''' Auto Numbering '''section.
|-
|| Point to Numbering section
|| Using this option we can change '''Numbering''' '''style''' as per our choice.

You may explore this further on your own.
|-
|| Close the dialog box click on X icon
|| Close the dialog box by clicking on '''X''' icon.
|-
|| Press''' Ctrl + S, '''Click on the''' X '''icon
|| Now let us save all the changes and close the file.
|-
|| Only Narration
|| This brings us to the end of this tutorial.

Let us summarize.
|-
|| Slide: Summary
|| In this tutorial, we learnt how to:

* Insert '''Header'''
* Insert '''Footer'''
* Remove '''Header '''and''' Footer''' from the first page
* Insert '''Footnote''' and '''Endnote''' in a '''document'''

|-
|| Slide: Assignment
|| As an assignment

* Open '''practice.odt '''file
* Add a '''Header''' and '''Footer''' to the '''document'''
* Insert your name in the '''Header'''
* Insert '''Page Count''' in the '''Footer'''
* Add an '''Endnote''' stating '''where the page ends'''

|-
|| Slide: About spoken tutorial project
|| The video at the following summarises the Spoken Tutorial project

Please download and watch it.
|-
|| Slide: Spoken Tutorial workshops
|| We conduct workshops using '''spoken tutorials '''and give certificates.

For more details, Please contact us.

|-
|| Slide: Forums Specific Questions
|| Post your timed queries in this forum.

|-
|| Slide: Acknowledgment
|| The '''Spoken Tutorial''' project is funded by MHRD Govt of India.
|-
|| Slide: Thank you
|| This tutorial was originally contributed by DesiCrew Solutions Pvt. Ltd. in 2011

This is Pratik Kamble along with the Spoken Tutorial team from''' IIT Bombay '''signing off.

Thank you for watching.
|-
|}

LibreOffice-Suite-Writer-6.3/C3/Creating-Newsletters/English

2020-09-21T13:39:40Z

Pratik kamble: Created page with "Title: Creating Newsletters Author: Pratik Kamble Novice Reviewer: Nikita and Pooja Domain Reviewer: Praveen and Nancy Keywords: Create newsletters, Column break option,..."

Title: Creating Newsletters

Author: Pratik Kamble

Novice Reviewer: Nikita and Pooja

Domain Reviewer: Praveen and Nancy

Keywords: Create newsletters, Column break option, Add image, Add banner, Animated text, word count

{|border = 1
|-
| align=center| Visual Cue
| align=center| Narration
|-
|| Slide: '''Title'''
|| Welcome to the spoken tutorial on '''Creating Newsletters.'''
|-
|| Slide: '''Learning Objectives'''
|| In this tutorial, we will learn how to:
*Create '''newsletters''' in '''LibreOffice Writer'''
*Use '''column break''' option
*Check the '''word count'''

|-
|| Slide: '''Learning Objectives'''
|| We will also learn to add the following to the '''newsletter''':
*'''Image''' and '''Banner'''
*'''Text animation''' and
*'''Watermark'''

|-
|| Slide''': System Requirements'''
|| This tutorial is recorded using
*'''Ubuntu Linux OS''' version '''18.04''' and
*'''LibreOffice Suite '''version '''6.3.5'''

|-
|| Slide:''' Code files'''
||
*The files used in this tutorial are provided to you in the''' Code files''' link on this tutorial page.
*Pls download and extract the file.
*Make a copy and then use it for practising.

|-
|| Slide: '''Newsletter '''
||
*'''Newsletters''' are '''publications''' which get circulated regularly to its subscribers
*It is used to communicate latest news, new ideas and events
*'''Newsletters''' usually have '''multi-column''' format
*This makes it easier for the reader to look at different sections

|-
|| Only Narration
|| A '''Newsletter''' can be created very easily using '''LibreOffice''' '''Writer.'''

This makes reading of articles easier and faster.
|-
|| Open '''Newsletter.odt'''
|| Open the file '''Newsletter.odt'''

The same is available in the '''Code files''' link for practice.
|-
|| Press '''Ctrl + A '''
|| Select all the text in the '''document''' by pressing '''Ctrl + A '''keys.
|-
|| '''Font''' = '''Liberation Serif'''

'''Font-size''' = '''14'''

Choose the '''Justified '''icon.
|| Now choose the '''font''' as '''Liberation Serif''' and '''font-size''' as '''14'''.

Also, choose the '''Justified '''icon.
|-
|| Select the text '''FOSS''' >> '''centre-align''' it.
|| Select the text '''FOSS''' and '''centre-align''' it.

|-
|| Only narration
|| We will now learn how to insert''' columns '''in our '''document'''.
|-
|| Click on '''Page''' icon
|| In the '''Sidebar deck''' click on the''' Page '''icon.''' '''
|-
|| Click on the '''Styles gear '''icon
|| Click on the '''Styles gear '''icon to open the '''Page Style''' dialog box.
|-
|| Click on '''Columns''' tab >> In '''Settings''', select the '''2-column icon'''
|| Click on the '''Columns''' tab.

Under '''Settings''', select the '''2 columns with equal size icon'''.
|-
|| Point to '''Autowidth '''and '''Spacing'''
|| Under '''Width and Spacing, Autowidth '''gets checked and '''Spacing''' is '''0.5cm.'''
|-
|| Click on '''Apply >> '''click on '''Close'''
|| Click on the '''Apply''' button and then on the '''OK''' button.

|-
|| Click on '''Close Sidebar Deck'''
|| Close the '''Sidebar''' '''deck.'''

|-
|| Point to 2 columns

|| Observe that our '''document''' changes into '''2 columns''' format.

|-
|| Click on Format menu >> Click on Column option (Only Highlight)
|| Alternatively we can add '''columns''' by clicking on the '''Format menu '''

And then on the '''Columns''' option.
|-
|| Point to Columns dialog box

Point to Plus symbol
|| '''Columns''' dialog box opens up.

We can add a number of '''Columns''' by clicking on '''plus''' symbol.
|-
|| Click on X icon
|| Let's close the dialog box by clicking on the '''X''' icon.
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Now let us insert an '''image''' into our '''newsletter.'''
|-
|| Cursor at the end of column 2 >> press '''Enter''' thrice.
|| Place the cursor at the end of '''column 2 '''and press '''Enter''' thrice.
|-
|| Click on '''Gallery''' icon in the '''sidebar'''
|| Click on the '''Gallery''' icon in the '''Sidebar.'''
|-
|| Point to '''New theme'''

Select '''Computers'''
|| Below the button '''New theme,''' we can see various '''theme''' folders.

I will select the '''Computers '''folder'''.'''
|-
|| Select Computer-laptop-black from the list

Select Insert option (Only Highlight)
|| Then select '''Computer-Laptop-Black '''from the list.

Right-click and select the '''Insert''' option.
|-
|| Only narration
|| Alternatively we can also '''drag-and-drop''' the '''image'''.
|-
|| Click on X icon of the '''Sidebar deck'''
|| Close the '''Sidebar deck'''.
|-
|| Point to the image
|| The inserted '''image''' fits the width of '''column 2''' into which it was inserted.
|-
|| Resize and reposition the image
|| Resize the '''image''' as shown.
|-
|| Point to newly added image
|| So this is how we can add an '''image''' to the '''newsletter column.'''
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Next, we will learn about the '''Column break '''option.
|-
|| Cursor at the beginning of second last para
|| I will keep the cursor at the beginning of the fourth paragraph.
|-
|| Click on Insert >> More Breaks >> Manual Break
|| Now click on the '''Insert''' menu in the '''menu bar '''and''' '''then on''' More Breaks.'''

From the sub-menu select '''Manual Break.'''
|-
|| Insert break dialog box
|| '''Insert break '''dialog box opens up.
|-
|| Select '''column break >> '''Click '''OK'''
|| Under the section '''Type, '''select the '''Column break''' option and click on the '''OK''' button.
|-
|| Point to new column
|| We can see that the paragraph shifted to the '''second column''' of the page.
|-
|| Click on Insert >> More Breaks >> Manual Break >> Select '''column break >> '''Click '''OK'''
|| Repeat the above steps for the last paragraph also.

We see that the paragraph is now in '''page 2''' of the '''newsletter'''.
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Next we will learn how to highlight a portion of the article in a different colour.
|-
|| Drag cursor along the text
|| Select the paragraph on '''page 2''' by dragging the cursor along the text.
|-
|| Click on '''highlight color''' icon
|| In the '''Formatting toolbar, '''click on the '''Highlight color icon''' drop-down.
|-
|| '''Color palette''' box

Select '''Lime'''
|| From the '''Color palette''' box, select any color of your choice.

I will select '''Light''' '''Lime 3.'''
|-
|| Click anywhere else to deselect the text
|| Click anywhere else to deselect the text.
|-
|| Point to new background color text
|| Observe that''' '''the''' background color''' of that text portion has changed as per our selection.
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Next we will learn how to add '''Banners''' to the '''newsletter.'''
|-
|| Scroll up >> place the cursor at the end of '''column 2 '''on '''page 1'''.
|| Scroll up and place the cursor at the end of '''column 2 '''on '''page 1'''.
|-
|| Click on star icon in the drawing toolbar
|| Now, locate the '''Stars and Banners icon''' in the''' Drawing toolbar'''.

And click on the down arrow to expand the options.
|-
|| Point to different shapes

Select '''Horizontal scroll '''
|| We see different shapes to choose from.

Let us select '''Horizontal scroll.'''
|-
|| Go to column 2

Hold left mouse button and drag to draw the shape

Click anywhere else to deselect the shape
|| Come to '''column 2'''.

Hold the left mouse button and drag the shape in the empty space of '''column 2.'''

Click anywhere else to deselect the shape.
|-
|| Move it to end beginning of the document
|| Now let’s move the newly added '''banner''' to the end beginning of the '''document'''.
|-
|| Go to '''page 1''' >> place the cursor before the word '''FOSS''' in '''column 1'''
|| First go to '''page 1''' and place the cursor before the word '''FOSS''' in '''column 1'''.
|-
|| Press '''Enter''' key four times
|| Now press '''Enter''' key four times.
|-
|| Repeat for '''column 2'''
|| Repeat the process for '''column 2''' also.
|-
|| Click on '''banner '''to select it

Drag and place it in between '''columns 1 '''and '''2'''
|| Come back to the '''banner''' and click on it to select it.

Now drag and place it in the empty space in between '''columns 1 '''and '''2.'''
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Inside the '''banner''' we can type any text of our choice.
|-
|| Double-click and type '''This is a newsletter'''
|| Double-click inside the '''banner''' and type, “'''This is a newsletter.” '''
|-
|| Press '''Ctrl+A''' keys

Make the text '''Centre-align''', increase the '''font size''' to 16, make the text '''bold'''
|| Now press '''Ctrl+A''' keys to select the full text.

'''Centre-align''' it, increase the '''font size''' to 16, make the text '''bold'''.
|-
|| Click anywhere else to deselect
|| Now click anywhere else to deselect the '''banner'''.
|-
|| Only Narration
|| We can even add '''effects''' to our '''newsletter'''.

I will demonstrate how to do so.
|-
|| Select the heading FOSS
|| Select the heading '''FOSS.'''
|-
|| Click Format >> Character
|| Now go to the '''Format menu''' and select '''Character.'''
|-
|| Point to '''Character''' dialog box

Click '''Font Effects''' tab

Select '''Blinking''' option
|| '''Character''' dialog box opens up

Click on the '''Font Effects''' tab.

Under the '''Relief '''or '''Effects '''section, check the '''Blinking''' option.
|-
|| Click on '''OK''' button
|| And click on the '''OK''' button.
|-
|| Point to word '''FOSS'''
|| We can see that the word '''FOSS''' is blinking.

This effect is useful to draw the attention of the reader of the '''digital newsletter'''.
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Now let’s learn how to add a '''watermark'''.
|-
|| Slide : Watermark
|| '''Watermark''' is used to indicate that the '''document''' is

to be treated in a special way.

For example- '''Confidential,''' '''Private, '''etc.

Let me demonstrate how to add a '''watermark'''.
|-
|| Click Format >> Watermark
|| Go to the '''Format menu''' in the '''menu bar''' and select the '''Watermark''' option.
|-
|| Point to Watermark dialog box

Point to Text field and type confidential
|| '''Watermark''' dialog box opens up.

In the '''Text''' field, type “'''For internal circulation”.'''
|-
|| Increase to 70 % '''transparency >> '''Change '''color''' to '''Light Red 3'''

Click on '''OK''' button
|| Increase the '''transparency''' to '''70 %''' and change the '''color''' to '''light green''' '''Light Red 3.'''

Then click on the '''OK''' button.
|-
|| Scroll to page 2 >> Point to the '''Watermark'''
|| We can see our '''Watermark''' is added to the '''newsletter'''.
|-
||

Only Narration
|| Now we will learn another feature in '''Writer''' that is '''Word count'''

Lastly, we will learn about the '''Word''' '''count''' feature in '''Writer.'''
|-
|| Slide : Word count
|| '''Word''' '''count''' feature helps to maintain '''word count''' in a '''document'''.

It helps us to know the number of words in the '''document''' which we typed.

It also counts pages, paragraphs, lines, and characters.
|-
|| Select Highlighted text
|| Select the last paragraph which we had highlighted earlier.
|-
|| Point to '''Status bar'''
|| Observe the '''word count''' that is displayed in the '''Status bar.'''
|-
|| Click on Word and character Count
|| Click on '''Word '''and''' Character count''' in the '''Status bar'''.
|-
|| Point to '''Word count''' dialog box

Point to words under selection

Point to document section
|| The '''Word Count''' dialog box opens up.

It shows the''' '''word count''' '''for the current selection.

And also for the whole '''document''' as well.
|-
|| Point to '''Character including spaces''' and '''excluding spaces'''
|| It also shows the total count of '''Characters''' '''including spaces '''and '''excluding spaces.'''
|-
|| Click on '''Close '''button
|| Close the '''Word Count''' dialog box by clicking on the '''Close '''button.
|-
|| Press''' Ctrl + S, '''Click on the''' X '''icon
|| Save all the changes and close the file.
|-
|| Only Narration
|| This brings us to the end of this tutorial.

Let us summarize.
|-
|| Slide: Summary
|| In this tutorial, we learnt how to:

*Create '''newsletters''' in '''LibreOffice Writer'''
*Use '''Column break''' option
*Check the '''word count'''

|-
|| Slide: Summary''' '''
|| We also learnt to add the following to the '''newsletter''':
*'''Image''' and '''Banner'''
*'''Text animation''' and
*'''Watermark'''

|-
|| Slide: Assignment
|| As an assignment

*Open '''Newsletter practice.odt '''file
*Use''' 3 column '''option format
*Add a '''Banner '''and''' '''type the''' '''text '''Spoken Tutorial''' in it

|-
|| Slide: About spoken tutorial project
|| The video at the following link summarises the spoken tutorial project

Please download and watch it.

|-
|| Slide: Spoken Tutorial workshops
|| We conduct workshops using '''spoken tutorials '''and give certificates.

For more details, Please contact us.
|-
|| Slide: Forums Specific Questions
|| Please post your timed queries in this forum.
|-
|| Slide: Acknowledgment
|| The '''Spoken Tutorial '''project is funded by '''MHRD''' Govt of India
|-
|| Slide: Thank you
|| This tutorial was originally contributed by DesiCrew Solutions Pvt. Ltd. in 2011.

This is Pratik Kamble along with the Spoken Tutorial team from '''IIT Bombay''' signing off.

Thank you for watching.
|-
|}

LibreOffice-Suite-Writer-6.3/C3/Using-Find-Replace-and-Auto-correct/English

2020-09-21T11:30:34Z

Pratik kamble: Created page with "Title: Using Find, Replace and autocorrect Author: Pratik Kamble Novice Reviewer: Nikita and Pooja Domain Reviewer: Praveen and Nancy Keywords: Search and Replace, Spellc..."

Title: Using Find, Replace and autocorrect

Author: Pratik Kamble

Novice Reviewer: Nikita and Pooja

Domain Reviewer: Praveen and Nancy

Keywords: Search and Replace, Spellcheck, Autocorrect

{|border = 1
|-
| align=center| '''Visual Cue'''
| align=center| '''Narration '''
|- "
|| '''Slide:''' Title
|| Welcome to the '''spoken tutorial '''on '''Using Find, Replace and Autocorrect '''in''' Writer.'''
|- "
|| '''Slide:''' Learning Objectives
|| In this tutorial, we will learn to use:
*'''Find '''and''' Replace '''
*'''Spell check '''and
*'''Autocorrect '''features

|- "
|| '''Slide:''' System Requirements
|| This tutorial is recorded using
* '''Ubuntu Linux OS''' version''' 18.04 '''and
* '''LibreOffice Suite '''version '''6.3.5'''

|- "
|| Slide''': Find and Replace'''
|| Let us start by learning to use the '''Find and Replace''' feature in '''Writer.'''

* With this feature, we can search for a particular '''text'''
* and/or replace it in the entire '''document.'''

Let us understand this through an example.

|- "
|| Open'''Resume.odt''' file
|| Open the file “'''Resume.odt” '''which we have created earlier.
|-
| " | '''Slide: Code files'''
| " |
* This file has been provided to you in the''' Code files''' link on this tutorial page.
* Pls download and extract the file.
* Make a copy and then use it for practising.

|-"
|| Only Narration
|| Before we proceed with the tutorial, let’s first delete some unwanted pages which were created earlier.
|-"
|| Go to the 4th page >> Select the text >> press Backspace twice

Select the lines''' This is the fourth page'''

Press '''Backspace'''

Point to status bar page
|| In our '''Resume '''file, go to the fourth page.

Select the lines “'''This is the fourth page'''” by dragging the cursor along the text.

Then press the '''Backspace''' key twice.

The 4th page is deleted and is no longer seen.
|-"
|| Go to the 3rd page >> Select the text >> press Backspace twice
|| Now repeat the same steps to delete the third page also.
|-"
|| Scroll up and down to show both the pages
|| We have only 2 pages in this '''document '''now.
|-"
|| Cursor on the first page >> before the word '''Resume'''
|| Let’s place the cursor on the first page of the '''document, '''before the word '''Resume'''.
|-"
|| Only Narration
|| First let us learn how to find a word or text in the''' document.'''
|-"
|| Only Narration
|| For an example, we will search for the word '''Ramesh''' in our '''Writer''' document.
|-"
|| Point to '''Search bar'''
|| At the bottom left, we can see the '''Search bar.'''
|-"
|| Go to View>> Toolbars>> Find

Only Highlight
|| If it is not visible, then go to the '''View''' menu and select '''Toolbars.'''

From the sub-menu check the '''Find''' option, if unchecked. The '''Search bar '''will become visible.
|-"
|| Type '''Ramesh'''
|| Type '''Ramesh '''in the '''Find '''field and press '''Enter.'''
|-"
|| Point to '''Ramesh'''
|| The word '''Ramesh''' gets highlighted.
|-"
|| Text on screen:'''Ctrl + F keys'''
|| Press '''Ctrl + F keys '''to go directly to the '''Find''' field.
|-"
|| Type '''NAME'''
|| Now type '''NAME '''in the '''Find '''field and press '''Enter.'''

This searches for the word '''NAME''' in the entire document.
|-"
|| Point to '''NAME''' word
|| The first instance of the word '''NAME''' gets highlighted.
|-"
|| Point to '''Find Previous '''and '''Find Next''' icon
|| Next to the '''Find''' field, we can see '''Find''' '''Previous''' and '''Find''' '''Next''' icons.
|-"
|| Click on Find Next and Find Previous
|| Click on these icons to find other occurrences of the word '''NAME''' in the document.
|-"
|| Click on Find All

Point to Word '''NAME'''
|| To search '''NAME''' in the entire document, click on the '''Find All '''option.

Notice that all the instances of the word '''NAME''' get highlighted in the entire '''document'''.
|-"
|| Point to Previous Page and Next Page icon
|| To navigate between the pages while searching, use the '''Previous page''' and '''Next page''' icons.
|-"
|| Click on empty space
|| Now, click anywhere in the '''document''' to deselect the highlighted words.
|- "
|| Only Narration

Only Narration
|| Next, let’s learn about the''' Find and Replace''' option.

By using this feature, we can easily replace the search word with a new one.
|- "
|| Scroll and show page 2
|| Let’s replace the word '''page''' on page 2.
|- "
|| Point to '''Find and Replace''' icon in the '''Standard''' '''toolbar'''
|| We can see the '''Find & Replace '''icon''' '''in the '''Standard toolbar.'''
|- "
|| Click on '''Edit '''>> '''Find & Replace'''

Only Highlight
|| Alternatively, click on the '''Edit''' '''menu''' in the '''menu bar''' and then on the '''Find & Replace '''option.
|- "
|| Point to '''Find & Replace''' dialog box
|| Either ways the '''Find & Replace''' dialog box opens up.
|- "
|| Point on '''Find''' field
|| In the '''Find '''field, type the text that you wish to find and replace.
|- "
|| Point on '''Find''' field
|| By default, the earlier search word '''NAME''' is visible here.
|- "
|| Type “'''Page'''”
|| Delete the word '''NAME''' and type the word '''page''' in the '''Find''' field.
|- "
|| Point to “Replace with” field
|| In the '''Replace''' field, type the text that you want to replace with.
|- "
|| Only Narration
|| I want to replace the word '''page''' with '''sheet''' in my '''document'''.
|- "
|| Type “'''sheet'''”
|| So, I’ll type '''sheet''' in the '''Replace''' field.
|- "
|| Click on '''Replace All'''

|| Now, click on the '''Replace All '''button.

|- "
||Point to '''Search key replaced 3 times.'''

|| A message is displayed - '''Search key replaced 3 times.'''

|-
| Click on close button

|And then click on the '''close''' button

|- "
||Point to word sheet

||On page 2 we see that all occurrences of the word '''page''' get replaced with '''sheet'''

|- "
|| Press Ctrl + H keys

Text on screen:'''Ctrl + H keys'''
|| Press '''Ctrl + H''' keys to open the '''Find & Replace '''dialog box once again.
|- "
|| Point to '''Other options'''

Click on right arrow icon
|| In the dialog box, we can see the '''Other''' '''options '''section.

Click on the arrow icon before '''Other options,''' to expand the section if not visible.
|- "
|| Only narration
|| The '''Other option''' section contains a list of specific '''Find & Replace '''options.
|- "
|| Point to '''Replace Backwards'''
|| '''Replace Backwards''' option searches for the text from bottom to top.
|- "
|| Point to '''Current selection only'''
|| '''Current selection only''' searches for the text inside the selected portion of the '''document'''.
|- "
|| Point to “'''Regular expression'''” & “'''Similarity search”'''
|| It has other advanced options like '''Regular''' '''expressions '''and '''Similarity search'''.
|- "
|| Only Narration
|| There are three more buttons at the bottom of the dialog box.
|- "
|| Point to “'''Attribute'''” “'''Format'''” and '''“No Format”'''
|| They are '''Attributes''', '''Format''' and '''No Format.'''
|- "
|| Only Narration
|| All of these provide us with various types of advanced '''Find & Replace''' options.
|- "
|| Only Narration
|| You can explore and learn more about them on your own later.
|- "
|| Click on '''Close''' button
|| Click on the '''Close''' button at bottom right corner to close this dialog box.
|- "
|| Only Narration
|| After learning about '''Find '''and''' Replace, '''we will now learn how to use '''Spellcheck.'''

'''Spellcheck''' is used for checking spelling mistakes in a '''document'''.
|- "
|| Only Narration
|| The '''Spell Check''' feature is distinct for each language.
|- "
|| Click on '''Tools '''>> '''Options'''
|| Click on the '''Tools''' menu in the '''menu''' '''bar''' and then click on '''Options.'''
|- "
|| Click on '''Language settings''' >> '''Languages'''
|| In the '''Options''' dialog-box, go to the left side section.

Click on the arrow icon before the '''Language Settings''' to expand it.

Now click on '''Languages.'''
|- "
|| Point to '''User interface''' >> '''Default-English (USA)'''
|| In the field '''User interface''', click on the drop-down and select '''Default - English (USA).'''
|- "
|| Click on '''Locale setting''' and select '''English (India)'''
|| In the''' Locale setting''', click on the drop-down and select '''English (India) '''If not already selected.

|- "
|| Point on '''Default Language for documents'''

'''Western''' field >> select '''English (India)'''

'''[Textbox] '''In case you don't see the curly red line, go back to Tools>> Options>>..... etc. and choose English (USA)

||Now go to the '''Default Languages for Documents''' section.

In the '''Western''' field, click on the drop-down and select '''English (India)'''.

|- "
|| Click on '''Apply '''button''' '''

Click''' '''on''' OK '''button
|| Finally, click on the '''Apply''' button at the bottom of the dialog box.

And then click on the '''OK''' button.
|- "
|| Only Narration
|| Let us now see how the '''spell check''' features works for the language - '''English India.'''
|- "
|| '''Menu bar''' >> '''Tools '''>> '''Automatic spell checking'''
|| To use the '''Spelling '''and''' Grammar''' option, go to '''Tools '''in the '''menu bar. '''

And confirm that the '''Automatic Spell checking '''option is checked.
|- "
|| Click on '''Automatic Spell checking'''
|| If not, then click on '''Automatic Spell checking '''to check it.
|- "
|| Go to the last line of the document >> press '''Enter '''key twice.
|| Now keep the cursor next to the word '''HOUSEWIFE''' and press the '''Spacebar'''.
|- "
|| Type '''HUSEWIFE''' and Press space bar
|| Then type '''HUSEWIFE '''and press the '''Spacebar '''once.
|- "
|| Point to red line

Point to names Shweta Mahesh Ramesh

Only Narration
|| We see that a curly red line appears just below the incorrect word.

We can also see the curly red lines below the names.

This is because Indian names are not a part of the '''LibreOffice Writer’s inbuilt dictionary.'''
|- "
|| Cursor on '''HUSEWIFE'''

Click on '''Check spelling'''
|| Now place the cursor on the word '''HUSEWIFE'''.

Then click on the '''Check spelling''' icon in the '''Standard toolbar.'''
|- "
|| Point to not in dictionary field
|| The '''Spelling''' dialog box opens.
|- "
|| Point to '''HUSEWIFE'''

Point to suggestion box
|| Under '''Not in dictionary,''' the incorrect word is highlighted in red color.

And the suggestions for correct words are shown in the '''Suggestions''' box.
|- "
|| Click on '''Housewife '''

click on '''Correct '''button
|| In the '''Suggestions''' box, first click on the word '''HOUSEWIFE.'''

Then click on the '''Correct''' button.

|- "
|| Point to Popup window

Click on No button
|| In some cases, a '''Confirmation''' pop-up window may appear.

It says “'''Continue checking at the beginning of the document''' ?

Click on the '''No''' button.
|- "
|| Click on close button
|| Now click on the '''Close''' button to close the '''Spelling''' dialog box.
|- "
|| Point to the correct word
|| We see that the correct spelling has now been replaced.
|- "
|| Press''' Ctrl + Z '''
|| Press '''Ctrl+Z '''keys''' '''until the newly added word '''HOUSEWIFE''' gets deleted.

|- "
|| Only Narration
|| Next, we will learn about the '''AutoCorrect '''feature.

|- "
|| Only Narration
|| The '''AutoCorrect''' feature is an extension of '''Spellcheck.'''

|- "
||Click on Tools >> Auto Correct >>Auto Correct options
|| Let me demonstrate how to use the '''Autocorrect '''feature.

Go to the '''Tools''' '''menu''' and select '''Auto Correct'''.

From the sub-menu select the '''AutoCorrection Options.'''
|- "
|| Open and Point to '''autocorrect '''dialog box
|| The '''AutoCorrect''' dialog box opens.
|- "
|| Only narration
|| The''' AutoCorrect''' feature automatically corrects the text as we type.
|- "
|| Click on the '''Option''' tab
|| The corrections are made according to the options we select in the '''Options''' tab.
|- "
|| Point at different options
|| There are several '''AutoCorrect''' options here like-

* '''Delete spaces and tabs at beginning and end of paragraph '''
* '''Ignore double spaces'''
|- "
|| Click on X icon
|| Close the '''Autocorrect''' dialog box by clicking on the '''X''' icon.
|- "
|| Only Narration
|| Let us see how these work through an example.
|- "
|| Type '''This is the Spoken Tutorial Project '''with single '''spaces''' and double '''spaces'''
|| In our '''Resume''' file, move the cursor below the word '''Hobbies '''and press '''Enter '''twice

Now type '''This is the Spoken Tutorial Project''' with single, double and triple '''spaces''' between words.
|- "
|| Click on Tools >> Auto Correct >>Auto Correct options
|| Go to the '''Tools''' '''menu''' and select '''Auto Correct'''.

From the sub menu select the '''AutoCorrection Options.'''
|- "
|| Check on '''Ignore double spaces '''

Click on '''OK'''
|| Under the '''Option''' tab put a check on '''Ignore double spaces.'''

And click on the '''OK''' button at the bottom right corner.
|- "
||

Type '''This is the '''and double space

Point to '''This is the Spoken Tutorial Project '''
|| In the new line, type '''This is the Spoken Tutorial Project '''with double and triple '''spaces''' between words.

I will type, '''This is the''' and press the '''Spacebar''' twice.

Notice that, '''Writer''' does not allow us to add double or more '''spaces'''.

Complete typing the sentence.
|- "
|| Only Narration
|| '''AutoCorrect''' feature can also be used to replace long text with an abbreviation.
|- "
|| Only Narration
|| It saves typing effort by creating shortcuts to long words.
|- "
|| Highlight '''NAME, Secondary''', '''Examination'''
|| We have used a few words repeatedly in our '''document'''.
|- "
|| Only Narration
|| With shortcuts, we can avoid typing these words again and again.
|- "
|| Cursor next to the word '''tutorial '''and''' '''Press''' Enter '''
|| Keep the cursor next to the word '''tutorial''' and press '''Enter.'''
|- "
|| Type '''This is the Spoken Tutorial Project '''5 2 times.
|| Now type '''This is the Spoken Tutorial Project '''repeatedly in our document, say 2 times.
|- "
|| Only Narration
|| To avoid repeated typing, we can create an '''abbreviation.'''

This will directly get converted into the required text.
|- "
|| Only Narration
|| Now I will demonstrate how abbreviation '''stp''' converts to '''Spoken Tutorial Project. '''
|- "
|| Click on Tools >> Auto Correct >>Auto Correct options
|| Go to the '''Tools''' '''menu''' and select '''Auto Correct'''.

From the sub-menu select the '''AutoCorrection Options.'''
|- "
|| Click on Replace tab

|| '''AutoCorrect''' dialog-box opens up. Click on the '''Replace''' tab.

|- "
|| Cursor on Replacement and exceptions for language box
|| Under '''Replacement and exceptions for language '''select '''English India '''from the drop down list.

|- "
|| Type “'''stp'''” in '''Replace''' field
|| Type '''stp''' in the '''Replace''' field.

|- "
|| Type “'''Spoken Tutorial Project'''” in '''With''' field
|| In the '''With''' field, type '''Spoken Tutorial Project.'''

|- "
|| Click on '''New''' button
|| Then click on the '''New''' button on the right.

|- "
|| Show the entry
|| We see that the entry is made in the replacement table.

|- "
|| Click on OK button
|| Click on the '''OK''' button at the bottom right.

|- "
|| Type “'''This is the stp'''”
Show '''Stp''' to '''Spoken tutorial Project'''

|| Now, type the text “'''This is the stp” '''in a new line''' '''and press the '''Spacebar'''.
Immediately the '''stp''' '''abbreviation''' gets converted to the words '''Spoken Tutorial Project.'''

|- "
|| Only Narration
|| This feature is very helpful when the same text is repeated several times in a '''document'''.
|- "
|| Press''' Ctrl + S, '''Click on the''' X '''icon
|| Save the changes and close the file.
|- "
|| Only Narration
|| This brings us to the end of this spoken tutorial.

Let us summarise
|- "
|| Slide: '''Summary'''
|| In this tutorial, we learnt how to use:

* '''Find '''and''' Replace '''
* '''Spell check '''and
* '''Auto Correct '''features

|- "
|| Slide: '''Assignment'''
|| As an assignment,

* Type the following text in a new '''Writer '''document''':'''

“'''This is a new document. This document deals with the Find and Replace feature of Writer.”'''

|- "
|| Slide: '''Assignment'''
||
* Now '''find''' and '''replace''' the word '''document''' in your text with the word '''file'''
* Replace the word '''text''' with '''t x t'''
* Use the '''Spell Check''' feature to correct the spelling to '''text'''
* Use “'''English(India)'''” as your default language
* Create an abbreviation for the text “'''This is LibreOffice Writer” '''as''' “TLW'''”.

|- "
|| Slide: '''About spoken tutorial project '''
|| The video at the following summarises the Spoken Tutorial project

Please download and watch it.
|- "
|| Slide: '''Spoken Tutorial workshops'''
|| We conduct workshops using '''Spoken''' '''Tutorials''' and give certificates

For more details, Please contact us
|- "
|| Slide''': Forums'''
|| Please post your timed queries in this forum.
|- "
|| Slide: '''Acknowledgment'''
|| The '''Spoken Tutorial '''project is funded by '''MHRD''' Govt of India
|- "
|| Slide: '''Thank you'''
|| This tutorial was originally contributed by DesiCrew Solutions Pvt. Ltd. in 2011

This is Pratik Kamble along with the Spoken Tutorial team from''' IIT Bombay''' signing off.

Thank you for watching.
|-
|}

LibreOffice-Suite-Writer-6.3/C2/Viewing-and-printing-a-document-in-Writer/English

2020-07-04T08:32:52Z

Pratik kamble:

Title: Viewing and printing a document in Writer

Author: Pratik Kamble

Novice Reviewer: Nikita and Pooja

Domain Reviewer: Praveen and Nancy

Keywords: View Document, Printing document,normal layout web layout

{|border=1
|-
| align=center | '''Visual Cue'''
| align=center | '''Narration'''
|-
| | Slide: '''Title Slide'''
| | Welcome to the''' '''spoken tutorial on '''Viewing and Printing text documents.'''
|-
| | Slide : '''Learning Objectives'''
|| In this tutorial we will learn how to
* View documents and
*'''Print''' documents in '''LibreOffice Writer.'''

|-
| | Slide: '''System Requirements'''
|| This tutorial is recorded using
* '''Ubuntu Linux OS''' version '''18.04''' and
* '''LibreOffice Suite '''version '''6.3.5'''

|-
| | Show Slide : '''Viewing options'''
|| Viewing options

We’ll first learn about the various viewing options in''' LibreOffice Writer.'''
|-
| | Slide: (a)
|| There are basically two widely used viewing options in '''Writer'''.

They are '''Normal''' and '''Web.'''
|-
| | Slide: Layout
| | The '''Normal '''option displays how the document will look when printed.
|-
| | Slide (a)
| | The '''Web '''option displays the document as seen in a '''web browser.'''
|-
| | Slide (b)
|| This is useful when we want to create '''HTML''' documents.

It’s also useful when we want to view the document in full screen mode for editing them.
|-
| | Open '''Resume.odt''' file
| | Open the file “'''Resume.odt” '''which we have created earlier.
|-
| | Slide: '''Code files '''
||
* The file has been provided to you in the''' Code files''' link on this tutorial page.
* Pls download and extract the file.
* Make a copy and then use it for practising.

|-
| | Click on '''View''' >> '''Normal'''
|| To access the '''Normal''' option, click on '''View''' '''menu''' in the '''menu bar.'''

And then click on the '''Normal''' option.
|-
| | Click on '''View''' >> '''Web'''
|| To access the '''Web''' option, click on the '''View''' '''menu''' in the '''menu bar. '''

Then click on the '''Web''' option.
|-
| | Only narration
| | Apart from both these options, one can also view the documents in full screen mode.
|-
| | Click on '''View''' >> '''Full screen'''
| | Click on the '''View''' '''menu''' in the '''menu bar''' and then on '''Full Screen''' option.
|-
| | Only Narration
|| The '''Full screen''' mode is useful for editing the documents.

It’s also useful for projecting them on a projector.
|-
|| Point to '''Full Screen '''button

Press '''Esc''' key

| | Press either the '''Full Screen''' button

or the '''Escape''' key to exit the full screen mode.

|-
| | Only Narration
| | We are back to the '''Writer''' window.
|-
| | Click on Normal
| | Now, let’s click on the '''View''' '''menu '''once again and then on the '''Normal''' option.
|-
| | Click on '''Insert''' >> '''Page break'''
|| Before proceeding further, let us add a new page to our document.

Click the '''Insert''' '''menu''' in the '''menu bar''', then on the '''Page break''' option.
|-
| | New page
| | We are moved to a new page in the document.
|-
| | Press '''Ctrl+Z''' keys
| | Press '''Ctrl+Z''' keys to undo this change.
|-
| | Click on '''Insert''' >> '''More break >> Manual Break '''
|| Let me demonstrate another way to add a new page.

Click on the''' Insert''' menu in the '''menu bar''' then on the '''More Breaks '''option.

Select '''Manual Break''' as a sub-option.
|-
| | '''Insert Break''' dialog box
| | The '''Insert Break''' dialog box opens up.
|-
| | Select '''Page break '''option
| | Here, select the '''Page break''' option.
|-
| | Click on '''OK'''
| | Then click on the '''OK '''button in the dialog box.
|-
|| This is the second page

This is the second page

This is the second page
| | Let’s now type some sample text on a few lines in this new page.
|-
| | Press '''Ctrl+Enter''' keys
| | We’ll add one more page by pressing '''Ctrl+Enter '''keys together.
|-
|| This is the third page

This is the third page

This is the third page
| | And type this sample text in the new page.
|-
| | Press '''Ctrl+Enter''' keys
| | Press '''Ctrl+Enter''' keys once again and create one more new page.
|-
|| This is the fourth page

This is the fourth page

This is the fourth page
| | And type this sample text in the new page.
|-
| | Only Narration
| | Now, let’s learn to use the '''Zoom '''option.
|-
|| Only Narration

Point to bottom right corner
|| The easiest way to zoom or magnify a document is to use the '''Zoom slider'''.

This is located at the bottom right corner of the '''Writer''' window.

|-
|| Click on plus icon

Click on minus icon
| | We can use the '''plus''' and '''minus''' icons on either side of the '''slider''', like this.
|-
|| Drag the '''Zoom head '''to plus side

Drag the '''Zoom head '''to minus side
| | Or we can drag the '''Zoom head''' to increase or decrease the magnification, like this.
|-
| | Only Narration
| | Let's learn another way of zooming.
|-
|| Click on '''View''' >> '''Zoom'''

| | Click on the '''View menu''' in the '''menu bar''' and click on '''Zoom'''.
|-
|| Point to the options displayed in the context menu.

Click on the '''Zoom '''option.
|| A few options are displayed in the context menu.

We’ll skip these and click on the '''Zoom '''option.
|-
| | Only narration
| | '''Zoom & View Layout''' dialog box opens up.
|-
| | Point to zoom factor and view layout
| | It has 2 headings namely - '''Zoom Factor''' and '''View''' '''Layout'''.
|-
| | Point to zoom factor option
| | The '''Zoom Factor''' sets the magnification in which to display the document.
|-
| | Point to options
| | Under '''Zoom Factor''' we see many options.
|-
| | Click '''Optimal''' option >> click on '''Ok'''
|| Click on '''Optimal''' and then on the''' Ok''' button at the bottom right'''.'''

On doing so, we get the most comfortable magnified view of the document.
|-
|| Click on '''View''' >> '''Zoom>> Zoom >> '''

Click on '''Fit width and height '''option >> click on '''Ok'''
|| Again open the '''Zoom & View Layout''' dialog box.

Click on '''Fit width and height''' and then on the''' Ok''' button at the bottom right'''.'''

This view fits the document across the entire width and height of the page.

So, it displays one page at a time.
|-
| | Click on '''View''' >> '''Zoom>> Zoom >> '''Point to '''Fit to Width'''
| | Next option is '''Fit Width'''. This fits the page to its width.
|-
| | Point on '''100%'''
| | '''100'''% view will display the page in its actual size.
|-
| | Highlight both options with a red box
| | Try out these 2 options on your own.
|-
| | Click on '''Variable''' option
| | Next we have the most important '''zoom''' option called the '''Variable'''.
|-
| | Point to '''zoom''' factor
| | Here, we can type the''' zoom factor''' at which we want to view the document.
|-
| | Change value field as 75% click on OK
|| For example, let’s type the value as '''75%''' in the '''Variable''' field.

And then click on the '''OK''' button
|-
| | Only Narration
| | Observe how the text is '''zoomed'''.
|-
| | Click on '''View''' >> '''Zoom>> Zoom >> '''Point to '''View layout'''
|| Another feature in the dialog-box is '''View Layout.'''

We see 2 options here - '''Automatic''' and '''Single page.'''
|-
| | Point to '''Automatic''' and '''Single page'''
|| '''Automatic '''option displays pages side-by-side.

'''Single page''' displays pages one below another.
|-
| | Only Narration
| | Let’s try out some combinations now.
|-
|| Select''' Fit width and height''' option under '''Zoom Factor'''

'''Single page''' option under '''View Layout '''option >> click on '''OK''' button
|| For example- we’ll select '''Fit width and height''' option under '''Zoom Factor'''

Then click on the '''Automatic '''option under the '''View Layout''' and Click on the '''OK''' button.
|-
| | Scroll and show pages
| | We see that the pages are displayed side-by-side.
|-
| | Click on '''View''' >> '''Zoom>> Zoom'''
| | Open the '''Zoom & View Layout''' dialog box once again, as shown here.
|-
| | Select '''Automatic''' under '''View layout'''
| | This time we’ll select '''Single page''' under '''View Layout''' and click on the '''OK''' button.
|-
| | Scroll and show all the pages
| | We see that the pages are displayed one below the other.
|-
| | Bring the '''zoom head''' to the centre of the '''zoom slider'''.
| | Let’s use the '''zoom slider''' and bring the '''Zoom head''' to the centre of the '''slider'''.
|-
| | Highlight the 3 controls in the '''Status bar'''
|| There are 3 more controls on the '''Writer Status Bar '''that can be used for page displays.

These also allow us to change the zoom and view layout of our document.
|-
|| Point to the icons one-by-one:

1. '''Single-page view'''

2. '''Multiple-page view'''

3. Click on '''Book view '''(Scroll down to show the other pages)
|| The''' '''icons are as follows:

'''Single-page view''', '''Multiple-page view''' and '''Book view. '''

'''Book view''' displays two pages adjacent to each other, as in an open book.
|-
| | Click on '''Single-page view '''icon >> Bring the '''zoom head''' to the centre of the '''zoom slider'''
| | Let’s click on '''Single page view''' and bring the '''Zoom head''' to the centre of the '''zoom slider'''.
|-
| | Only Narration
| | Next, we will learn about '''Print Preview'''.
|-
| | Click on Toggle Print Preview icon
| | Click on the '''Toggle''' '''Print Preview '''icon in the '''Standard toolbar'''.
|-
| | Show print preview mode
| | The '''Print Preview bar''' appears when we view the document in preview mode.
|-
| | Only narration
| | It basically shows how the document will look like, when it is printed.
|-
| | Scroll down to see all the pages
| | Scroll down to see all the pages in the document.
|-
| | Point to the '''Print''' icon
|| From this screen, one can proceed to printing the document, by clicking the '''Print''' icon.

But I will not do so now.
|-
| | Click '''Close Preview''' button
| | Click on the '''Close Preview''' button to close the preview.
|-
|| Click on '''File >> Print Preview'''

Press '''Esc '''key
| | We can also click on '''File menu''' in the''' menu bar''' and click on '''Print Preview.'''
|-
| | Only narration
| | Next, we will learn how to '''print''' our '''LibreOffice Writer''' document.
|-
| | Text on screen: Printer connection should be configured correctly on your machine.
| | First, ensure that the printer connection is configured correctly on your machine.
|-
| | Click on '''Print''' icon
|| To directly '''print''' the entire document, click on the '''Print''' icon in the '''Standard toolbar'''.

This is known as quick printing.
|-
| | Only narration
| | We can have more control over printing our document by using the '''Print '''option.
|-
| | Click '''File''' '''>> Print'''
| | We can also click on the '''File menu''' in the''' menu bar '''and then click on '''Print.'''
|-
|| '''Print '''dialog box appears

Highlight the 2 tabs

Highlight the settings below also
|| The '''Print '''dialog box appears on the screen.

There are 2 tabs with different settings in this dialog box.

We can either leave these as default or change the setting as per our printing requirement.
|-
|| Select my configured printer’s''' '''name '''(TCS lab)'''.

Click Printer >> Print to File
|| Under '''Printer drop-down''', let’s select '''Print to File '''option.

This option is used predominantly to print the document into '''PDF '''file''' '''format.
|-
| | Point and then click on '''Print to File'''
|| The button at the bottom of the dialog box says '''Print to File'''.

Click on it.
|-
| | Choose '''Desktop '''>> type '''sample-file >> '''Click '''Save'''
|| Choose the location to save and type a filename for the new document.

Then click on the '''Save''' button at the top right.
|-
| | Only narration
| | The document will be printed to the file
|-
| | Press '''Ctrl+P '''keys
|| Press '''Ctrl+P '''keys on your keyboard.

This is the shortcut to open the '''Print '''dialog box.
|-
| | Select my configured printer’s''' '''name '''(TCS lab)'''.
| | This time under '''Printer''', we will select our configured printer’s''' '''name.
|-
|| Under '''Range and Copies''' >> click on '''more'''

'''Pages''' = 2 and '''Number of copies''' = 3.
|| Under '''Range and Copies''',

I will select '''Pages''' as 2 and '''Number of copies''' as 3.
|-
| | Click '''Ok'''
| | Finally, click on the '''OK '''button to start the printing.
|-
| | Only narration
| | The pages and copies we mentioned will now get printed.
|-
| | Only narration
| | Next, we will see how to access other '''Print '''options.
|-
| | Click on Tools>>options
| | Click on the '''Tools menu '''in the '''menu bar''' and then click on '''Options.'''
|-
| | Click on Libreoffice Writer>>Print
| | Click on the arrow beside '''LibreOffice '''and then click on '''Print.'''
|-
| | Dialog box appears
|| A dialog box appears on the screen, giving us several options to select from.

Choose these options as per requirements.
|-
| | Only narration
| | These settings are now valid for all prints from '''LibreOffice Writer''', in the future.
|-
| | Click on '''OK''' button
| | I will keep all the default settings and then click on the '''OK '''button at the bottom.
|-
| | Press''' Ctrl + S'''
|| Save our file by pressing '''Ctrl + S''' keys.

Then close it by clicking on the '''X '''icon at the top right.
|-
| | Only Narration
|| This brings us to the end of this tutorial.

Let us summarize.
|-
| | Slide: '''Summary'''
|| In this tutorial, we learnt to:
* View documents
* '''Print''' documents in '''LibreOffice Writer'''

|-
| | Slide: '''Assignment'''
|| As an assignment
* Open practice.odt file

* Type the text “'''This is LibreOffice Writer'''”

* Choose '''View '''and select '''Full Screen''' option
* Exit '''Full Screen''' option

|-
| | Slide: '''Assignment'''
||
* Explore all the available '''Zoom '''options
* Explore all the available '''Page preview''' options

|-
| | Slide: '''About spoken tutorial project'''
|| The video at the following summarises the Spoken Tutorial project

Please download and watch it.
|-
| | Slide: '''Spoken Tutorial workshops'''
|| We conduct workshops using '''spoken tutorials '''and give certificates.

For more details, Please contact us.
|-
| | Slide: '''Forums Specific Questions'''
| | Post your timed queries in this forum.
|-
| | Slide: '''Acknowledgment'''
| | The '''Spoken Tutorial''' project is funded by MHRD Govt of India.
|-
| | Slide: '''Thank you'''
|| This tutorial was originally contributed by DesiCrew Solutions Pvt. Ltd. in 2011

This is Pratik Kamble along with the Spoken Tutorial team from''' IIT Bombay '''signing off.

Thank you for watching.
|-
|}

LibreOffice-Suite-Writer-6.3/C2/Viewing-and-printing-a-document-in-Writer/English

2020-07-04T08:29:28Z

Pratik kamble:

Title: Viewing and printing a document in Writer

Author: Pratik Kamble

Novice Reviewer: Nikita and Pooja

Domain Reviewer: Praveen and Nancy

Keywords: View Document, Printing document,normal layout web layout

{|border=1
|-
| align=center | '''Visual Cue'''
| align=center | '''Narration'''
|-
| | Slide: '''Title Slide'''
| | Welcome to the''' '''spoken tutorial on '''Viewing and Printing text documents.'''
|-
| | Slide : '''Learning Objectives'''
|| In this tutorial we will learn how to
* View documents and
*Print documents in '''LibreOffice Writer.'''

|-
| | Slide: '''System Requirements'''
|| This tutorial is recorded using
* '''Ubuntu Linux OS''' version '''18.04''' and
* '''LibreOffice Suite '''version '''6.3.5'''

|-
| | Show Slide : '''Viewing options'''
|| Viewing options

We’ll first learn about the various viewing options in''' LibreOffice Writer.'''
|-
| | Slide: (a)
|| There are basically two widely used viewing options in '''Writer'''.

They are '''Normal''' and '''Web.'''
|-
| | Slide: Layout
| | The '''Normal '''option displays how the document will look when printed.
|-
| | Slide (a)
| | The '''Web '''option displays the document as seen in a '''web browser.'''
|-
| | Slide (b)
|| This is useful when we want to create '''HTML''' documents.

It’s also useful when we want to view the document in full screen mode for editing them.
|-
| | Open '''Resume.odt''' file
| | Open the file “'''Resume.odt” '''which we have created earlier.
|-
| | Slide: '''Code files '''
||
* The file has been provided to you in the''' Code files''' link on this tutorial page.
* Pls download and extract the file.
* Make a copy and then use it for practising.

|-
| | Click on '''View''' >> '''Normal'''
|| To access the '''Normal''' option, click on '''View''' '''menu''' in the '''menu bar.'''

And then click on the '''Normal''' option.
|-
| | Click on '''View''' >> '''Web'''
|| To access the '''Web''' option, click on the '''View''' '''menu''' in the '''menu bar. '''

Then click on the '''Web''' option.
|-
| | Only narration
| | Apart from both these options, one can also view the documents in full screen mode.
|-
| | Click on '''View''' >> '''Full screen'''
| | Click on the '''View''' '''menu''' in the '''menu bar''' and then on '''Full Screen''' option.
|-
| | Only Narration
|| The '''Full screen''' mode is useful for editing the documents.

It’s also useful for projecting them on a projector.
|-
|| Point to '''Full Screen '''button

Press '''Esc''' key

| | Press either the '''Full Screen''' button

or the '''Escape''' key to exit the full screen mode.

|-
| | Only Narration
| | We are back to the '''Writer''' window.
|-
| | Click on Normal
| | Now, let’s click on the '''View''' '''menu '''once again and then on the '''Normal''' option.
|-
| | Click on '''Insert''' >> '''Page break'''
|| Before proceeding further, let us add a new page to our document.

Click the '''Insert''' '''menu''' in the '''menu bar''', then on the '''Page break''' option.
|-
| | New page
| | We are moved to a new page in the document.
|-
| | Press '''Ctrl+Z''' keys
| | Press '''Ctrl+Z''' keys to undo this change.
|-
| | Click on '''Insert''' >> '''More break >> Manual Break '''
|| Let me demonstrate another way to add a new page.

Click on the''' Insert''' menu in the '''menu bar''' then on the '''More Breaks '''option.

Select '''Manual Break''' as a sub-option.
|-
| | '''Insert Break''' dialog box
| | The '''Insert Break''' dialog box opens up.
|-
| | Select '''Page break '''option
| | Here, select the '''Page break''' option.
|-
| | Click on '''OK'''
| | Then click on the '''OK '''button in the dialog box.
|-
|| This is the second page

This is the second page

This is the second page
| | Let’s now type some sample text on a few lines in this new page.
|-
| | Press '''Ctrl+Enter''' keys
| | We’ll add one more page by pressing '''Ctrl+Enter '''keys together.
|-
|| This is the third page

This is the third page

This is the third page
| | And type this sample text in the new page.
|-
| | Press '''Ctrl+Enter''' keys
| | Press '''Ctrl+Enter''' keys once again and create one more new page.
|-
|| This is the fourth page

This is the fourth page

This is the fourth page
| | And type this sample text in the new page.
|-
| | Only Narration
| | Now, let’s learn to use the '''Zoom '''option.
|-
|| Only Narration

Point to bottom right corner
|| The easiest way to zoom or magnify a document is to use the '''Zoom slider'''.

This is located at the bottom right corner of the '''Writer''' window.

|-
|| Click on plus icon

Click on minus icon
| | We can use the '''plus''' and '''minus''' icons on either side of the '''slider''', like this.
|-
|| Drag the '''Zoom head '''to plus side

Drag the '''Zoom head '''to minus side
| | Or we can drag the '''Zoom head''' to increase or decrease the magnification, like this.
|-
| | Only Narration
| | Let's learn another way of zooming.
|-
|| Click on '''View''' >> '''Zoom'''

| | Click on the '''View menu''' in the '''menu bar''' and click on '''Zoom'''.
|-
|| Point to the options displayed in the context menu.

Click on the '''Zoom '''option.
|| A few options are displayed in the context menu.

We’ll skip these and click on the '''Zoom '''option.
|-
| | Only narration
| | '''Zoom & View Layout''' dialog box opens up.
|-
| | Point to zoom factor and view layout
| | It has 2 headings namely - '''Zoom Factor''' and '''View''' '''Layout'''.
|-
| | Point to zoom factor option
| | The '''Zoom Factor''' sets the magnification in which to display the document.
|-
| | Point to options
| | Under '''Zoom Factor''' we see many options.
|-
| | Click '''Optimal''' option >> click on '''Ok'''
|| Click on '''Optimal''' and then on the''' Ok''' button at the bottom right'''.'''

On doing so, we get the most comfortable magnified view of the document.
|-
|| Click on '''View''' >> '''Zoom>> Zoom >> '''

Click on '''Fit width and height '''option >> click on '''Ok'''
|| Again open the '''Zoom & View Layout''' dialog box.

Click on '''Fit width and height''' and then on the''' Ok''' button at the bottom right'''.'''

This view fits the document across the entire width and height of the page.

So, it displays one page at a time.
|-
| | Click on '''View''' >> '''Zoom>> Zoom >> '''Point to '''Fit to Width'''
| | Next option is '''Fit Width'''. This fits the page to its width.
|-
| | Point on '''100%'''
| | '''100'''% view will display the page in its actual size.
|-
| | Highlight both options with a red box
| | Try out these 2 options on your own.
|-
| | Click on '''Variable''' option
| | Next we have the most important '''zoom''' option called the '''Variable'''.
|-
| | Point to '''zoom''' factor
| | Here, we can type the''' zoom factor''' at which we want to view the document.
|-
| | Change value field as 75% click on OK
|| For example, let’s type the value as '''75%''' in the '''Variable''' field.

And then click on the '''OK''' button
|-
| | Only Narration
| | Observe how the text is '''zoomed'''.
|-
| | Click on '''View''' >> '''Zoom>> Zoom >> '''Point to '''View layout'''
|| Another feature in the dialog-box is '''View Layout.'''

We see 2 options here - '''Automatic''' and '''Single page.'''
|-
| | Point to '''Automatic''' and '''Single page'''
|| '''Automatic '''option displays pages side-by-side.

'''Single page''' displays pages one below another.
|-
| | Only Narration
| | Let’s try out some combinations now.
|-
|| Select''' Fit width and height''' option under '''Zoom Factor'''

'''Single page''' option under '''View Layout '''option >> click on '''OK''' button
|| For example- we’ll select '''Fit width and height''' option under '''Zoom Factor'''

Then click on the '''Automatic '''option under the '''View Layout''' and Click on the '''OK''' button.
|-
| | Scroll and show pages
| | We see that the pages are displayed side-by-side.
|-
| | Click on '''View''' >> '''Zoom>> Zoom'''
| | Open the '''Zoom & View Layout''' dialog box once again, as shown here.
|-
| | Select '''Automatic''' under '''View layout'''
| | This time we’ll select '''Single page''' under '''View Layout''' and click on the '''OK''' button.
|-
| | Scroll and show all the pages
| | We see that the pages are displayed one below the other.
|-
| | Bring the '''zoom head''' to the centre of the '''zoom slider'''.
| | Let’s use the '''zoom slider''' and bring the '''Zoom head''' to the centre of the '''slider'''.
|-
| | Highlight the 3 controls in the '''Status bar'''
|| There are 3 more controls on the '''Writer Status Bar '''that can be used for page displays.

These also allow us to change the zoom and view layout of our document.
|-
|| Point to the icons one-by-one:

1. '''Single-page view'''

2. '''Multiple-page view'''

3. Click on '''Book view '''(Scroll down to show the other pages)
|| The''' '''icons are as follows:

'''Single-page view''', '''Multiple-page view''' and '''Book view. '''

'''Book view''' displays two pages adjacent to each other, as in an open book.
|-
| | Click on '''Single-page view '''icon >> Bring the '''zoom head''' to the centre of the '''zoom slider'''
| | Let’s click on '''Single page view''' and bring the '''Zoom head''' to the centre of the '''zoom slider'''.
|-
| | Only Narration
| | Next, we will learn about '''Print Preview'''.
|-
| | Click on Toggle Print Preview icon
| | Click on the '''Toggle''' '''Print Preview '''icon in the '''Standard toolbar'''.
|-
| | Show print preview mode
| | The '''Print Preview bar''' appears when we view the document in preview mode.
|-
| | Only narration
| | It basically shows how the document will look like, when it is printed.
|-
| | Scroll down to see all the pages
| | Scroll down to see all the pages in the document.
|-
| | Point to the '''Print''' icon
|| From this screen, one can proceed to printing the document, by clicking the '''Print''' icon.

But I will not do so now.
|-
| | Click '''Close Preview''' button
| | Click on the '''Close Preview''' button to close the preview.
|-
|| Click on '''File >> Print Preview'''

Press '''Esc '''key
| | We can also click on '''File menu''' in the''' menu bar''' and click on '''Print Preview.'''
|-
| | Only narration
| | Next, we will learn how to '''print''' our '''LibreOffice Writer''' document.
|-
| | Text on screen: Printer connection should be configured correctly on your machine.
| | First, ensure that the printer connection is configured correctly on your machine.
|-
| | Click on '''Print''' icon
|| To directly '''print''' the entire document, click on the '''Print''' icon in the '''Standard toolbar'''.

This is known as quick printing.
|-
| | Only narration
| | We can have more control over printing our document by using the '''Print '''option.
|-
| | Click '''File''' '''>> Print'''
| | We can also click on the '''File menu''' in the''' menu bar '''and then click on '''Print.'''
|-
|| '''Print '''dialog box appears

Highlight the 2 tabs

Highlight the settings below also
|| The '''Print '''dialog box appears on the screen.

There are 2 tabs with different settings in this dialog box.

We can either leave these as default or change the setting as per our printing requirement.
|-
|| Select my configured printer’s''' '''name '''(TCS lab)'''.

Click Printer >> Print to File
|| Under '''Printer drop-down''', let’s select '''Print to File '''option.

This option is used predominantly to print the document into '''PDF '''file''' '''format.
|-
| | Point and then click on '''Print to File'''
|| The button at the bottom of the dialog box says '''Print to File'''.

Click on it.
|-
| | Choose '''Desktop '''>> type '''sample-file >> '''Click '''Save'''
|| Choose the location to save and type a filename for the new document.

Then click on the '''Save''' button at the top right.
|-
| | Only narration
| | The document will be printed to the file
|-
| | Press '''Ctrl+P '''keys
|| Press '''Ctrl+P '''keys on your keyboard.

This is the shortcut to open the '''Print '''dialog box.
|-
| | Select my configured printer’s''' '''name '''(TCS lab)'''.
| | This time under '''Printer''', we will select our configured printer’s''' '''name.
|-
|| Under '''Range and Copies''' >> click on '''more'''

'''Pages''' = 2 and '''Number of copies''' = 3.
|| Under '''Range and Copies''',

I will select '''Pages''' as 2 and '''Number of copies''' as 3.
|-
| | Click '''Ok'''
| | Finally, click on the '''OK '''button to start the printing.
|-
| | Only narration
| | The pages and copies we mentioned will now get printed.
|-
| | Only narration
| | Next, we will see how to access other '''Print '''options.
|-
| | Click on Tools>>options
| | Click on the '''Tools menu '''in the '''menu bar''' and then click on '''Options.'''
|-
| | Click on Libreoffice Writer>>Print
| | Click on the arrow beside '''LibreOffice '''and then click on '''Print.'''
|-
| | Dialog box appears
|| A dialog box appears on the screen, giving us several options to select from.

Choose these options as per requirements.
|-
| | Only narration
| | These settings are now valid for all prints from '''LibreOffice Writer''', in the future.
|-
| | Click on '''OK''' button
| | I will keep all the default settings and then click on the '''OK '''button at the bottom.
|-
| | Press''' Ctrl + S'''
|| Save our file by pressing '''Ctrl + S''' keys.

Then close it by clicking on the '''X '''icon at the top right.
|-
| | Only Narration
|| This brings us to the end of this tutorial.

Let us summarize.
|-
| | Slide: '''Summary'''
|| In this tutorial, we learnt to:
* View documents
* Print documents in '''LibreOffice Writer'''

|-
| | Slide: '''Assignment'''
|| As an assignment
* Open practice.odt file

* Type the text “'''This is LibreOffice Writer'''”

* Choose '''View '''and select '''Full Screen''' option
* Exit '''Full Screen''' option

|-
| | Slide: '''Assignment'''
||
* Explore all the available '''Zoom '''options
* Explore all the available '''Page preview''' options

|-
| | Slide: '''About spoken tutorial project'''
|| The video at the following summarises the Spoken Tutorial project

Please download and watch it.
|-
| | Slide: '''Spoken Tutorial workshops'''
|| We conduct workshops using '''spoken tutorials '''and give certificates.

For more details, Please contact us.
|-
| | Slide: '''Forums Specific Questions'''
| | Post your timed queries in this forum.
|-
| | Slide: '''Acknowledgment'''
| | The '''Spoken Tutorial''' project is funded by MHRD Govt of India.
|-
| | Slide: '''Thank you'''
|| This tutorial was originally contributed by DesiCrew Solutions Pvt. Ltd. in 2011

This is Pratik Kamble along with the Spoken Tutorial team from''' IIT Bombay '''signing off.

Thank you for watching.
|-
|}

LibreOffice-Suite-Writer-6.3/C2/Viewing-and-printing-a-document-in-Writer/English

2020-07-04T08:27:34Z

Pratik kamble: Created page with "Title: Viewing and Printing text document Author: Pratik Kamble Novice Reviewer: Nikita and Pooja Domain Reviewer: Praveen and Nancy Keywords: View Document, Printing doc..."

Title: Viewing and Printing text document

Author: Pratik Kamble

Novice Reviewer: Nikita and Pooja

Domain Reviewer: Praveen and Nancy

Keywords: View Document, Printing document,normal layout web layout

{|border=1
|-
| align=center | '''Visual Cue'''
| align=center | '''Narration'''
|-
| | Slide: '''Title Slide'''
| | Welcome to the''' '''spoken tutorial on '''Viewing and Printing text documents.'''
|-
| | Slide : '''Learning Objectives'''
|| In this tutorial we will learn how to
* View documents and
*Print documents in '''LibreOffice Writer.'''

|-
| | Slide: '''System Requirements'''
|| This tutorial is recorded using
* '''Ubuntu Linux OS''' version '''18.04''' and
* '''LibreOffice Suite '''version '''6.3.5'''

|-
| | Show Slide : '''Viewing options'''
|| Viewing options

We’ll first learn about the various viewing options in''' LibreOffice Writer.'''
|-
| | Slide: (a)
|| There are basically two widely used viewing options in '''Writer'''.

They are '''Normal''' and '''Web.'''
|-
| | Slide: Layout
| | The '''Normal '''option displays how the document will look when printed.
|-
| | Slide (a)
| | The '''Web '''option displays the document as seen in a '''web browser.'''
|-
| | Slide (b)
|| This is useful when we want to create '''HTML''' documents.

It’s also useful when we want to view the document in full screen mode for editing them.
|-
| | Open '''Resume.odt''' file
| | Open the file “'''Resume.odt” '''which we have created earlier.
|-
| | Slide: '''Code files '''
||
* The file has been provided to you in the''' Code files''' link on this tutorial page.
* Pls download and extract the file.
* Make a copy and then use it for practising.

|-
| | Click on '''View''' >> '''Normal'''
|| To access the '''Normal''' option, click on '''View''' '''menu''' in the '''menu bar.'''

And then click on the '''Normal''' option.
|-
| | Click on '''View''' >> '''Web'''
|| To access the '''Web''' option, click on the '''View''' '''menu''' in the '''menu bar. '''

Then click on the '''Web''' option.
|-
| | Only narration
| | Apart from both these options, one can also view the documents in full screen mode.
|-
| | Click on '''View''' >> '''Full screen'''
| | Click on the '''View''' '''menu''' in the '''menu bar''' and then on '''Full Screen''' option.
|-
| | Only Narration
|| The '''Full screen''' mode is useful for editing the documents.

It’s also useful for projecting them on a projector.
|-
|| Point to '''Full Screen '''button

Press '''Esc''' key

| | Press either the '''Full Screen''' button

or the '''Escape''' key to exit the full screen mode.

|-
| | Only Narration
| | We are back to the '''Writer''' window.
|-
| | Click on Normal
| | Now, let’s click on the '''View''' '''menu '''once again and then on the '''Normal''' option.
|-
| | Click on '''Insert''' >> '''Page break'''
|| Before proceeding further, let us add a new page to our document.

Click the '''Insert''' '''menu''' in the '''menu bar''', then on the '''Page break''' option.
|-
| | New page
| | We are moved to a new page in the document.
|-
| | Press '''Ctrl+Z''' keys
| | Press '''Ctrl+Z''' keys to undo this change.
|-
| | Click on '''Insert''' >> '''More break >> Manual Break '''
|| Let me demonstrate another way to add a new page.

Click on the''' Insert''' menu in the '''menu bar''' then on the '''More Breaks '''option.

Select '''Manual Break''' as a sub-option.
|-
| | '''Insert Break''' dialog box
| | The '''Insert Break''' dialog box opens up.
|-
| | Select '''Page break '''option
| | Here, select the '''Page break''' option.
|-
| | Click on '''OK'''
| | Then click on the '''OK '''button in the dialog box.
|-
|| This is the second page

This is the second page

This is the second page
| | Let’s now type some sample text on a few lines in this new page.
|-
| | Press '''Ctrl+Enter''' keys
| | We’ll add one more page by pressing '''Ctrl+Enter '''keys together.
|-
|| This is the third page

This is the third page

This is the third page
| | And type this sample text in the new page.
|-
| | Press '''Ctrl+Enter''' keys
| | Press '''Ctrl+Enter''' keys once again and create one more new page.
|-
|| This is the fourth page

This is the fourth page

This is the fourth page
| | And type this sample text in the new page.
|-
| | Only Narration
| | Now, let’s learn to use the '''Zoom '''option.
|-
|| Only Narration

Point to bottom right corner
|| The easiest way to zoom or magnify a document is to use the '''Zoom slider'''.

This is located at the bottom right corner of the '''Writer''' window.

|-
|| Click on plus icon

Click on minus icon
| | We can use the '''plus''' and '''minus''' icons on either side of the '''slider''', like this.
|-
|| Drag the '''Zoom head '''to plus side

Drag the '''Zoom head '''to minus side
| | Or we can drag the '''Zoom head''' to increase or decrease the magnification, like this.
|-
| | Only Narration
| | Let's learn another way of zooming.
|-
|| Click on '''View''' >> '''Zoom'''

| | Click on the '''View menu''' in the '''menu bar''' and click on '''Zoom'''.
|-
|| Point to the options displayed in the context menu.

Click on the '''Zoom '''option.
|| A few options are displayed in the context menu.

We’ll skip these and click on the '''Zoom '''option.
|-
| | Only narration
| | '''Zoom & View Layout''' dialog box opens up.
|-
| | Point to zoom factor and view layout
| | It has 2 headings namely - '''Zoom Factor''' and '''View''' '''Layout'''.
|-
| | Point to zoom factor option
| | The '''Zoom Factor''' sets the magnification in which to display the document.
|-
| | Point to options
| | Under '''Zoom Factor''' we see many options.
|-
| | Click '''Optimal''' option >> click on '''Ok'''
|| Click on '''Optimal''' and then on the''' Ok''' button at the bottom right'''.'''

On doing so, we get the most comfortable magnified view of the document.
|-
|| Click on '''View''' >> '''Zoom>> Zoom >> '''

Click on '''Fit width and height '''option >> click on '''Ok'''
|| Again open the '''Zoom & View Layout''' dialog box.

Click on '''Fit width and height''' and then on the''' Ok''' button at the bottom right'''.'''

This view fits the document across the entire width and height of the page.

So, it displays one page at a time.
|-
| | Click on '''View''' >> '''Zoom>> Zoom >> '''Point to '''Fit to Width'''
| | Next option is '''Fit Width'''. This fits the page to its width.
|-
| | Point on '''100%'''
| | '''100'''% view will display the page in its actual size.
|-
| | Highlight both options with a red box
| | Try out these 2 options on your own.
|-
| | Click on '''Variable''' option
| | Next we have the most important '''zoom''' option called the '''Variable'''.
|-
| | Point to '''zoom''' factor
| | Here, we can type the''' zoom factor''' at which we want to view the document.
|-
| | Change value field as 75% click on OK
|| For example, let’s type the value as '''75%''' in the '''Variable''' field.

And then click on the '''OK''' button
|-
| | Only Narration
| | Observe how the text is '''zoomed'''.
|-
| | Click on '''View''' >> '''Zoom>> Zoom >> '''Point to '''View layout'''
|| Another feature in the dialog-box is '''View Layout.'''

We see 2 options here - '''Automatic''' and '''Single page.'''
|-
| | Point to '''Automatic''' and '''Single page'''
|| '''Automatic '''option displays pages side-by-side.

'''Single page''' displays pages one below another.
|-
| | Only Narration
| | Let’s try out some combinations now.
|-
|| Select''' Fit width and height''' option under '''Zoom Factor'''

'''Single page''' option under '''View Layout '''option >> click on '''OK''' button
|| For example- we’ll select '''Fit width and height''' option under '''Zoom Factor'''

Then click on the '''Automatic '''option under the '''View Layout''' and Click on the '''OK''' button.
|-
| | Scroll and show pages
| | We see that the pages are displayed side-by-side.
|-
| | Click on '''View''' >> '''Zoom>> Zoom'''
| | Open the '''Zoom & View Layout''' dialog box once again, as shown here.
|-
| | Select '''Automatic''' under '''View layout'''
| | This time we’ll select '''Single page''' under '''View Layout''' and click on the '''OK''' button.
|-
| | Scroll and show all the pages
| | We see that the pages are displayed one below the other.
|-
| | Bring the '''zoom head''' to the centre of the '''zoom slider'''.
| | Let’s use the '''zoom slider''' and bring the '''Zoom head''' to the centre of the '''slider'''.
|-
| | Highlight the 3 controls in the '''Status bar'''
|| There are 3 more controls on the '''Writer Status Bar '''that can be used for page displays.

These also allow us to change the zoom and view layout of our document.
|-
|| Point to the icons one-by-one:

1. '''Single-page view'''

2. '''Multiple-page view'''

3. Click on '''Book view '''(Scroll down to show the other pages)
|| The''' '''icons are as follows:

'''Single-page view''', '''Multiple-page view''' and '''Book view. '''

'''Book view''' displays two pages adjacent to each other, as in an open book.
|-
| | Click on '''Single-page view '''icon >> Bring the '''zoom head''' to the centre of the '''zoom slider'''
| | Let’s click on '''Single page view''' and bring the '''Zoom head''' to the centre of the '''zoom slider'''.
|-
| | Only Narration
| | Next, we will learn about '''Print Preview'''.
|-
| | Click on Toggle Print Preview icon
| | Click on the '''Toggle''' '''Print Preview '''icon in the '''Standard toolbar'''.
|-
| | Show print preview mode
| | The '''Print Preview bar''' appears when we view the document in preview mode.
|-
| | Only narration
| | It basically shows how the document will look like, when it is printed.
|-
| | Scroll down to see all the pages
| | Scroll down to see all the pages in the document.
|-
| | Point to the '''Print''' icon
|| From this screen, one can proceed to printing the document, by clicking the '''Print''' icon.

But I will not do so now.
|-
| | Click '''Close Preview''' button
| | Click on the '''Close Preview''' button to close the preview.
|-
|| Click on '''File >> Print Preview'''

Press '''Esc '''key
| | We can also click on '''File menu''' in the''' menu bar''' and click on '''Print Preview.'''
|-
| | Only narration
| | Next, we will learn how to '''print''' our '''LibreOffice Writer''' document.
|-
| | Text on screen: Printer connection should be configured correctly on your machine.
| | First, ensure that the printer connection is configured correctly on your machine.
|-
| | Click on '''Print''' icon
|| To directly '''print''' the entire document, click on the '''Print''' icon in the '''Standard toolbar'''.

This is known as quick printing.
|-
| | Only narration
| | We can have more control over printing our document by using the '''Print '''option.
|-
| | Click '''File''' '''>> Print'''
| | We can also click on the '''File menu''' in the''' menu bar '''and then click on '''Print.'''
|-
|| '''Print '''dialog box appears

Highlight the 2 tabs

Highlight the settings below also
|| The '''Print '''dialog box appears on the screen.

There are 2 tabs with different settings in this dialog box.

We can either leave these as default or change the setting as per our printing requirement.
|-
|| Select my configured printer’s''' '''name '''(TCS lab)'''.

Click Printer >> Print to File
|| Under '''Printer drop-down''', let’s select '''Print to File '''option.

This option is used predominantly to print the document into '''PDF '''file''' '''format.
|-
| | Point and then click on '''Print to File'''
|| The button at the bottom of the dialog box says '''Print to File'''.

Click on it.
|-
| | Choose '''Desktop '''>> type '''sample-file >> '''Click '''Save'''
|| Choose the location to save and type a filename for the new document.

Then click on the '''Save''' button at the top right.
|-
| | Only narration
| | The document will be printed to the file
|-
| | Press '''Ctrl+P '''keys
|| Press '''Ctrl+P '''keys on your keyboard.

This is the shortcut to open the '''Print '''dialog box.
|-
| | Select my configured printer’s''' '''name '''(TCS lab)'''.
| | This time under '''Printer''', we will select our configured printer’s''' '''name.
|-
|| Under '''Range and Copies''' >> click on '''more'''

'''Pages''' = 2 and '''Number of copies''' = 3.
|| Under '''Range and Copies''',

I will select '''Pages''' as 2 and '''Number of copies''' as 3.
|-
| | Click '''Ok'''
| | Finally, click on the '''OK '''button to start the printing.
|-
| | Only narration
| | The pages and copies we mentioned will now get printed.
|-
| | Only narration
| | Next, we will see how to access other '''Print '''options.
|-
| | Click on Tools>>options
| | Click on the '''Tools menu '''in the '''menu bar''' and then click on '''Options.'''
|-
| | Click on Libreoffice Writer>>Print
| | Click on the arrow beside '''LibreOffice '''and then click on '''Print.'''
|-
| | Dialog box appears
|| A dialog box appears on the screen, giving us several options to select from.

Choose these options as per requirements.
|-
| | Only narration
| | These settings are now valid for all prints from '''LibreOffice Writer''', in the future.
|-
| | Click on '''OK''' button
| | I will keep all the default settings and then click on the '''OK '''button at the bottom.
|-
| | Press''' Ctrl + S'''
|| Save our file by pressing '''Ctrl + S''' keys.

Then close it by clicking on the '''X '''icon at the top right.
|-
| | Only Narration
|| This brings us to the end of this tutorial.

Let us summarize.
|-
| | Slide: '''Summary'''
|| In this tutorial, we learnt to:
* View documents
* Print documents in '''LibreOffice Writer'''

|-
| | Slide: '''Assignment'''
|| As an assignment
* Open practice.odt file

* Type the text “'''This is LibreOffice Writer'''”

* Choose '''View '''and select '''Full Screen''' option
* Exit '''Full Screen''' option

|-
| | Slide: '''Assignment'''
||
* Explore all the available '''Zoom '''options
* Explore all the available '''Page preview''' options

|-
| | Slide: '''About spoken tutorial project'''
|| The video at the following summarises the Spoken Tutorial project

Please download and watch it.
|-
| | Slide: '''Spoken Tutorial workshops'''
|| We conduct workshops using '''spoken tutorials '''and give certificates.

For more details, Please contact us.
|-
| | Slide: '''Forums Specific Questions'''
| | Post your timed queries in this forum.
|-
| | Slide: '''Acknowledgment'''
| | The '''Spoken Tutorial''' project is funded by MHRD Govt of India.
|-
| | Slide: '''Thank you'''
|| This tutorial was originally contributed by DesiCrew Solutions Pvt. Ltd. in 2011

This is Pratik Kamble along with the Spoken Tutorial team from''' IIT Bombay '''signing off.

Thank you for watching.
|-
|}

LibreOffice-Suite-Writer-6.3/C2/Tables-and-table-properties-in-Writer/English

2020-07-04T07:26:33Z

Pratik kamble: Created page with "Title: Table and table properties Author: Pratik Kamble Novice Reviewer: Nikita and Pooja Domain Reviewer: Praveen and Nancy Keywords: Table, modify row and column, table..."

Title: Table and table properties

Author: Pratik Kamble

Novice Reviewer: Nikita and Pooja

Domain Reviewer: Praveen and Nancy

Keywords: Table, modify row and column, table properties

{| border=1
|-
| align=center | '''Visual Cue '''
| align=center | '''Narration'''
|-
| | Slide : Title
| | Welcome to the '''spoken tutorial''' on''' Table and table properties.'''
|-
| | Slide : Learning Objectives
|| In this tutorial we will learn how to:
* Insert a '''table''' in a '''Writer '''document
* Add and modify''' rows''' and '''columns'''
* And adjust the '''table properties''' as per our preference.

|-
| | Slide: System Requirements
|| This tutorial is recorded using
* '''Ubuntu Linux 18.04''' and
* '''LibreOffice Suite '''version '''6.3.5'''

|- "
| | Slide''': Code files'''
||
* Two files have been provided to you in the''' Code files''' link on this tutorial page.
* Pls download and extract the files.
* Make a copy and then use them for practising.

|-
| | Open '''Resume.odt''' file
| | Open the '''Resume.odt '''file''' '''which we have created earlier.
|-
| | Only Narration
| | Now let’s learn how to insert '''Tables '''in a '''Writer '''document.
|-
| | Place the cursor at the end of''' EDUCATION DETAILS''' >> press '''Enter'''.
| | Place the cursor at the end of''' EDUCATION DETAILS''' and press '''Enter'''.
|-
| | Point to '''Insert table '''icon in '''Standard toolbar'''
| | To insert a '''table''' into a document, click on the '''Insert table '''icon''' '''in the '''Standard toolbar.'''
|-
|| Move the cursor to show various combinations of rows and columns

Select''' 2X4''' option
|| Now, select the size of the '''table''', that is the rows and columns you require.

I will select the '''2X4''' (2 by 4) option which will give me 4 rows and 2 columns.
|-
| | Only Narration
| | Let me show you another way to insert a '''table''' into a '''Writer '''document.
|-
| | Press the '''Ctrl + Z''' keys
| | Before that we will press the '''Ctrl + Z''' keys to undo the changes.
|-
| | Click on '''Table >> Insert Table '''
| | Now, click on the''' Table menu''' in the '''menu bar''' and then click on '''Insert table''' option.
|-
| | Only narration
| | '''Insert Table''' dialog-box opens with several '''fields.'''
|-
| | Type '''Resumetable '''in Name field
| | In the '''Name '''field, let us name the '''table''' as '''Resumetable.'''
|-
| | Point to '''Column''' field
| | We will keep the number of '''Columns '''as '''2. '''
|-
| | Point to '''Row '''field >> click on '''Plus '''button till no. 5
| | In the '''Rows '''field, click on the '''Plus''' button and increase the number of rows'''. '''
|-
| | Click the Minus''' '''symbol to bring the number to 3.
|| Click the '''Minus''' button to decrease the number.

Let’s bring the number back to 3
|-
| | Point to '''Styles''' list
|| Below we see a list of '''Styles.'''

We can use this list to select a '''style''' for the '''table, '''if we want to.
|-
||

Select '''None >> '''click on '''Insert'''
|| We’ll click on the '''Default Style '''option for now.

Then click on the '''Insert '''button at the bottom right.
|-
| | Point to '''table'''
| | A '''table''' with two columns and two three rows get inserted below '''EDUCATION DETAILS'''.
|-
| | Only narration
| | Now we can type any information in '''tabular''' form inside the '''table.'''
|-
| | Highlight the new '''table toolbar '''at the bottom
|| Notice a new '''toolbar''' at the bottom.

Here are shortcuts to the most common '''table''' features.
|-
| | Click first row cell
| | Let’s click inside the '''cell''' in column 1 and row 1 of the '''table'''.
|-
| | Type '''“Secondary School Examination”'''
| | Here we’ll type '''Secondary School Examination.'''
|-
| | Click on adjacent cell >> type 93 %
| | Now, click on the adjacent '''cell''' and type '''93''' %.
|- "
|| Type '''Higher Secondary School Examination''' 88%

Type '''Graduation - B.Tech. CSE''' 75%
|| Likewise, we will type other educational details in the '''table, '''as shown.

|- "
|| Click on the '''Rows below '''icon in the '''table toolbar'''

Type '''Post Graduation - M. Tech. CSE''' 70%
| | To add a new row, use the '''Rows below '''icon in the '''table toolbar''' at the bottom.
|-
| | Press '''Tab''' key
|| When we are in the last row of a '''table''', press the '''Tab''' key on the keyboard.

This will add another row to our''' table.'''
|-
| | Click on row 2 column 1.
| | Click on row 2 column 1.
|-
|| Text on screen:

'''Tab''' key helps to move forward from '''cell'''-to-'''cell'''.

'''Shift + Tab''' keys help to move backward from '''cell'''-to-'''cell'''.
|| Pressing the '''Tab''' key helps to move forward from '''cell'''-to-'''cell'''.

Pressing '''Shift + Tab''' keys help to move backward from '''cell'''-to-'''cell'''.
|-
| | Type PhD CSE | 2015
| | In the last row, type '''PhD CSE '''in column 1 and '''2015''' in column 2.
|-
| | Slide: '''Resizing rows and columns'''
|| Another important feature in '''tables''' is resizing rows and columns.

We can adjust the height and width of rows and columns in a '''table''' in several ways.
|-
|| Place the cursor on the right side border of column 2 and drag to increase.

Now drag to decrease.
|| We can increase the column width manually by dragging the border with the '''cursor'''.

Likewise, we can decrease the width as well.
|-
| | Only narration
| | We can do the same with row height also.
|-
| | Cursor after the text 88 %
| | Now place the '''cursor''' in column 2 of any row and click.
|-
| | Click >> Table >> Size
| | Then click on the '''Table''' '''menu''' in the '''Menu toolbar''' and on '''Size''' option.
|-
| | Select '''Minimize column width'''
| | Now select '''Minimize Column Width '''suboption'''.'''
|-
| | Point to column
|| The width of the column adjusts itself automatically.

It matches the width of the content of the '''cells''' in the selected column.
|-
| | Only Narration
| | Next, let’s learn some cool tricks with '''tables'''.
|-
|| Text on screen:

Use the''' Table-demo.odt''' file

OpenTable-demo.odt
|| I am going to use the''' Table-demo.odt''' file for this part of the demonstration.

Open the file '''Table-demo.odt '''which you downloaded earlier, in '''Writer.'''
|-
| | Point to columns and rows
| | Here I have a '''table''' with 2 columns and 5 rows.
|-
||

Move the cursor right above column 2 of the table

>> cursor changes to downward arrow

>> click the left mouse button >> entire column is selected.

|| To select an entire column, move the '''cursor''' to the top of a column of the '''table'''.

The '''cursor''' changes into a downward arrow.

Now click the left mouse button. The entire column is selected.
|-
| | Click on the '''Centre Align '''icon
|| Let’s align the text to the centre by clicking on the '''Centre Align '''icon.

The entire text in this column gets centre-aligned.
|-
| | Click anywhere on the document
| | Now click anywhere on the document to deselect.
|-
| | Move the cursor to the top right corner of the table

>> cursor changes to downward slanting arrow

>> click the left mouse button >> entire table is selected.

|| Next, move the '''cursor''' towards the top left corner of the '''table'''.

The '''cursor''' changes into a downward slanting arrow.

Click the left mouse button.

The entire '''table''' gets selected.
|-
| | Click anywhere on the document
| | Now click anywhere on the document to deselect.
|-
| | Click inside any cell in the '''table'''
| | Click inside any '''cell''' in the '''table'''.
|-
| | Highlight the '''Table '''icon in the '''table toolbar'''.
| | This time select the entire '''table''' by clicking on the '''Select Table '''icon in the ''' toolbar'''.
|-
|| Click '''Table menu''' >> '''Table properties'''.

'''DO NOT CLICK'''
| | Click on the '''Table menu''' in the '''menu bar''' and select '''Properties'''.
|-
| | Click on the '''Table Properties '''icon in the '''table toolbar'''.
| | Alternatively, click on the '''Table Properties '''icon in the '''table toolbar'''.
|-
| | '''Table Properties''' dialog box
|| Either ways, the '''Table Properties''' dialog box opens.

Here we see many tabs and many options.
|-
|| Extreme right >> point to '''Alignment '''>> '''Automatic'''.

Change this to '''Left'''.
|| On the extreme right, notice that the '''Alignment '''is set to '''Automatic'''.

First, let’s change this to '''Left'''.
|-
| | Only narration
| | On doing so, other disabled options in the dialog box get enabled.
|-
|| Name of '''table''' = '''MyTable1'''

'''Width''' = 12cm.
| | Let’s name this '''table''' as '''MyTable1''' and change the '''Width''' field to 12cm.
|-
| | Click on '''OK'''.
|| Click on the '''OK''' button at the bottom of the dialog box.

Observe the change in the size of the columns.
|-
| | Click inside any cell in the '''table'''
| | Once again, click inside any '''cell''' in the '''table'''.
|-
| | Click on the '''Table Properties '''icon in the '''table toolbar'''.
| | Click on the '''Table Properties '''icon in the '''table toolbar '''once again.
|-
| | Click on the '''Column''' tab.
| | Click on the '''Column''' tab.
|-
| | Under '''Column Width''' >> point to column 1 and 2
|| Under '''Column Width''' section, we can see that only 1 and 2 are enabled.

This is because we have only 2 columns in our '''table'''.
|-
| | Change value 2 cm to '''10 cm'''
| | Here, let’s change the value of column 2 to '''10cm'''
|-
| | Click on Adjust columns proportionally
| | Click on the checkbox for '''Adjust columns proportionally'''.
|-
| | press '''OK''' button
| | And press the '''OK''' button at the bottom right
|-
| | Only Narration
| | Observe the change in the size of the column 2.
|-
| | Click on '''Select Table '''icon in the '''table toolbar'''.
| | Click on the '''Select Table '''icon in the '''table toolbar'''.
|-
| | Click on '''Optimize Size '''icon.
|| Now, click on the '''Optimize Size '''icon in the '''table toolbar'''.

This is the shortcut icon to adjust width of rows and columns.
|-
| | Select '''Distribute Columns Evenly'''
| | Select '''Distribute Columns Evenly''' option.
|-
| | Only Narration
| | The columns are now of the same width.
|-
|| Place the cursor on the right side border of column 2 and drag to increase.

Now drag to decrease.
|| We can also increase the column width manually by dragging the border with the '''cursor'''.

Likewise, we can decrease the width as well.
|-
| | Only narration
| | We can do the same with row height also.
|-
||

Click the '''cell '''in column 2 and row 3.
|| Next, let’s learn how to work with '''cells''' in a '''table'''.

Click inside the '''cell '''in column 2 and row 3.
|-
| | Press '''Shift '''and '''Ctrl''' keys >> move the '''cursor '''over the left column border.
| | Now keeping the '''Shift '''and '''Ctrl''' keys pressed, hold the '''cursor '''over the left column border.
|-
| | Drag the column border to the left
|| Then with the mouse, drag the border to the left, as demonstrated here.

The border of that particular '''cell '''moves!
|-
| | Only Narration
| | Next, we will learn to split and merge '''cells'''.
|-
| | Click the '''cell '''in 2nd column and 3rd row.
| | Click inside the '''cell '''in column 2 and row 3.
|-
| | '''Table toolbar >>''' click on '''Split Cells'''
| | In the '''table toolbar''', click on the '''Split Cells''' icon.
|-
| |
| | A dialog box opens with some options.
|-
| | '''Split cell into''' = 3
| | In the '''Split cell into''' field, we will say 3.
|-
|| '''Direction = Vertically'''

Click on '''OK'''
| | In the '''Direction '''field, we’ll choose '''Vertically '''and click on the '''OK '''button.
|-
| | Only Narration
| | The '''cell''' is split into 3 equal '''cells'''.
|-
| | Select the 3 '''cells'''
|| Now, let’s select the 3 '''cells''' and click on '''Merge Cells '''icon in the '''table toolbar'''.

The 3 '''cells''' get merged.
|-
| | Only narration
| | That’s how we split and merge '''cells''' in a '''table''' in '''Writer'''.
|-
| | Click the '''cell '''in 2nd column and 3rd row.
| | Once again, click inside the '''cell '''in column 2 and row 3.
|-
| | '''Table toolbar >>''' click on '''Split Table'''
| | We can even split the '''table''' into 2 by clicking on the '''Split Table '''icon in the '''table toolbar'''.
|-
| | Dialog box
| | The dialog box that opens, shows some options.
|-
||

Choose '''No heading '''>> click on '''OK'''
|| Depending on what we choose, the '''table''' will be split accordingly.

First I will choose '''No heading '''and click on the '''OK''' button.
|-
||

Press '''Ctrl+Z'''
|| The '''table''' is split into 2 '''tables'''.

Press '''Ctrl + Z '''keys to undo this action.
|-
| | Click the '''cell '''in 2nd column and 3rd row.
| | Once again, click inside the '''cell '''in column 2 and row 3.
|-
| | '''Table toolbar >>''' click on '''Split Table'''
| | Click on the '''Split Table '''icon in the '''table toolbar'''.
|-
| | Choose '''Copy heading '''>> click on '''OK'''
| | I will choose the '''Copy heading '''option and click on the '''OK''' button.
|-
| | Highlight the 2 '''tables'''
| | The '''table''' is split into 2 '''tables''' with the same column '''headings'''.
|-
| | Only narration
| | Let’s learn about some more alignment options.
|-
| | Drag down the bottom row '''boundary''' of the second '''table’s heading''' row.
| | Before that, drag down the bottom row '''border''' of the second '''table’s heading''' row.
|-
| | Select the entire '''header '''row
| | Select the entire '''header '''row as shown here.
|-
| | '''Table toolbar >>''' highlight the 3 cell alignment options
| | Now, look at the alignment options for the '''cell''', in the '''table toolbar'''.
|-
| | Highlight '''Align Top'''
| | '''Align Top''' is selected, by default.
|-
|| Click on '''Align Bottom '''

Click on '''Centre Vertically'''
| | Click on '''Align Bottom''' and '''Centre Vertically''' to see how the text gets aligned within the '''cell'''.
|-
|| Click within '''table 2 '''

'''cell: Heading1'''
| | To give a background colour to a '''cell''', first click within a '''cell.'''
|-
| | '''Table toolbar >>''' click on '''Background Colour''' icon.
|| In the '''table toolbar,''' click on the '''Table Cell Background Color''' icon.

Yellow is the default highlight colour.
|-
| | '''Background Colour''' icon>> click on the down-arrow >> choose any other blue colour
|| To open the full colour palette, click on the down-arrow of the icon.

Now we can choose other colours from here.
|-
| | Next to '''Background Colour''' icon >> point first and then click '''Autoformat Styles '''icon.
| | Next to '''Background Color''' icon, we see '''Autoformat Styles '''icon.

|-
|| Point to '''AutoFormat''' dialog box.

Scroll various '''styles'''

Click '''Cancel'''

|| '''AutoFormat '''dialog box opens up.

We see various '''styles''' here that we can apply to our '''table''', if we want to.

Click on the '''Cancel''' button.
|-
| | '''Table toolbar '''>> highlight icons for '''borders, styles, colours'''
|| In the '''table toolbar''', we see icons for choosing different

* '''Borders'''
* '''Border styles'''
* '''Border colours'''.

|-
| | '''Table toolbar '''>> highlight '''numerical formats''' icons
| | And there are numerical formats shortcut icons, too, in the '''table toolbar. '''
|-
| | Only Narration
| | Explore all these options on your own.
|-
| | Press''' Ctrl + S'''
|| Save our file by pressing '''Ctrl + S''' keys.

And then close it by clicking on the '''X '''icon at the top right.
|-
| | Only Narration
| | This brings us to the end of this tutorial
|-
| | Slide: '''Summary'''
|| In this tutorial, we learnt to
* Insert a '''table''' in a '''Writer '''document
* Add and modify''' '''rows and columns
* Adjust the '''table properties''' as per our preference

|-
| | Slide: '''Assignment'''
|| As an assignment
* Open '''practice.odt'''.
* Insert a '''table''' with 3 rows and 2 columns
* Add the headings for the columns as Column One and Column Two

* Add some text in all '''cells''' of the '''table'''
* Save and close the file

|-
| | Slide: '''About spoken tutorial project'''
|| The video at the following summarises the Spoken Tutorial project

Please download and watch it.
|-
| | Slide: '''Spoken Tutorial workshops'''
|| We conduct workshops using '''spoken tutorials '''and give certificates.

For more details, Please contact us.
|-
| | Slide''': Forums'''
| | Please post your timed queries in this forum.
|-
| | Slide: '''Acknowledgment'''
| | The '''Spoken Tutorial '''project is funded by MHRD Govt of India
|-
| | Slide: '''Thank you'''
|| The script for this tutorial is contributed by Nancy Varkey from IIT Bombay.

This is Pratik Kamble from''' IIT Bombay''' signing off. Thank you for watching.
|-
|}

LibreOffice-Suite-Writer-6.3/C2/Inserting-images,-hyperlinks,-bookmarks-in-Writer/English

2020-07-03T19:19:46Z

Pratik kamble: Created page with "Title: Inserting Images, Hyperlinks and Bookmarks Author: Pratik Kamble Novice Reviewer: Nikita and Pooja Domain Reviewer: Praveen and Nancy Keywords: Insert Image, Hyperl..."

Title: Inserting Images, Hyperlinks and Bookmarks

Author: Pratik Kamble

Novice Reviewer: Nikita and Pooja

Domain Reviewer: Praveen and Nancy

Keywords: Insert Image, Hyperlinks, Bookmark,

{|border=1
|-
| | '''Visual Cue '''
| | '''Narration'''

|-
| | Slide : Title
| | Welcome to the '''spoken tutorial''' on''' Inserting Images, Hyperlinks & Bookmarks.'''

|-
| | Slide : Learning Objectives
|| In this tutorial we will learn how to insert:
* An '''Image file'''
* A '''Hyperlink'''
* A '''Bookmark''' into a '''Writer''' document.

|-
| | Slide: System Requirements
|| This tutorial is recorded using
* '''Ubuntu Linux OS '''version''' 18.04 '''and
* '''LibreOffice Suite''' version''' 6.3.5'''

|-
| | Only Narration
| | We will start by learning how to insert an '''image file''' in '''LibreOffice Writer'''

|-
| | Open '''Resume.odt''' file
| | Open the file '''Resume.odt''' which we have created earlier.

|-
| | '''Slide: Code files'''
||
* This file and an image file have been provided to you in the''' Code files''' link on this tutorial page
* Pls download and extract the files.
* Make a copy and then use them for practising

|-
| | Point to the top right hand side of the document
| | I would like to insert an '''image''' here on the right hand side.

|-
| | '''Only Narration '''
| | As mentioned earlier, this '''image '''has been provided in the '''Code files '''link.

|-
| | Go to the last line >> press Enter twice.
| | Go to the line which is Mother’s Occupation Housewife and press Enter twice.

|-
| | Click '''Insert '''>> '''Image'''
| | Now, click on the '''Insert Image '''icon''' '''in the '''Standard toolbar'''.
|-
| | Point to '''Insert Image''' box
| | '''Insert Image''' dialog-box appears.

|-
| | Only Narration
| | Go to the location where your '''file''' is saved.

|-
| | Click on '''Desktop''' location
| | I have already extracted and saved the '''file''' on my '''Desktop'''.

|-
| | Select image file
| | I will select the '''image file '''by clicking on it.

|-
| | Click on image and click open button
| | And then click on the '''Open '''button at the top right.

|-
| | Only Narration
| | The '''Image '''gets inserted into our document.

|-
| | Only Narration
| | We can '''resize''' this image to fit into the top right corner of the '''Resume''' document.

|-
| | Point to the handles quickly
|| Select the image

On the '''image, '''we can see 8 '''handles.'''
|-
| | Point to the handle and click left mouse button and drag length then drag breadth
|| Using the '''mouse''', click on any of the side''' handles.'''

Then drag to increase or decrease the size of the '''image'''.
|-
| | Press Ctrl+Z keys twice.
| | Undo these changes by pressing '''Ctrl+Z''' keys twice.

|-
| | Point to the corner handles
|| We can even '''scale''' both dimensions using the corner '''handles'''.

When we do that, the proportions are maintained.
|-
|| Click on Image >> resize using the corner handle >>

Drag to the top right corner
|| '''Resize '''the '''image''' by clicking and dragging the mouse, like this.

After resizing, click on the''' image''' and drag it to the top right corner of the document.
|-
|| Click on '''Insert '''tab menu bar and then on '''Image.'''

'''ONLY HIGHLIGHT'''
|| We can also insert '''images''' by clicking on the''' Insert''' menu in the''' menu bar'''.

And then click on the '''Image '''option'''.'''
|-
| | Only narration
| | Next we will learn how '''Hyperlink''' is created in '''Writer.'''
|-
| | '''Slide: What is a Hyperlink? '''
|| '''Hyperlink''' within '''documents''' are words or '''phrases''' that can be clicked.

On clicking them, we jump to a new '''document''' or a new section within the current '''document'''.
|-
| | Only narration
| | Before creating a '''hyperlink''' in this file, we’ll first create a new '''document''' to be '''hyperlinked'''.

|-
| | Click on '''New''' icon
| | Click on the '''New''' icon in the '''standard toolbar'''
|-
|| Point to Untitled 1

Only Narration
|| A new '''Writer''' document open named as '''Untitled 1'''

Now we will create a list of hobbies in this new document.

|-
| | Type '''HOBBIES''' >>press '''Enter'''
| | Let’s type the '''heading''' as '''HOBBIES''' and press '''Enter'''.

|-
|| Type:

'''Listening to music'''

'''Playing table tennis'''

'''Painting'''
|| Now, let us type few of the '''hobbies''' as
* '''Listening to music''',
* '''Playing table tennis'''
* and '''Painting'''

one below the other.
|-
| | Press '''Ctrl + S '''keys together
| | Then save this file by pressing '''Ctrl + S '''keys together.
|-
| | Click on Desktop option >> Save
| | In the file browser, I will select '''Desktop''' as the location to save my file.
|-
|| Type '''HOBBY'''

Click on '''Save''' icon button

|| In the '''Name''' field of dialog box, we’ll type the filename as '''HOBBY'''

Then click on the '''Save''' button at the top right.
|-
|| Close file HOBBY.odt

Point to '''Resume.odt'''

|| Close this file '''HOBBY.odt '''by clicking on the '''X '''icon at the top right corner.

Now we’ll create a '''hyperlink''' in '''Resume.odt''' which would redirect to this document.

|-
| | Type '''HOBBIES'''
|| Place the cursor at the end of the last line in the '''document''' and press '''Enter '''twice'''.'''

Type the word '''HOBBIES'''.
|-
| | Select the word '''HOBBIES'''
| | Now select the text by dragging the cursor along the word '''HOBBIES'''.

|-
| | Click on '''Insert '''>> '''Hyperlink'''
| | Then click on '''Insert menu''' in the '''menu bar''' and click on the '''Hyperlink''' option.

|-
| | Poin to '''Internet''', '''Mails''', '''Document''' and '''New Document'''
|| '''Hyperlink''' dialog box opens up.

On the left, we see the options '''Internet''', '''Mail''', '''Document''' and '''New Document.'''
|-
| | Click on '''Document''' option
| | For creating a '''hyperlink''' to another '''text document''', click on '''Document''' option.
|-
| | Point to '''Document''' and '''Target in Document'''
|| Here there are 2 sections

'''Document''' and '''Target in Document'''.
|-
| | Only Narration
| | We will learn about the '''Target in Document''' feature as the tutorial progresses.

|-
| | Click on the folder icon at the right of '''Path''' field
| | Click on the '''folder''' icon on the right of the '''Path''' field.

|-
| | Click on Desktop >> Scroll down & locate '''HOBBY.odt'''
|| Select '''Desktop''' location.

Scroll down and locate the new document '''HOBBY.odt''' which we had created.
|-
| | Select '''HOBBY.odt''' and click on '''Open '''button
| | Now, double-click on the “'''HOBBY.odt”''' file.

|-
| | Point on the '''Path''' field
| | We see that the '''path''' to the file gets inserted in the '''Path''' field.

|-
| | Click on '''Apply''' >> click on '''Close''' button
| | At the bottom, click on the '''Apply''' button first and then on the '''Close''' button.

|-
| | Point to '''HOBBIES'''
|| We see that the text "'''HOBBIES'''" is underlined and is blue in color.

Which means the text is now a '''hyperlink'''.
|-
|| Cursor on '''HOBBIES'''

Press Ctrl key and Left mouse button
|| Now, place the cursor on the word '''HOBBIES'''.

Then press the '''Ctrl '''key and the left '''mouse button''' together.
|-
| | Point to '''HOBBIES'''
| | We see that the file '''HOBBY.odt''' opens up.

|-
| | Click on X icon
| | Click on the '''X '''icon at the top right corner to close this file.
|-
| | Only Narration
| | Next, let’s learn how to insert '''Bookmarks'''.

|-
|| Slide: '''What is a Bookmark?'''
||
* A '''Bookmark''' is a text that marks a particular position inside a '''paragraph''' or a text portion.

* '''Bookmarks '''are useful when we are reading large '''documents'''.

* It helps us to mark and later revisit certain pages or '''paragraphs''' in a '''document'''.

|-
| | Select '''RAMESH'''
| | I will select the text '''RAMESH.'''

|-
| | Click on the '''Insert Bookmark''' icon in the '''Standard toolbar'''
| | Then click on the '''Insert Bookmark''' icon in the '''Standard toolbar'''.
|-
| | '''Bookmark''' dialog box
| | The '''Bookmark''' dialog box opens.
|-
| | Point to '''Bookmark 1'''
|| The text field says '''Bookmark 1'''.

We can give our own '''customised''' name if we wish to.

I will leave this as it is.
|-
| | Click on '''Insert'''
| | Click on the '''Insert''' button to the right of this field.

|-
| | Only Narration
| | The '''Bookmark''' dialog box automatically closes.

|-
| | Select '''SELF EMPLOYED'''
| | I will now select another text within the document, say '''SELF EMPLOYED.'''

|-
| | Click on the '''Insert Bookmark''' icon in the '''Standard toolbar'''
| | Once again, click on the '''Insert Bookmark''' icon in the '''Standard toolbar'''.

|-
| | '''Bookmark''' dialog box >> Point to the previous '''bookmark'''
| | This time the dialog box shows our previously created '''bookmark '''in the list below.

|-
| | Point to '''Bookmark 2'''
|| The text field now says '''Bookmark 2'''.

Again, I will leave it as default.
|-
| | Click on '''Insert'''
| | Then click on the '''Insert''' button to the right of this field.

|-
| | Click on the '''Insert Bookmark''' icon in the '''Standard toolbar'''
| | Click on the '''Insert Bookmark''' icon in the '''Standard toolbar'''.

|-
| | '''Bookmark''' dialog box >> Point to 2 '''bookmarks'''
| | This time the dialog box shows 2 '''bookmarks'''.

|-
| | Select '''Bookmark 1 >> '''click on the '''Go to''' button
| | Click on any one and then click on the '''Go to''' button at the bottom of the dialog box.
|-
| | Click on the close button.
| | Click on the '''Close''' button.

|-
| | Highlight in the main document
| | The focus shifts to the specified portion of text in the '''document'''.

|-
||

Click on the '''Insert Bookmark''' icon in the '''Standard toolbar'''
||

Click on '''Insert bookmark '''icon in the standard toolbar
|-
|| Select '''Bookmark 2 '''

click on the '''Go to''' button
|| Now click on the other '''bookmark'''.

And then click on the '''Go to''' button at the bottom of the dialog box.
|-
| | Click on the '''Close''' button.
| | Click on the '''Close''' button.

|-
| | Highlight in the main document
| | The focus shifts to the other specified portion of text in the '''document'''.

|-
|| Click on the '''Insert Bookmark''' icon

'''Bookmark''' dialog box

Point to '''Help, Rename, Delete'''

|Explore what the other buttons in the dialog box will do, on your own.

|-
| | Only Narration
| | This is how we can insert and use '''Bookmarks''' in a '''Writer '''document.

|-
|| Press Ctrl+S

Click on X icon
|| Press '''Ctrl+S''' to save '''Resume.odt''' file.

And then click on '''X''' icon at the top right corner of the window to close it.
|-
| | Only Narration
| | We have another feature in '''Hyperlinks''' which is''' Target in document.'''
|-
|| Only Narration

| | This will help the reader to find a specific section in the '''target document.'''
|-
| | Open HOBBY.odt
| | Open '''HOBBY.odt''' file.
|-
| | Select word tennis
| | Inside the '''document''', select the word '''tennis'''.
|-
| | Click on Insert >> Bookmark
| | Click on '''Insert''' menu in the '''menu bar''' and select '''Bookmark.'''
|-
|| Point to Bookmark dialog box

Type tennis and click on Insert
|| Under the '''Bookmark''' dialog box, in the place of '''Bookmark1''' type''' tennis.'''

Now click on the '''Insert''' button on the right.
|-
| | `Press Ctrl+S
| | Let’s save this file and then close it.
|-
|| Open Resume.odt

Select word HOBBIES
|| Now open the '''Resume.odt '''file once again.

Select the word ‘'''HOBBIES’.'''
|-
|| Click Insert >> Hyperlink

Point to Hyperlink dialog box
|| Click on '''Insert''' menu in the '''menu bar '''and

select '''Hyperlink'''.

The '''Hyperlink''' dialog box opens up.
|-
|| Click on '''Document '''

Point to the '''Path''' field
|| Click on '''Document '''in the left.

In the '''Path''' field, we see the full path of '''HOBBY.odt '''file.
|-
|| Point to target in document

Type word tennis
|| Under''' Target in document '''section, click on the circle icon to the right.

The '''Target in document''' list box opens.

|-
||Expand '''Bookmarks''' by clicking on the arrow >> select '''tennis bookmark'''

Click on''' Apply''' and '''Close''' button

||Expand '''Bookmarks''' by clicking on the arrow and select the '''tennis bookmark'''.

Click on the '''Apply''' button and then on '''Close''' button.
|-
| | Point to '''Target''' field >> '''tennis'''.
| | In the '''Hyperlink''' dialog box, in the '''Target''' field we see the text '''tennis'''.
|-
| | Point on the '''URL''' field
| | We also see that the '''path''' of '''HOBBY.odt '''file gets inserted in the '''URL''' field.
|-
| | Click on '''Apply''' >> click on '''Close''' button
| | At the bottom, click on the '''Apply''' button first and then on the '''Close''' button.
|-
|| Cursor on HOBBIES

Press Ctrl+left key mouse
|| Keep the cursor on the word '''HOBBIES'''.

And press the '''Ctrl '''key and the left mouse-button together.
|-
| | Highlight with a red box
| | Notice that this time the cursor is next to the word '''tennis''' in the '''HOBBY.odt '''file.
|-
| | Only Narration
| | This is a useful feature when the '''Target file''' is large and runs into multiple pages.
|-
| | Click on ‘X’ icon
|| Close the file '''HOBBY.odt''' by clicking on the '''X '''icon.

Come back to '''Resume.odt'''.

|-
|| Press''' Ctrl + S'''

Click on ‘X’ icon

|| Let’s save the file by pressing '''Ctrl + S '''keys.

Then close the file by clicking on the '''X '''icon.
|-
| | Only Narration
| | This brings us to the end of the tutorial . Let us summarize.

|-
| | Slide: '''Summary'''
|| In this tutorial we learnt how to insert:
* An '''Image file'''
* A '''Hyperlink'''
* A '''Bookmark '''in a '''Writer '''document

|-
| | Slide: '''Assignment'''
|| As an assignment
* Open '''practice.odt'''
* Insert an '''image''' of your choice into the file
* Create a '''hyperlink''' to open '''www.google.com''' website when you click on the '''image''' in the file
* Insert at least 2 '''bookmarks'''

|-
| | Slide: '''About spoken tutorial project'''
|| The video at the following summarises the Spoken Tutorial project

Please download and watch it.
|-
| | Slide: '''Spoken Tutorial workshops'''
|| We conduct workshops using '''spoken tutorials '''and give certificates.

For more details, Please contact us.
|-
| | Slide:''' Forums'''
| | Please post your timed queries in this forum.
|-
| | Slide: '''Acknowledgment'''
| | The '''Spoken Tutorial '''project is funded by '''MHRD''' Govt of India
|-
| | Slide: '''Thank you'''
|| This tutorial was originally contributed by DesiCrew Solutions Pvt. Ltd. in 2011.

This is Pratik Kamble along with the Spoken Tutorial team from '''IIT Bombay''' signing off.

Thank you for watching.
|-
|}

LibreOffice-Suite-Writer-6.3/C2/Typing-text-and-basic-formatting-in-Writer/English

2020-07-03T13:04:55Z

Pratik kamble: Created page with "Title: Typing text and Basic formatting Author: Pratik Kamble Novice Reviewer: Nikita and Pooja Domain Reviewer: Praveen and Nancy Keywords: Align, Bullets, Numbering, Bo..."

Title: Typing text and Basic formatting

Author: Pratik Kamble

Novice Reviewer: Nikita and Pooja

Domain Reviewer: Praveen and Nancy

Keywords: Align, Bullets, Numbering, Bold, Underline, Italics, Font name, Font size, Font color

{|border=1
| align=center| '''Visual Cue'''
| align=center| '''Narration'''
|-
|| Slide : '''Title '''
|| Welcome to the '''Spoken tutorial''' on '''Typing text and basic formatting'''.
|-
|| Slide : '''Learning Objectives'''
|| In this tutorial, we will learn to:
* '''Align''' text
* Use '''Bullets '''and''' Numbering'''
* Use '''Cut, Copy''' and '''Paste''' options
* Use '''Bold''', '''Underline''' and '''Italic''' options
* Use the '''Font name''', '''Font size''', '''Font color''' options in''' Writer'''

|-
|| Slide: '''Formatting features'''
||
* Applying these features make our documents more attractive.
* They will be much easier to read as compared to the documents which are plain text.

|-
|| Slide: '''System Requirements'''
|| This tutorial is recorded using
* '''Ubuntu Linux OS''' version '''18.04''' and
* '''LibreOffice Suite '''version '''6.3.5'''

|-
|| Open '''Resume.odt''' file
|| Open the file '''Resume.odt '''which we have created earlier.
|-
|| Slide: '''Code files'''
||
* This file has been provided to you in the''' Code files''' link on this tutorial page.
* Pls download and extract the file.
* Make a copy and then use it for practising.

|-
|| Only Narration
|| We will first learn about aligning text in '''Writer.'''
|-
|| Point to Text '''RESUME'''
|| We had previously typed the word '''RESUME''' and aligned it to the center of the page.
|-
|| Select word '''RESUME'''
|| So, let’s select the word '''RESUME''' once again.
|-
|| Only Narration
|| If you have resized your '''LibreOffice''' window, some of the '''icon''' may not be visible.
|-
|| Click on Double arrow icon
|| In that case, click on the double arrow icon at the end of the '''toolbars''' to see the hidden '''icons.'''
|-
|| Click on Align Left icon

|| Now click on the''' Align Left''' icon on the '''Formatting toolbar'''.
|-
|| Point to Text '''RESUME'''
|| The word '''RESUME''' is now aligned to the left of the page.
|-
|| Click on''' Align Right''' icon on formatting toolbar

Point to Text '''RESUME'''
|| Click on the '''Align Right''' icon.

The word '''RESUME''' gets aligned to the right of the page.
|-
|| Click on '''Justify icon''' on formatting toolbar

Point to Text '''RESUME'''

Only Narration
|| Now, click on the '''Justify '''icon.

The word '''RESUME''' is uniformly placed between the right and left margin of the page.

This feature will be more obvious when we have a line or paragraph of text.
|-
|| '''Press Ctrl +Z (3 Times) '''
|| Let’s undo the changes until our text '''Resume''' is centre-aligned.

In '''Writer''', we press '''Ctrl + Z''' keys on the keyboard to undo an action.

Deselect the word '''RESUME'''.
|-
|| Press '''Enter'''

|| Now, press '''Enter''' key on the keyboard to go to the next line.

Press the '''Enter''' key once again to create one more line.
|-
|| Click on '''Align Left'''

Click''' '''on '''Bold''' icon
|| Click on the '''Align Left''' icon in the '''Formatting toolbar'''.

Then click on the '''Bold''' icon from the '''toolbar '''to disable the '''bold''' option.
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Now let’s learn about '''bullets''' and '''numbering'''.
|-
|| '''Slide: Bullets and Numbering'''

||
* '''Bullets''' and '''Numbering''' are used when independent points have to be written in a document
* Each point starts with either a '''bullet''' or a '''number.'''
* '''Bullets '''are used for unordered lists
* '''Numbering''' is used for ordered lists

|-
|| Point to the '''Bullets''' and '''Numbering''' icons.
|| In the '''Formatting toolbar, '''we can see the separate icons for '''Bullets''' and '''Numbering'''.
|-
|| Click on the '''Bullets''' icon

Point to the '''bullet''' symbol
|| Let’s click on the '''Bullets''' icon.

Immediately a '''dot''' or '''bullet''' symbol appears on the document.
|-
|| Type a >> '''Enter'''
|| Let’s type the alphabet '''a''' and press '''Enter'''.
|-
|| Type b >> '''Enter'''
|| Now, let’s type '''b''' and press '''Enter'''.
|-
|| Click on the '''Numbering''' icon

highlight the '''number 1'''
|| Next let’s press the '''Numbering''' icon.

Immediately, the '''bullet''' symbol is converted to number 1.
|-
|| Type c >> '''Enter'''

Type d >> '''Enter'''
|| Type '''c''' and press '''Enter'''.

type '''d''' and press '''Enter'''.
|-
|| Only narration
|| Hope this gives you a clear picture of the difference between '''bullets''' and '''numbering'''.
|-
|| Click and drag the left mouse button to select this text.
|| Click and drag the left mouse button to select all this text.
|-
|| Click on '''Format menu >> Bullets and Numbering'''
|| Now, we will learn another method of accessing '''Bullets''' and''' Numbering'''.

First click on the '''Format''' '''menu''' in the '''menu bar '''and then on '''Bullets and Numbering '''option.
|-
||

Point to option such as '''Bullets, Numbering, Outline, Image'''
|| '''Bullets and Numbering''' dialog box opens up.

It provides various '''styles''' under different tabs which can be applied to our document.
|-
|| Select '''Bullets''' tab
|| Select '''Bullets''' tab if not already selected.

Many '''bullets styles''' are seen here.
|-
|| Select the large square bullets >> click on '''Ok'''
|| Select the large square '''bullets'''.

And click on the '''OK''' button at the bottom right corner of the dialog box.
|-
|| Highlight the new bullet style
|| Observe the change in the '''bullet''' symbols.
|-
|| Click on '''Format menu >> Bullets and Numbering >> '''select '''Numbering '''tab
|| Now, let’s reopen the '''Bullets and Numbering''' dialog box and click on the '''Numbering '''tab.

Many '''numbering styles''' are seen here.
|-
|| Select the '''Roman numerals''' >> click on '''Ok'''
|| Let’s select the '''Roman numerals''' style.

And click on the '''OK''' button at the bottom right corner of the dialog box.
|-
|| Highlight the new bullet style
|| Observe the change in the '''numbering'''. They appear as '''Roman numerals '''now.
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Likewise we can use any '''bullets''' or '''numbering style''' as per our choice.
|-
|| Select this newly typed text

Press the '''Delete '''key

Press the '''Backspace''' key

||Now press the '''Delete '''key on the keyboard.

Then press the '''Backspace''' key on the keyboard to remove the remaining '''numbering''' also.
|-
|| Click on '''Format menu >> Bullets and Numbering >> '''select '''Numbering '''tab
|| Let’s reopen the '''Bullets and Numbering''' dialog box and click on the '''Numbering '''tab.
|-
|| Click on second''' style'''

Click on''' OK '''button
|| Now, let us click on the second '''style'''

and click on the '''OK '''button.

|-
|| Only Narration
|| We are now ready to type our first point.
|-
|| Type '''NAME''': '''RAMESH''' >>Press '''Enter'''
|| We’ll type '''NAME''' colon space '''RAMESH''' and press '''Enter'''.
|-
|| Press '''Enter''' key

|| Here onwards, press the '''Enter '''key after every point.
|-
|| Point to '''2'''
|| The next '''bullet''' '''point''' shows the new incremental '''number'''.
|-
|| Type '''FATHER’S NAME: MAHESH '''>>Press '''Enter'''
|| Let’s type the second point in the '''Resume''' as '''“FATHER’S NAME” colon '''MAHESH'''
|-
|| '''MOTHER’S NAME''': '''SHWETA”''' >>Press '''Enter'''
|| Then type the third point as '''MOTHER’S NAME''' colon '''SHWETA.'''
|-
|| “'''FATHERS OCCUPATION''': '''GOVERNMENT SERVANT” '''>>Press '''Enter'''

'''MOTHERS OCCUPATION''': '''HOUSEWIFE'''
|| Type the next two points as shown here.
|-
|| Press '''Ctrl + S'''
|| Let’s save our file by pressing '''Ctrl + S''' keys.

It’s a good habit to frequently save our file while working.
|-
|| Text on screen: Multiple levels of '''bullets '''or''' numbers '''in a '''list.'''
|| There can be multiple levels of '''bullets '''or''' numbers '''in a '''list.'''

It depends on the format we choose.
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Let me demonstrate for you.
|-
|| Go to point no. 4 '''FATHERS OCCUPATION'''

cursor after '''colon''' and press '''Enter'''.
|| Go to point no. 4 '''FATHERS OCCUPATION'''.

Place the cursor after the '''colon''' and press '''Enter'''.
|-
| | Press '''Tab''' key once.

Point to newly created bullet point
| | Now press '''Tab''' key once.

Immediately, no. 5 turns into a new '''Bullet list''' and gets indented below no. 4
|-
|| Click on the '''Bullet '''icon in the '''formatting toolbar.'''
|| Click on the '''Bullet '''icon in the '''Formatting toolbar.'''
|-
|| Cursor to the end of the '''bullet '''point >> press '''Enter '''

Type''' SELF EMPLOYED''' >> press '''Enter'''
|| Move the cursor to the end of the '''bullet '''point and press '''Enter.'''

Type '''SELF EMPLOYED''' and press '''Enter.'''
|-
|| Press '''Shift + tab key''' on the keyboard
|| We can press '''Shift + Tab''' keys to decrease the indentation.
|-
|| Press '''Delete''' key
|| Now press the '''Delete''' key till the next point comes up one line.
|-
|| Cursor to the end of the '''bullet '''point >> press '''Enter '''

Point to newly created no. 6
|| Move the cursor to the end of the numbered''' '''point 5 and press '''Enter.'''

'''No. 6 '''appears on the list.
|-
|| Click on '''Format menu >> Bullets and Numbering >>''' Click on''' Remove '''button
|| To turn off '''Bullets and Numbering,''' reopen the '''Bullets and Numbering''' dialog box.

Click on the '''Remove''' button at the bottom.
|-
|| Point to the New line of text
|| We see that the '''bullet and numbering style''' is no longer seen for the new line of text.
|-
|| Highlight the icons '''Bullets '''and''' Numbering.'''
|| Explore the '''bullets '''and''' numbering''' quick access icon in the '''formatting toolbar''' on your own.
|-
|| Highlight all occurrences of the word '''NAME'''
|| Notice that we have typed the word '''NAME''' thrice in our document.
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Instead of typing the same text all over again, we can use the '''Copy''' and '''Paste''' option in '''Writer.'''
|-
|| Only narration
|| So, let us learn how to do this.
|-
|| Delete '''NAME''' from the text''' MOTHER’S NAME'''
|| First, delete the word '''NAME''' from the text '''MOTHER’S NAME'''.
|-
|| Select the word '''NAME'''
|| Select the word '''NAME'''” in '''FATHER’S NAME'''
|-
|| Right-click on mouse >> '''Copy'''
|| Right-click on the '''mouse''' and select '''Copy.'''
|-
|| Cursor between '''MOTHER’S''' and '''Colon >>'''Right-click on mouse >> '''Paste'''
|| Place the cursor between the text '''MOTHER’S''' and '''colon''' symbol.

Right-click on the '''mouse''' and select '''Paste'''.
|-
|| Point to word '''MOTHER’S NAME'''
|| We see that the word '''NAME''' gets pasted automatically.
|-
|| Text on screen: '''Ctrl+C''' to '''copy''' and '''Ctrl+V '''to '''paste.'''
|| The '''shortcut keys''' for these options are '''Ctrl+C''' to '''copy''' and '''Ctrl+V '''to '''paste.'''
|-
|| Only Narration
|| This feature is very useful while writing repeated text in large documents.

So we don't need to type the entire text repeatedly. We can simply copy and paste.
|-
|| Only Narration
|| In '''Writer''', there is a feature similar to '''Copy''', which is '''Cut'''.
|-
|| Only''' '''Narration''' '''
|| Let me show a demonstration.
|-
|| Delete '''NAME''' from the text''' MOTHER’S NAME'''
|| First, delete the word '''NAME''' from the text '''MOTHER’S NAME'''.
|-
|| Select word '''NAME''' in '''FATHER'S NAME.'''
|| Now select the word '''NAME''' in '''FATHER'S NAME.'''
|-
|| Right click on mouse >> '''Cut'''

Point to '''FATHER’S'''
|| Right-click and select '''Cut'''.

Notice that the word '''NAME''' is no longer there next to the word '''FATHER’S'''.

Which means it has been cut or deleted.
|-
|| Cursor between '''MOTHER’s''' and '''Colon >>'''Right-click on mouse >> '''Paste'''
|| Place the cursor between the text '''MOTHER’S''' and '''colon''' symbol.

Right-click on the '''mouse''' and select '''Paste'''.
|-
|| Point to '''MOTHER’S'''
|| We see that the word '''NAME''' is now pasted next to the word '''MOTHER’S'''
|-
|| Text on screen: '''Ctrl+X''' to '''cut'''
|| The shortcut key to cut is '''Ctrl+X.'''
|-
|| Cursor between '''FATHER’S''' and '''Colon >>'''Right-click on mouse >> '''Paste'''
|| Likewise, paste the word after '''FATHER’S '''also.
|-
|| Only Narration
|| '''Cut''' and '''Paste''' feature is useful to move a text from one place in the document to another.
|-
|| '''Slide: Difference between Copy and Cut'''

|| The only difference between copying and cutting the text is

* the '''Copy''' option keeps the original word at its place from where it was copied

* whereas the '''Cut''' option removes it from its original place.

|-
|| Press Enter twice
|| Move the cursor to the end of the '''document. '''

Press '''Enter''' twice
|-
|| Press '''Enter''' >> Type '''EDUCATION DETAILS''' >> Press '''Enter'''
||Now Let’s type a new '''heading''' '''EDUCATION DETAILS.'''

|-
|| Only Narration
|| We will now learn how the '''Font name''' and '''Font size '''of any text can be changed or applied.
|-
|| Point to '''Font Name''' field
|| Previously, we had selected '''UnDotum''' as the '''font name'''.

Hence we can see '''UnDotum''' in the '''Font name''' field.
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Let us use a different '''Font''' and '''Size''' for''' '''the heading '''EDUCATION DETAILS.'''
|-
|| Select '''EDUCATION DETAILS'''

click on '''Font Name''' drop-down.
|| So, first select the text '''EDUCATION DETAILS''' and then

click on the '''Font Name''' drop-down.
|-
|| Click on''' Liberation Sans'''
|| Search for '''Liberation Sans''' and click on it.
|-
|| Point to '''Font size''' field
|| The '''Font Size '''field shows '''14''' currently.
|-
|| Click '''Font size '''field box
|| Let’s change this to '''11'''.
|-
|| Point to '''EDUCATION DETAILS'''
|| We see that the '''Font size''' of the text decreases.
|-
|| Point to '''Font Color'''
|| Let’s now move to '''Font Color'''.
|-
|| Select '''EDUCATION DETAILS'''
|| Make sure that our text is still selected.
|-
|| Click on '''Font''' '''color''' >> Select '''Green'''
|| Now, click on the dropdown in the '''Font Color''' and select the color '''green'''.
|-
|| Point to '''EDUCATION DETAILS'''
|| So, we see that the '''heading''' is now '''green''' in color.
|-
|| Point to '''Bold Italic''' and '''Underline'''
|| Next we will click on the icons '''Bold''', '''Italic''' and '''Underline.'''
|-
|| Only narration
|| We can use any combination of these text formats for our text, as per our requirements.
|-
|| Press''' Ctrl + S'''
|| Save our file by pressing '''Ctrl + S''' keys and then close it by clicking on the '''X '''icon at the top right.
|-
|| Only Narration
|| This brings us to the end of this tutorial.

Let us summarise.
|-
|| Slide: '''Summary'''
|| In this tutorial we learnt to:
* '''Align''' text
* Use '''Bullets '''and''' Numbering'''
* Use '''Cut, Copy''' and '''Paste''' options
* Use '''Bold''', '''Underline''' and '''Italic''' options
* Use the '''Font name''', '''Font size''', '''Font color''' options in''' Writer'''

|-
|| Slide: '''Assignment'''
|| As an assignment:
* Open the file '''practice.odt'''
* Activate '''Bullets and Numbering'''
* Choose any '''style''' and type few lines of text
* Select some text and change its '''Font ''' '''name''' to '''Free Sans'''
* Set the '''Font size''' to '''16'''
* Make the text '''Italic'''
* Change the '''Font''' '''color''' to '''red'''
* Save and close the file

|-
|| Slide: '''About spoken Tutorial Project'''
|| The video at the following link summarises the spoken tutorial project

Please download and watch it.
|-
|| Slide: '''Spoken tutorial workshops'''
|| We conduct workshop using '''Spoken''' '''Tutorials''' and give certificates

For more details, please contact us
|-
|| Slide: '''Forums'''
|| Please post your timed queries in this forum.
|-
|| Slide: '''Acknowledgment'''
|| The''' Spoken Tutorial '''project is funded by '''MHRD''' Govt of India
|-
|| Slide: '''Thank you'''
|| This tutorial was originally contributed by DesiCrew Solutions Pvt. Ltd. in 2011

This is Pratik Kamble along with the Spoken Tutorial team from''' IIT Bombay''' signing off.

Thank you for watching.
|-
|}

LibreOffice-Suite-Writer-6.3/C2/Introduction-to-LibreOffice-Writer/English

2020-07-02T10:49:35Z

Pratik kamble:

Title: Introduction to LibreOffice Writer

Author: Pratik Kamble

Novice Reviewer: Nikita and Pooja

Domain Reviewer: Praveen and Nancy

Keywords: LibreOffice Writer, word processor, Toolbars, Title bar, Menu bar, Standard toolbar, Formatting bar, Save, Export, MS Word, PDF, File type, Font Name, Font Size, Bold and Align

{| border=1
|-
| | '''Visual Cue'''
| | '''Narration '''
|-
| | Slide : Title
| | Welcome to the '''spoken tutorial''' on '''Introduction to LibreOffice Writer.'''
|-
| | Slide : Learning Objectives
|| In this tutorial, we will learn:
* About '''LibreOffice Writer'''
* Various '''toolbars '''in '''Writer'''
* How to open a new and existing document
* How to save''' '''and close a document in '''Writer'''
* How to save as '''MS Word '''document
* How to export as a '''PDF '''document

|-
| | Slide : What is LibreOffice Writer ?
||
* '''LibreOffice Writer''' is the '''word processor''' component of the '''LibreOffice Suite'''.
* It is the equivalent of '''Microsoft Word''' in '''Microsoft Office Suite'''.
* It's free and open source software.
* It can be shared, modified and distributed without any restrictions.

|-
| | Slide: OS and versions
|| '''LibreOffice Writer''' can run on any of the following operating systems:

* '''Microsoft Windows 8''' or higher versions
* '''GNU/Linux OS '''and
* '''Mac OSX'''

|-
| | Slide: System Requirements
|| This tutorial is recorded using
* '''Ubuntu Linux OS''' version 18.04 and
* '''LibreOffice Suite '''version 6.3.5

|-
| | Slide: LibreOffice installation
||
* By default, the latest '''Ubuntu Linux OS''' has '''LibreOffice Suite''' pre-installed in it
* To install a specific version, refer to the '''LibreOffice Installation''' series on this website.

|-
| | Only Narration
| | Let us learn how to open '''LibreOffice''' '''Writer.'''
|-
| | Click on '''Show Applications '''->search bar type “Writer”->click on '''LibreOffice Writer''' icon
|| In '''Ubuntu Linux OS''', click on the '''Show applications''' icon located at the bottom left corner.

In the '''search bar''' type '''Writer'''.

From the displayed list, click on the '''Libreoffice Writer''' icon.
|-
| | Click on “Start menu”->search bar type “Writer”->click on '''LibreOffice Writer''' icon
|| In '''Windows OS''', click on the '''Start Menu''' icon located at the bottom left corner.

In the '''search bar,''' type '''Writer'''.

From the displayed list, click on the '''Libreoffice Writer''' icon.
|-
| | Only Narration:
|| This will open an empty document in the main '''Writer '''window.

Now let us learn about the main components of the '''Writer '''window.
|-
| | Highlight with a red box - '''Title''' '''bar''', '''Menu bar''', '''Standard toolbar '''and''' Formatting bar.'''
|| The '''Writer''' window has various '''toolbars '''at the top.

These are '''Title''' '''bar''', '''Menu bar''', '''Standard toolbar '''and''' Formatting bar.'''
|-
| | Highlight with a red box - '''Search bear, Drawing toolbar, Status bar.'''
| | At the bottom, we see the''' Search bar, Drawing toolbar '''and''' Status bar.'''
|-
|| Click '''View''' '''menu''' >> '''Toolbars'''

Check '''Drawing''' '''toolbar''' and '''Find'''

|| We can enable or disable these '''toolbars''' from the interface.

To do so, go to the '''View''' '''menu''' in the main''' menu bar''' and select '''Toolbars'''.

From the sub menu, check or uncheck the '''toolbars''' based on your preference.
|-
| | Highlight with a red box - vertical scroll bar and sidebar
| | At the right side, we see the vertical '''scroll bar '''and '''sidebar.'''
|-
| | Only Narration
|| All of these have the most commonly used options.

We will learn about these as the series progresses.
|-
| | Only Narration
| | Now let us learn how to open a new document in '''Writer.'''
|-
| | Point to on '''New''' icon
| | We can open a new document by clicking on the '''New''' icon in the '''Standard''' '''toolbar.'''
|-
|| Click '''File menu'''

Click '''New''' >> '''Text Document'''

|| Alternatively go to the '''File''' '''menu''' in the '''menu bar.'''

Then click on the sub menu '''New''' and select the option '''Text Document.'''
|-
| | Point to '''Title bar - Untitled 2'''
|| A new '''Writer''' document named '''Untitled 2 '''opens up.

Close the newly opened document''' '''named''' Untitled 2 '''by clicking on the '''X '''icon at the top right'''.'''
|-
| | Only Narration
| | Now, we’ll type some text in the''' Untitled 1''' document.
|-
| | Type “'''RESUME'''”
| | Type the word “'''RESUME'''”.
|-
| | Only Narration
| | Once done typing our document, we should save it for future use.
|-
| | Click on '''File'''
| | To save the file, click on the '''Save '''icon in the '''Standard toolbar'''.
|-
|| Dialog box

Point to '''Name'''.

Type “'''Resume'''” in the '''Name''' field.
|| A''' '''dialog box appears on the screen.

It prompts us to enter the name of our file in the '''Name''' field.

I will type the name of the file as''' “Resume”.'''
|-
| | Select '''Desktop''' location to save the file.
| | On the left side, I’ll select '''Desktop''' as the location to save my file.
|-
| | Click '''File type''' drop-down
|| Notice, we have a '''File type''' drop-down at the bottom right corner.

Click on this drop-down.
|-
||

Point to “'''ODF Text Document (.odt)'''”

|| It shows a list of '''file types''' or '''file extensions''' in which we can save our file.

The default '''file type''' in '''LibreOffice Writer''' is '''ODF''' '''Text Document (.odt)'''.

'''ODF''' stands for '''Open Document Format''' which is an open standard.
|-
| | Only narration
| | It is also accepted by the Government of India policy on '''open standards in e-Governance'''.
|-
| | Click on “'''ODF Text Document (.odt)”'''.
|| I will click on the '''ODF Text Document''' option to save my file.

Do likewise on your machine.
|-
|| Click on '''Save''' button.

| | Click on the '''Save''' button at the top right corner of the dialog box.
|-
| | '''Writer '''window
| | We will be redirected back to the '''Writer''' window.
|-
| | Point to “'''Resume.odt'''” in the '''title bar'''.
|| Observe the change in the '''title bar '''now.

It has changed to '''Resume.odt'''
|-
|| Point to '''“Word 97-2003 (.doc)” '''

Point to '''“Word 2007-365 (.docx)”'''
|| Besides saving in '''dot odt''' format, we can also save our file in '''dot doc''' and in '''dot docx''' formats.

Files with these formats can be opened later in '''MS Word '''application.

|-
| | Only Narration
| | Now, we will save the same file as a '''docx '''file.

|-
| | Click on '''File >> Save as'''
| | Go to '''File menu '''in the '''menu bar''' and then click on the '''Save As''' option.
|-
|| '''Save As''' dialog box >> click on '''File type '''drop-down

Scroll down and select '''Word 2007 - 365(.docx)'''
|| In the '''Save As''' dialog box, click on the '''File type '''drop-down at the bottom right corner.

Scroll down and select''' Word 2007 - 365 (.docx)'''
|-
| | Choose '''Desktop''' as location >> Click on '''Save '''button.
|| Again choose the same file location to save.

Then click on the '''Save''' button at the top right corner of the dialog box.
|-
|| '''Confirm File Format '''dialog box opens

Put a check on''' “Ask when not saving in ODF format”'''.
|| If we save the file in any other file format, '''Confirm File Format '''dialog box opens up.

Put a check on “'''Ask when not saving in ODF or default forma'''t” option.
|-
| | Click on''' Use Word 2007 - 365 Format'''
| | Then click on the '''Use Word 2007 - 365 Format''' button.
|-
| | '''Writer '''window
| | We will be redirected back to the '''Writer''' window.
|-
| | Point to “'''Resume.odt'''” in the '''title bar'''.
|| Observe the change in the '''title bar '''now.

It has changed to '''Resume.docx'''
|-
||

Point to '''“Export Directly as PDF”'''.
|| The file can also be exported to '''PDF''' format.

Click on the '''Export Directly as PDF''' icon in the '''Standard toolbar'''.
|-
|| Highlight '''Filename''' field, highlight left panel locations, highlight '''Save''' button.

'''DO NOT CLICK Save button.'''
| | Type a '''filename''', choose a location and click on the '''Save '''button at the top right.
|-
| | Click on '''Cancel '''button
| | I will click on '''Cancel''' and show another way of saving the document in '''PDF''' format.
|-
| | Click on '''File menu>>Export As>>Export as PDF'''
|| Click on the '''File''' '''menu''' in the '''menu bar '''and select '''Export As''' sub-menu option.

Then click on the '''Export as PDF''' option.

|-
||Point to''' PDF Option '''dialog box

Click on '''Export''' button
| '''PDF options''' dialog box opens up.

In this dialog box, we will see various settings to customize the '''PDF''' option.

Keep the default settings as it is and click on the '''Export''' button at the bottom.
|-
| | Click on '''Desktop '''location >> click on '''Save''' button
|| Type a '''filename''', choose a location and click on the '''Save '''button at the top right.

A '''pdf '''file will be created in the selected location.
|-
| | Click on File >> Save As>> File type drop-down >> Point to '''Rich Text (.rtf)'''
| | Another popular extension which opens in most applications, is '''dot rtf,''' the '''Rich Text Format.'''
|-
| | Point to '''“HTML”'''
|| We can save the file in '''dot html''' format also, which is a '''web page format'''.

This is done in the same way as explained above.
|-
| | File type drop-down >> Scroll down and select “'''HTML Document writer .html'''
|| In the '''File type '''drop-down, scroll down and select''' HTML Document (Writer)(.html).'''

This option gives the '''dot html''' extension to the document.
|-
| | Choose '''Desktop''' as location >> Click on '''Save '''button.
|| Again choose the same file location to save.

Now click on the '''Save''' button at the top right corner of the dialog box.
|-
|| '''Confirm File Format '''dialog box opens

Put a check on''' “Ask when not saving in ODF format”'''.
|| The '''Confirm File Format '''dialog box opens.

Put a check on “'''Ask when not saving in ODF or default forma'''t” option.
|-
| | Click on “'''Use HTML Document (Writer) Format'''”.
| | Then click on the '''Use HTML Document (Writer) Format''' button.
|-
| | Point to '''title bar.'''
|| We see that the file gets saved with '''dot html''' extension.

This format is used when we want to show our '''document''' as a''' web page.'''

It can be opened in any '''web browser'''.
|-
| | Click on '''File'''>>'''Close'''
| | Let's close this document by clicking on the '''File menu''' in the '''menu bar '''and then '''Close.'''
|-
| | Only Narration
|| Next, we will learn how to open an existing document in '''LibreOffice Writer.'''

Let's open the document '''Resume.odt'''
|-
|| Click on '''Open File'''

File browser dialog box opens >> browse location
|| Click on the '''Open File''' '''menu''' on the left of the '''LibreOffice''' interface.

The file browser dialog box opens up.

Go to the location where our file is saved.

|-
|Choose '''Resume.odt''' '''

'''click on the '''Open''' button
|| Now in the list of filenames that appears, choose '''Resume.odt'''

Then click on the '''Open''' button at the top right corner.

The file '''Resume.odt''' opens in the '''Writer '''window.
|-
| | Only Narration
| | Likewise, we can also open files with '''dot doc''' and '''dot docx''' extensions in '''Writer.'''
|-
| | Only Narration
| | Next we will see how to modify a file and save it under the same filename.
|-
| | Select word '''RESUME''' by clicking on the''' '''left''' mouse button '''and then dragging it along the text.
|| So, first let us select the word '''RESUME. '''

To do so click the''' '''left''' mouse button '''and then drag it along the text.

This will select the text and highlight it.
|-
| | Release the left '''mouse button.'''
|| Now release the left '''mouse button.'''

The text should still be highlighted.
|-
| | Point to and click on '''Bold''' icon
|| Now, click on the '''Bold''' icon in the '''Formatting''' '''bar'''.

The text thus becomes '''bold.'''
|-
| | Only Narration
| | Next, let us align the word '''RESUME''' to the centre of the page.
|-
| | Only Narration
| | If you have resized your '''LibreOffice''' window, some of the '''icons '''may not be visible.
|-
||

Click on Double arrow icon
| | In that case, click on the double arrow icon at the end of the '''toolbars '''to see the hidden '''icons.'''
|-
| | Click on Align Centre icon
| | Click on the '''Align Center''' icon in the '''Formatting''' '''bar.'''
|-
| | Point to text
| | We see that the text gets aligned to the center of the page.
|-
| | Only Narration
| | Now, let us increase the''' font size '''of the text.
|-
| | Click on '''Font Size''' down-arrow
| | So, click on the down-arrow in the '''Font Size''' field in the '''Formatting bar.'''
|-
| | Select 14
|| In the drop-down, let us select '''14.'''

The '''font size''' of the text increases to '''14'''.
|-
||

Click '''Font Name '''down-arrow
|| Next, let us change the '''Font''' we are using.

Click on the down-arrow in the '''Font Name''' field in the '''Formatting toolbar.'''
|-
| | Select '''Undotum '''
|| In the drop-down, let us select '''Undotum'''.

The '''font name '''of the text has changed to '''Undotum'''.
|-
| | Press '''Ctrl + S''' keys
|| Let us now save the changes that we have made.

To do so, press '''Ctrl + S''' keys together.
|-
| | Point to the '''Title Toolbar'''
| | The file gets saved with the same filename even after the modification is done.
|-
| | Click on '''File''' >> '''Close'''
|| Let's close the document now.

Click on the '''File''' menu in the '''menu bar '''and then click on the '''Close''' option.
|-
| | Only Narration
|| This brings us to the end of this spoken tutorial.

Let us summarize.
|-
| | Slide: Summary
|| In this tutorial, we learnt:
* About '''LibreOffice Writer'''
* Various '''toolbars'''
* How to open a new and an existing document
* How to save and close a document in '''Writer'''
* How to save as '''MS Word '''document
* How to export as a '''PDF '''document

|-
| | Slide: Assignment
|| As an assignment
* Open a new document in '''Writer'''
* Save it under the name '''practice.odt'''
* Type the text “'''This is my first assignment”'''

* Underline the text.
* Increase the '''Font size''' to 16.
* Save and close the file.

|-
| | Slide: About Spoken Tutorial Project
|
* The video at the following link summarises the Spoken Tutorial project.
* Please download and watch it.

|-
| | Slide: Spoken tutorial workshops
| |
* We conduct workshops using '''spoken''' '''tutorials''' and give certificates.
* For more details, please write to us.

|-
| | Slide: Answers for THIS Spoken Tutorial
|
* Do you have questions in THIS Spoken Tutorial?
* Please visit this site
* Choose the minute and second where you have the question
* Explain your question briefly
* The Spoken Tutorial project team will ensure an answer
* You will have to register on this website to ask questions.

|-
| | Slide: Forum for specific Questions
|
* The Spoken Tutorial forum is for specific questions on this tutorial.
* Please do not post unrelated and general questions on them.
* This will help reduce the clutter.
* With less clutter, we can use these discussions as instructional material.

|-
| | Slide: Acknowledgement
| | The''' Spoken''' '''Tutorial''' project is funded by '''MHRD''', Govt. of India.

|-
| | Slide: Thank you
|| This tutorial was originally contributed by DesiCrew Solutions Pvt. Ltd. in 2011

This is Pratik Kamble along with Spoken Tutorial team from '''IIT Bombay''' signing off.

Thank you for watching.
|-
|}

LibreOffice-Suite-Writer-6.3/C2/Introduction-to-LibreOffice-Writer/English

2020-07-02T10:48:47Z

Pratik kamble:

Title: Introduction to LibreOffice Writer

Author: Pratik Kamble

Novice Reviewer: Nikita and Pooja

Domain Reviewer: Praveen and Nancy

Keywords: LibreOffice Writer, word processor, Toolbars, '''Title''' '''bar''', '''Menu bar''', '''Standard toolbar, Formatting bar, '''Save, Export, MS Word, PDF, File type, Font Name, Font Size, Bold and Align

{| border=1
|-
| | '''Visual Cue'''
| | '''Narration '''
|-
| | Slide : Title
| | Welcome to the '''spoken tutorial''' on '''Introduction to LibreOffice Writer.'''
|-
| | Slide : Learning Objectives
|| In this tutorial, we will learn:
* About '''LibreOffice Writer'''
* Various '''toolbars '''in '''Writer'''
* How to open a new and existing document
* How to save''' '''and close a document in '''Writer'''
* How to save as '''MS Word '''document
* How to export as a '''PDF '''document

|-
| | Slide : What is LibreOffice Writer ?
||
* '''LibreOffice Writer''' is the '''word processor''' component of the '''LibreOffice Suite'''.
* It is the equivalent of '''Microsoft Word''' in '''Microsoft Office Suite'''.
* It's free and open source software.
* It can be shared, modified and distributed without any restrictions.

|-
| | Slide: OS and versions
|| '''LibreOffice Writer''' can run on any of the following operating systems:

* '''Microsoft Windows 8''' or higher versions
* '''GNU/Linux OS '''and
* '''Mac OSX'''

|-
| | Slide: System Requirements
|| This tutorial is recorded using
* '''Ubuntu Linux OS''' version 18.04 and
* '''LibreOffice Suite '''version 6.3.5

|-
| | Slide: LibreOffice installation
||
* By default, the latest '''Ubuntu Linux OS''' has '''LibreOffice Suite''' pre-installed in it
* To install a specific version, refer to the '''LibreOffice Installation''' series on this website.

|-
| | Only Narration
| | Let us learn how to open '''LibreOffice''' '''Writer.'''
|-
| | Click on '''Show Applications '''->search bar type “Writer”->click on '''LibreOffice Writer''' icon
|| In '''Ubuntu Linux OS''', click on the '''Show applications''' icon located at the bottom left corner.

In the '''search bar''' type '''Writer'''.

From the displayed list, click on the '''Libreoffice Writer''' icon.
|-
| | Click on “Start menu”->search bar type “Writer”->click on '''LibreOffice Writer''' icon
|| In '''Windows OS''', click on the '''Start Menu''' icon located at the bottom left corner.

In the '''search bar,''' type '''Writer'''.

From the displayed list, click on the '''Libreoffice Writer''' icon.
|-
| | Only Narration:
|| This will open an empty document in the main '''Writer '''window.

Now let us learn about the main components of the '''Writer '''window.
|-
| | Highlight with a red box - '''Title''' '''bar''', '''Menu bar''', '''Standard toolbar '''and''' Formatting bar.'''
|| The '''Writer''' window has various '''toolbars '''at the top.

These are '''Title''' '''bar''', '''Menu bar''', '''Standard toolbar '''and''' Formatting bar.'''
|-
| | Highlight with a red box - '''Search bear, Drawing toolbar, Status bar.'''
| | At the bottom, we see the''' Search bar, Drawing toolbar '''and''' Status bar.'''
|-
|| Click '''View''' '''menu''' >> '''Toolbars'''

Check '''Drawing''' '''toolbar''' and '''Find'''

|| We can enable or disable these '''toolbars''' from the interface.

To do so, go to the '''View''' '''menu''' in the main''' menu bar''' and select '''Toolbars'''.

From the sub menu, check or uncheck the '''toolbars''' based on your preference.
|-
| | Highlight with a red box - vertical scroll bar and sidebar
| | At the right side, we see the vertical '''scroll bar '''and '''sidebar.'''
|-
| | Only Narration
|| All of these have the most commonly used options.

We will learn about these as the series progresses.
|-
| | Only Narration
| | Now let us learn how to open a new document in '''Writer.'''
|-
| | Point to on '''New''' icon
| | We can open a new document by clicking on the '''New''' icon in the '''Standard''' '''toolbar.'''
|-
|| Click '''File menu'''

Click '''New''' >> '''Text Document'''

|| Alternatively go to the '''File''' '''menu''' in the '''menu bar.'''

Then click on the sub menu '''New''' and select the option '''Text Document.'''
|-
| | Point to '''Title bar - Untitled 2'''
|| A new '''Writer''' document named '''Untitled 2 '''opens up.

Close the newly opened document''' '''named''' Untitled 2 '''by clicking on the '''X '''icon at the top right'''.'''
|-
| | Only Narration
| | Now, we’ll type some text in the''' Untitled 1''' document.
|-
| | Type “'''RESUME'''”
| | Type the word “'''RESUME'''”.
|-
| | Only Narration
| | Once done typing our document, we should save it for future use.
|-
| | Click on '''File'''
| | To save the file, click on the '''Save '''icon in the '''Standard toolbar'''.
|-
|| Dialog box

Point to '''Name'''.

Type “'''Resume'''” in the '''Name''' field.
|| A''' '''dialog box appears on the screen.

It prompts us to enter the name of our file in the '''Name''' field.

I will type the name of the file as''' “Resume”.'''
|-
| | Select '''Desktop''' location to save the file.
| | On the left side, I’ll select '''Desktop''' as the location to save my file.
|-
| | Click '''File type''' drop-down
|| Notice, we have a '''File type''' drop-down at the bottom right corner.

Click on this drop-down.
|-
||

Point to “'''ODF Text Document (.odt)'''”

|| It shows a list of '''file types''' or '''file extensions''' in which we can save our file.

The default '''file type''' in '''LibreOffice Writer''' is '''ODF''' '''Text Document (.odt)'''.

'''ODF''' stands for '''Open Document Format''' which is an open standard.
|-
| | Only narration
| | It is also accepted by the Government of India policy on '''open standards in e-Governance'''.
|-
| | Click on “'''ODF Text Document (.odt)”'''.
|| I will click on the '''ODF Text Document''' option to save my file.

Do likewise on your machine.
|-
|| Click on '''Save''' button.

| | Click on the '''Save''' button at the top right corner of the dialog box.
|-
| | '''Writer '''window
| | We will be redirected back to the '''Writer''' window.
|-
| | Point to “'''Resume.odt'''” in the '''title bar'''.
|| Observe the change in the '''title bar '''now.

It has changed to '''Resume.odt'''
|-
|| Point to '''“Word 97-2003 (.doc)” '''

Point to '''“Word 2007-365 (.docx)”'''
|| Besides saving in '''dot odt''' format, we can also save our file in '''dot doc''' and in '''dot docx''' formats.

Files with these formats can be opened later in '''MS Word '''application.

|-
| | Only Narration
| | Now, we will save the same file as a '''docx '''file.

|-
| | Click on '''File >> Save as'''
| | Go to '''File menu '''in the '''menu bar''' and then click on the '''Save As''' option.
|-
|| '''Save As''' dialog box >> click on '''File type '''drop-down

Scroll down and select '''Word 2007 - 365(.docx)'''
|| In the '''Save As''' dialog box, click on the '''File type '''drop-down at the bottom right corner.

Scroll down and select''' Word 2007 - 365 (.docx)'''
|-
| | Choose '''Desktop''' as location >> Click on '''Save '''button.
|| Again choose the same file location to save.

Then click on the '''Save''' button at the top right corner of the dialog box.
|-
|| '''Confirm File Format '''dialog box opens

Put a check on''' “Ask when not saving in ODF format”'''.
|| If we save the file in any other file format, '''Confirm File Format '''dialog box opens up.

Put a check on “'''Ask when not saving in ODF or default forma'''t” option.
|-
| | Click on''' Use Word 2007 - 365 Format'''
| | Then click on the '''Use Word 2007 - 365 Format''' button.
|-
| | '''Writer '''window
| | We will be redirected back to the '''Writer''' window.
|-
| | Point to “'''Resume.odt'''” in the '''title bar'''.
|| Observe the change in the '''title bar '''now.

It has changed to '''Resume.docx'''
|-
||

Point to '''“Export Directly as PDF”'''.
|| The file can also be exported to '''PDF''' format.

Click on the '''Export Directly as PDF''' icon in the '''Standard toolbar'''.
|-
|| Highlight '''Filename''' field, highlight left panel locations, highlight '''Save''' button.

'''DO NOT CLICK Save button.'''
| | Type a '''filename''', choose a location and click on the '''Save '''button at the top right.
|-
| | Click on '''Cancel '''button
| | I will click on '''Cancel''' and show another way of saving the document in '''PDF''' format.
|-
| | Click on '''File menu>>Export As>>Export as PDF'''
|| Click on the '''File''' '''menu''' in the '''menu bar '''and select '''Export As''' sub-menu option.

Then click on the '''Export as PDF''' option.

|-
||Point to''' PDF Option '''dialog box

Click on '''Export''' button
| '''PDF options''' dialog box opens up.

In this dialog box, we will see various settings to customize the '''PDF''' option.

Keep the default settings as it is and click on the '''Export''' button at the bottom.
|-
| | Click on '''Desktop '''location >> click on '''Save''' button
|| Type a '''filename''', choose a location and click on the '''Save '''button at the top right.

A '''pdf '''file will be created in the selected location.
|-
| | Click on File >> Save As>> File type drop-down >> Point to '''Rich Text (.rtf)'''
| | Another popular extension which opens in most applications, is '''dot rtf,''' the '''Rich Text Format.'''
|-
| | Point to '''“HTML”'''
|| We can save the file in '''dot html''' format also, which is a '''web page format'''.

This is done in the same way as explained above.
|-
| | File type drop-down >> Scroll down and select “'''HTML Document writer .html'''
|| In the '''File type '''drop-down, scroll down and select''' HTML Document (Writer)(.html).'''

This option gives the '''dot html''' extension to the document.
|-
| | Choose '''Desktop''' as location >> Click on '''Save '''button.
|| Again choose the same file location to save.

Now click on the '''Save''' button at the top right corner of the dialog box.
|-
|| '''Confirm File Format '''dialog box opens

Put a check on''' “Ask when not saving in ODF format”'''.
|| The '''Confirm File Format '''dialog box opens.

Put a check on “'''Ask when not saving in ODF or default forma'''t” option.
|-
| | Click on “'''Use HTML Document (Writer) Format'''”.
| | Then click on the '''Use HTML Document (Writer) Format''' button.
|-
| | Point to '''title bar.'''
|| We see that the file gets saved with '''dot html''' extension.

This format is used when we want to show our '''document''' as a''' web page.'''

It can be opened in any '''web browser'''.
|-
| | Click on '''File'''>>'''Close'''
| | Let's close this document by clicking on the '''File menu''' in the '''menu bar '''and then '''Close.'''
|-
| | Only Narration
|| Next, we will learn how to open an existing document in '''LibreOffice Writer.'''

Let's open the document '''Resume.odt'''
|-
|| Click on '''Open File'''

File browser dialog box opens >> browse location
|| Click on the '''Open File''' '''menu''' on the left of the '''LibreOffice''' interface.

The file browser dialog box opens up.

Go to the location where our file is saved.

|-
|Choose '''Resume.odt''' '''

'''click on the '''Open''' button
|| Now in the list of filenames that appears, choose '''Resume.odt'''

Then click on the '''Open''' button at the top right corner.

The file '''Resume.odt''' opens in the '''Writer '''window.
|-
| | Only Narration
| | Likewise, we can also open files with '''dot doc''' and '''dot docx''' extensions in '''Writer.'''
|-
| | Only Narration
| | Next we will see how to modify a file and save it under the same filename.
|-
| | Select word '''RESUME''' by clicking on the''' '''left''' mouse button '''and then dragging it along the text.
|| So, first let us select the word '''RESUME. '''

To do so click the''' '''left''' mouse button '''and then drag it along the text.

This will select the text and highlight it.
|-
| | Release the left '''mouse button.'''
|| Now release the left '''mouse button.'''

The text should still be highlighted.
|-
| | Point to and click on '''Bold''' icon
|| Now, click on the '''Bold''' icon in the '''Formatting''' '''bar'''.

The text thus becomes '''bold.'''
|-
| | Only Narration
| | Next, let us align the word '''RESUME''' to the centre of the page.
|-
| | Only Narration
| | If you have resized your '''LibreOffice''' window, some of the '''icons '''may not be visible.
|-
||

Click on Double arrow icon
| | In that case, click on the double arrow icon at the end of the '''toolbars '''to see the hidden '''icons.'''
|-
| | Click on Align Centre icon
| | Click on the '''Align Center''' icon in the '''Formatting''' '''bar.'''
|-
| | Point to text
| | We see that the text gets aligned to the center of the page.
|-
| | Only Narration
| | Now, let us increase the''' font size '''of the text.
|-
| | Click on '''Font Size''' down-arrow
| | So, click on the down-arrow in the '''Font Size''' field in the '''Formatting bar.'''
|-
| | Select 14
|| In the drop-down, let us select '''14.'''

The '''font size''' of the text increases to '''14'''.
|-
||

Click '''Font Name '''down-arrow
|| Next, let us change the '''Font''' we are using.

Click on the down-arrow in the '''Font Name''' field in the '''Formatting toolbar.'''
|-
| | Select '''Undotum '''
|| In the drop-down, let us select '''Undotum'''.

The '''font name '''of the text has changed to '''Undotum'''.
|-
| | Press '''Ctrl + S''' keys
|| Let us now save the changes that we have made.

To do so, press '''Ctrl + S''' keys together.
|-
| | Point to the '''Title Toolbar'''
| | The file gets saved with the same filename even after the modification is done.
|-
| | Click on '''File''' >> '''Close'''
|| Let's close the document now.

Click on the '''File''' menu in the '''menu bar '''and then click on the '''Close''' option.
|-
| | Only Narration
|| This brings us to the end of this spoken tutorial.

Let us summarize.
|-
| | Slide: Summary
|| In this tutorial, we learnt:
* About '''LibreOffice Writer'''
* Various '''toolbars'''
* How to open a new and an existing document
* How to save and close a document in '''Writer'''
* How to save as '''MS Word '''document
* How to export as a '''PDF '''document

|-
| | Slide: Assignment
|| As an assignment
* Open a new document in '''Writer'''
* Save it under the name '''practice.odt'''
* Type the text “'''This is my first assignment”'''

* Underline the text.
* Increase the '''Font size''' to 16.
* Save and close the file.

|-
| | Slide: About Spoken Tutorial Project
|
* The video at the following link summarises the Spoken Tutorial project.
* Please download and watch it.

|-
| | Slide: Spoken tutorial workshops
| |
* We conduct workshops using '''spoken''' '''tutorials''' and give certificates.
* For more details, please write to us.

|-
| | Slide: Answers for THIS Spoken Tutorial
|
* Do you have questions in THIS Spoken Tutorial?
* Please visit this site
* Choose the minute and second where you have the question
* Explain your question briefly
* The Spoken Tutorial project team will ensure an answer
* You will have to register on this website to ask questions.

|-
| | Slide: Forum for specific Questions
|
* The Spoken Tutorial forum is for specific questions on this tutorial.
* Please do not post unrelated and general questions on them.
* This will help reduce the clutter.
* With less clutter, we can use these discussions as instructional material.

|-
| | Slide: Acknowledgement
| | The''' Spoken''' '''Tutorial''' project is funded by '''MHRD''', Govt. of India.

|-
| | Slide: Thank you
|| This tutorial was originally contributed by DesiCrew Solutions Pvt. Ltd. in 2011

This is Pratik Kamble along with Spoken Tutorial team from '''IIT Bombay''' signing off.

Thank you for watching.
|-
|}

LibreOffice-Suite-Writer-6.3/C2/Introduction-to-LibreOffice-Writer/English

2020-07-02T10:46:53Z

Pratik kamble: Created page with "Title: Introduction to LibreOffice Writer Author: Pratik Kamble Novice Reviewer: Nikita and Pooja Domain Reviewer: Praveen and Nancy Keywords: LibreOffice Writer, word pro..."

Title: Introduction to LibreOffice Writer

Author: Pratik Kamble

Novice Reviewer: Nikita and Pooja

Domain Reviewer: Praveen and Nancy

Keywords: LibreOffice Writer, word processor, Toolbars, '''Title''' '''bar''', '''Menu bar''', '''Standard toolbar, Formatting bar, '''Save, Export, MS Word, PDF, File type, Font Name, Font Size, Bold and Align

{| border=1
|-
| | '''Visual Cue'''
| | '''Narration '''
|-
| | Slide : Title
| | Welcome to the '''spoken tutorial''' on '''Introduction to LibreOffice Writer.'''
|-
| | Slide : Learning Objectives
|| In this tutorial, we will learn:
* About '''LibreOffice Writer'''
* Various '''toolbars '''in '''Writer'''
* How to open a new and existing document
* How to save''' '''and close a document in '''Writer'''
* How to save as '''MS Word '''document
* How to export as a '''PDF '''document

|-
| | Slide : What is LibreOffice Writer ?
||
* '''LibreOffice Writer''' is the '''word processor''' component of the '''LibreOffice Suite'''.
* It is the equivalent of '''Microsoft Word''' in '''Microsoft Office Suite'''.
* It's free and open source software.
* It can be shared, modified and distributed without any restrictions.

|-
| | Slide: OS and versions
|| '''LibreOffice Writer''' can run on any of the following operating systems:

* '''Microsoft Windows 8''' or higher versions
* '''GNU/Linux OS '''and
* '''Mac OSX'''

|-
| | Slide: System Requirements
|| This tutorial is recorded using
* '''Ubuntu Linux OS''' version 18.04 and
* '''LibreOffice Suite '''version 6.3.5

|-
| | Slide: LibreOffice installation
||
* By default, the latest '''Ubuntu Linux OS''' has '''LibreOffice Suite''' pre-installed in it
* To install a specific version, refer to the '''LibreOffice Installation''' series on this website.

|-
| | Only Narration
| | Let us learn how to open '''LibreOffice''' '''Writer.'''
|-
| | Click on '''Show Applications '''->search bar type “Writer”->click on '''LibreOffice Writer''' icon
|| In '''Ubuntu Linux OS''', click on the '''Show applications''' icon located at the bottom left corner.

In the '''search bar''' type '''Writer'''.

From the displayed list, click on the '''Libreoffice Writer''' icon.
|-
| | Click on “Start menu”->search bar type “Writer”->click on '''LibreOffice Writer''' icon
|| In '''Windows OS''', click on the '''Start Menu''' icon located at the bottom left corner.

In the '''search bar,''' type '''Writer'''.

From the displayed list, click on the '''Libreoffice Writer''' icon.
|-
| | Only Narration:
|| This will open an empty document in the main '''Writer '''window.

Now let us learn about the main components of the '''Writer '''window.
|-
| | Highlight with a red box - '''Title''' '''bar''', '''Menu bar''', '''Standard toolbar '''and''' Formatting bar.'''
|| The '''Writer''' window has various '''toolbars '''at the top.

These are '''Title''' '''bar''', '''Menu bar''', '''Standard toolbar '''and''' Formatting bar.'''
|-
| | Highlight with a red box - '''Search bear, Drawing toolbar, Status bar.'''
| | At the bottom, we see the''' Search bar, Drawing toolbar '''and''' Status bar.'''
|-
|| Click '''View''' '''menu''' >> '''Toolbars'''

Check '''Drawing''' '''toolbar''' and '''Find'''

|| We can enable or disable these '''toolbars''' from the interface.

To do so, go to the '''View''' '''menu''' in the main''' menu bar''' and select '''Toolbars'''.

From the sub menu, check or uncheck the '''toolbars''' based on your preference.
|-
| | Highlight with a red box - vertical scroll bar and sidebar
| | At the right side, we see the vertical '''scroll bar '''and '''sidebar.'''
|-
| | Only Narration
|| All of these have the most commonly used options.

We will learn about these as the series progresses.
|-
| | Only Narration
| | Now let us learn how to open a new document in '''Writer.'''
|-
| | Point to on '''New''' icon
| | We can open a new document by clicking on the '''New''' icon in the '''Standard''' '''toolbar.'''
|-
|| Click '''File menu'''

Click '''New''' >> '''Text Document'''

|| Alternatively go to the '''File''' '''menu''' in the '''menu bar.'''

Then click on the sub menu '''New''' and select the option '''Text Document.'''
|-
| | Point to '''Title bar - Untitled 2'''
|| A new '''Writer''' document named '''Untitled 2 '''opens up.

Close the newly opened document''' '''named''' Untitled 2 '''by clicking on the '''X '''icon at the top right'''.'''
|-
| | Typing text
| | Now, we’ll type some text in the''' Untitled 1''' document.
|-
| | Type “'''RESUME'''”
| | Type the word “'''RESUME'''”.
|-
| | Only Narration
| | Once done typing our document, we should save it for future use.
|-
| | Click on '''File'''
| | To save the file, click on the '''Save '''icon in the '''Standard toolbar'''.
|-
|| Dialog box

Point to '''Name'''.

Type “'''Resume'''” in the '''Name''' field.
|| A''' '''dialog box appears on the screen.

It prompts us to enter the name of our file in the '''Name''' field.

I will type the name of the file as''' “Resume”.'''
|-
| | Select '''Desktop''' location to save the file.
| | On the left side, I’ll select '''Desktop''' as the location to save my file.
|-
| | Click '''File type''' drop-down
|| Notice, we have a '''File type''' drop-down at the bottom right corner.

Click on this drop-down.
|-
||

Point to “'''ODF Text Document (.odt)'''”

|| It shows a list of '''file types''' or '''file extensions''' in which we can save our file.

The default '''file type''' in '''LibreOffice Writer''' is '''ODF''' '''Text Document (.odt)'''.

'''ODF''' stands for '''Open Document Format''' which is an open standard.
|-
| | Only narration
| | It is also accepted by the Government of India policy on '''open standards in e-Governance'''.
|-
| | Click on “'''ODF Text Document (.odt)”'''.
|| I will click on the '''ODF Text Document''' option to save my file.

Do likewise on your machine.
|-
|| Click on '''Save''' button.

| | Click on the '''Save''' button at the top right corner of the dialog box.
|-
| | '''Writer '''window
| | We will be redirected back to the '''Writer''' window.
|-
| | Point to “'''Resume.odt'''” in the '''title bar'''.
|| Observe the change in the '''title bar '''now.

It has changed to '''Resume.odt'''
|-
|| Point to '''“Word 97-2003 (.doc)” '''

Point to '''“Word 2007-365 (.docx)”'''
|| Besides saving in '''dot odt''' format, we can also save our file in '''dot doc''' and in '''dot docx''' formats.

Files with these formats can be opened later in '''MS Word '''application.

|-
| | Only Narration
| | Now, we will save the same file as a '''docx '''file.

|-
| | Click on '''File >> Save as'''
| | Go to '''File menu '''in the '''menu bar''' and then click on the '''Save As''' option.
|-
|| '''Save As''' dialog box >> click on '''File type '''drop-down

Scroll down and select '''Word 2007 - 365(.docx)'''
|| In the '''Save As''' dialog box, click on the '''File type '''drop-down at the bottom right corner.

Scroll down and select''' Word 2007 - 365 (.docx)'''
|-
| | Choose '''Desktop''' as location >> Click on '''Save '''button.
|| Again choose the same file location to save.

Then click on the '''Save''' button at the top right corner of the dialog box.
|-
|| '''Confirm File Format '''dialog box opens

Put a check on''' “Ask when not saving in ODF format”'''.
|| If we save the file in any other file format, '''Confirm File Format '''dialog box opens up.

Put a check on “'''Ask when not saving in ODF or default forma'''t” option.
|-
| | Click on''' Use Word 2007 - 365 Format'''
| | Then click on the '''Use Word 2007 - 365 Format''' button.
|-
| | '''Writer '''window
| | We will be redirected back to the '''Writer''' window.
|-
| | Point to “'''Resume.odt'''” in the '''title bar'''.
|| Observe the change in the '''title bar '''now.

It has changed to '''Resume.docx'''
|-
||

Point to '''“Export Directly as PDF”'''.
|| The file can also be exported to '''PDF''' format.

Click on the '''Export Directly as PDF''' icon in the '''Standard toolbar'''.
|-
|| Highlight '''Filename''' field, highlight left panel locations, highlight '''Save''' button.

'''DO NOT CLICK Save button.'''
| | Type a '''filename''', choose a location and click on the '''Save '''button at the top right.
|-
| | Click on '''Cancel '''button
| | I will click on '''Cancel''' and show another way of saving the document in '''PDF''' format.
|-
| | Click on '''File menu>>Export As>>Export as PDF'''
|| Click on the '''File''' '''menu''' in the '''menu bar '''and select '''Export As''' sub-menu option.

Then click on the '''Export as PDF''' option.

|-
||Point to''' PDF Option '''dialog box

Click on '''Export''' button
| '''PDF options''' dialog box opens up.

In this dialog box, we will see various settings to customize the '''PDF''' option.

Keep the default settings as it is and click on the '''Export''' button at the bottom.
|-
| | Click on '''Desktop '''location >> click on '''Save''' button
|| Type a '''filename''', choose a location and click on the '''Save '''button at the top right.

A '''pdf '''file will be created in the selected location.
|-
| | Click on File >> Save As>> File type drop-down >> Point to '''Rich Text (.rtf)'''
| | Another popular extension which opens in most applications, is '''dot rtf,''' the '''Rich Text Format.'''
|-
| | Point to '''“HTML”'''
|| We can save the file in '''dot html''' format also, which is a '''web page format'''.

This is done in the same way as explained above.
|-
| | File type drop-down >> Scroll down and select “'''HTML Document writer .html'''
|| In the '''File type '''drop-down, scroll down and select''' HTML Document (Writer)(.html).'''

This option gives the '''dot html''' extension to the document.
|-
| | Choose '''Desktop''' as location >> Click on '''Save '''button.
|| Again choose the same file location to save.

Now click on the '''Save''' button at the top right corner of the dialog box.
|-
|| '''Confirm File Format '''dialog box opens

Put a check on''' “Ask when not saving in ODF format”'''.
|| The '''Confirm File Format '''dialog box opens.

Put a check on “'''Ask when not saving in ODF or default forma'''t” option.
|-
| | Click on “'''Use HTML Document (Writer) Format'''”.
| | Then click on the '''Use HTML Document (Writer) Format''' button.
|-
| | Point to '''title bar.'''
|| We see that the file gets saved with '''dot html''' extension.

This format is used when we want to show our '''document''' as a''' web page.'''

It can be opened in any '''web browser'''.
|-
| | Click on '''File'''>>'''Close'''
| | Let's close this document by clicking on the '''File menu''' in the '''menu bar '''and then '''Close.'''
|-
| | Only Narration
|| Next, we will learn how to open an existing document in '''LibreOffice Writer.'''

Let's open the document '''Resume.odt'''
|-
|| Click on '''Open File'''

File browser dialog box opens >> browse location
|| Click on the '''Open File''' '''menu''' on the left of the '''LibreOffice''' interface.

The file browser dialog box opens up.

Go to the location where our file is saved.

|-
|Choose '''Resume.odt''' '''

'''click on the '''Open''' button
|| Now in the list of filenames that appears, choose '''Resume.odt'''

Then click on the '''Open''' button at the top right corner.

The file '''Resume.odt''' opens in the '''Writer '''window.
|-
| | Only Narration
| | Likewise, we can also open files with '''dot doc''' and '''dot docx''' extensions in '''Writer.'''
|-
| | Only Narration
| | Next we will see how to modify a file and save it under the same filename.
|-
| | Select word '''RESUME''' by clicking on the''' '''left''' mouse button '''and then dragging it along the text.
|| So, first let us select the word '''RESUME. '''

To do so click the''' '''left''' mouse button '''and then drag it along the text.

This will select the text and highlight it.
|-
| | Release the left '''mouse button.'''
|| Now release the left '''mouse button.'''

The text should still be highlighted.
|-
| | Point to and click on '''Bold''' icon
|| Now, click on the '''Bold''' icon in the '''Formatting''' '''bar'''.

The text thus becomes '''bold.'''
|-
| | Only Narration
| | Next, let us align the word '''RESUME''' to the centre of the page.
|-
| | Only Narration
| | If you have resized your '''LibreOffice''' window, some of the '''icons '''may not be visible.
|-
||

Click on Double arrow icon
| | In that case, click on the double arrow icon at the end of the '''toolbars '''to see the hidden '''icons.'''
|-
| | Click on Align Centre icon
| | Click on the '''Align Center''' icon in the '''Formatting''' '''bar.'''
|-
| | Point to text
| | We see that the text gets aligned to the center of the page.
|-
| | Only Narration
| | Now, let us increase the''' font size '''of the text.
|-
| | Click on '''Font Size''' down-arrow
| | So, click on the down-arrow in the '''Font Size''' field in the '''Formatting bar.'''
|-
| | Select 14
|| In the drop-down, let us select '''14.'''

The '''font size''' of the text increases to '''14'''.
|-
||

Click '''Font Name '''down-arrow
|| Next, let us change the '''Font''' we are using.

Click on the down-arrow in the '''Font Name''' field in the '''Formatting toolbar.'''
|-
| | Select '''Undotum '''
|| In the drop-down, let us select '''Undotum'''.

The '''font name '''of the text has changed to '''Undotum'''.
|-
| | Press '''Ctrl + S''' keys
|| Let us now save the changes that we have made.

To do so, press '''Ctrl + S''' keys together.
|-
| | Point to the '''Title Toolbar'''
| | The file gets saved with the same filename even after the modification is done.
|-
| | Click on '''File''' >> '''Close'''
|| Let's close the document now.

Click on the '''File''' menu in the '''menu bar '''and then click on the '''Close''' option.
|-
| | Only Narration
|| This brings us to the end of this spoken tutorial.

Let us summarize.
|-
| | Slide: Summary
|| In this tutorial, we learnt:
* About '''LibreOffice Writer'''
* Various '''toolbars'''
* How to open a new and an existing document
* How to save and close a document in '''Writer'''
* How to save as '''MS Word '''document
* How to export as a '''PDF '''document

|-
| | Slide: Assignment
|| As an assignment
* Open a new document in '''Writer'''
* Save it under the name '''practice.odt'''
* Type the text “'''This is my first assignment”'''

* Underline the text.
* Increase the '''Font size''' to 16.
* Save and close the file.

|-
| | Slide: About Spoken Tutorial Project
|
* The video at the following link summarises the Spoken Tutorial project.
* Please download and watch it.

|-
| | Slide: Spoken tutorial workshops
| |
* We conduct workshops using '''spoken''' '''tutorials''' and give certificates.
* For more details, please write to us.

|-
| | Slide: Answers for THIS Spoken Tutorial
|
* Do you have questions in THIS Spoken Tutorial?
* Please visit this site
* Choose the minute and second where you have the question
* Explain your question briefly
* The Spoken Tutorial project team will ensure an answer
* You will have to register on this website to ask questions.

|-
| | Slide: Forum for specific Questions
|
* The Spoken Tutorial forum is for specific questions on this tutorial.
* Please do not post unrelated and general questions on them.
* This will help reduce the clutter.
* With less clutter, we can use these discussions as instructional material.

|-
| | Slide: Acknowledgement
| | The''' Spoken''' '''Tutorial''' project is funded by '''MHRD''', Govt. of India.

|-
| | Slide: Thank you
|| This tutorial was originally contributed by DesiCrew Solutions Pvt. Ltd. in 2011

This is Pratik Kamble along with Spoken Tutorial team from '''IIT Bombay''' signing off.

Thank you for watching.
|-
|}

FrontAccounting-2.4.7/C2/Setup-in-FrontAccounting/English

2020-07-02T09:38:16Z

Pratik kamble: Undo revision 52775 by Pratik kamble (talk)

{| style="border-spacing:0;"
| style="background-color:#cc99cc;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| <center>'''Visual Cue'''</center>
| style="background-color:#cc99cc;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| <center>'''Narration'''</center>

|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| '''Slide 1:'''

'''Title Slide'''
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Welcome to the spoken tutorial on '''Setup in FrontAccounting'''.

|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| '''Slide 2''':

'''Learning Objectives'''
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| In this tutorial, we will learn:

* '''FrontAccounting''' interface
* Various modules in the '''Setup''' tab

Also, we will learn how to:

* Create our own organization or '''Company'''
* Setup '''user accounts'''
* Setup '''access''' permissions and
* Setup display
|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| '''Slide 3''':

'''System Requirement'''
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| To record this tutorial, I am using

* '''Ubuntu Linux '''OS version 16.04
* '''FrontAccounting''' version 2.4.7

|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| '''Slide 4''':

'''Pre -requisites'''
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| To follow this tutorial you should have

* Knowledge of higher secondary commerce and
* Knowledge of Accounting.
|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| '''Slide 5:'''

'''Start XAMPP service'''
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Start the '''XAMPP services''' before you begin working on '''FrontAccounting''' interface.
|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| '''Narration'''
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Let us open the '''FrontAccounting '''interface.

|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Click on '''browser''' >>'''localhost/account''' >> Press Enter
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Open the browser and type '''localhost slash account''' and press '''Enter.'''

|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Enter '''Username and Password''' >>

Click on '''login'''
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| The '''login '''page appears.

Recall that during installation, we had created the '''admin''' user.

Type the '''username''' as '''admin '''and password as '''spoken.'''

Then click on the '''Login '''button.

|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"|
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| The '''FrontAccounting''' window opens.

|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| '''Point to''' options of '''FrontAccounting '''Interface
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Standard modules have been provided in '''FrontAccounting.'''

|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Point to the '''options''' as per the narration
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| We will learn about

* '''Sales'''
* '''Purchases'''
* '''Items and Inventory'''
* '''Banking and General Ledger '''and
* '''Setup '''

modules in the upcoming tutorials.

|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| '''Narration'''
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Let us start with the '''Setup '''tab in '''FrontAccounting'''.

|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Point to '''Setup tab >> click on it'''
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Click on the '''Setup''' tab.

This module is used for '''Company Setting.'''

|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Click >> '''Company Setup link'''
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Let us create a new organisation or '''Company''' by clicking on the '''Company Setup '''link.

|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Point to >>'''Name '''field

Point '''>>'ST COMPANY PVT. LTD'>>'''
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| In the '''Name '''field''',''' by default, we can see the name of the '''company - 'ST Company Pvt Ltd'.'''

This is because we had given this name during installation.

However, you can change the name based on how you want it to appear in the reports.

I will keep the same name.

Scroll down.

|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Click on '''Home currency''' field

| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| In the '''Home currency '''field, click on the dropdown menu.

A list of options will appear.

|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Continue on '''Home currency''' field

| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| But '''Indian Rupees''' is not available in the list.

Since our company is in '''India''', we will setup the '''home currency '''to '''Indian Rupees'''.

|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"|
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Let us learn how to add a new '''currency''' to the list here.

|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| '''Click on the Banking and General Ledger'''
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Click on the '''Banking and General Ledger '''tab in the top menu.

|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| In the '''Maintenance''' panel, click on '''Currencies.'''
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| In the '''Maintenance''' panel, click on '''Currencies '''link.

A new window appears.

|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Type ''''INR'''' in the '''Currency Abbreviation 'Rs' in the Currency Symbol field.'''

'''Currency Name field type 'Indian Rupees'. '''

| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Type ''''INR'''' in the '''Currency Abbreviation '''field and ''''Rs'''' in the '''Currency Symbol''' field.

In the '''Currency Name '''field, type ''''Indian Rupees''''.

In the '''Hundredths Name''' field, type ‘'''Paise’''' and in the '''Country''' field type ''''India''''.

|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| '''click on 'Add new' button. '''
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Now click on ''''Add new'''' button at the bottom of the window.

We can see a success message- ''''New currency has been added'.'''

|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| click on S'''etup >> Company setup'''
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Let us go back to the''' Company setup '''page.

For this, click on the '''Setup '''tab in the top menu and then on '''Company Setup''' link.

|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Click>> '''Address''' field

A-123, Highway Industrial Estate,

Andheri, Link Road, Sakinaka, Andheri(E) Mumbai - 400072

Click>> '''Domicile '''field >> India

Click>> '''Phone no '''field >>

022 25764279

Click>> '''E- mail Address '''field>>

[mailto:accounting@spoken-tutorial.com accounting@spoken-tutorial.com]

Type

'''37AAAPP2678Q1ZP''' in the Company GSTNo
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Next, type the

* '''Company'''’s address,
* Domicile
* Phone no,
* Email address and
* '''Company GST''' number

in the respective fields as shown here.

|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Click on the '''Home Currency and select Indian Rupees'''
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Now, click on the '''Home Currency '''drop-down box.

Select ' '''Indian Rupees''''.

|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| '''Narration'''

Point to the fiscal year
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Next we will learn about '''fiscal year'''.

By default the previous financial year, i,e 1st January to 31st December 2018 is shown as closed.

At the time of recording this tutorial, the date is as shown on the screen.

It may differ when you are practicing.
|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"|Text on screen for date format
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Note that the date format is in '''MMDDYYYY'''.

|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| '''Slide 6:'''

'''What is Fiscal year?'''
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| What is '''Fiscal year?'''
* It is a period that a '''Company''' uses for accounting purposes and preparing financial statements.

* It varies across countries.

|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| '''Slide 7a:'''

'''Fiscal Year setup'''
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| '''Fiscal Year setup'''
* When a new '''Company''' is created in '''FrontAccounting''', the '''Fiscal Year '''has to be set up correctly.

* By default, '''FrontAccounting '''software shows the '''fiscal year''' from '''January to December '''

|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| '''Slide 7b:'''

'''Fiscal Year setup'''
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"|
* This is not suitable for '''Companies''' and organisations in India.
* We have to set up the''' fiscal year''' from 1st April to 31st March for that financial year.
* This is as per '''Indian Accounting Standards'''.

|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"|
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Let us switch back to the '''FrontAccounting''' interface.

|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Click >> '''Update''' button>>
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Scroll down and click on the '''Update''' button to save the entries.

|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Point to the message
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| We can see a message- '''Company setup has been updated.'''

|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Come back to '''Frontaccounting'''
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Now, we will change the '''Fiscal Year '''to the current '''Financial Year.'''

|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Point to '''Setup icon'''
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Click on the '''Setup '''tab of '''FrontAccounting.'''

|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Point >> '''Fiscal Years icon'''
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Click on the '''Fiscal Years''' link.
|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Click>>'''Fiscal Year icon'''
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| We can see that, by default the '''Fiscal Year '''begins from '''01 January 2018 '''to '''31 December 2018.'''

|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| narration
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| So first, we will create a dummy period for 3 months from '''01 January 2019 '''to '''31 March 2019'''.

|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| '''Slide 8:'''

'''Why dummy period?'''

* the '''Fiscal year''' ie.1st January to 31st December
* and the '''Financial year''' which is from 1st April to 31st March

| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| This is because we have to fill the gap between

* the '''Fiscal year''' ie.1st January to 31st December
* and the '''Financial year''' which is from 1st April to 31st March

|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| '''Slide 9: Important Note'''

Show the image Sample_Fiscalyear.png (shared in the drive)
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| You may be in a different financial year when you are practising this tutorial.

In that case, you have to set up the '''fiscal year''' for all the previous years upto the current financial year.

A sample is shown here for your understanding.

|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Click >> '''Calendar''' icon to select the '''date'''
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| First, select the 3 months dummy period from '''01 January 2019 '''to '''31 March 2019'''.

Now, click on the '''Add New '''button.

|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Point to the new row of '''dummy period'''
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| We can see the '''dummy period''' is created.

A message appears - “'''New Fiscal year has been added”'''.

|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Type '''1 April 2016 to 31 March 2017.'''

Click on the '''Add new''' button
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Then, we can see the current '''financial year''' is from '''1 April 2019 to 31 March 2020.'''

Keep the '''“Is closed” '''option to '''“No”''' as we will be using the current financial year for accounting purposes.

Again, click on the '''Add new '''button.

|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Point to >> '''Financial Year field'''>>
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Here, you can see the '''Financial Year''' has been created.

|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Point to first row

Point to second row

Click on '''Edit icon''', in the '''Is Closed '''drop down menu, select '''Yes.'''
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| We can see the '''fiscal year''' from 1st January 2018 to 31st December 2018 as closed.

We have created the dummy period from 1st January 2019 to 31st March 2019.

We will change the '''Is Closed''' option to '''Yes.'''

Click on '''Edit icon.'''

In the '''Is Closed '''drop down menu, select '''Yes.'''

Repeat the same steps to close all the previous financial years if they are not required.

|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Click '''Update''' button.

| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Click on '''Update''' button.

A message appears - “'''Selected fiscal year has been updated”'''

Likewise you can use the '''Edit''' button to make changes.

|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Point to X sign
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| The''' cross (X) sign''' is for deleting the year.

Right now, we will not delete any rows.

|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| '''narration'''
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Now, we need to update these changes in the '''Company setup'''.

|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Click '''Setup''' tab >>'''Company setup icon'''
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Click on the '''Setup '''tab.

Then click on the '''Company Setup '''link.

|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Click '''Fiscal year''' Drop down box >> Current Financial year.
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| In the '''Fiscal year''' field, click on the drop-down menu.

Select the '''current Financial Year as 1st April 2019 '''to '''31st March 2020 '''which is shown as''' active.'''

|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Point to Login timeout
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Scroll down and go to '''Login Timeout''' option.

We will increase to 6 lakh seconds so that frequent '''logout''' or '''timeout''' can be avoided.

|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Click '''>> Update button'''

'''Highlight '''the message.
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Click on the '''Update''' button.

|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"|
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Next we will setup '''User Accounts.'''

|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Point to '''Setup icon'''
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Again click on the '''Setup '''tab.

|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Click>> '''User Accounts Setup>>''' icon
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Click on the '''User Accounts Setup '''link.

|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Point to the '''User login field'''
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| We can see the '''admin user login''' information such as

* '''Full Name '''
* '''Email'''
* '''Access Level, etc.'''

Recall this information was entered during the installation. Let us create a new '''user login.'''

|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Point to the details
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| I have typed the new user details as shown here.

Likewise, enter your new user details.

|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Point >> '''Access Level>>Sub Admin'''
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| In '''Access Level field''', click on the drop-down menu and select '''Sub Admin.'''

|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Point>>'''language'''>>
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| In the '''Language field''', by default, the drop-down menu option is '''English.'''

|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Point to >> '''User's POS>>'''

Point to '''Default'''
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Here, '''POS''' means '''Point of Sale'''.

We will keep the '''Default''' option.

|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Point to >>'''Printing option'''>>
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| In '''Printing option '''drop-down menu, keep the default option '''Browser printing support.'''

|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Point to >>'''Use popup window for reports'''>>
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Next, by default, the checkbox is checked for '''popup''' window for the '''reports '''option.

|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Click on '''Add new''' button
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Click on the '''Add new''' button.

We can see the message- ‘'''A new user has been added’.'''

|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Point to the '''new user''' below the '''admin'''.
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| We can also see that the new '''user''' is added in the panel below the '''admin.'''

|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Point to '''Setup icon'''
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Again, click on the '''Setup '''tab.

|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Click>> '''Access setup icon'''>>
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Next, let us see '''Access setup'''.

|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Click>>'''Role'''>> drop down menu
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Click on the '''Role''' drop-down menu and select '''Sub Admin.'''

|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Point to the >> '''Access level field>> sub-admin'''

Scroll down to show the access permission
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| We can see the default '''access''' given for a '''Sub Admin '''to use.

Scroll down.

We can see the permissions available for the '''Sub Admin.'''

|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Point to available '''field'''
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| You can also check or uncheck the boxes as required for the '''Sub Admin''' to use.

|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Point to >> '''Save Role''' button>>
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Then click on '''Save Role''' button.

A message appears as “'''Security role has been updated”.'''

Likewise, you can create several '''users''' as per your requirement and give the required permissions.

|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Point to '''Setup icon'''
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Again, click on the '''Setup '''tab and then on '''Display Setup '''link.

|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Click >>'''Display Setup '''>> icon
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| '''Display Setup''' is used to change the

* '''Decimal Places''',
* '''Date format and Separators '''
* and other '''parameters.'''

|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Point >>'''Decimal Places'''>>
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| We can see the number of '''Decimal Places''' for

* '''Prices/amounts'''
* '''Quantities'''
* '''Exchange rate and '''
* '''Percentages'''

|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Point>> '''Date Format and Separators'''>>
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| We can change the '''Date format and Separators''' by selecting the drop-down menu.

We will change the '''Date format''' to '''DDMMYYYY'''.

|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Point >>'''Miscellaneous '''>>
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| We can see various '''Miscellaneous Settings''' also.

|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Point to >> '''Update button'''>>
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Click on the '''Update''' button to save the changes.

We can see a message “'''Display settings have been updated”.'''

|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Point to the new date format
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Now we will check the '''fiscal year''' date format.

Go to the'''Setup tab'''.

Under '''Company Setup''' panel, click on '''Fiscal Years '''link.

We can see the '''date format''' has been changed to '''DDMMYYYY''' format.

Recall, initially when we added the '''fiscal year''' it was '''MMDDYYYY''' format.

|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"|
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| This brings us to the end of this tutorial. Let us summarize.

|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| '''Slide 10:'''

'''Summary'''
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| In this tutorial, we learnt about

* '''FrontAccounting''' interface and
* Various modules in the '''Setup''' tab

Also, we have learnt how to:

* Create our own organisation or '''Company'''
* Setup '''user accounts'''
* Setup '''access''' permissions and
* Setup display
|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| '''Slide 11:'''

'''Assignment'''
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| As an assignment,

* Add a new '''user''' using '''User Accounts Setup'''
* Give '''Access Level''' as an '''Accountant'''
|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| '''Slide 12:'''

'''Acknowledgement'''
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"|
* The video at the following link summarises the Spoken Tutorial project.
* Please download and watch it
|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Slide 13:

About workshops
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| The''' Spoken Tutorial Project''' Team conducts workshops and gives certificates.

For more details, please write to us.

|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Slide 14:

Forum for specific questions:
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.079cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Please post your timed queries in this forum.

|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| '''Slide 15:'''

Acknowledgement
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| Spoken Tutorial project is funded by NMEICT, MHRD, Government of India.

More information on this mission is available at this link.

|-
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"|
| style="background-color:#ffffff;border:1pt solid #000001;padding-top:0cm;padding-bottom:0cm;padding-left:0.206cm;padding-right:0.191cm;"| The script and video has been contributed by Spoken Tutorial team. This is Pratik kamble signing off. Thanks for joining.

|}

FrontAccounting-2.4.7/C2/Setup-in-FrontAccounting/English

2020-07-02T09:36:50Z

Pratik kamble: click

Title: Introduction to LibreOffice Writer

Author: Pratik Kamble

Novice Reviewer: Nikita and Pooja

Domain Reviewer: Praveen and Nancy

Keywords: LibreOffice Writer, word processor, Toolbars, '''Title''' '''bar''', '''Menu bar''', '''Standard toolbar, Formatting bar, '''Save, Export, MS Word, PDF, File type, Font Name, Font Size, Bold and Align

{| border=1
|-
| | '''Visual Cue'''
| | '''Narration '''
|-
| | Slide : Title
| | Welcome to the '''spoken tutorial''' on '''Introduction to LibreOffice Writer.'''
|-
| | Slide : Learning Objectives
|| In this tutorial, we will learn:* About '''LibreOffice Writer'''
* Various '''toolbars '''in '''Writer'''
* How to open a new and existing document
* How to save''' '''and close a document in '''Writer'''
* How to save as '''MS Word '''document
* How to export as a '''PDF '''document

|-
| | Slide : What is LibreOffice Writer ?
||
* '''LibreOffice Writer''' is the '''word processor''' component of the '''LibreOffice Suite'''.
* It is the equivalent of '''Microsoft Word''' in '''Microsoft Office Suite'''.
* It's free and open source software.
* It can be shared, modified and distributed without any restrictions.

|-
| | Slide: OS and versions
|| '''LibreOffice Writer''' can run on any of the following operating systems:

* '''Microsoft Windows 8''' or higher versions
* '''GNU/Linux OS '''and
* '''Mac OSX'''

|-
| | '''Slide: '''System Requirements
|| This tutorial is recorded using
* '''Ubuntu Linux OS''' version 18.04 and
* '''LibreOffice Suite '''version 6.3.5

|-
| | Slide: LibreOffice installation
|| By default, the latest '''Ubuntu Linux OS''' has '''LibreOffice Suite''' pre-installed in it
* To install a specific version, refer to the '''LibreOffice Installation''' series on this website.

|-
| | Narration only
| | Let us learn how to open '''LibreOffice''' '''Writer.'''
|-
| | Click on '''Show Applications '''->search bar type “Writer”->click on '''LibreOffice Writer''' icon
|| In '''Ubuntu Linux OS''', click on the '''Show applications''' icon located at the bottom left corner.

In the '''search bar''' type '''Writer'''.

From the displayed list, click on the '''Libreoffice Writer''' icon.
|-
| | Click on “Start menu”->search bar type “Writer”->click on '''LibreOffice Writer''' icon
|| In '''Windows OS''', click on the '''Start Menu''' icon located at the bottom left corner.

In the '''search bar,''' type '''Writer'''.

From the displayed list, click on the '''Libreoffice Writer''' icon.
|-
| | Only Narration:
|| This will open an empty document in the main '''Writer '''window.

Now let us learn about the main components of the '''Writer '''window.
|-
| | Highlight with a red box - '''Title''' '''bar''', '''Menu bar''', '''Standard toolbar '''and''' Formatting bar.'''
|| The '''Writer''' window has various '''toolbars '''at the top.

These are '''Title''' '''bar''', '''Menu bar''', '''Standard toolbar '''and''' Formatting bar.'''
|-
| | Highlight with a red box - '''Search bear, Drawing toolbar, Status bar.'''
| | At the bottom, we see the''' Search bar, Drawing toolbar '''and''' Status bar.'''
|-
||

Click '''View''' '''menu''' >> '''Toolbars'''

Check '''Drawing''' '''toolbar''' and '''Find'''
|| We can enable or disable these '''toolbars''' from the interface.

To do so, go to the '''View''' '''menu''' in the main''' menu bar''' and select '''Toolbars'''.

From the sub menu, check or uncheck the '''toolbars''' based on your preference.
|-
| | Highlight with a red box - vertical scroll bar and sidebar
| | At the right side, we see the vertical '''scroll bar '''and '''sidebar.'''
|-
| | Only Narration
|| All of these have the most commonly used options.

We will learn about these as the series progresses.
|-
| | Only Narration
| | Now let us learn how to open a new document in '''Writer.'''
|-
| | Point to on '''New''' icon
| | We can open a new document by clicking on the '''New''' icon in the '''Standard''' '''toolbar.'''
|-
|| Click '''File menu'''

Click '''New''' >> '''Text Document'''

|| Alternatively go to the '''File''' '''menu''' in the '''menu bar.'''

Then click on the sub menu '''New''' and select the option '''Text Document.'''
|-
| | Point to '''Title bar - Untitled 2'''
|| A new '''Writer''' document named '''Untitled 2 '''opens up.

Close the newly opened document''' '''named''' Untitled 2 '''by clicking on the '''X '''icon at the top right'''.'''
|-
| | Typing text
| | Now, we’ll type some text in the''' Untitled 1''' document.
|-
| | Type “'''RESUME'''”
| | Type the word “'''RESUME'''”.
|-
| | Only Narration
| | Once done typing our document, we should save it for future use.
|-
| | Click on '''File'''
| | To save the file, click on the '''Save '''icon in the '''Standard toolbar'''.
|-
|| Dialog box

Point to '''Name'''.

Type “'''Resume'''” in the '''Name''' field.
|| A''' '''dialog box appears on the screen.

It prompts us to enter the name of our file in the '''Name''' field.

I will type the name of the file as''' “Resume”.'''
|-
| | Select '''Desktop''' location to save the file.
| | On the left side, I’ll select '''Desktop''' as the location to save my file.
|-
| | Click '''File type''' drop-down
|| Notice, we have a '''File type''' drop-down at the bottom right corner.

Click on this drop-down.
|-
||

Point to “'''ODF Text Document (.odt)'''”

|| It shows a list of '''file types''' or '''file extensions''' in which we can save our file.

The default '''file type''' in '''LibreOffice Writer''' is '''ODF''' '''Text Document (.odt)'''.

'''ODF''' stands for '''Open Document Format''' which is an open standard.
|-
| | Only narration
| | It is also accepted by the Government of India policy on '''open standards in e-Governance'''.
|-
| | Click on “'''ODF Text Document (.odt)”'''.
|| I will click on the '''ODF Text Document''' option to save my file.

Do likewise on your machine.
|-
|| Click on '''Save''' button.

| | Click on the '''Save''' button at the top right corner of the dialog box.
|-
| | '''Writer '''window
| | We will be redirected back to the '''Writer''' window.
|-
| | Point to “'''Resume.odt'''” in the '''title bar'''.
|| Observe the change in the '''title bar '''now.

It has changed to '''Resume.odt'''
|-
|| Point to '''“Word 97-2003 (.doc)” '''

Point to '''“Word 2007-365 (.docx)”'''
|| Besides saving in '''dot odt''' format, we can also save our file in '''dot doc''' and in '''dot docx''' formats.

Files with these formats can be opened later in '''MS Word '''application.
|-
| |
| | Now, we will save the same file as a '''docx '''file.
|-
| | Click on '''File >> Save as'''
| | Go to '''File menu '''in the '''menu bar''' and then click on the '''Save As''' option.
|-
|| '''Save As''' dialog box >> click on '''File type '''drop-down

Scroll down and select '''Word 2007 - 365(.docx)'''
|| In the '''Save As''' dialog box, click on the '''File type '''drop-down at the bottom right corner.

Scroll down and select''' Word 2007 - 365 (.docx)'''
|-
| | Choose '''Desktop''' as location >> Click on '''Save '''button.
|| Again choose the same file location to save.

Then click on the '''Save''' button at the top right corner of the dialog box.
|-
|| '''Confirm File Format '''dialog box opens

Put a check on''' “Ask when not saving in ODF format”'''.
|If we save the file in any other file format, '''Confirm File Format '''dialog box opens up.

Put a check on “'''Ask when not saving in ODF or default forma'''t” option.

|-
| | Click on''' Use Word 2007 - 365 Format'''
| | Then click on the '''Use Word 2007 - 365 Format''' button.
|-
| | '''Writer '''window
| | We will be redirected back to the '''Writer''' window.
|-
| | Point to “'''Resume.odt'''” in the '''title bar'''.
|| Observe the change in the '''title bar '''now.

It has changed to '''Resume.docx'''
|-
||

Point to '''“Export Directly as PDF”'''.
|| The file can also be exported to '''PDF''' format.

Click on the '''Export Directly as PDF''' icon in the '''Standard toolbar'''.
|-
|| Highlight '''Filename''' field, highlight left panel locations, highlight '''Save''' button.

'''DO NOT CLICK Save button.'''
| | Type a '''filename''', choose a location and click on the '''Save '''button at the top right.
|-
| | Click on '''Cancel '''button
| | I will click on '''Cancel''' and show another way of saving the document in '''PDF''' format.
|-
| | Click on '''File menu>>Export As>>Export as PDF'''
|| Click on the '''File''' '''menu''' in the '''menu bar '''and select '''Export As''' sub-menu option.

Then click on the '''Export as PDF''' option.
|-
|| Point to''' PDF Option '''dialog box

Click on '''Export''' button
|| '''PDF options''' dialog box opens up.

In this dialog box, we will see various settings to customize the '''PDF''' option.

Keep the default settings as it is and click on the '''Export''' button at the bottom.
|-
| | Click on '''Desktop '''location >> click on '''Save''' button
|| Type a '''filename''', choose a location and click on the '''Save '''button at the top right.

A '''pdf '''file will be created in the selected location.
|-
| | Click on File >> Save As>> File type drop-down >> Point to '''Rich Text (.rtf)'''
| | Another popular extension which opens in most applications, is '''dot rtf,''' the '''Rich Text Format.'''
|-
| | Point to '''“HTML”'''
|| We can save the file in '''dot html''' format also, which is a '''web page format'''.

This is done in the same way as explained above.
|-
| | File type drop-down >> Scroll down and select “'''HTML Document writer .html'''
|| In the '''File type '''drop-down, scroll down and select''' HTML Document (Writer)(.html).'''

This option gives the '''dot html''' extension to the document.
|-
| | Choose '''Desktop''' as location >> Click on '''Save '''button.
|| Again choose the same file location to save.

Now click on the '''Save''' button at the top right corner of the dialog box.
|-
|| '''Confirm File Format '''dialog box opens

Put a check on''' “Ask when not saving in ODF format”'''.
|| The '''Confirm File Format '''dialog box opens.

Put a check on “'''Ask when not saving in ODF or default forma'''t” option.
|-
| | Click on “'''Use HTML Document (Writer) Format'''”.
| | Then click on the '''Use HTML Document (Writer) Format''' button.
|-
| | Point to '''title bar.'''
|| We see that the file gets saved with '''dot html''' extension.

This format is used when we want to show our '''document''' as a''' web page.'''

It can be opened in any '''web browser'''.
|-
| | Click on '''File'''>>'''Close'''
| | Let's close this document by clicking on the '''File menu''' in the '''menu bar '''and then '''Close.'''
|-
| | Only Narration
|| Next, we will learn how to open an existing document in '''LibreOffice Writer.'''

Let's open the document '''Resume.odt'''
|-
|| Click on '''Open File'''

File browser dialog box opens >> browse location
|| Click on the '''Open File''' '''menu''' on the left of the '''LibreOffice''' interface.

The file browser dialog box opens up.

Go to the location where our file is saved.
|-
| | Choose '''Resume.odt''' '''>> '''click on the '''Open''' button
|| Now in the list of filenames that appears, choose '''Resume.odt'''

Then click on the '''Open''' button at the top right corner.

The file '''Resume.odt''' opens in the '''Writer '''window.
|-
| | Only Narration
| | Likewise, we can also open files with '''dot doc''' and '''dot docx''' extensions in '''Writer.'''
|-
| | Only Narration
| | Next we will see how to modify a file and save it under the same filename.
|-
| | Select word '''RESUME''' by clicking on the''' '''left''' mouse button '''and then dragging it along the text.
|| So, first let us select the word '''RESUME. '''

To do so click the''' '''left''' mouse button '''and then drag it along the text.

This will select the text and highlight it.
|-
| | Release the left '''mouse button.'''
|| Now release the left '''mouse button.'''

The text should still be highlighted.
|-
| | Point to and click on '''Bold''' icon
|| Now, click on the '''Bold''' icon in the '''Formatting''' '''bar'''.

The text thus becomes '''bold.'''
|-
| | Only Narration
| | Next, let us align the word '''RESUME''' to the centre of the page.
|-
| | Only Narration
| | If you have resized your '''LibreOffice''' window, some of the '''icons '''may not be visible.
|-
||

Click on Double arrow icon
| | In that case, click on the double arrow icon at the end of the '''toolbars '''to see the hidden '''icons.'''
|-
| | Click on Align Centre icon
| | Click on the '''Align Center''' icon in the '''Formatting''' '''bar.'''
|-
| | Point to text
| | We see that the text gets aligned to the center of the page.
|-
| | Only Narration
| | Now, let us increase the''' font size '''of the text.
|-
| | Click on '''Font Size''' down-arrow
| | So, click on the down-arrow in the '''Font Size''' field in the '''Formatting bar.'''
|-
| | Select 14
|| In the drop-down, let us select '''14.'''

The '''font size''' of the text increases to '''14'''.
|-
||

Click '''Font Name '''down-arrow
|| Next, let us change the '''Font''' we are using.

Click on the down-arrow in the '''Font Name''' field in the '''Formatting toolbar.'''
|-
| | Select '''Undotum '''
|| In the drop-down, let us select '''Undotum'''.

The '''font name '''of the text has changed to '''Undotum'''.
|-
| | Press '''Ctrl + S''' keys
|| Let us now save the changes that we have made.

To do so, press '''Ctrl + S''' keys together.
|-
| | Point to the '''Title Toolba'''r
| | The file gets saved with the same filename even after the modification is done.
|-
| | Click on '''File''' >> '''Close'''
|| Let's close the document now.

Click on the '''File''' menu in the '''menu bar '''and then click on the '''Close''' option.
|-
| | Only Narration
|| This brings us to the end of this spoken tutorial.

Let us summarize.
|-
| | Slide: Summary
|| In this tutorial, we learnt:
* About '''LibreOffice Writer'''
* Various '''toolbars'''
* How to open a new and an existing document
* How to save and close a document in '''Writer'''
* How to save as '''MS Word '''document
* How to export as a '''PDF '''document

|-
| | Slide: Assignment
|| As an assignment
* Open a new document in '''Writer'''
* Save it under the name '''practice.odt'''
* Type the text “'''This is my first assignment”'''

* Underline the text.
* Increase the '''Font size''' to 16.
* Save and close the file.

|-
| | '''Slide: '''About Spoken Tutorial Project
|
* The video at the following link summarises the Spoken Tutorial project.
* Please download and watch it.

|-
| | '''Slide:''' Spoken tutorial workshops
|
* We conduct workshops using '''spoken''' '''tutorials''' and give certificates.
* For more details, please write to us.

|-
| | '''Slide:'''Answers for THIS Spoken Tutorial
|
* Do you have questions in THIS Spoken Tutorial?
* Please visit this site
* Choose the minute and second where you have the question
* Explain your question briefly
* The Spoken Tutorial project team will ensure an answer
* You will have to register on this website to ask questions.

|-
| | '''Slide: '''Forum for specific Questions
|
* The Spoken Tutorial forum is for specific questions on this tutorial.
* Please do not post unrelated and general questions on them.
* This will help reduce the clutter.
* With less clutter, we can use these discussions as instructional material.

|-
| | '''Slide: '''Acknowledgement
| | The''' Spoken''' '''Tutorial''' project is funded by '''MHRD''', Govt. of India.

|-
| | Slide: Thank you
|| This tutorial was originally contributed by DesiCrew Solutions Pvt. Ltd. in 2011

This is Pratik Kamble along with Spoken Tutorial team from '''IIT Bombay''' signing off.

Thank you for watching.
|-
|}

C and Cpp

2020-02-06T10:04:58Z

Pratik kamble:

==Introduction to C==
'''Powerful features''',''' simple syntax''', and''' portability''' make '''C''' a preferred language among programmers for business and industrial applications.'''Portability''' means that '''C''' programs written for a computer with a particular kind of processor, say Intel, can be executed on computers with different processors such as Motorola, Sun Sparc, or IBM with little or no modification.'''C language''' is widely used in the development of operating systems.

An '''Operating System(OS)''' is a software(collection of programs) that controls the various functions of a computer. Also it makes other programs on your computer work.

'''For example''', you cannot work with a word processor program, such as Microsoft Word, if there is no operating system installed on your computer.Windows, Unix, Linux, Solaris, and MacOS are some of the popular operating systems.

'''Dennis M. Ritchie''', a systems engineer at '''Bell Laboratories''', New Jersey developed''' C''' in the early '''1970’s'''although designed for the Unix operating system, it soon proved itself a powerful, general purpose programming language.

'''C++''' is a programming language developed by '''Bjarne Stroustrup''' starting in '''1979''' at '''Bell Labs'''. C++ is a statically typed, free-form, multi-paradigm, compiled, general-purpose, powerful programming language. C++ is an '''object oriented language'''. It supports features like classes and objects, Polymorphism, Encapsulation, Inheritance etc. C++ is also used for hardware design.

The Spoken Tutorial effort for '''C''' and '''C++''' is led by Ashwini Patil from IIT BOMBAY, under the guidance of various Professors from IIT BOMBAY.

Other Contributors : Chaitanya Mokashi, Ritwik Joshi, Dhawal Goyal

'''Learners''': High School and UG/PG CSE/CS/IT students and anyone who wishes to learn basic programming.

__TOC__

==Basic Level==

1) '''First C Program'''

*-Header Files
**<nowiki>example: #include <stdio.h> </nowiki>
*main()
*Curly braces { }
*printf()
*semicolon ;

*Compiling a C program
**example: gcc filename.c -o output parameter
*Executing a C program
**example: ./output parameter
*Errors

2) '''First C++ Program'''

*Header files
**<nowiki>--example: #include <iostream> </nowiki>
*main()
*Curly braces { }
*<nowiki>-cout<< </nowiki>
*semicolon ;

*Compiling a C++ program
**example: g++ filename.cpp -o output parameter
*Executing a C program
**example: ./output parameter

3) '''Tokens in C and C++'''

*Data types, constants, identifiers
*Keywords
**example: if, break, else
*Constants
*Data types
**example: int, float, char, double
*Format specifiers
**example: %d, %f, %c, %lf
*Range of data types
*Variables
*Identifier
*Errors

4) '''Functions in C and C++'''

*What is a function
*Syntax for declaration of a function
*Function with arguments
**example: return-type function-name(parameter);
*Function without arguments
**example: return-type function-name;
*Calling a function
*Errors

5) '''Scope of Variables in C and C++'''

*Introduction
*Syntax of declaring a variable
**example: data-type var-name;
*Syntax for initializing a variable
**example: data-type var-name = value;
*Scope of variables
*Global variable
*Local variable
*Error

6) '''If And Else If statement in C and C++'''

*What are Statements.
*Syntax for if and
*If-else Statement
*Errors

7) '''Nested if and switch statement in C and C++'''

*Nested if statement.
*Switch statement.
*Syntax for nested-if statement
*Syntax for switch statement
*break statement
*Comparison between nested if-else and switch statement
*Errors

8) '''Increment and Decrement Operators in C and C++'''

*Increment Operator
**example: ++
*Postfix increment
**example: a++
*Prefix increment
**example: ++a
*Decrement Operator
**example: --
*Postfix decrement
**example: a--
*Prefix decrement
**example: --a
*Typecasting
*Errors

9) '''Arithmetic Operators in C and C++'''

*Arithmetic Operators
*Addition Operator
**example: a + b
*Subtraction Operator
**example: a - b
*Multiplication Operator
**example: a * b
*Division Operator
**example: a \ b
*Modulus Operator
**example: a % b
*Errors

10) '''Relational Operators in C and C++'''

*Double Equal to
**example: a == b
*Not Equal to
**example: a != b
*Greater Than
**example: a > b
*Less Than
**<nowiki>example: a 
*Greater than Equal To
**<nowiki>example: a >= b </nowiki>
*Less Than Equal To
**<nowiki>example: a <= b </nowiki>
*Errors

11) '''Logical Operators in C and C++
'''
*And &&
*Or ||
*Not !
*Errors

==Intermediate level==

12) '''Loops in C and C++'''

*Loops
*Syntax for while and do-while loop
*Comparison of while and do-while loop
*Syntax for
*for loop
*Errors

13) '''Arrays in C and C++'''

*What are arrays
*1-D Arrays
*Syntax for Declaration of arrays
**<nowiki>example: data type array_name [size]; </nowiki>
*Syntax for Initialization of arrays
**<nowiki>example: data type array_name [size]=value; </nowiki>
*Accepting values from the user
*Errors

14) '''Working with 2-D Arrays in C and C++'''
*What are 2-D Arrays.
*Range of arrays
*Syntax for Declaration of 2-D arrays
**example: data type array_name[row][column];
*Syntax for initialization of 2-D arrays
**example: data type array_name[row][column]=
{

{row-val},{col-val}

};
*Errors

15) '''Strings in C and C++'''

*What is a string
*Syntax for declaring a string
*Syntax for initializing a string
*To read a string from keyboard
*Errors

16) '''String Library Functions in C and C++'''

*What are string library functions.
*Types of string library functions
**Strcpy
**Strlen
**Strcmp
**Strcat
*Errors

==Advanced level==

17) '''Working with Structures in C and C++'''

*Introduction
*Syntax of structures
*Declaration and initialization
*Declaration of structure variable
*Accessing structure variables

18) '''Understanding Pointers in C and C++'''

*Introduction
*Syntax of Pointer
**example: int *iptr;
*Declaration
**example:
int a;
(integer a)
int *aptr;
(pointer to an integer *aptr)
aptr = &a;
(aptr set to address of a)
Address Pointer
*Errors

19) '''Function call in C and C++'''

*types of function calls
*function pass by value
*function pass by reference

20) '''File Handling in C'''

*File handling functions
*Opening a File closing a file
**example: fopen, fclose
*Reading data from a File

FrontAccounting-2.4.7

2020-01-14T05:41:02Z

Pratik kamble:

'''FrontAccounting''' (FA) is a free and open source accounting software. FA is a multi-locational, multi-user, multi-lingual, multi-currency web-based accounting system for the entire Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) chain written in PHP, using MySQL. FrontAccounting is developed by an international team. Senior developer Joe Hunt (@joe) lives in Sweden and Janusz Dobrowolski (@itronics) is in Poland, while other developers come from USA, Canada, Egypt, Dubai, India, Australia, and elsewhere.

FrontAccounting works on '''Linux''', '''Windows''' and '''Mac''' operating systems. It automates accounting tasks. It contains a number of ready to use reports. It helps to manage all aspects of business. i.e from job costing to inventory management to financial statements

The contributors who helped create this tutorial series are - '''Sheetal Prabhu, Nirmala Venkat, Praveen Somu, Arvind Pillai, Pratik Kamble '''and''' Nancy Varkey '''- all from Spoken Tutorial Project, IIT Bombay. The effort has been moderated and coordinated by the Spoken Tutorial team, IIT Bombay.

'''Learners:''' UG/PG Commerce students, Commerce teachers, Accountants, Finance professionals

<blockquote style="background-color: cornsilk; border: solid thin grey;">

'''Important note to System Administrators: '''

1. Please ensure that you have the done the '''XAMPP''' installation and '''FrontAccounting''' installation successfully before you begin to learn from this tutorial series.

2. You may get some port error message while starting the XAMPP services. To change these ports, refer to the '''Additional Reading Material'''
of the Installation tutorial.

3. Follow each steps as shown in the Installation tutorial to do a successful installation.

</blockquote>

=== Basic Level ===
#Overview of FrontAccounting
#*Introduction to FrontAccounting
#*Prerequisites for learning FrontAccounting
#*OS and FrontAccounting version used
#*Features of FrontAccounting
#*Who can use FrontAccounting?
#*Glimpse of Spoken Tutorials available on FrontAccounting
#*Future tutorials in FrontAccounting
#*About Spoken Tutorial project
#*About Spoken Tutorial workshops
#*Timed discussion forum of Spoken Tutorials
#Installation of FrontAccounting on Linux OS
#*Installation FrontAccounting on Linux OS
#*System prerequisites for installation
#*Demonstration on how to install XAMPP on Linux
#*Start the XAMPP services
#*Download FrontAccounting software
#*Move the folder account into the web server's root directory
#*Create Users and Database for FrontAccounting
#*Steps to follow to do the installation
#*Login to the FrontAccounting interface
#*Additional Reading material for solutions if port error in XAMPP services
#*About Spoken tutorial project
#Installation of FrontAccounting on Windows OS
#*Installation FrontAccounting on Windows OS
#*System prerequisites for installation
#*Demonstration on how to install XAMPP on Windows
#*Start the XAMPP services
#*Download FrontAccounting software
#*Move the folder account into the web server's root directory
#*Create Users and Database for FrontAccounting
#*Steps to follow to do the installation
#*Login to the FrontAccounting interface
#*Additional Reading material to resolve Port error in XAMPP services
#*About Spoken tutorial project
#Setup in FrontAccounting
#*Various modules in setup
#*Create our own Organization or Company
#*How to add home currency?
#*What is fiscal year?
#*About fiscal year setup
#*Update Company setup
#*Increase the Login timeout option
#*New user accounts Setup
#*Setup access permission
#*How to change the date format?
#Banking and General Ledger in FrontAccounting.
#*Various modules in Banking and General Ledger
#*About Charts of Accounts
#*Why we need GL Accounts, Groups and Class?
#*How to create new GL Class?
#*About Class ID and Class Name
#*List of various Class types
#*List of various Class names
#*How to create new GL Groups?
#*Demonstration of adding Unique ID
#*How to create new GL Accounts?
#Journal Entry and Balance sheet in FrontAccounting
#*Various modules in Banking and General Ledger
#*How to introduce capital in the business?
#*Example for journal entry
#*Process journal entry
#*View the journal entry
#*Enter a new journal entry
#*Reference number for each journal entry
#*How to add an attachment for the journal entry
#*Balance sheet Drill down option
#*How to void a transaction?
#Items and inventory in FrontAccounting
#*Various modules in Items and inventory
#*What are items and inventory?
#*How to set units of measure?
#*How to set the Item Categories for items?
#*Default Item categories in FrontAccounting
#*Add a new Item category for Finished Goods
#*Add a new Item for Finished Goods
#*Assign sales prices to individual sales item
#*Different Item types
#*Different Sales types
#Taxes and Bank Accounts in FrontAccounting
#*About Taxes and Bank Accounts
#*How to add GST and Sevice tax for a company?
#*About Sale and Purchase GL Account for tax
#*How to add new GL Account for service tax?
#*Set up a Bank Account for the company
#*Set Current account and Petty Cash account details
#*Deposit amount in the company's Bank Account
#*View the GL postings for the Deposit
#*How to transfer petty cash
#*Reconcile the Bank Account
#Setup for Sales in FrontAccounting
#*About Sales
#*How to Setup Sales
#*Different type of Sales Types
#*How to add Sales Person and Sales Areas
#*About Provision and Turnover Break point Level
#*About Customers
#*Add and Manage Customers
#*To check whether default branch is added or not
#*Customer Branch
#*About Mailing address and Billing address for customer
#Place Sales Order in FrontAccounting
#*Enter the sales quotation entry for a customer
#*Sales order inclusive of GST
#*About shipping charges
#*Place Quotation
#*Make Sales Order against the Quotation
#*Place Order
#*Make delivery against the order
#*Process dispatch
#*Sales Order Inquiry
#*Customer Payment
#Purchase and Reports in FrontAccounting
#*Various modules under Purchases
#*Add new supplier
#*Purchase Order Entry
#*Place Order
#*Receive Items on the Purchase Order
#*Process Receive items
#*Purchase invoice for the receival
#*Supplier payment for the invoice
#*Payment Process
#*Various reports related to the transactions

FrontAccounting-2.4.7

2020-01-14T05:05:40Z

Pratik kamble:

'''FrontAccounting''' (FA) is a free and open source accounting software. FA is a multi-locational, multi-user, multi-lingual, multi-currency web-based accounting system for the entire Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) chain written in PHP, using MySQL. FrontAccounting is developed by an international team. Senior developer Joe Hunt (@joe) lives in Sweden and Janusz Dobrowolski (@itronics) is in Poland, while other developers come from USA, Canada, Egypt, Dubai, India, Australia, and elsewhere.

FrontAccounting works on '''Linux''', '''Windows''' and '''Mac''' operating systems. It automates accounting tasks. It contains a number of ready to use reports. It helps to manage all aspects of business. i.e from job costing to inventory management to financial statements

The contributors who helped create this tutorial series are - '''Sheetal Prabhu, Nirmala Venkat, Praveen Somu, Arvind Pillai, Pratik Kamble '''and''' Nancy Varkey '''- all from Spoken Tutorial Project, IIT Bombay. The effort has been moderated and coordinated by the Spoken Tutorial team, IIT Bombay.

'''Learners:''' UG/PG Commerce students, Commerce teachers, Accountants, Finance professionals

<blockquote style="background-color: cornsilk; border: solid thin grey;">

'''Important note to System Administrators: '''

1. Please ensure that you have the done the '''XAMPP''' installation and '''FrontAccounting''' installation successfully before you begin to learn from this tutorial series.

2. You may get some port error message while starting the XAMPP services. To change these ports, refer to the '''Additional Reading Material'''
of the Installation tutorial.

3. Follow each steps as shown in the Installation tutorial to do a successful installation.

</blockquote>

=== Basic Level ===
#Overview of FrontAccounting
#*About FrontAccounting
#*Features of FrontAccounting
#*Who can use FrontAccounting?
#*Glimpse of Spoken Tutorials available on FrontAccounting series
#Installation of FrontAccounting on Linux OS
#*System prerequisites for installation
#*Demonstration on how to install XAMPP on linux
#*Start the XAMPP services
#*Download FrontAccounting software
#*Create Users and Database for FrontAccounting
#*Steps to follow to do the installation
#*Login to the FrontAccounting interface
#*Additional Reading material for solutions if Port error in XAMPP services
#Installation of FrontAccounting on Windows OS
#*System pre requisites for installation
#*Demonstration on how to install XAMPP on Windows
#*Start the XAMPP services
#*Download FrontAccounting software
#*Create Users and Database for FrontAccounting
#*Steps to follow to do the installation
#*Login to the FrontAccounting interface
#*Additional Reading material for solutions if Port error in XAMPP services
#Setup in FrontAccounting
#*Various modules in setup
#*Create our own Organization or Company
#*How to add home currency?
#*What is fiscal year?
#*About fiscal year setup
#*Update Company setup
#*Increase the Login timeout option
#*New user accounts Setup
#*Setup access permission
#*How to change the date format?
#Banking and General Ledger in FrontAccounting.
#*Various modules in Banking and General Ledger
#*About Charts of Accounts
#*Why we need GL Accounts, Groups and Class?
#*How to create new GL Class?
#*About Class ID and Class Name
#*List of various Class types
#*List of various Class names
#*How to create new GL Groups and GL Accounts?
#Journal Entry and Balance sheet in FrontAccounting
#*How to introduce capital in the business?
#*Example for journal entry
#*Process journal entry
#*View the journal entry
#*Enter a new journal entry
#*How to add an attachment for the journal entry
#*Balance sheet Drilldown option
#*How to void a transaction
#Items and inventory in FrontAccounting
#*What are items nad inventory?
#*How to set units of measure?
#*How to set the Item Categories for items?
#*Default Item Categories in FrontAccounting
#*Add a new Item category for Finished Goods
#*Add a new Item for Finished Goods
#*Assign sales prices to individual Sales item
#*Different Item types
#*Different Sales types
#Taxes and Bank Accounts in FrontAccounting
#*Add a new tax
#*How to add GST and Sevice tax for a company?
#*About Sale and purchase GL account for tax
#*How to add new GL Accounts for service tax?
#*Set up a Bank Account for the company
#*Set Current account and Petty Cash account details
#*Deposit amount in the company's Bank account
#*View the GL postings for the Deposit
#*How to transfer petty cash
#*Reconcile the Bank Account
#Setup for Sales in FrontAccounting
#*About Sales
#*How to Setup Sales
#*Different type of Sales Types
#*How to add Sales Person and Sales Areas
#*About Provision and Turnover Break point Level
#*About Customers
#*Add and Manage Customers
#*To check whether default branch is added or not
#*Customer Branch
#*About Mailing address and Billing address for customer
#Place Sales Order in FrontAccounting
#*Enter the sales quotation entry for a customer
#*Sales order inclusive of GST
#*About shipping charges
#*Place Quotation
#*Make Sales Order against the Quotation
#*Place Order
#*Make delivery against the order
#*Process dispatch
#*Sales Order Inquiry
#*Customer Payment
#Purchase and Reports in FrontAccounting
#*Various modules under Purchases
#*Add new supplier
#*Purchase Order Entry
#*Place Order
#*Receive Items on the Purchase Order
#*Process Receive items
#*Purchase invoice for the receival
#*Supplier payment for the invoice
#*Payment Process
#*Various reports related to the transactions